Accton Technology Es3528M Sfp Users Manual Mgmt

ES3528M-SFP to the manual a902d288-4ef5-43c1-b577-bdfefe517ccb

2015-02-05

: Accton-Technology Accton-Technology-Es3528M-Sfp-Users-Manual-503970 accton-technology-es3528m-sfp-users-manual-503970 accton-technology pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 644 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Powered by Accton
www.edge-core.com
Management Guide
ES3528M-SFP
Fast Ethernet Switch
Management Guide
Fast Ethernet Switch
Layer 2 Workgroup Switch
with 24 100BASE-BX (SFP) Ports, 2 1000BASE-T (RJ-45)
and 2 Combination Gigabit (RJ-45/SFP) Ports
ES3528M-SFP
E122007-DG-R01
149100035500A
v
About This Guide
Purpose
This guide gives specific information on how to operate and use the management
functions of the switch.
Audience
The guide is intended for use by network administrators who are responsible for operating
and maintaining network equipment; consequently, it assumes a basic working
knowledge of general switch functions, the Internet Protocol (IP), and Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP).
Conventions
The following conventions are used throughout this guide to show information:
Note: Emphasizes important information or calls your attention to related features or
instructions.
Caution: Alerts you to a potential hazard that could cause loss of data, or damage the
system or equipment.
Warning: Alerts you to a potential hazard that could cause personal injury.
Related Publications
The following publication details the hardware features of the switch, including the
physical and performance-related characteristics, and how to install the switch:
The Installation Guide
Also, as part of the switch’s software, there is an online web-based help that describes all
management related features.
Revision History
This section summarizes the changes in each revision of this guide.
November 2007 Revision
This is the second revision of this guide. This guide is valid for software release v1.1.0.7.
vi
i
Contents
Chapter 1: Introduction 1-1
Key Features 1-1
Description of Software Features 1-2
System Defaults 1-6
Chapter 2: Initial Configuration 2-1
Connecting to the Switch 2-1
Configuration Options 2-1
Required Connections 2-2
Remote Connections 2-3
Basic Configuration 2-3
Console Connection 2-3
Setting Passwords 2-4
Setting an IP Address 2-4
Manual Configuration 2-4
Dynamic Configuration 2-5
Enabling SNMP Management Access 2-6
Community Strings (for SNMP version 1 and 2c clients) 2-6
Trap Receivers 2-7
Configuring Access for SNMP Version 3 Clients 2-8
Saving Configuration Settings 2-8
Managing System Files 2-9
Chapter 3: Configuring the Switch 3-1
Using the Web Interface 3-1
Navigating the Web Browser Interface 3-2
Home Page 3-2
Configuration Options 3-3
Panel Display 3-3
Main Menu 3-4
Basic Configuration 3-12
Displaying System Information 3-12
Displaying Switch Hardware/Software Versions 3-13
Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities 3-15
Setting the Switch’s IP Address 3-16
Manual Configuration 3-17
Using DHCP/BOOTP 3-18
Enabling Jumbo Frames 3-19
Managing Firmware 3-19
Downloading System Software from a Server 3-20
Contents
ii
Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings 3-21
Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server 3-22
Console Port Settings 3-23
Telnet Settings 3-25
Configuring Event Logging 3-28
Displaying Log Messages 3-28
System Log Configuration 3-28
Remote Log Configuration 3-30
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol 3-31
Resetting the System 3-33
Setting the System Clock 3-34
Setting the Time Manually 3-34
Configuring SNTP 3-34
Configuring NTP 3-35
Setting the Time Zone 3-37
Simple Network Management Protocol 3-38
Setting Community Access Strings 3-39
Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types 3-40
Enabling SNMP Agent Status 3-41
Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access 3-42
Setting the Local Engine ID 3-42
Specifying a Remote Engine ID 3-43
Configuring SNMPv3 Users 3-43
Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users 3-45
Configuring SNMPv3 Groups 3-46
Setting SNMPv3 Views 3-49
User Authentication 3-51
Configuring User Accounts 3-51
Configuring Local/Remote Logon Authentication 3-53
Configuring Encryption Keys 3-57
AAA Authorization and Accounting 3-58
Configuring AAA RADIUS Group Settings 3-59
Configuring AAA TACACS+ Group Settings 3-59
Configuring AAA Accounting 3-60
AAA Accounting Update 3-62
AAA Accounting 802.1X Port Settings 3-62
AAA Accounting Exec Command Privileges 3-63
AAA Accounting Exec Settings 3-65
AAA Accounting Summary 3-65
Authorization Settings 3-67
Authorization EXEC Settings 3-68
Authorization Summary 3-68
Configuring HTTPS 3-69
Replacing the Default Secure-site Certificate 3-70
Configuring the Secure Shell 3-71
Contents
iii
Configuring the SSH Server 3-74
Generating the Host Key Pair 3-75
Importing User Public Keys 3-76
Configuring Port Security 3-80
Configuring 802.1X Port Authentication 3-81
Displaying 802.1X Global Settings 3-83
Configuring 802.1X Global Settings 3-83
Configuring Port Settings for 802.1X 3-84
Displaying 802.1X Statistics 3-87
Web Authentication 3-88
Configuring Web Authentication 3-89
Configuring Web Authentication for Ports 3-90
Displaying Web Authentication Port Information 3-91
Re-authenticating Web Authenticated Ports 3-92
Network Access – MAC Address Authentication 3-93
Configuring the MAC Authentication Reauthentication Time 3-94
Configuring MAC Authentication for Ports 3-94
Configuring Port Link Detection 3-96
Displaying Secure MAC Address Information 3-97
MAC Authentication 3-98
Configuring MAC authentication parameters for ports 3-98
Access Control Lists 3-99
Configuring Access Control Lists 3-100
Setting the ACL Name and Type 3-100
Configuring a Standard IP ACL 3-101
Configuring an Extended IP ACL 3-102
Configuring a MAC ACL 3-105
Binding a Port to an Access Control List 3-106
Filtering IP Addresses for Management Access 3-107
Port Configuration 3-110
Displaying Connection Status 3-110
Configuring Interface Connections 3-112
Creating Trunk Groups 3-114
Statically Configuring a Trunk 3-115
Enabling LACP on Selected Ports 3-116
Configuring LACP Parameters 3-118
Displaying LACP Port Counters 3-120
Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side 3-122
Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side 3-124
Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds 3-125
Configuring Port Mirroring 3-127
Configuring Rate Limits 3-128
Rate Limit Configuration 3-128
Showing Port Statistics 3-129
Address Table Settings 3-133
Contents
iv
Setting Static Addresses 3-133
Displaying the Address Table 3-134
Changing the Aging Time 3-136
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration 3-136
Displaying Global Settings 3-138
Configuring Global Settings 3-141
Displaying Interface Settings 3-144
Configuring Interface Settings 3-147
Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees 3-149
Displaying Interface Settings for MSTP 3-151
Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP 3-153
VLAN Configuration 3-155
IEEE 802.1Q VLANs 3-155
Enabling or Disabling GVRP (Global Setting) 3-158
Displaying Basic VLAN Information 3-159
Displaying Current VLANs 3-159
Creating VLANs 3-161
Adding Static Members to VLANs (VLAN Index) 3-162
Adding Static Members to VLANs (Port Index) 3-164
Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces 3-165
Configuring IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling 3-167
Enabling QinQ Tunneling on the Switch 3-170
Adding an Interface to a QinQ Tunnel 3-172
Private VLANs 3-173
Displaying Current Private VLANs 3-174
Configuring Private VLANs 3-175
Associating VLANs 3-176
Displaying Private VLAN Interface Information 3-177
Configuring Private VLAN Interfaces 3-178
Protocol VLANs 3-179
Protocol VLAN Group Configuration 3-179
Protocol VLAN System Configuration 3-180
Link Layer Discovery Protocol 3-181
Setting LLDP Timing Attributes 3-181
Configuring LLDP Interface Attributes 3-183
Displaying LLDP Local Device Information 3-186
Displaying LLDP Remote Port Information 3-187
Displaying LLDP Remote Information Details 3-188
Displaying Device Statistics 3-189
Displaying Detailed Device Statistics 3-190
Class of Service Configuration 3-191
Layer 2 Queue Settings 3-191
Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces 3-191
Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues 3-192
Enabling CoS 3-194
Contents
v
Selecting the Queue Mode 3-195
Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes 3-195
Layer 3/4 Priority Settings 3-196
Mapping Layer 3/4 Priorities to CoS Values 3-196
Enabling IP DSCP Priority 3-197
Mapping DSCP Priority 3-198
Quality of Service 3-199
Configuring Quality of Service Parameters 3-200
Configuring a Class Map 3-200
Creating QoS Policies 3-203
Attaching a Policy Map to Ingress Queues 3-206
VoIP Traffic Configuration 3-207
Configuring VoIP Traffic 3-207
Configuring VoIP Traffic Port 3-208
Configuring Telephony OUI 3-210
Multicast Filtering 3-212
Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query) 3-212
Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters 3-213
Enabling IGMP Immediate Leave 3-215
Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router 3-216
Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router 3-217
Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services 3-218
Assigning Ports to Multicast Services 3-219
IGMP Filtering and Throttling 3-220
Enabling IGMP Filtering and Throttling 3-221
Configuring IGMP Filter Profiles 3-222
Configuring IGMP Filtering and Throttling for Interfaces 3-223
Multicast VLAN Registration 3-225
Configuring Global MVR Settings 3-226
Displaying MVR Interface Status 3-227
Displaying Port Members of Multicast Groups 3-228
Configuring MVR Interface Status 3-229
Assigning Static Multicast Groups to Interfaces 3-231
DHCP Snooping 3-232
DHCP Snooping Configuration 3-233
DHCP Snooping VLAN Configuration 3-233
DHCP Snooping Information Option Configuration 3-234
DHCP Snooping Port Configuration 3-235
DHCP Snooping Binding Information 3-236
IP Source Guard 3-237
IP Source Guard Port Configuration 3-237
Static IP Source Guard Binding Configuration 3-238
Dynamic IP Source Guard Binding Information 3-239
IP Clustering 3-240
Cluster Configuration 3-241
Contents
vi
Cluster Member Configuration 3-242
Cluster Member Information 3-243
Cluster Candidate Information 3-243
UPnP 3-245
UPnP Configuration 3-245
Chapter 4: Command Line Interface 4-1
Using the Command Line Interface 4-1
Accessing the CLI 4-1
Console Connection 4-1
Telnet Connection 4-2
Entering Commands 4-3
Keywords and Arguments 4-3
Minimum Abbreviation 4-3
Command Completion 4-3
Getting Help on Commands 4-3
Showing Commands 4-4
Partial Keyword Lookup 4-6
Negating the Effect of Commands 4-6
Using Command History 4-6
Understanding Command Modes 4-6
Exec Commands 4-7
Configuration Commands 4-8
Command Line Processing 4-10
Command Groups 4-11
Line Commands 4-12
line 4-13
login 4-13
password 4-14
timeout login response 4-15
exec-timeout 4-15
password-thresh 4-16
silent-time 4-17
databits 4-17
parity 4-18
speed 4-19
stopbits 4-19
disconnect 4-20
show line 4-20
General Commands 4-21
enable 4-21
disable 4-22
configure 4-23
show history 4-23
Contents
vii
reload 4-24
reload cancel 4-24
show reload 4-25
end 4-25
exit 4-26
quit 4-26
System Management Commands 4-27
Device Designation Commands 4-27
prompt 4-27
hostname 4-28
Banner 4-28
banner configure 4-29
banner configure company 4-30
banner configure dc-power-info 4-31
banner configure department 4-31
banner configure equipment-info 4-32
banner configure equipment-location 4-33
banner configure ip-lan 4-33
banner configure lp-number 4-34
banner configure manager-info 4-35
banner configure mux 4-35
banner configure note 4-36
show banner 4-37
User Access Commands 4-38
username 4-38
enable password 4-39
IP Filter Commands 4-40
management 4-40
show management 4-41
Web Server Commands 4-42
ip http port 4-42
ip http server 4-42
ip http secure-server 4-43
ip http secure-port 4-44
Telnet Server Commands 4-45
ip telnet port 4-45
ip telnet server 4-45
Secure Shell Commands 4-46
ip ssh server 4-48
ip ssh timeout 4-49
ip ssh authentication-retries 4-49
ip ssh server-key size 4-50
delete public-key 4-50
ip ssh crypto host-key generate 4-51
ip ssh crypto zeroize 4-51
Contents
viii
ip ssh save host-key 4-52
show ip ssh 4-52
show ssh 4-53
show public-key 4-54
Event Logging Commands 4-55
logging on 4-55
logging history 4-56
logging host 4-57
logging facility 4-57
logging trap 4-58
clear logging 4-58
show logging 4-59
show log 4-60
SMTP Alert Commands 4-61
logging sendmail host 4-61
logging sendmail level 4-62
logging sendmail source-email 4-63
logging sendmail destination-email 4-63
logging sendmail 4-64
show logging sendmail 4-64
Time Commands 4-65
sntp client 4-65
sntp server 4-66
sntp poll 4-67
show sntp 4-67
ntp client 4-68
ntp server 4-69
ntp poll 4-70
ntp authenticate 4-70
ntp authentication-key 4-71
show ntp 4-72
clock timezone-predefined 4-72
clock timezone 4-73
clock summer-time (date) 4-74
clock summer-time (predefined) 4-75
clock summer-time (recurring) 4-76
calendar set 4-77
show calendar 4-77
System Status Commands 4-78
show startup-config 4-78
show running-config 4-79
show system 4-82
show users 4-82
show version 4-83
Frame Size Commands 4-84
Contents
ix
jumbo frame 4-84
Flash/File Commands 4-85
copy 4-85
delete 4-88
dir 4-89
whichboot 4-90
boot system 4-90
Authentication Commands 4-91
Authentication Sequence 4-91
authentication login 4-92
authentication enable 4-93
RADIUS Client 4-94
radius-server host 4-95
radius-server acct-port 4-95
radius-server auth-port 4-96
radius-server key 4-96
radius-server retransmit 4-97
radius-server timeout 4-97
show radius-server 4-97
TACACS+ Client 4-98
tacacs-server host 4-98
tacacs-server port 4-99
tacacs-server key 4-99
tacacs-server retransmit 4-100
tacacs-server timeout 4-100
show tacacs-server 4-101
AAA Commands 4-102
aaa group server 4-102
server 4-103
aaa accounting dot1x 4-103
aaa accounting exec 4-104
aaa accounting commands 4-105
aaa accounting update 4-106
accounting dot1x 4-107
accounting exec 4-107
accounting commands 4-108
aaa authorization exec 4-108
authorization exec 4-109
show accounting 4-110
Port Security Commands 4-111
port security 4-111
802.1X Port Authentication 4-112
dot1x system-auth-control 4-113
dot1x default 4-113
dot1x max-req 4-114
Contents
x
dot1x port-control 4-114
dot1x operation-mode 4-115
dot1x re-authenticate 4-115
dot1x re-authentication 4-116
dot1x timeout quiet-period 4-116
dot1x timeout re-authperiod 4-117
dot1x timeout tx-period 4-117
dot1x intrusion-action 4-118
show dot1x 4-118
Network Access – MAC Address Authentication 4-121
network-access mode 4-121
network-access max-mac-count 4-122
mac-authentication intrusion-action 4-123
mac-authentication max-mac-count 4-123
network-access dynamic-qos 4-124
network-access dynamic-vlan 4-124
network-access guest-vlan 4-125
network-access link-detection 4-125
network-access link-detection link-down 4-126
network-access link-detection link-up 4-126
network-access link-detection link-up-down 4-127
mac-authentication reauth-time 4-127
clear network-access 4-128
show network-access 4-128
show network-access mac-address-table 4-129
Web Authentication 4-130
web-auth login-attempts 4-131
web-auth login-fail-page-url 4-131
web-auth login-page-url 4-132
web-auth login-success-page-url 4-132
web-auth quiet-period 4-133
web-auth session-timeout 4-133
web-auth system-auth-control 4-134
web-auth 4-134
show web-auth 4-135
show web-auth interface 4-135
web-auth re-authenticate (Port) 4-136
web-auth re-authenticate (IP) 4-136
show web-auth summary 4-137
Access Control List Commands 4-139
IP ACLs 4-140
access-list ip 4-140
permit, deny (Standard ACL) 4-141
permit, deny (Extended ACL) 4-141
show ip access-list 4-143
Contents
xi
ip access-group 4-143
show ip access-group 4-144
MAC ACLs 4-144
access-list mac 4-145
permit, deny (MAC ACL) 4-146
show mac access-list 4-147
mac access-group 4-148
show mac access-group 4-148
ACL Information 4-149
show access-list 4-149
show access-group 4-149
SNMP Commands 4-150
snmp-server 4-151
show snmp 4-151
snmp-server community 4-152
snmp-server contact 4-153
snmp-server location 4-153
snmp-server host 4-154
snmp-server enable traps 4-156
snmp-server engine-id 4-157
show snmp engine-id 4-158
snmp-server view 4-159
show snmp view 4-160
snmp-server group 4-160
show snmp group 4-161
snmp-server user 4-163
show snmp user 4-165
Interface Commands 4-166
interface 4-166
description 4-167
speed-duplex 4-167
negotiation 4-168
capabilities 4-169
flowcontrol 4-170
shutdown 4-171
switchport packet-rate 4-172
clear counters 4-172
show interfaces status 4-173
show interfaces counters 4-174
show interfaces switchport 4-175
Mirror Port Commands 4-177
port monitor 4-177
show port monitor 4-178
Rate Limit Commands 4-179
rate-limit 4-179
Contents
xii
Link Aggregation Commands 4-180
channel-group 4-181
lacp 4-182
lacp system-priority 4-183
lacp admin-key (Ethernet Interface) 4-184
lacp admin-key (Port Channel) 4-185
lacp port-priority 4-186
show lacp 4-186
Address Table Commands 4-190
mac-address-table static 4-190
clear mac-address-table dynamic 4-191
show mac-address-table 4-191
mac-address-table aging-time 4-192
show mac-address-table aging-time 4-193
LLDP Commands 4-193
lldp 4-195
lldp holdtime-multiplier 4-195
lldp medFastStartCount 4-196
lldp notification-interval 4-196
lldp refresh-interval 4-197
lldp reinit-delay 4-198
lldp tx-delay 4-198
lldp admin-status 4-199
lldp notification 4-199
lldp mednotification 4-200
lldp basic-tlv management-ip-address 4-201
lldp basic-tlv port-description 4-201
lldp basic-tlv system-capabilities 4-202
lldp basic-tlv system-description 4-202
lldp basic-tlv system-name 4-203
lldp dot1-tlv proto-ident 4-203
lldp dot1-tlv proto-vid 4-204
lldp dot1-tlv pvid 4-204
lldp dot1-tlv vlan-name 4-205
lldp dot3-tlv link-agg 4-205
lldp dot3-tlv mac-phy 4-206
lldp dot3-tlv max-frame 4-206
lldp dot3-tlv poe 4-207
lldp medtlv extpoe 4-207
lldp medtlv inventory 4-208
lldp medtlv location 4-208
lldp medtlv med-cap 4-209
lldp medtlv network-policy 4-209
show lldp config 4-210
show lldp info local-device 4-212
Contents
xiii
show lldp info remote-device 4-213
show lldp info statistics 4-213
UPnP Commands 4-215
upnp device 4-215
upnp device ttl 4-216
upnp device advertise duration 4-216
show upnp 4-217
Spanning Tree Commands 4-217
spanning-tree 4-218
spanning-tree mode 4-219
spanning-tree forward-time 4-220
spanning-tree hello-time 4-221
spanning-tree max-age 4-221
spanning-tree priority 4-222
spanning-tree pathcost method 4-222
spanning-tree transmission-limit 4-223
spanning-tree mst-configuration 4-223
mst vlan 4-224
mst priority 4-225
name 4-225
revision 4-226
max-hops 4-226
spanning-tree spanning-disabled 4-227
spanning-tree cost 4-227
spanning-tree port-priority 4-228
spanning-tree edge-port 4-229
spanning-tree portfast 4-230
spanning-tree link-type 4-231
spanning-tree loopback-detection 4-231
spanning-tree loopback-detection release-mode 4-232
spanning-tree loopback-detection trap 4-233
spanning-tree mst cost 4-233
spanning-tree mst port-priority 4-234
spanning-tree protocol-migration 4-235
show spanning-tree 4-235
show spanning-tree mst configuration 4-237
VLAN Commands 4-238
GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands 4-238
bridge-ext gvrp 4-239
show bridge-ext 4-239
switchport gvrp 4-240
show gvrp configuration 4-240
garp timer 4-241
show garp timer 4-241
Editing VLAN Groups 4-242
Contents
xiv
vlan database 4-242
vlan 4-243
Configuring VLAN Interfaces 4-244
interface vlan 4-244
switchport mode 4-245
switchport acceptable-frame-types 4-246
switchport ingress-filtering 4-246
switchport native vlan 4-247
switchport allowed vlan 4-248
switchport forbidden vlan 4-249
Displaying VLAN Information 4-250
show vlan 4-250
Configuring IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling 4-251
dot1q-tunnel system-tunnel-control 4-251
switchport dot1q-tunnel mode 4-252
switchport dot1q-tunnel tpid 4-253
show dot1q-tunnel 4-253
Configuring Private VLANs 4-254
private-vlan 4-256
private vlan association 4-256
switchport mode private-vlan 4-257
switchport private-vlan host-association 4-258
switchport private-vlan isolated 4-258
switchport private-vlan mapping 4-259
show vlan private-vlan 4-259
Configuring Protocol-based VLANs 4-261
protocol-vlan protocol-group (Configuring Groups) 4-261
protocol-vlan protocol-group (Configuring VLANs) 4-262
show protocol-vlan protocol-group 4-263
show protocol-vlan protocol-group-vid 4-263
Priority Commands 4-264
Priority Commands (Layer 2) 4-264
queue mode 4-265
switchport priority default 4-265
queue bandwidth 4-266
queue cos-map 4-267
show queue mode 4-268
show queue bandwidth 4-268
show queue cos-map 4-269
Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4) 4-269
map ip dscp (Global Configuration) 4-269
map ip dscp (Interface Configuration) 4-270
show map ip dscp 4-271
Quality of Service Commands 4-272
class-map 4-273
Contents
xv
match 4-274
policy-map 4-275
class 4-276
set 4-277
police 4-277
service-policy 4-278
show class-map 4-279
show policy-map 4-279
show policy-map interface 4-280
Voice VLAN Commands 4-280
voice vlan 4-281
voice vlan aging 4-282
voice vlan mac-address 4-282
switchport voice vlan 4-283
switchport voice vlan rule 4-284
switchport voice vlan security 4-284
switchport voice vlan priority 4-285
show voice vlan 4-286
Multicast Filtering Commands 4-287
IGMP Snooping Commands 4-287
ip igmp snooping 4-288
ip igmp snooping vlan static 4-288
ip igmp snooping version 4-289
ip igmp snooping leave-proxy 4-289
ip igmp snooping immediate-leave 4-290
show ip igmp snooping 4-291
show mac-address-table multicast 4-291
IGMP Query Commands (Layer 2) 4-292
ip igmp snooping querier 4-292
ip igmp snooping query-count 4-293
ip igmp snooping query-interval 4-293
ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time 4-294
ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time 4-295
Static Multicast Routing Commands 4-295
ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter 4-296
show ip igmp snooping mrouter 4-296
IGMP Filtering and Throttling Commands 4-297
ip igmp filter (Global Configuration) 4-298
ip igmp profile 4-298
permit, deny 4-299
range 4-299
ip igmp filter (Interface Configuration) 4-300
ip igmp max-groups 4-300
ip igmp max-groups action 4-301
show ip igmp filter 4-302
Contents
xvi
show ip igmp profile 4-302
show ip igmp throttle interface 4-303
Multicast VLAN Registration Commands 4-304
mvr (Global Configuration) 4-304
mvr (Interface Configuration) 4-305
show mvr 4-307
IP Interface Commands 4-309
ip address 4-309
ip default-gateway 4-310
ip dhcp restart 4-311
show ip interface 4-311
show ip redirects 4-312
ping 4-312
IP Source Guard Commands 4-313
ip source-guard 4-313
ip source-guard binding 4-315
show ip source-guard 4-316
show ip source-guard binding 4-316
DHCP Snooping Commands 4-317
ip dhcp snooping 4-317
ip dhcp snooping vlan 4-319
ip dhcp snooping trust 4-320
ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address 4-321
ip dhcp snooping information option 4-321
ip dhcp snooping information policy 4-322
ip dhcp snooping database flash 4-323
show ip dhcp snooping 4-323
show ip dhcp snooping binding 4-324
IP Cluster Commands 4-324
cluster 4-324
cluster commander 4-325
cluster ip-pool 4-326
cluster member 4-326
rcommand 4-327
show cluster 4-327
show cluster members 4-328
show cluster candidates 4-328
Appendix A: Software Specifications A-1
Software Features A-1
Management Features A-2
Standards A-2
Management Information Bases A-3
Contents
xvii
Appendix B: Troubleshooting B-1
Problems Accessing the Management Interface B-1
Using System Logs B-2
Glossary
Index
Contents
xviii
xix
Tables
Table 1-1 Key Features 1-1
Table 1-2 System Defaults 1-6
Table 3-1 Configuration Options 3-3
Table 3-2 Main Menu 3-4
Table 3-3 Logging Levels 3-29
Table 3-5 Supported Notification Messages 3-47
Table 3-6 HTTPS System Support 3-69
Table 3-7 802.1X Statistics 3-87
Table 3-8 LACP Port Counters 3-120
Table 3-9 LACP Internal Configuration Information 3-122
Table 3-10 LACP Neighbor Configuration Information 3-124
Table 3-11 Port Statistics 3-129
Table 3-12 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues 3-193
Table 3-13 CoS Priority Levels 3-193
Table 3-14 Mapping DSCP Priority Values 3-198
Table 4-1 Command Modes 4-7
Table 4-2 Configuration Modes 4-8
Table 4-3 Command Line Processing 4-10
Table 4-4 Command Groups 4-11
Table 4-5 Line Commands 4-12
Table 4-6 General Commands 4-21
Table 4-7 System Management Commands 4-27
Table 4-8 Device Designation Commands 4-27
Table 4-9 Banner Commands 4-28
Table 4-10 User Access Commands 4-38
Table 4-11 Default Login Settings 4-38
Table 4-12 IP Filter Commands 4-40
Table 4-13 Web Server Commands 4-42
Table 4-14 HTTPS System Support 4-43
Table 4-15 Telnet Server Commands 4-45
Table 4-16 SSH Commands 4-46
Table 4-17 show ssh - display description 4-53
Table 4-18 Event Logging Commands 4-55
Table 4-19 Logging Levels 4-56
Table 4-20 show logging flash/ram - display description 4-59
Table 4-21 show logging trap - display description 4-60
Table 4-22 SMTP Alert Commands 4-61
Table 4-23 Time Commands 4-65
Table 4-24 Predefined Summer-Time Parameters 4-75
Table 4-25 System Status Commands 4-78
Table 4-26 Frame Size Commands 4-84
Table 4-27 Flash/File Commands 4-85
Tables
xx
Table 4-28 File Directory Information 4-89
Table 4-29 Authentication Commands 4-91
Table 4-30 Authentication Sequence 4-91
Table 4-31 RADIUS Client Commands 4-94
Table 4-32 TACACS Commands 4-98
Table 4-34 Port Security Commands 4-111
Table 4-35 802.1X Port Authentication 4-112
Table 4-36 Network Access 4-121
Table 4-37 Web Authentication 4-130
Table 4-38 Access Control Lists 4-139
Table 4-39 IP ACLs 4-140
Table 4-40 MAC ACL Commands 4-144
Table 4-41 ACL Information 4-149
Table 4-42 SNMP Commands 4-150
Table 4-43 show snmp engine-id - display description 4-158
Table 4-44 show snmp view - display description 4-160
Table 4-45 show snmp group - display description 4-163
Table 4-46 show snmp user - display description 4-165
Table 4-47 Interface Commands 4-166
Table 4-48 Interfaces Switchport Statistics 4-176
Table 4-49 Mirror Port Commands 4-177
Table 4-50 Rate Limit Commands 4-179
Table 4-51 Link Aggregation Commands 4-180
Table 4-52 show lacp counters - display description 4-187
Table 4-53 show lacp internal - display description 4-188
Table 4-54 show lacp neighbors - display description 4-189
Table 4-55 show lacp sysid - display description 4-189
Table 4-56 Address Table Commands 4-190
Table 4-57 LLDP Commands 4-193
Table 4-58 Spanning Tree Commands 4-217
Table 4-59 VLANs 4-238
Table 4-60 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands 4-238
Table 4-61 Editing VLAN Groups 4-242
Table 4-62 Configuring VLAN Interfaces 4-244
Table 4-63 Show VLAN Commands 4-250
Table 4-64 IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling Commands 4-251
Table 4-65 Private VLAN Commands 4-254
Table 4-66 Protocol-based VLAN Commands 4-261
Table 4-67 Priority Commands 4-264
Table 4-68 Priority Commands (Layer 2) 4-264
Table 4-69 Default CoS Values to Egress Queues 4-267
Table 4-70 Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4) 4-269
Table 4-71 IP DSCP to CoS Vales 4-270
Table 4-72 Quality of Service Commands 4-272
Table 4-73 Voice VLAN Commands 4-280
Tables
xxi
Table 4-74 Multicast Filtering Commands 4-287
Table 4-75 IGMP Snooping Commands 4-287
Table 4-76 IGMP Query Commands (Layer 2) 4-292
Table 4-77 Static Multicast Routing Commands 4-295
Table 4-78 IGMP Filtering and Throttling Commands 4-297
Table 4-79 Multicast VLAN Registration Commands 4-304
Table 4-80 show mvr - display description 4-307
Table 4-81 show mvr interface - display description 4-308
Table 4-82 show mvr members - display description 4-308
Table 4-83 IP Interface Commands 4-309
Table 4-84 IP Source Guard Commands 4-313
Table 4-85 DHCP Snooping Commands 4-317
Table 4-86 Switch Cluster Commands 4-324
Table B-1 Troubleshooting Chart B-1
Tables
xxii
xxiii
Figures
Figure 3-1 Home Page 3-2
Figure 3-2 Panel Display 3-3
Figure 3-3 System Information 3-12
Figure 3-4 Switch Information 3-14
Figure 3-5 Bridge Extension Configuration 3-15
Figure 3-6 Manual IP Configuration 3-17
Figure 3-7 DHCP IP Configuration 3-18
Figure 3-8 Jumbo Frames Configuration 3-19
Figure 3-9 Copy Firmware 3-20
Figure 3-10 Setting the Startup Code 3-20
Figure 3-11 Deleting Files 3-21
Figure 3-12 Downloading Configuration Settings for Startup 3-22
Figure 3-13 Setting the Startup Configuration Settings 3-23
Figure 3-14 Console Port Settings 3-24
Figure 3-15 Enabling Telnet 3-26
Figure 3-16 Displaying Logs 3-28
Figure 3-17 System Logs 3-29
Figure 3-18 Remote Logs 3-31
Figure 3-19 Enabling and Configuring SMTP 3-32
Figure 3-20 Resetting the System 3-33
Figure 3-21 SNTP Configuration 3-35
Figure 3-22 NTP Client Configuration 3-36
Figure 3-23 Setting the System Clock 3-38
Figure 3-24 Configuring SNMP Community Strings 3-40
Figure 3-25 Configuring IP Trap Managers 3-41
Figure 3-26 Enabling SNMP Agent Status 3-42
Figure 3-27 Setting an Engine ID 3-43
Figure 3-28 Setting a Remote Engine ID 3-43
Figure 3-29 Configuring SNMPv3 Users 3-45
Figure 3-30 Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users 3-46
Figure 3-31 Configuring SNMPv3 Groups 3-49
Figure 3-32 Configuring SNMPv3 Views 3-50
Figure 3-33 Access Levels 3-52
Figure 3-34 Authentication Settings 3-55
Figure 3-35 Encryption Key Settings 3-57
Figure 3-36 AAA Radius Group Settings 3-59
Figure 3-37 AAA TACACS+ Group Settings 3-60
Figure 3-38 AAA Accounting Settings 3-61
Figure 3-39 AAA Accounting Update 3-62
Figure 3-40 AAA Accounting 802.1X Port Settings 3-63
Figure 3-41 AAA Accounting Exec Command Privileges 3-64
Figure 3-42 AAA Accounting Exec Settings 3-65
Figures
xxiv
Figure 3-43 AAA Accounting Summary 3-66
Figure 3-44 AAA Authorization Settings 3-67
Figure 3-45 AAA Authorization Exec Settings 3-68
Figure 3-46 AAA Authorization Summary 3-69
Figure 3-47 HTTPS Settings 3-70
Figure 3-48 HTTPS Settings 3-71
Figure 3-49 SSH Server Settings 3-74
Figure 3-50 SSH Host-Key Settings 3-76
Figure 3-51 SSH User Public-Key Settings 3-78
Figure 3-52 Configuring Port Security 3-81
Figure 3-53 802.1X Global Information 3-83
Figure 3-54 802.1X Global Configuration 3-84
Figure 3-55 802.1X Port Configuration 3-85
Figure 3-56 Displaying 802.1X Port Statistics 3-88
Figure 3-57 Web Authentication Configuration 3-89
Figure 3-58 Web Authentication Port Configuration 3-90
Figure 3-59 Web Authentication Port Information 3-92
Figure 3-60 Web Authentication Port Re-authentication 3-92
Figure 3-61 Network Access Configuration 3-94
Figure 3-62 Network Access Port Configuration 3-95
Figure 3-63 Network Access Port Link Detection Configuration 3-97
Figure 3-64 Network Access MAC Address Information 3-98
Figure 3-65 MAC Authentication Port Configuration 3-99
Figure 3-66 Selecting ACL Type 3-101
Figure 3-67 Configuring Standard IP ACLs 3-102
Figure 3-68 Configuring Extended IP ACLs 3-104
Figure 3-69 Configuring MAC ACLs 3-106
Figure 3-70 Configuring ACL Port Binding 3-107
Figure 3-71 Creating an IP Filter List 3-109
Figure 3-72 Displaying Port/Trunk Information 3-110
Figure 3-73 Port/Trunk Configuration 3-113
Figure 3-74 Configuring Static Trunks 3-115
Figure 3-75 LACP Trunk Configuration 3-117
Figure 3-76 LACP Port Configuration 3-119
Figure 3-77 LACP - Port Counters Information 3-121
Figure 3-78 LACP - Port Internal Information 3-123
Figure 3-79 LACP - Port Neighbors Information 3-124
Figure 3-80 Port Broadcast Control 3-126
Figure 3-81 Mirror Port Configuration 3-127
Figure 3-82 Input Rate Limit Port Configuration 3-128
Figure 3-83 Port Statistics 3-132
Figure 3-84 Configuring a Static Address Table 3-134
Figure 3-85 Configuring a Dynamic Address Table 3-135
Figure 3-86 Setting the Address Aging Time 3-136
Figure 3-87 Displaying Spanning Tree Information 3-140
Figures
xxv
Figure 3-88 Configuring Spanning Tree 3-143
Figure 3-89 Displaying Spanning Tree Port Information 3-146
Figure 3-90 Configuring Spanning Tree per Port 3-149
Figure 3-91 Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees 3-150
Figure 3-92 Displaying MSTP Interface Settings 3-152
Figure 3-93 Displaying MSTP Interface Settings 3-155
Figure 3-94 Globally Enabling GVRP 3-158
Figure 3-95 Displaying Basic VLAN Information 3-159
Figure 3-96 Displaying Current VLANs 3-160
Figure 3-97 Configuring a VLAN Static List 3-162
Figure 3-98 Configuring a VLAN Static Table 3-164
Figure 3-99 VLAN Static Membership by Port 3-164
Figure 3-100 Configuring VLANs per Port 3-166
Figure 3-101 802.1Q Tunnel Status and Ethernet Type 3-171
Figure 3-102 Tunnel Port Configuration 3-173
Figure 3-103 Private VLAN Information 3-175
Figure 3-104 Private VLAN Configuration 3-176
Figure 3-105 Private VLAN Association 3-176
Figure 3-106 Private VLAN Port Information 3-177
Figure 3-107 Private VLAN Port Configuration 3-179
Figure 3-108 Protocol VLAN Configuration 3-180
Figure 3-109 Protocol VLAN System Configuration 3-181
Figure 3-110 LLDP Configuration 3-183
Figure 3-111 LLDP Port Configuration 3-185
Figure 3-112 LLDP Local Device Information 3-186
Figure 3-113 LLDP Remote Port Information 3-187
Figure 3-114 LLDP Remote Information Details 3-188
Figure 3-115 LLDP Device Statistics 3-189
Figure 3-116 LLDP Device Statistics Details 3-190
Figure 3-117 Port Priority Configuration 3-192
Figure 3-118 Traffic Classes 3-194
Figure 3-119 Enable Traffic Classes 3-195
Figure 3-120 Queue Mode 3-195
Figure 3-121 Configuring Queue Scheduling 3-196
Figure 3-122 IP DSCP Priority Status 3-197
Figure 3-123 Mapping IP DSCP Priority Values 3-198
Figure 3-124 Configuring Class Maps 3-202
Figure 3-125 Configuring Policy Maps 3-205
Figure 3-126 Service Policy Settings 3-206
Figure 3-127 Configuring VoIP Traffic 3-208
Figure 3-128 VoIP Traffic Port Configuration 3-209
Figure 3-129 Telephony OUI List 3-211
Figure 3-130 IGMP Configuration 3-215
Figure 3-131 IGMP Immediate Leave 3-216
Figure 3-132 Displaying Multicast Router Port Information 3-217
Figures
xxvi
Figure 3-133 Static Multicast Router Port Configuration 3-218
Figure 3-134 IP Multicast Registration Table 3-219
Figure 3-135 IGMP Member Port Table 3-220
Figure 3-136 Enabling IGMP Filtering and Throttling 3-221
Figure 3-137 IGMP Profile Configuration 3-223
Figure 3-138 IGMP Filter and Throttling Port Configuration 3-224
Figure 3-139 MVR Global Configuration 3-227
Figure 3-140 MVR Port Information 3-228
Figure 3-141 MVR Group IP Information 3-229
Figure 3-142 MVR Port Configuration 3-230
Figure 3-143 MVR Group Member Configuration 3-231
Figure 3-144 DHCP Snooping Configuration 3-233
Figure 3-145 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configuration 3-234
Figure 3-146 DHCP Snooping Information Option Configuration 3-235
Figure 3-147 DHCP Snooping Port Configuration 3-235
Figure 3-148 DHCP Snooping Binding Information 3-236
Figure 3-149 IP Source Guard Port Configuration 3-237
Figure 3-150 Static IP Source Guard Binding Configuration 3-239
Figure 3-151 Dynamic IP Source Guard Binding Information 3-240
Figure 3-152 Cluster Member Choice 3-241
Figure 3-153 Cluster Configuration 3-242
Figure 3-154 Cluster Member Configuration 3-242
Figure 3-155 Cluster Member Information 3-243
Figure 3-156 Cluster Candidate Information 3-244
Figure 3-157 UPnP Configuration 3-245
1-1
Chapter 1: Introduction
This switch provides a broad range of features for Layer 2 switching. It includes a
management agent that allows you to configure the features listed in this manual.
The default configuration can be used for most of the features provided by this
switch. However, there are many options that you should configure to maximize the
switch’s performance for your particular network environment.
Key Features
Table 1-1 Key Features
Feature Description
Configuration Backup and
Restore
Backup to TFTP server
Authentication Console, Telnet, web – User name / password, RADIUS, TACACS+
Web – HTTPS
Telnet – SSH
SNMP v1/2c - Community strings
SNMP version 3 – MD5 or SHA password
Port – IEEE 802.1X, MAC address filtering, Web Authentication
Access Control Lists Supports IP and MAC ACLs, 100 rules per system
DHCP Client Supported
DHCP Snooping Supported with Option 82 relay information
Port Configuration Speed, duplex mode and flow control
Rate Limiting Input rate limiting per port
Port Mirroring One port mirrored to a single analysis port
Port Trunking Supports up to 8 trunks using either static or dynamic trunking (LACP)
Broadcast Storm Control Supported
Static Address Up to 8K MAC addresses in the forwarding table
IEEE 802.1D Bridge Supports dynamic data switching and addresses learning
Store-and-Forward Switching Supported to ensure wire-speed switching while eliminating bad frames
Spanning Tree Algorithm Supports standard STP, Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP), and Multiple
Spanning Trees (MSTP)
Virtual LANs Up to 255 using IEEE 802.1Q, port-based, or private VLANs
Traffic Prioritization Default port priority, traffic class map, queue scheduling, or Differentiated
Services Code Point (DSCP), and TCP/UDP Port
Quality of Service Supports Differentiated Services (DiffServ)
Multicast Filtering Supports IGMP snooping and query, as well as Multicast VLAN Registration
Introduction
1-2
1
Description of Software Features
The switch provides a wide range of advanced performance enhancing features.
Flow control eliminates the loss of packets due to bottlenecks caused by port
saturation. Broadcast storm suppression prevents broadcast traffic storms from
engulfing the network. Port-based and private VLANs, plus support for automatic
GVRP VLAN registration provide traffic security and efficient use of network
bandwidth. CoS priority queueing ensures the minimum delay for moving real-time
multimedia data across the network. While multicast filtering provides support for
real-time network applications. Some of the management features are briefly
described below.
Configuration Backup and Restore – You can save the current configuration
settings to a file on a TFTP server, and later download this file to restore the switch
configuration settings.
Authentication – This switch authenticates management access via the console
port, Telnet or web browser. User names and passwords can be configured locally or
can be verified via a remote authentication server (i.e., RADIUS or TACACS+).
Port-based authentication is also supported via the IEEE 802.1X protocol. This
protocol uses the Extensible Authentication Protocol over LANs (EAPOL) to request
user credentials from the 802.1X client, and then verifies the client’s right to access
the network via an authentication server.
Other authentication options include HTTPS for secure management access via the
web, SSH for secure management access over a Telnet-equivalent connection, IP
address filtering for SNMP/web/Telnet management access, and MAC address
filtering for port access.
Access Control Lists – ACLs provide packet filtering for IP frames (based on
address, protocol, or TCP/UDP port number) or any frames (based on MAC address
or Ethernet type). ACLs can be used to improve performance by blocking
unnecessary network traffic or to implement security controls by restricting access to
specific network resources or protocols.
Port Configuration – You can manually configure the speed, duplex mode, and
flow control used on specific ports, or use auto-negotiation to detect the connection
settings used by the attached device. Use the full-duplex mode on ports whenever
possible to double the throughput of switch connections. Flow control should also be
enabled to control network traffic during periods of congestion and prevent the loss
of packets when port buffer thresholds are exceeded. The switch supports flow
control based on the IEEE 802.3x standard.
IP Clustering Supports up to 36 Member switches in a cluster
Table 1-1 Key Features
Feature Description
Description of Software Features
1-3
1
Rate Limiting – This feature controls the maximum rate for traffic received on an
interface. Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a network to limit
traffic into the network. Packets that exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are
dropped.
Port Mirroring – The switch can unobtrusively mirror traffic from any port to a
monitor port. You can then attach a protocol analyzer or RMON probe to this port to
perform traffic analysis and verify connection integrity.
Port Trunking – Ports can be combined into an aggregate connection. Trunks can
be manually set up or dynamically configured using IEEE 802.3ad Link Aggregation
Control Protocol (LACP). The additional ports dramatically increase the throughput
across any connection, and provide redundancy by taking over the load if a port in
the trunk should fail. The switch supports up to 8 trunks.
Broadcast Storm Control – Broadcast suppression prevents broadcast traffic from
overwhelming the network. When enabled on a port, the level of broadcast traffic
passing through the port is restricted. If broadcast traffic rises above a pre-defined
threshold, it will be throttled until the level falls back beneath the threshold.
Static Addresses – A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this
switch. Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved.
When a static address is seen on another interface, the address will be ignored and
will not be written to the address table. Static addresses can be used to provide
network security by restricting access for a known host to a specific port.
IEEE 802.1D Bridge – The switch supports IEEE 802.1D transparent bridging. The
address table facilitates data switching by learning addresses, and then filtering or
forwarding traffic based on this information. The address table supports up to 8K
addresses.
Store-and-Forward Switching – The switch copies each frame into its memory
before forwarding them to another port. This ensures that all frames are a standard
Ethernet size and have been verified for accuracy with the cyclic redundancy check
(CRC). This prevents bad frames from entering the network and wasting bandwidth.
To avoid dropping frames on congested ports, the switch provides 4 Mbits for frame
buffering. This buffer can queue packets awaiting transmission on congested
networks.
Spanning Tree Algorithm – The switch supports these spanning tree protocols:
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP, IEEE 802.1D) – This protocol provides loop detection
and recovery by allowing two or more redundant connections to be created between
a pair of LAN segments. When there are multiple physical paths between segments,
this protocol will choose a single path and disable all others to ensure that only one
route exists between any two stations on the network. This prevents the creation of
network loops. However, if the chosen path should fail for any reason, an alternate
path will be activated to maintain the connection.
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP, IEEE 802.1w) – This protocol reduces the
convergence time for network topology changes to 3 to 5 seconds, compared to 30
Introduction
1-4
1
seconds or more for the older IEEE 802.1D STP standard. It is intended as a
complete replacement for STP, but can still interoperate with switches running the
older standard by automatically reconfiguring ports to STP-compliant mode if they
detect STP protocol messages from attached devices.
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP, IEEE 802.1s) – This protocol is a direct
extension of RSTP. It can provide an independent spanning tree for different VLANs.
It simplifies network management, provides for even faster convergence than RSTP
by limiting the size of each region, and prevents VLAN members from being
segmented from the rest of the group (as sometimes occurs with IEEE 802.1D STP).
Virtual LANs – The switch supports up to 255 VLANs. A Virtual LAN is a collection
of network nodes that share the same collision domain regardless of their physical
location or connection point in the network. The switch supports tagged VLANs
based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard. Members of VLAN groups can be dynamically
learned via GVRP, or ports can be manually assigned to a specific set of VLANs.
This allows the switch to restrict traffic to the VLAN groups to which a user has been
assigned. By segmenting your network into VLANs, you can:
• Eliminate broadcast storms which severely degrade performance in a flat network.
• Simplify network management for node changes/moves by remotely configuring
VLAN membership for any port, rather than having to manually change the network
connection.
• Provide data security by restricting all traffic to the originating VLAN.
• Use private VLANs to restrict traffic to pass only between data ports and the uplink
ports, thereby isolating adjacent ports within the same VLAN, and allowing you to
limit the total number of VLANs that need to be configured.
• Use protocol VLANs to restrict traffic to specified interfaces based on protocol type.
Note: The switch allows 255 user-manageable VLANs. One other VLAN (VLAN ID 4093)
is reserved for IP clustering.
Traffic Prioritization – This switch prioritizes each packet based on the required
level of service, using four priority queues with strict or Weighted Round Robin
Queuing. It uses IEEE 802.1p and 802.1Q tags to prioritize incoming traffic based on
input from the end-station application. These functions can
be used to provide
independent priorities for delay-sensitive data and best-effort data.
This switch also supports several common methods of prioritizing layer 3/4 traffic to
meet application requirements. Traffic can be prioritized based on the DSCP field in
the IP frame. When these services are enabled, the priorities are mapped to a Class
of Service value by the switch, and the traffic then sent to the corresponding output
queue.
Quality of Service – Differentiated Services (DiffServ) provides policy-based
management mechanisms used for prioritizing network resources to meet the
requirements of specific traffic types on a per-hop basis. Each packet is classified
upon entry into the network based on access lists, IP Precedence or DSCP values,
or VLAN lists. Using access lists allows you select traffic based on Layer 2, Layer 3,
or Layer 4 information contained in each packet. Based on network policies, different
kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of forwarding.
Description of Software Features
1-5
1
Multicast Filtering – Specific multicast traffic can be assigned to its own VLAN to
ensure that it does not interfere with normal network traffic and to guarantee
real-time delivery by setting the required priority level for the designated VLAN. The
switch uses IGMP Snooping and Query to manage multicast group registration. It
also supports Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) which allows common multicast
traffic, such as television channels, to be transmitted across a single network-wide
multicast VLAN shared by hosts residing in other standard or private VLAN groups,
while preserving security and data isolation for normal traffic.
Introduction
1-6
1
System Defaults
The switch’s system defaults are provided in the configuration file
“Factory_Default_Config.cfg.” To reset the switch defaults, this file should be set as
the startup configuration file (page 3-21).
The following table lists some of the basic system defaults.
Table 1-2 System Defaults
Function Parameter Default
Console Port
Connection
Baud Rate 9600
Data bits 8
Stop bits 1
Parity none
Local Console Timeout 0 (disabled)
Authentication Privileged Exec Level Username “admin”
Password “admin”
Normal Exec Level Username “guest”
Password “guest”
Enable Privileged Exec from Normal
Exec Level
Password “super”
RADIUS Authentication Disabled
TACACS Authentication Disabled
802.1X Port Authentication Disabled
Web Authentication Disabled
MAC Authentication Disabled
HTTPS Enabled
SSH Disabled
Port Security Disabled
IP Filtering Disabled
Web Management HTTP Server Enabled
HTTP Port Number 80
HTTP Secure Server Enabled
HTTP Secure Port Number 443
SNMP Community Strings “public” (read only)
“private” (read/write)
Traps Authentication traps: enabled
Link-up-down events: enabled
System Defaults
1-7
1
Port Configuration Admin Status Enabled
Auto-negotiation Enabled
Flow Control Disabled
Rate Limiting Input limits Disabled
Port Trunking Static Trunks None
LACP (all ports) Disabled
Broadcast Storm
Protection
Status Enabled (all ports)
Broadcast Limit Rate 64 kbits per second
Spanning Tree
Algorithm
Status Enabled, RSTP
(Defaults: All values based on IEEE 802.1w)
Fast Forwarding (Edge Port) Disabled
Address Table Aging Time 300 seconds
Virtual LANs Default VLAN 1
PVID 1
Acceptable Frame Type All
Ingress Filtering Enabled
Switchport Mode (Egress Mode) Hybrid: tagged/untagged frames
GVRP (global) Disabled
GVRP (port interface) Disabled
Traffic Prioritization Ingress Port Priority 0
Weighted Round Robin Queue: 0 1 2 3
Weight: 1 2 4 8
IP DSCP Priority Disabled
IP Settings IP Address DHCP assigned, otherwise 192.168.1.1
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0
DHCP Client: Enabled
BOOTP Disabled
Multicast Filtering IGMP Snooping Snooping: Enabled
Querier: Enabled
Multicast VLAN Registration Disabled
Table 1-2 System Defaults (Continued)
Function Parameter Default
Introduction
1-8
1
System Log Status Enabled
Messages Logged Levels 0-6 (all)
Messages Logged to Flash Levels 0-3
SMTP Email Alerts Event Handler Enabled (but no server defined)
SNTP Clock Synchronization Disabled
NTP Clock Synchronization Disabled
DHCP Snooping Status Disabled
IP Source Guard Status Disabled (all ports)
IP Clustering Status Enabled
Commander Disabled
Table 1-2 System Defaults (Continued)
Function Parameter Default
2-1
Chapter 2: Initial Configuration
Connecting to the Switch
Configuration Options
The switch includes a built-in network management agent. The agent offers a variety
of management options, including SNMP, RMON (Groups 1, 2, 3, 9) and a
web-based interface. A PC may also be connected directly to the switch for
configuration and monitoring via a command line interface (CLI).
Note: The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default. To change this
address, see “Setting an IP Address” on page 2-4.
The switch’s HTTP web agent allows you to configure switch parameters, monitor
port connections, and display statistics using a standard web browser such as
Netscape version 6.2 and higher or Microsoft IE version 5.0 and higher. The switch’s
web management interface can be accessed from any computer attached to the
network.
The CLI program can be accessed by a direct connection to the RS-232 serial
console port on the switch, or remotely by a Telnet connection over the network.
The switch’s management agent also supports SNMP (Simple Network
Management Protocol). This SNMP agent permits the switch to be managed from
any system in the network using network management software such as
HP OpenView.
The switch’s web interface, CLI configuration program, and SNMP agent allow you
to perform the following management functions:
• Set user names and passwords
• Set an IP interface for a management VLAN
• Configure SNMP parameters
• Enable/disable any port
• Set the speed/duplex mode for any port
• Configure the bandwidth of any port by limiting input rates
• Control port access through IEEE 802.1X security or static address filtering
• Filter packets using Access Control Lists (ACLs)
• Configure up to 255 IEEE 802.1Q VLANs
• Enable GVRP automatic VLAN registration
• Configure IGMP multicast filtering
• Upload and download system firmware via TFTP
• Upload and download switch configuration files via TFTP
• Configure Spanning Tree parameters
• Configure Class of Service (CoS) priority queuing
Initial Configuration
2-2
2
• Configure up to 8 static or LACP trunks
• Enable port mirroring
• Set broadcast storm control on any port
• Display system information and statistics
Required Connections
The switch provides an RS-232 serial port that enables a connection to a PC or
terminal for monitoring and configuring the switch. A null-modem console cable is
provided with the switch.
Attach a VT100-compatible terminal, or a PC running a terminal emulation program
to the switch. You can use the console cable provided with this package, or use a
null-modem cable that complies with the wiring assignments shown in the
Installation Guide.
To connect a terminal to the console port, complete the following steps:
1. Connect the console cable to the serial port on a terminal, or a PC running
terminal emulation software, and tighten the captive retaining screws on the
DB-9 connector.
2. Connect the other end of the cable to the RS-232 serial port on the switch.
3. Make sure the terminal emulation software is set as follows:
• Select the appropriate serial port (COM port 1 or COM port 2).
• Set the baud rate to 9600 bps.
• Set the data format to 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and no parity.
• Set flow control to none.
• Set the emulation mode to VT100.
• When using HyperTerminal, select Terminal keys, not Windows keys.
Notes: 1. Refer to “Line Commands” on page 4-12 for a complete description of
console configuration options.
2. Once you have set up the terminal correctly, the console login screen will be
displayed.
For a description of how to use the CLI, see “Using the Command Line Interface” on
page 4-1. For a list of all the CLI commands and detailed information on using the
CLI, refer to “Command Groups” on page 4-11.
Basic Configuration
2-3
2
Remote Connections
Prior to accessing the switch’s onboard agent via a network connection, you must
first configure it with a valid IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway using a
console connection, DHCP or BOOTP protocol.
The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default. To manually
configure this address or enable dynamic address assignment via DHCP or BOOTP,
see “Setting an IP Address” on page 2-4.
Note: This switch supports four concurrent Telnet/SSH sessions.
After configuring the switch’s IP parameters, you can access the onboard
configuration program from anywhere within the attached network. The onboard
configuration program can be accessed using Telnet from any computer attached to
the network. The switch can also be managed by any computer using a web
browser (Internet Explorer 5.0 or above, or Netscape 6.2 or above), or from a
network computer using SNMP network management software.
Note: The onboard program only provides access to basic configuration functions. To
access the full range of SNMP management functions, you must use
SNMP-based network management software.
Basic Configuration
Console Connection
The CLI program provides two different command levels — normal access level
(Normal Exec) and privileged access level (Privileged Exec). The commands
available at the Normal Exec level are a limited subset of those available at the
Privileged Exec level and allow you to only display information and use basic
utilities. To fully configure the switch parameters, you must access the CLI at the
Privileged Exec level.
Access to both CLI levels are controlled by user names and passwords. The switch
has a default user name and password for each level. To log into the CLI at ]the
Privileged Exec level using the default user name and password, perform these
steps:
1. To initiate your console connection, press <Enter>. The “User Access
Verification” procedure starts.
2. At the Username prompt, enter “admin.”
3. At the Password prompt, also enter “admin.” (The password characters are not
displayed on the console screen.)
4. The session is opened and the CLI displays the “Console#” prompt indicating
you have access at the Privileged Exec level.
Initial Configuration
2-4
2
Setting Passwords
Note: If this is your first time to log into the CLI program, you should define new
passwords for both default user names using the “username” command, record
them and put them in a safe place.
Passwords can consist of up to 8 alphanumeric characters and are case sensitive.
To prevent unauthorized access to the switch, set the passwords as follows:
1. Open the console interface with the default user name and password “admin” to
access the Privileged Exec level.
2. Type “configure” and press <Enter>.
3. Type “username guest password 0 password,” for the Normal Exec level, where
password is your new password. Press <Enter>.
4. Type “username admin password 0 password,” for the Privileged Exec level,
where password is your new password. Press <Enter>.
Note: ‘0’ specifies the password in plain text, ‘7’ specifies the password in encrypted
form.
Setting an IP Address
You must establish IP address information for the stack to obtain management
access through the network. This can be done in either of the following ways:
Manual — You have to input the information, including IP address and subnet mask.
If your management station is not in the same IP subnet as the stack’s master unit,
you will also need to specify the default gateway router.
Dynamic — The switch sends IP configuration requests to BOOTP or DHCP
address allocation servers on the network.
Manual Configuration
You can manually assign an IP address to the switch. You may also need to specify
a default gateway that resides between this device and management stations that
exist on another network segment. Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal
numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Anything outside this format will not be
accepted by the CLI program.
Note: The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default.
Username: admin
Password:
CLI session with the ES3528M-SFP is opened.
To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].
Console#configure
Console(config)#username guest password 0 [password]
Console(config)#username admin password 0 [password]
Console(config)#
Basic Configuration
2-5
2
Before you can assign an IP address to the switch, you must obtain the following
information from your network administrator:
• IP address for the switch
• Default gateway for the network
• Network mask for this network
To assign an IP address to the switch, complete the following steps:
1. From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt, type
“interface vlan 1” to access the interface-configuration mode. Press <Enter>.
2. Type “ip address ip-address netmask,” where “ip-address” is the switch IP
address and “netmask” is the network mask for the network. Press <Enter>.
3. Type “exit” to return to the global configuration mode prompt. Press <Enter>.
4. To set the IP address of the default gateway for the network to which the switch
belongs, type “ip default-gateway gateway,” where “gateway” is the IP address
of the default gateway. Press <Enter>.
Dynamic Configuration
If you select the “bootp” or “dhcp” option, IP will be enabled but will not function until
a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received. You therefore need to use the “ip dhcp
restart” command to start broadcasting service requests. Requests will be sent
periodically in an effort to obtain IP configuration information. (BOOTP and DHCP
values can include the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway.)
If the “bootp” or “dhcp” option is saved to the startup-config file (step 6), then the
switch will start broadcasting service requests as soon as it is powered on.
To automatically configure the switch by communicating with BOOTP or DHCP
address allocation servers on the network, complete the following steps:
1. From the Global Configuration mode prompt, type “interface vlan 1” to access
the interface-configuration mode. Press <Enter>.
2. At the interface-configuration mode prompt, use one of the following commands:
• To obtain IP settings via DHCP, type “ip address dhcp” and press <Enter>.
• To obtain IP settings via BOOTP, type “ip address bootp” and press <Enter>.
3. Type “end” to return to the Privileged Exec mode. Press <Enter>.
4. Type “ip dhcp restart” to begin broadcasting service requests. Press <Enter>.
Console(config)#interface vlan 1
Console(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.5 255.255.255.0
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#ip default-gateway 192.168.1.254
Console(config)#
Initial Configuration
2-6
2
5. Wait a few minutes, and then check the IP configuration settings by typing the
“show ip interface” command. Press <Enter>.
6. Then save your configuration changes by typing “copy running-config
startup-config.” Enter the startup file name and press <Enter>.
Enabling SNMP Management Access
The switch can be configured to accept management commands from Simple
Network Management Protocol (SNMP) applications such as HP OpenView. You
can configure the switch to (1) respond to SNMP requests or (2) generate SNMP
traps.
When SNMP management stations send requests to the switch (either to return
information or to set a parameter), the switch provides the requested data or sets the
specified parameter. The switch can also be configured to send information to
SNMP managers (without being requested by the managers) through trap
messages, which inform the manager that certain events have occurred.
The switch includes an SNMP agent that supports SNMP version 1, 2c, and 3
clients. To provide management access for version 1 or 2c clients, you must specify
a community string. The switch provides a default MIB View (i.e., an SNMPv3
construct) for the default “public” community string that provides read access to the
entire MIB tree, and a default view for the “private” community string that provides
read/write access to the entire MIB tree. However, you may assign new views to
version 1 or 2c community strings that suit your specific security requirements (see
page 3-49).
Community Strings (for SNMP version 1 and 2c clients)
Community strings are used to control management access to SNMP version 1 and
2c stations, as well as to authorize SNMP stations to receive trap messages from
the switch. You therefore need to assign community strings to specified users, and
set the access level.
Console(config)#interface vlan 1
Console(config-if)#ip address dhcp
Console(config-if)#end
Console#ip dhcp restart
Console#show ip interface
IP address and netmask: 192.168.1.54 255.255.255.0 on VLAN 1,
and address mode: User specified.
Console#copy running-config startup-config
Startup configuration file name []: startup
\Write to FLASH Programming.
\Write to FLASH finish.
Success.
Basic Configuration
2-7
2
The default strings are:
•public - with read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to
retrieve MIB objects.
•private - with read-write access. Authorized management stations are able to both
retrieve and modify MIB objects.
To prevent unauthorized access to the switch from SNMP version 1 or 2c clients, it is
recommended that you change the default community strings.
To configure a community string, complete the following steps:
1. From the Privileged Exec level global configuration mode prompt, type
“snmp-server community string mode,” where “string” is the community access
string and “mode” is rw (read/write) or ro (read only). Press <Enter>. (Note that
the default mode is read only.)
2. To remove an existing string, simply type “no snmp-server community string,”
where “string” is the community access string to remove. Press <Enter>.
Note: If you do not intend to support access to SNMP version 1 and 2c clients, we
recommend that you delete both of the default community strings. If there are no
community strings, then SNMP management access from SNMP v1 and v2c
clients is disabled.
Trap Receivers
You can also specify SNMP stations that are to receive traps from the switch. To
configure a trap receiver, use the “snmp-server host” command. From the Privileged
Exec level global configuration mode prompt, type:
“snmp-server host host-address community-string
[version {1 | 2c | 3 {auth | noauth | priv}}]”
where “host-address” is the IP address for the trap receiver, “community-string”
specifies access rights for a version 1/2c host, or is the user name of a version 3
host, “version” indicates the SNMP client version, and “auth | noauth | priv” means
that authentication, no authentication, or authentication and privacy is used for v3
clients. Then press <Enter>. For a more detailed description of these parameters,
see “snmp-server host” on page 4-154. The following example creates a trap host
for each type of SNMP client.
Console(config)#snmp-server community admin rw 4-152
Console(config)#snmp-server community private
Console(config)#
Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.23 batman 4-154
Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.98 robin version 2c
Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.34 barbie version 3 auth
Console(config)#
Initial Configuration
2-8
2
Configuring Access for SNMP Version 3 Clients
To configure management access for SNMPv3 clients, you need to first create a
view that defines the portions of MIB that the client can read or write, assign the view
to a group, and then assign the user to a group. The following example creates one
view called “mib-2” that includes the entire MIB-2 tree branch, and then another view
that includes the IEEE 802.1d bridge MIB. It assigns these respective read and read/
write views to a group call “r&d” and specifies group authentication via MD5 or SHA.
In the last step, it assigns a v3 user to this group, indicating that MD5 will be used for
authentication, provides the password “greenpeace” for authentication, and the
password “einstien” for encryption.
For a more detailed explanation on how to configure the switch for access from
SNMP v3 clients, refer to “Simple Network Management Protocol” on page 3-38, or
refer to the specific CLI commands for SNMP starting on page 4-150.
Saving Configuration Settings
Configuration commands only modify the running configuration file and are not
saved when the switch is rebooted. To save all your configuration changes in
nonvolatile storage, you must copy the running configuration file to the start-up
configuration file using the “copy” command.
To save the current configuration settings, enter the following command:
1. From the Privileged Exec mode prompt, type “copy running-config
startup-config” and press <Enter>.
2. Enter the name of the start-up file. Press <Enter>.
Console(config)#snmp-server view mib-2 1.3.6.1.2.1 included 4-159
Console(config)#snmp-server view 802.1d 1.3.6.1.2.1.17 included
Console(config)#snmp-server group r&d v3 auth mib-2 802.1d 4-160
Console(config)#snmp-server user steve group r&d v3 auth md5
greenpeace priv des56 einstien 4-163
Console(config)#
Console#copy running-config startup-config
Startup configuration file name []: startup
\Write to FLASH Programming.
\Write to FLASH finish.
Success.
Console#
Managing System Files
2-9
2
Managing System Files
The switch’s flash memory supports three types of system files that can be managed
by the CLI program, web interface, or SNMP. The switch’s file system allows files to
be uploaded and downloaded, copied, deleted, and set as a start-up file.
The three types of files are:
•Configuration — This file stores system configuration information and is created
when configuration settings are saved. Saved configuration files can be selected
as a system start-up file or can be uploaded via TFTP to a server for backup. A file
named “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” contains all the system default settings and
cannot be deleted from the system. See “Saving or Restoring Configuration
Settings” on page 3-21 for more information.
•Operation Code — System software that is executed after boot-up, also known as
run-time code. This code runs the switch operations and provides the CLI and web
management interfaces. See “Managing Firmware” on page 3-19 for more
information.
•Diagnostic Code — Software that is run during system boot-up, also known as
POST (Power On Self-Test).
Due to the size limit of the flash memory, the switch supports only two operation
code files. However, you can have as many diagnostic code files and configuration
files as available flash memory space allows.
In the system flash memory, one file of each type must be set as the start-up file.
During a system boot, the diagnostic and operation code files set as the start-up file
are run, and then the start-up configuration file is loaded.
Note that configuration files should be downloaded using a file name that reflects the
contents or usage of the file settings. If you download directly to the running-config,
the system will reboot, and the settings will have to be copied from the
running-config to a permanent file.
Initial Configuration
2-10
2
3-1
Chapter 3: Configuring the Switch
Using the Web Interface
This switch provides an embedded HTTP web agent. Using a web browser you can
configure the switch and view statistics to monitor network activity. The web agent
can be accessed by any computer on the network using a standard web browser
(Internet Explorer 5.0 or above, or Netscape 6.2 or above).
Note: You can also use the Command Line Interface (CLI) to manage the switch over a
serial connection to the console port or via Telnet. For more information on using
the CLI, refer to Chapter 4: “Command Line Interface.”
Prior to accessing the switch from a web browser, be sure you have first performed
the following tasks:
1. Configure the switch with a valid IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway
using an out-of-band serial connection, BOOTP or DHCP protocol. (See
“Setting an IP Address” on page 2-4.)
2. Set user names and passwords using an out-of-band serial connection. Access
to the web agent is controlled by the same user names and passwords as the
onboard configuration program. (See “Setting Passwords” on page 2-4)
3. After you enter a user name and password, you will have access to the system
configuration program.
Notes: 1. You are allowed three attempts to enter the correct password; on the third
failed attempt the current connection is terminated.
2. If you log into the web interface as guest (Normal Exec level), you can view
the configuration settings or change the guest password. If you log in as
“admin” (Privileged Exec level), you can change the settings on any page.
3. If the path between your management station and this switch does not pass
through any device that uses the Spanning Tree Algorithm, then you can set
the switch port attached to your management station to fast forwarding (i.e.,
enable Admin Edge Port) to improve the switch’s response time to
management commands issued through the web interface. See “Configuring
Interface Settings” on page 3-147.
Configuring the Switch
3-2
3
Navigating the Web Browser Interface
To access the web-browser interface you must first enter a user name and
password. The administrator has Read/Write access to all configuration parameters
and statistics. The default user name and password for the administrator is “admin.”
Home Page
When your web browser connects with the switch’s web agent, the home page is
displayed as shown below. The home page displays the Main Menu on the left side
of the screen and System Information on the right side. The Main Menu links are
used to navigate to other menus, and display configuration parameters and
statistics.
Figure 3-1 Home Page
Panel Display
3-3
3
Configuration Options
Configurable parameters have a dialog box or a drop-down list. Once a configuration
change has been made on a page, be sure to click on the Apply button to confirm
the new setting. The following table summarizes the web page configuration
buttons.
Notes: 1. To ensure proper screen refresh, be sure that Internet Explorer is configured
so that the setting “Check for newer versions of stored pages” reads “Every
visit to the page”.
Internet Explorer 6.x and earlier: This option is available under the menu
“Tools / Internet Options / General / Temporary Internet Files / Settings”.
Internet Explorer 7.x: This option is available under “Tools / Internet Options
/ General / Browsing History / Settings / Temporary Internet Files”.
2. You may have to manually refresh the screen after making configuration
changes by pressing the browser’s refresh button.
Panel Display
The web agent displays an image of the switch’s ports. The Mode can be set to
display different information for the ports, including Active (i.e., up or down), Duplex
(i.e., half or full duplex, or Flow Control (i.e., with or without flow control). Clicking on
the image of a port opens the Port Configuration page as described on page 3-112.
Figure 3-2 Panel Display
Table 3-1 Configuration Options
Button Action
Revert Cancels specified values and restores current values prior to pressing Apply.
Apply Sets specified values to the system.
Help Links directly to webhelp.
Configuring the Switch
3-4
3
Main Menu
Using the onboard web agent, you can define system parameters, manage and
control the switch, and all its ports, or monitor network conditions. The following
table briefly describes the selections available from this program.
Table 3-2 Main Menu
Menu Description Page
System 3-12
System Information Provides basic system description, including contact information 3-12
Switch Information Shows the number of ports, hardware/firmware version
numbers, and power status
3-13
Bridge Extension
Configuration
Shows the bridge extension parameters 3-15
IP Configuration Sets the IP address for management access 3-16
Jumbo Frames Enables jumbo frame packets. 3-19
File Management 3-19
Copy Operation Allows the transfer and copying of files 3-19
Delete Allows deletion of files from the flash memory 3-20
Set Start-Up Sets the startup file 3-20
Line 3-23
Console Sets console port connection parameters 3-23
Telnet Sets Telnet connection parameters 3-25
Log 3-28
Logs Stores and displays error messages 3-28
System Logs Sends error messages to a logging process 3-28
Remote Logs Configures the logging of messages to a remote logging process 3-30
SMTP Sends an SMTP client message to a participating server. 3-31
Reset Restarts the switch 3-33
SNTP 3-34
Configuration Configures SNTP and NTP client settings, including broadcast
mode, authentication parameters or a specified list of servers
3-34
Clock Time Zone Sets the local time zone for the system clock 3-37
SNMP 3-38
Configuration Configures community strings and related trap functions 3-39
Agent Status Enables or disables SNMP Agent Status 3-41
SNMPv3 3-42
Engine ID Sets the SNMP v3 engine ID on this switch 3-42
Main Menu
3-5
3
Remote Engine ID Sets the SNMP v3 engine ID for a remote device 3-43
Users Configures SNMP v3 users on this switch 3-43
Remote Users Configures SNMP v3 users from a remote device 3-45
Groups Configures SNMP v3 groups 3-46
Views Configures SNMP v3 views 3-49
Security 3-51
User Accounts Assigns a new password for the current user 3-51
Authentication Settings Configures authentication sequence, RADIUS and TACACS 3-53
Encryption Key Configures RADIUS and TACACS encryption key settings 3-57
AAA 3-58
RADIUS Group Settings Defines the configured RADIUS servers to use for accounting 3-59
TACACS+ Group Settings Defines the configured TACACS+ servers to use for accounting 3-59
Accounting
Settings Configures accounting of requested services for billing or
security purposes
3-60
Periodic Update Sets the interval at which accounting updates are sent to
RADIUS AAA servers
3-62
802.1X Port Settings Applies the specified accounting method to an interface 3-62
Exec Settings Specifies console or Telnet authentication method 3-65
Summary Displays accounting information and statistics 3-65
Authorization 3-67
Settings Configures authorization of requested services 3-67
EXEC Settings Specifies console or Telnet authorization method 3-68
Summary Displays authorization information 3-68
AAA 3-58
HTTPS Settings Configures secure HTTP settings 3-57
SSH 3-71
Settings Configures Secure Shell server settings 3-80
Host-Key Settings Generates the host key pair (public and private) 3-75
SSH User Public-Key
Settings
Imports and manages user RSA and DSA public keys 3-76
Port Security Configures per port security, including status, response for
security breach, and maximum allowed MAC addresses
3-80
802.1X 3-81
Table 3-2 Main Menu (Continued)
Menu Description Page
Configuring the Switch
3-6
3
Information Displays global configuration settings for 802.1X Port
authentication
3-83
Configuration Configures the global configuration settings 3-83
Port Configuration Sets parameters for individual ports 3-84
Statistics Displays protocol statistics for the selected port 3-87
Web Authentication 3-88
Configuration Configures Web Authentication settings 3-89
Port Configuration Enables Web Authentication for individual ports 3-90
Port Information Displays status information for individual ports 3-91
Re-authentication Forces a host to re-authenticate itself immediately 3-92
Network Access 3-93
Configuration Configures global Network Access parameters 3-94
Port Configuration Configures Network Access parameters for individual ports 3-94
Port Link Detection
Configuration
Configures Port Link Detection parameters 3-96
MAC Address Information Displays Network Access statistics sorted by various attributes 3-97
MAC Authentication 3-98
Port Configuration Configures MAC Authentication parameters for ports 3-98
ACL 3-99
Configuration Configures packet filtering based on IP or MAC addresses 3-100
Port Binding Binds a port to the specified ACL 3-106
IP Filter Sets IP addresses of clients allowed management access via
the web, SNMP, and Telnet
3-107
Port 3-110
Port Information Displays port connection status 3-110
Trunk Information Displays trunk connection status 3-110
Port Configuration Configures port connection settings 3-112
Trunk Configuration Configures trunk connection settings 3-112
Trunk Membership Specifies ports to group into static trunks 3-115
LACP 3-116
Configuration Allows ports to dynamically join trunks 3-116
Aggregation Port Configures parameters for link aggregation group members 3-118
Port Counters Information Displays statistics for LACP protocol messages 3-120
Port Internal Information Displays settings and operational state for the local side 3-122
Table 3-2 Main Menu (Continued)
Menu Description Page
Main Menu
3-7
3
Port Neighbors Information Displays settings and operational state for the remote side 3-124
Port Broadcast Control Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each port 3-125
Trunk Broadcast Control Sets the broadcast storm threshold for each trunk 3-125
Mirror Port Configuration Sets the source and target ports for mirroring 3-127
Rate Limit 3-128
Input Port Configuration Sets the input rate limit for each port 3-128
Input Trunk Configuration Sets the input rate limit for each trunk 3-128
Output Port Configuration Sets the output rate limit for ports 3-128
Output Trunk Configuration Sets the output rate limit for trunks 3-128
Port Statistics Lists Ethernet and RMON port statistics 3-129
Address Table 3-133
Static Addresses Displays entries for interface, address or VLAN 3-133
Dynamic Addresses Displays or edits static entries in the Address Table 3-134
Address Aging Sets timeout for dynamically learned entries 3-136
Spanning Tree 3-136
Port Loopback Detection Configures Port Loopback Detection parameters 3-138
Trunk Loopback Detection Configures Trunk Loopback Detection parameters 3-138
STA 3-136
Information Displays STA values used for the bridge 3-138
Configuration Configures global bridge settings for STA and RSTP 3-141
Port Information Displays individual port settings for STA 3-144
Trunk Information Displays individual trunk settings for STA 3-144
Port Configuration Configures individual port settings for STA 3-147
Trunk Configuration Configures individual trunk settings for STA 3-147
MSTP 3-149
VLAN Configuration Configures priority and VLANs for a spanning tree instance 3-149
Port Information Displays port settings for a specified MST instance 3-151
Trunk Information Displays trunk settings for a specified MST instance 3-151
Port Configuration Configures port settings for a specified MST instance 3-153
Trunk Configuration Configures trunk settings for a specified MST instance 3-153
VLAN 3-155
802.1Q VLAN 3-155
Table 3-2 Main Menu (Continued)
Menu Description Page
Configuring the Switch
3-8
3
GVRP Status Enables GVRP on the switch 3-158
802.1Q Tunnel
Configuration
Enables 802.1Q (QinQ) Tunneling 3-170
Basic Information Displays information on the VLAN type supported by this switch 3-159
Current Table Shows the current port members of each VLAN and whether or
not the port is tagged or untagged
3-159
Static List Used to create or remove VLAN groups 3-161
Static Table Modifies the settings for an existing VLAN 3-162
Static Membership by Port Configures membership type for interfaces, including tagged,
untagged or forbidden
3-164
Port Configuration Specifies default PVID and VLAN attributes 3-165
Trunk Configuration Specifies default trunk VID and VLAN attributes 3-165
Tunnel Port Configuration Adds an interface to a QinQ Tunnel 3-172
Tunnel Trunk Configuration Adds an interface to a QinQ Tunnel 3-172
Private VLAN 3-173
Information Displays Private VLAN feature information 3-174
Configuration This page is used to create/remove primary or community
VLANs
3-175
Association Each community VLAN must be associated with a primary VLAN 3-176
Port Information Shows VLAN port type, and associated primary or secondary
VLANs
3-177
Port Configuration Sets the private VLAN interface type, and associates the
interfaces with a private VLAN
3-178
Trunk Information Shows VLAN port type, and associated primary or secondary
VLANs
3-177
Trunk Configuration Sets the private VLAN interface type, and associates the
interfaces with a private VLAN
3-178
Protocol VLAN 3-179
Configuration Configures protocol VLANs 3-179
System Configuration Configures protocol VLAN system parameters 3-180
LLDP 3-181
Configuration Configures global LLDP timing parameters 3-181
Port Configuration Configures parameters for individual ports 3-183
Trunk Configuration Configures parameters for trunks 3-183
Local Information Displays LLDP information about the local device 3-186
Table 3-2 Main Menu (Continued)
Menu Description Page
Main Menu
3-9
3
Remote Port Information Displays LLDP information about a remote device connected to
a port on this switch
3-187
Remote Trunk Information Displays LLDP information about a remote device connected to
a trunk on this switch
3-187
Remote Information Details Displays detailed LLDP information about a remote device
connected to this switch
3-188
Device Statistics Displays LLDP statistics for all connected remote devices 3-189
Device Statistics Details Displays LLDP statistics for remote devices on a selected port or
trunk
3-190
Priority 3-191
Default Port Priority Sets the default priority for each port 3-191
Default Trunk Priority Sets the default priority for each trunk 3-191
Traffic Classes Maps IEEE 802.1p priority tags to output queues 3-192
Traffic Classes Status Enables/disables traffic class priorities (not implemented) 3-194
Queue Mode Sets queue mode to strict priority or Weighted Round-Robin 3-195
Queue Scheduling Configures Weighted Round Robin queueing 3-195
IP DSCP Priority Status Globally selects DSCP Priority, or disables it. 3-197
IP DSCP Priority Sets IP Differentiated Services Code Point priority, mapping a
DSCP tag to a class-of-service value
3-198
QoS 3-199
DiffServ 3-199
Class Map Sets Class Maps 3-200
Policy Map Sets Policy Maps 3-203
Service Policy Defines service policy settings for ports 3-206
VoIP Traffic Setting 3-207
Configuration VoIP Traffic Setting Configuration 3-207
Port Configuration Configures VoIP Traffic Settings for ports 3-208
OUI Configuration Defines OUI settings 3-210
IGMP Snooping 3-212
IGMP Configuration Enables multicast filtering; configures parameters for multicast
query
3-213
IGMP Filter Configuration Configures IGMP filtering 3-220
IGMP Immediate Leave Enables the immediate leave function 3-215
Multicast Router
Port Information
Displays the ports that are attached to a neighboring multicast
router for each VLAN ID
3-216
Table 3-2 Main Menu (Continued)
Menu Description Page
Configuring the Switch
3-10
3
Static Multicast Router Port
Configuration
Assigns ports that are attached to a neighboring multicast router 3-217
IP Multicast Registration
Table
Displays all multicast groups active on this switch, including
multicast IP addresses and VLAN ID
3-218
IGMP Member Port Table Indicates multicast addresses associated with the selected
VLAN
3-219
IGMP Filter Profile
Configuration
Configures IGMP Filter Profiles 3-220
IGMP Filter/Throttling Port
Configuration
Configures IGMP Filtering and Throttling for ports 3-220
IGMP Filter/Throttling Trunk
Configuration
Configures IGMP Filtering and Throttling for trunks 3-220
MVR 3-225
Configuration Globally enables MVR, sets the MVR VLAN, adds multicast
stream addresses
3-226
Port Information Displays MVR interface type, MVR operational and activity
status, and immediate leave status
3-227
Trunk Information Displays MVR interface type, MVR operational and activity
status, and immediate leave status
3-227
Group IP Information Displays the ports attached to an MVR multicast stream 3-228
Port Configuration Configures MVR interface type and immediate leave status 3-229
Trunk Configuration Configures MVR interface type and immediate leave status 3-229
Group Member Configuration Statically assigns MVR multicast streams to an interface 3-231
DHCP Snooping 3-232
Configuration Enables DHCP Snooping and DHCP Snooping MAC-Address
Verification
3-233
VLAN Configuration Enables DHCP Snooping for a VLAN 3-233
Information Option
Configuration
Enables DHCP Snooping Information Option 3-234
Port Configuration Selects the DHCP Snooping Information Option policy 3-235
Binding Information Displays the DHCP Snooping binding information 3-236
IP Source Guard 3-237
Port Configuration Enables IP source guard and selects filter type per port 3-237
Static Configuration Adds a static addresses to the source-guard binding table 3-238
Dynamic Information Displays the source-guard binding table for a selected interface 3-239
Cluster 3-240
Configuration Globally enables clustering for the switch 3-241
Table 3-2 Main Menu (Continued)
Menu Description Page
Main Menu
3-11
3
Member Configuration Adds switch Members to the cluster 3-242
Member Information Displays cluster Member switch information 3-243
Candidate Information Displays network Candidate switch information 3-243
UPNP 3-245
Configuration Enables UPNP and defines timeout values 3-245
Table 3-2 Main Menu (Continued)
Menu Description Page
Configuring the Switch
3-12
3
Basic Configuration
Displaying System Information
You can easily identify the system by displaying the device name, location and
contact information.
Field Attributes
•System Name – Name assigned to the switch system.
•Object ID – MIB II object ID for switch’s network management subsystem.
•Location – Specifies the system location.
•Contact – Administrator responsible for the system.
•System Up Time – Length of time the management agent has been up.
These additional parameters are displayed for the CLI.
•MAC Address – The physical layer address for this switch.
•Web server – Shows if management access via HTTP is enabled.
•Web server port – Shows the TCP port number used by the web interface.
•Web secure server – Shows if management access via HTTPS is enabled.
•Web secure server port – Shows the TCP port used by the HTTPS interface.
•Telnet server – Shows if management access via Telnet is enabled.
•Telnet port – Shows the TCP port used by the Telnet interface.
•Jumbo Frame – Shows if jumbo frames are enabled.
•POST result – Shows results of the power-on self-test.
Web – Click System, System Information. Specify the system name, location, and
contact information for the system administrator, then click Apply. (This page also
includes a Telnet button that allows access to the Command Line Interface via Telnet.)
Figure 3-3 System Information
Basic Configuration
3-13
3
CLI – Specify the hostname, location and contact information.
Displaying Switch Hardware/Software Versions
Use the Switch Information page to display hardware/firmware version numbers for
the main board and management software, as well as the power status of the system.
Field Attributes
Main Board
•Serial Number – The serial number of the switch.
•Number of Ports – Number of built-in RJ-45 ports.
•Hardware Version – Hardware version of the main board.
•Internal Power Status – Displays the status of the internal power supply.
Management Software
• EPLD Version – Version number of the Electronically Programmable Logic Device
code.
•Loader Version – Version number of loader code.
•Boot-ROM Version – Version of Power-On Self-Test (POST) and boot code.
•Operation Code Version – Version number of runtime code.
•Role – Shows that this switch is operating as Master or Slave.
Console(config)#hostname R&D 5 4-28
Console(config)#snmp-server location WC 9 4-153
Console(config)#snmp-server contact Ted 4-153
Console(config)#exit
Console#show system 4-82
System description : ES3528M-SFP
System OID string : 1.3.6.1.4.1.259.8.1.4
System information
System Up time : 0 days, 0 hours, 14 minutes, and 32.93 seconds
System Name : R&D 5
System Location : WC 9
System Contact : Ted
MAC address : 00-00-35-28-10-03
Web server : enabled
Web server port : 80
Web secure server : enabled
Web secure server port : 443
Telnet server : enable
Telnet port : 23
Jumbo Frame : Disabled
POST result
UART Loopback Test ........... PASS
DRAM Test .................... PASS
Timer Test ................... PASS
PCI Device 1 Test ............ PASS
I2C Bus Initialization ....... PASS
Switch Int Loopback Test ..... PASS
Fan Speed Test ............... PASS
Done All Pass.
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-14
3
Web – Click System, Switch Information.
Figure 3-4 Switch Information
CLI – Use the following command to display version information.
Console#show version 4-83
Unit 1
Serial number:
Hardware version:
EPLD Version: 4.04
Number of ports: 28
Main power status: Up
Redundant power status: Not present
Agent (master)
Unit ID: 1
Loader version: 0.0.0.5
Boot ROM version: 0.0.0.8
Operation code version: 0.0.1.2
Console#
Basic Configuration
3-15
3
Displaying Bridge Extension Capabilities
The Bridge MIB includes extensions for managed devices that support Multicast
Filtering, Traffic Classes, and Virtual LANs. You can access these extensions to
display default settings for the key variables.
Field Attributes
•Extended Multicast Filtering Services – This switch does not support the filtering
of individual multicast addresses based on GMRP (GARP Multicast Registration
Protocol).
•Traffic Classes – This switch provides mapping of user priorities to multiple traffic
classes. (Refer to “Class of Service Configuration” on page 3-191.)
•Static Entry Individual Port – This switch allows static filtering for unicast and
multicast addresses. (Refer to “Setting Static Addresses” on page 3-133.)
•VLAN Learning – This switch uses Shared VLAN Learning (SVL), where all
VLANs share the same address table.
•Configurable PVID Tagging – This switch allows you to override the default Port
VLAN ID (PVID used in frame tags) and egress status (VLAN-Tagged or
Untagged) on each port. (Refer to “VLAN Configuration” on page 3-155.)
•Local VLAN Capable – This switch does not support multiple local bridges outside
of the scope of 802.1Q defined VLANs.
•GMRP – GARP Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP) allows network devices to
register endstations with multicast groups. This switch does not support GMRP; it
uses the Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) to provide automatic
multicast filtering.
Web – Click System, Bridge Extension Configuration.
Figure 3-5 Bridge Extension Configuration
Configuring the Switch
3-16
3
CLI – Enter the following command.
Setting the Switch’s IP Address
This section describes how to configure an IP interface for management access
over the network. The IP address for the stack is obtained via DHCP by default. To
manually configure an address, you need to change the switch’s default settings
(IP address 192.168.1.1 and netmask 255.255.255.0) to values that are compatible
with your network. You may also need to a establish a default gateway between the
stack and management stations that exist on another network segment.
You can manually configure a specific IP address, or direct the device to obtain an
address from a BOOTP or DHCP server. Valid IP addresses consist of four decimal
numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Anything outside this format will not be
accepted by the CLI program.
Command Attributes
•Management VLAN – ID of the configured VLAN (1-4092, no leading zeroes). By
default, all ports on the switch are members of VLAN 1. However, the management
station can be attached to a port belonging to any VLAN, as long as that VLAN has
been assigned an IP address.
•IP Address Mode – Specifies whether IP functionality is enabled via manual
configuration (Static), Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP), or Boot
Protocol (BOOTP). If DHCP/BOOTP is enabled, IP will not function until a reply has
been received from the server. Requests will be broadcast periodically by the
switch for an IP address. (DHCP/BOOTP values can include the IP address,
subnet mask, and default gateway.)
•IP Address – Address of the VLAN interface that is allowed management access.
Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods.
(Default: 0.0.0.0)
•Subnet Mask – This mask identifies the host address bits used for routing to
specific subnets. (Default: 255.0.0.0)
•Gateway IP address – IP address of the gateway router between this device and
management stations that exist on other network segments. (Default: 0.0.0.0)
•MAC Address – The physical layer address for this switch.
•Restart DHCP – Requests a new IP address from the DHCP server.
Console#show bridge-ext 4-239
Max support VLAN numbers: 256
Max support VLAN ID: 4092
Extended multicast filtering services: No
Static entry individual port: Yes
VLAN learning: IVL
Configurable PVID tagging: Yes
Local VLAN capable: No
Traffic classes: Enabled
Global GVRP status: Disabled
GMRP: Disabled
Console#
Basic Configuration
3-17
3
Manual Configuration
Web – Click System, IP Configuration. Select the VLAN through which the
management station is attached, set the IP Address Mode to “Static,” enter the IP
address, subnet mask and gateway, then click Apply.
Figure 3-6 Manual IP Configuration
CLI – Specify the management interface, IP address and default gateway.
Console#config
Console(config)#interface vlan 1 4-166
Console(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0 4-309
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#ip default-gateway 0.0.0.0 4-310
Console(config)#
Configuring the Switch
3-18
3
Using DHCP/BOOTP
If your network provides DHCP/BOOTP services, you can configure the switch to be
dynamically configured by these services.
Web – Click System, IP Configuration. Specify the VLAN to which the management
station is attached, set the IP Address Mode to DHCP or BOOTP. Click Apply to
save your changes. Then click Restart DHCP to immediately request a new
address. Note that the switch will also broadcast a request for IP configuration
settings on each power reset.
Figure 3-7 DHCP IP Configuration
Note: If you lose your management connection, use a console connection and enter
“show ip interface” to determine the new switch address.
CLI – Specify the management interface, and set the IP address mode to DHCP or
BOOTP, and then enter the “ip dhcp restart” command.
Renewing DHCP – DHCP may lease addresses to clients indefinitely or for a
specific period of time. If the address expires or the switch is moved to another
network segment, you will lose management access to the switch. In this case, you
can reboot the switch or submit a client request to restart DHCP service via the CLI.
Console#config
Console(config)#interface vlan 1 4-166
Console(config-if)#ip address dhcp 4-309
Console(config-if)#end
Console#ip dhcp restart 4-311
Console#show ip interface 4-311
IP address and netmask: 192.168.1.1 255.255.255.0 on VLAN 1,
and address mode: User specified.
Console#
Basic Configuration
3-19
3
Web – If the address assigned by DHCP is no longer functioning, you will not be
able to renew the IP settings via the web interface. You can only restart DHCP
service via the web interface if the current address is still available.
CLI – Enter the following command to restart DHCP service.
Enabling Jumbo Frames
You can enable jumbo frames to support data packets up to 9000 bytes in size.
Command Attributes
•Jumbo Packet Status – Check the box to enable jumbo frames.
Web – Click System, Jumbo Frames.
Figure 3-8 Jumbo Frames Configuration
CLI – Enter the following command.
Managing Firmware
You can upload/download firmware to or from a TFTP server, or copy files to and
from switch units in a stack. By saving runtime code to a file on a TFTP server, that
file can later be downloaded to the switch to restore operation. You can also set the
switch to use new firmware without overwriting the previous version. You must
specify the method of file transfer, along with the file type and file names as required.
Command Attributes
•File Transfer Method – The firmware copy operation includes these options:
- file to file – Copies a file within the switch directory, assigning it a new name.
- file to tftp – Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server.
- tftp to file – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch.
•TFTP Server IP Address – The IP address of a TFTP server.
•File Type – Specify opcode (operational code) to copy firmware.
Console#ip dhcp restart 4-311
Console#
Console#config
Console(config)#jumbo frame
Console(config)#
Configuring the Switch
3-20
3
•File Name –
The file name should not contain slashes (\ or /),
the leading letter of
the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names on
the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch.
(Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)
Note: Up to two copies of the system software (i.e., the runtime firmware) can be stored
in the file directory on the switch. The currently designated startup version of this
file cannot be deleted.
Downloading System Software from a Server
When downloading runtime code, you can specify the destination file name to
replace the current image, or first download the file using a different name from the
current runtime code file, and then set the new file as the startup file.
Web –Click System, File Management, Copy Operation. Select “tftp to file” as the file
transfer method, enter the IP address of the TFTP server, set the file type to
“opcode,” enter the file name of the software to download, select a file on the switch
to overwrite or specify a new file name, then click Apply. If you replaced the current
firmware used for startup and want to start using the new operation code, reboot the
system via the System/Reset menu.
Figure 3-9 Copy Firmware
If you download to a new destination file, go to the System/File/Set Start-Up menu,
mark the operation code file used at startup, and click Apply. To start the new
firmware, reboot the system via the System/Reset menu.
Figure 3-10 Setting the Startup Code
Basic Configuration
3-21
3
To delete a file, select System, File, Delete. Select the file name from the given list
by checking the tick box and click Apply. Note that the file currently designated as the
startup code cannot be deleted.
Figure 3-11 Deleting Files
CLI – To download new firmware form a TFTP server, enter the IP address of the
TFTP server, select “opcode” as the file type, then enter the source and destination
file names. When the file has finished downloading, set the new file to start up the
system, and then restart the switch.
To start the new firmware, enter the “reload” command or reboot the system.
Saving or Restoring Configuration Settings
You can upload/download configuration settings to/from a TFTP server. The
configuration files can be later downloaded to restore the switch’s settings.
Command Attributes
•File Transfer Method – The configuration copy operation includes these options:
- file to file – Copies a file within the switch directory, assigning it a new name.
- file to running-config – Copies a file in the switch to the running configuration.
- file to startup-config – Copies a file in the switch to the startup configuration.
- file to tftp – Copies a file from the switch to a TFTP server.
- running-config to file – Copies the running configuration to a file.
- running-config to startup-config – Copies the running config to the startup config.
- running-config to tftp – Copies the running configuration to a TFTP server.
- startup-config to file – Copies the startup configuration to a file on the switch.
- startup-config to running-config – Copies the startup config to the running config.
- startup-config to tftp – Copies the startup configuration to a TFTP server.
Console#copy tftp file 4-85
TFTP server ip address: 192.168.1.23
Choose file type:
1. config: 2. opcode: 4. diag: 5. loader: <1,2,4,5>: 2
Source file name: V2.2.7.1.bix
Destination file name: V2271.F
\Write to FLASH Programming.
-Write to FLASH finish.
Success.
Console#config
Console(config)#boot system opcode:V2271.F 4-90
Console(config)#exit
Console#reload 4-24
Configuring the Switch
3-22
3
- tftp to file – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the switch.
- tftp to running-config – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the running config.
- tftp to startup-config – Copies a file from a TFTP server to the startup config.
•TFTP Server IP Address – The IP address of a TFTP server.
•File Type – Specify config (configuration) to copy configuration settings.
•
File Name
— The file name should not contain slashes (\ or /),
the leading letter of
the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file names on
the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the switch. (Valid
characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)
Note: The maximum number of user-defined configuration files is limited only by
available flash memory space.
Downloading Configuration Settings from a Server
You can download the configuration file under a new file name and then set it as the
startup file, or you can specify the current startup configuration file as the destination
file to directly replace it. Note that the file “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” can be
copied to the TFTP server, but cannot be used as the destination on the switch.
Web – Click System, File, Copy Operation. Select “tftp to startup-config” or “tftp to
file” and enter the IP address of the TFTP server. Specify the name of the file to
download and select a file on the switch to overwrite or specify a new file name, then
click Apply.
Figure 3-12 Downloading Configuration Settings for Startup
If you download to a new file name using “tftp to startup-config” or “tftp to file,” the file
is automatically set as the start-up configuration file. To use the new settings, reboot
the system via the System/Reset menu.
Basic Configuration
3-23
3
Note: You can also select any configuration file as the start-up configuration by using the
System/File/Set Start-Up page.
Figure 3-13 Setting the Startup Configuration Settings
CLI – Enter the IP address of the TFTP server, specify the source file on the server,
set the startup file name on the switch, and then restart the switch.
To select another configuration file as the start-up configuration, use the boot
system command and then restart the switch.
Console Port Settings
You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100
compatible device to the switch’s serial console port. Management access through
the console port is controlled by various parameters, including a password, timeouts,
and basic communication settings. These parameters can be configured via the web
or CLI interface.
Command Attributes
•Login Timeout – Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the
CLI. If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval, the connection is
terminated for the session. (Range: 0-300 seconds; Default: 0 seconds)
•Exec Timeout – Sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected.
If user input is not detected within the timeout interval, the current session is
terminated. (Range: 0-65535 seconds; Default: 600 seconds)
•Password Threshold – Sets the password intrusion threshold, which limits the
number of failed logon attempts. When the logon attempt threshold is reached, the
Console#copy tftp startup-config 4-85
TFTP server ip address: 192.168.1.19
Source configuration file name: config-1
Startup configuration file name [] : startup
\Write to FLASH Programming.
-Write to FLASH finish.
Success.
Console#reload
Console#config
Console(config)#boot system config: startup-new 4-90
Console(config)#exit
Console#reload 4-24
Configuring the Switch
3-24
3
system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time (set by the Silent
Time parameter) before allowing the next logon attempt.
(Range: 0-120; Default: 3 attempts)
•Silent Time – Sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible
after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts has been exceeded.
(Range: 0-65535; Default: 0)
•Data Bits – Sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and
generated by the console port. If parity is being generated, specify 7 data bits per
character. If no parity is required, specify 8 data bits per character. (Default: 8 bits)
•Parity – Defines the generation of a parity bit. Communication protocols provided
by some terminals can require a specific parity bit setting. Specify Even, Odd, or
None. (Default: None)
•Speed – Sets the terminal line’s baud rate for transmit (to terminal) and receive
(from terminal). Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to
the serial port. (Range: 9600, 19200, 38400 baud, or Auto; Default: Auto)
•Stop Bits – Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte.
(Range: 1-2; Default: 1 stop bit)
•Password1 – Specifies a password for the line connection. When a connection is
started on a line with password protection, the system prompts for the password.
If you enter the correct password, the system shows a prompt.
(Default: No password)
•Login1 – Enables password checking at login. You can select authentication by a
single global password as configured for the Password parameter, or by
passwords set up for specific user-name accounts. (Default: Local)
Web – Click System, Line, Console. Specify the console port connection parameters
as required, then click Apply.
Figure 3-14 Console Port Settings
1. CLI only.
Basic Configuration
3-25
3
CLI – Enter Line Configuration mode for the console, then specify the connection
parameters as required. To display the current console port settings, use the show
line command from the Normal Exec level.
Telnet Settings
You can access the onboard configuration program over the network using Telnet
(i.e., a virtual terminal). Management access via Telnet can be enabled/disabled and
other various parameters set, including the TCP port number, timeouts, and a
password. These parameters can be configured via the web or CLI interface.
Command Attributes
• Telnet Status – Enables or disables Telnet access to the switch.
(Default: Enabled)
• Telnet Port Number – Sets the TCP port number for Telnet on the switch.
(Default: 23)
•Login Timeout – Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the
CLI. If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval, the connection is
terminated for the session. (Range: 0-300 seconds; Default: 300 seconds)
•Exec Timeout – Sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected.
If user input is not detected within the timeout interval, the current session is
terminated. (Range: 0-65535 seconds; Default: 600 seconds)
Console(config)#line console 4-13
Console(config-line)#login local 4-13
Console(config-line)#password 0 secret 4-14
Console(config-line)#timeout login response 0 4-15
Console(config-line)#exec-timeout 0 4-15
Console(config-line)#password-thresh 3 4-16
Console(config-line)#silent-time 60 4-17
Console(config-line)#databits 8 4-17
Console(config-line)#parity none 4-18
Console(config-line)#speed 19200 4-19
Console(config-line)#stopbits 1 4-19
Console(config-line)#end
Console#show line 4-20
Console configuration:
Password threshold: 3 times
Interactive timeout: Disabled
Login timeout: Disabled
Silent time: 60
Baudrate: 19200
Databits: 8
Parity: none
Stopbits: 1
VTY configuration:
Password threshold: 3 times
Interactive timeout: 600 sec
Login timeout: 300 sec
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-26
3
•Password Threshold – Sets the password intrusion threshold, which limits the
number of failed logon attempts. When the logon attempt threshold is reached, the
system interface becomes silent for a specified amount of time (set by the Silent
Time parameter) before allowing the next logon attempt.
(Range: 0-120; Default: 3 attempts)
•Password2 – Specifies a password for the line connection. When a connection is
started on a line with password protection, the system prompts for the password.
If you enter the correct password, the system shows a prompt. (Default: No
password)
•Login2 – Enables password checking at login. You can select authentication by a
single global password as configured for the Password parameter, or by
passwords set up for specific user-name accounts. (Default: Local)
Web – Click System, Line, Telnet. Specify the connection parameters for Telnet
access, then click Apply.
Figure 3-15 Enabling Telnet
2. CLI only.
Basic Configuration
3-27
3
CLI – Enter Line Configuration mode for a virtual terminal, then specify the
connection parameters as required. To display the current virtual terminal settings,
use the show line command from the Normal Exec level.
Console(config)#line vty 4-13
Console(config-line)#login local 4-13
Console(config-line)#password 0 secret 4-14
Console(config-line)#timeout login response 300 4-15
Console(config-line)#exec-timeout 600 4-15
Console(config-line)#password-thresh 3 4-16
Console(config-line)#end
Console#show line 4-20
Console configuration:
Password threshold: 3 times
Interactive timeout: Disabled
Login timeout: Disabled
Silent time: Disabled
Baudrate: 9600
Databits: 8
Parity: none
Stopbits: 1
VTY configuration:
Password threshold: 3 times
Interactive timeout: 600 sec
Login timeout: 300 sec
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-28
3
Configuring Event Logging
The switch allows you to control the logging of error messages, including the type of
events that are recorded in switch memory, logging to a remote System Log (syslog)
server, and displays a list of recent event messages.
Displaying Log Messages
The Logs page allows you to scroll through the logged system and event messages.
The switch can store up to 2048 log entries in temporary random access memory
(RAM; i.e., memory flushed on power reset) and up to 4096 entries in permanent
flash memory.
Web – Click System, Log, Logs.
Figure 3-16 Displaying Logs
CLI – This example shows the event message stored in RAM.
System Log Configuration
The system allows you to enable or disable event logging, and specify which levels
are logged to RAM or flash memory.
Severe error messages that are logged to flash memory are permanently stored in
the switch to assist in troubleshooting network problems. Up to 4096 log entries can
be stored in the flash memory, with the oldest entries being overwritten first when the
available log memory (256 kilobytes) has been exceeded.
Console#show log ram 4-59
[1] 00:00:27 2001-01-01
"VLAN 1 link-up notification."
level: 6, module: 5, function: 1, and event no.: 1
[0] 00:00:25 2001-01-01
"System coldStart notification."
level: 6, module: 5, function: 1, and event no.: 1
Console#
Basic Configuration
3-29
3
The System Logs page allows you to configure and limit system messages that are
logged to flash or RAM memory. The default is for event levels 0 to 3 to be logged to
flash and levels 0 to 6 to be logged to RAM.
Command Attributes
•System Log Status – Enables/disables the logging of debug or error messages to
the logging process. (Default: Enabled)
•Flash Level – Limits log messages saved to the switch’s permanent flash memory
for all levels up to the specified level. For example, if level 3 is specified, all
messages from level 0 to level 3 will be logged to flash. (Range: 0-7, Default: 3)
•RAM Level – Limits log messages saved to the switch’s temporary RAM memory
for all levels up to the specified level. For example, if level 7 is specified, all
messages from level 0 to level 7 will be logged to RAM. (Range: 0-7, Default: 6)
Note: The Flash Level must be equal to or less than the RAM Level.
Web – Click System, Log, System Logs. Specify System Log Status,
set the level of
event messages to be logged to RAM and flash memory, then click Apply.
Figure 3-17 System Logs
Table 3-3 Logging Levels
Level Severity Name Description
7 Debug Debugging messages
6 Informational Informational messages only
5 Notice Normal but significant condition, such as cold start
4 Warning Warning conditions (e.g., return false, unexpected return)
3 Error Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default used)
2 Critical Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or free memory
error - resource exhausted)
1 Alert Immediate action needed
0 Emergency System unusable
* There are only Level 2, 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release.
Configuring the Switch
3-30
3
CLI – Enable system logging and then specify the level of messages to be logged to
RAM and flash memory. Use the show logging command to display the current
settings.
Remote Log Configuration
The Remote Logs page allows you to configure the logging of messages that are
sent to syslog servers or other management stations. You can also limit the error
messages sent to only those messages below a specified level.
Command Attributes
•Remote Log Status – Enables/disables the logging of debug or error messages
to the remote logging process. (Default: Enabled)
•Logging Facility – Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages.
There are eight facility types specified by values of 16 to 23. The facility type is
used by the syslog server to dispatch log messages to an appropriate service.
The attribute specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages. (See RFC
3164.) This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the switch.
However, it may be used by the syslog server to process messages, such as
sorting or storing messages in the corresponding database. (Range: 16-23,
Default: 23)
•Logging Trap – Limits log messages that are sent to the remote syslog server for
all levels up to the specified level. For example, if level 3 is specified, all messages
from level 0 to level 3 will be sent to the remote server. (Range: 0-7, Default: 6)
•Host IP List – Displays the list of remote server IP addresses that receive the
syslog messages. The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five.
•Host IP Address – Specifies a new server IP address to add to the Host IP List.
Console(config)#logging on 4-55
Console(config)#logging history ram 0 4-56
Console(config)#end
Console#show logging flash 4-59
Syslog logging: Enabled
History logging in FLASH: level emergencies
Console#
Basic Configuration
3-31
3
Web – Click System, Log, Remote Logs. To add an IP address to the Host IP List,
type the new IP address in the Host IP Address box, and then click Add. To delete
an IP address, click the entry in the Host IP List, and then click Remove.
Figure 3-18 Remote Logs
CLI – Enter the syslog server host IP address, choose the facility type and set the
logging trap.
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) is used to send email messages between
servers. The messages can be retrieved using POP or IMAP clients.
Command Attributes
•Admin Status – Enables/disables the SMTP function. (Default: Enabled)
•Email Source Address – This command specifies SMTP servers email addresses
that can send alert messages.
•Severity – Specifies the degree of urgency that the message carries.
Console(config)#logging host 192.168.1.15 4-57
Console(config)#logging facility 23 4-57
Console(config)#logging trap 4 4-58
Console(config)#end
Console#show logging trap 4-58
Syslog logging: Enabled
REMOTELOG status: Enabled
REMOTELOG facility type: local use 7
REMOTELOG level type: Warning conditions
REMOTELOG server ip address: 192.168.1.15
REMOTELOG server ip address: 0.0.0.0
REMOTELOG server ip address: 0.0.0.0
REMOTELOG server ip address: 0.0.0.0
REMOTELOG server ip address: 0.0.0.0
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-32
3
• Debugging – Sends a debugging notification. (Level 7)
• Information – Sends informatative notification only. (Level 6)
• Notice – Sends notification of a normal but significant condition, such as a cold
start. (Level 5)
• Warning – Sends notification of a warning condition such as return false, or
unexpected return. (Level 4)
• Error – Sends notification that an error conditions has occurred, such as invalid
input, or default used. (Level 3)
• Critical – Sends notification that a critical condition has occurred, such as
memory allocation, or free memory error - resource exhausted. (Level 2)
• Alert – Sends urgent notification that immediate action must be taken. (Level 1)
• Emergency – Sends an emergency notification that the system is now unusable.
(Level 0)
•SMTP Server List – Specifies a list of recipient SMTP servers.
•SMTP Server – Specifies a new SMTP server address to add to the SMTP Server
List.
•Email Destination Address List – Specifies a list of recipient Email Destination
Address.
•Email Destination Address – This command specifies SMTP servers that may
receive alert messages.
Web – Click System, Log, SMTP. To add an IP address to the Server IP List, type
the new IP address in the Server IP Address box, and then click Add. To delete an IP
address, click the entry in the Server IP List, and then click Remove.
Figure 3-19 Enabling and Configuring SMTP
Basic Configuration
3-33
3
CLI – Enter the host ip address, followed by the mail severity level, source and
destination email addresses and enter the sendmail command to complete the
action. Use the show logging command to display SMTP information.
Resetting the System
This feature restarts the system. You can reboot the system immediately, or you can
configure the switch to reset after a specified amount of time.
Command Attributes
•Hours – Specifies the amount of hours to wait, combined with the minutes, before
the switch resets. (Range: 0-576; Default: 0)
•Minutes – Specifies the amount of minutes to wait, combined with the hours,
before the switch resets. (Range: 1-34560; Default: 0)
•Reset – Resets the switch after the specified time. If the hour and minute fields are
blank, then the switch will reset immediately.
•Refresh – Refreshes the countdown timer of a pending delayed reset.
•Cancel – Cancels a pending delayed reset.
Web – Click System, Reset. Enter the amount of time the switch should wait before
rebooting. Click the Reset button to reboot the switch or click the Cancel button to
cancel a configured reset. If prompted, confirm that you want reset the switch or
cancel a configured reset.
Figure 3-20 Resetting the System
Console(config)#logging sendmail host 192.168.1.19
Console(config)#logging sendmail level 3
Console(config)#logging sendmail source-email
bill@this-company.com
Console(config)#logging sendmail destination-email
ted@this-company.com
Console(config)#logging sendmail
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-34
3
CLI – Use the reload command to restart the switch. When prompted, confirm that
you want to reset the switch.
Note: When restarting the system, it will always run the Power-On Self-Test. It will also
retain all configuration information stored in non-volatile memory (See “Saving or
Restoring Configuration Settings” on page 3-21 or the copy running-config
startup-config command (See “copy” on page 4-85)).
Setting the System Clock
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) allows the switch to set its internal clock
based on periodic updates from a time server (SNTP or NTP). Maintaining an
accurate time on the switch enables the system log to record meaningful dates and
times for event entries. You can also manually set the clock. If the clock is not set,
the switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup.
When the SNTP client is enabled, the switch periodically sends a request for a time
update to a configured time server. You can configure up to three time server IP
addresses. The switch will attempt to poll each server in the configured sequence.
Setting the Time Manually
You can set the system time on the switch manually without using SNTP.
CLI – This example sets the system clock time and then displays the current time
and date.
Configuring SNTP
You can configure the switch to send time synchronization requests to time servers.
Command Attributes
•SNTP Client – Configures the switch to operate as an SNTP client. This requires
at least one time server to be specified in the SNTP Server field. (Default: Disabled)
•SNTP Poll Interval – Sets the interval between sending requests for a time update
from a time server. (Range: 16-16384 seconds; Default: 16 seconds)
•SNTP Server – Sets the IP address for up to three time servers. The switch
attempts to update the time from the first server, if this fails it attempts an update
from the next server in the sequence.
Web – Select SNTP, Configuration. Modify any of the required SNTP parameters,
and click Apply.
Console#reload 4-24
System will be restarted, continue <y/n>? y
Console#calendar set 17 46 00 october 18 2007 4-77
Console#show calendar 4-77
17:46:11 October 18 2007
Console#
Basic Configuration
3-35
3
Figure 3-21 SNTP Configuration
CLI – This example configures the switch to operate as an SNTP unicast client and
then displays the current time and settings.
Configuring NTP
The NTP client allows you to configure up to 50 NTP servers to poll for time updates.
You can also enable authentication to ensure that reliable updates are received from
only authorized NTP servers. The authentication keys and their associated key
number must be centrally managed and manually distributed to NTP servers and
clients. The key numbers and key values must match on both the server and client.
Command Attributes
•NTP Client – Configures the switch to operate as an NTP client. This requires at
least one time server to be specified in the NTP Server list. (Default: Disabled)
•NTP Polling Interval – Sets the interval between sending requests for a time
update from NTP servers. (Range: 16-16384 seconds; Default: 16 seconds)
•NTP Authenticate – Enables authentication for time requests and updates
between the switch and NTP servers. (Default: Disabled)
•NTP Server – Sets the IP address for an NTP server to be polled. The switch
requests an update from all configured servers, then determines the most accurate
time update from the responses received.
•Version – Specifies the NTP version supported by the server. (Range: 1-3;
Default: 3)
Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.19 137.82.140.80 128.250.36.2 4-66
Console(config)#sntp poll 60 4-67
Console(config)#sntp client 4-65
Console(config)#exit
Console#show sntp
Current time: Jan 6 14:56:05 2004
Poll interval: 60
Current mode: unicast
SNTP status : Enabled
SNTP server 10.1.0.19 137.82.140.80 128.250.36.2
Current server: 128.250.36.2
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-36
3
•Authenticate Key – Specifies the number of the key in the NTP Authentication Key
List to use for authentication with the configured server. The authentication key
must match the key configured on the NTP server.
•Key Number – A number that specifies a key value in the NTP Authentication Key
List. Up to 255 keys can be configured in the NTP Authentication Key List. Note
that key numbers and values must match on both the server and client. (Range:
1-65535)
•Key Context – Specifies an MD5 authentication key string. The key string can be
up to 32 case-sensitive printable ASCII characters (no spaces).
Web – Select SNTP, Configuration. Modify any of the required NTP parameters, and
click Apply.
Figure 3-22 NTP Client Configuration
Basic Configuration
3-37
3
CLI – This example configures the switch to operate as an NTP client and then
displays the current settings.
Setting the Time Zone
SNTP uses Coordinated Universal Time (or UTC, formerly Greenwich Mean Time,
or GMT) based on the time at the Earth’s prime meridian, zero degrees longitude,
which passes through Greenwich, England. To display a time corresponding to your
local time, you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time zone is
east (before) or west (after) of UTC. You can choose one of the 80 predefined time
zone definitions, or your can manually configure the parameters for your local time
zone.
Command Attributes
• Predefined Configuration – A drop-down box provides access to the 80
predefined time zone configurations. Each choice indicates it’s offset from UTC
and lists at least one major city or location covered by the time zone.
• User-defined Configuration – Allows the user to define all parameters of the local
time zone.
•Direction: Configures the time zone to be before (east) or after (west) UTC.
•Name – Assigns a name to the time zone. (Range: 1-29 characters)
•Hours (0-13) – The number of hours before/after UTC. The maximum value before
UTC is 12. The maximum value after UTC is 13.
•Minutes (0-59) – The number of minutes before/after UTC.
Console(config)#ntp authentication-key 19 md5 thisiskey19 4-71
Console(config)#ntp authentication-key 30 md5 ntpkey30
Console(config)#ntp server 192.168.3.20 4-69
Console(config)#ntp server 192.168.3.21
Console(config)#ntp server 192.168.4.22 version 2
Console(config)#ntp server 192.168.5.23 version 3 key 19
Console(config)#ntp poll 60 4-70
Console(config)#ntp client 4-68
Console(config)#ntp authenticate 4-70
Console(config)#exit
Console#show ntp 4-72
Current time: Jan 1 02:58:58 2001
Poll interval: 60
Current mode: unicast
NTP status : Enabled NTP Authenticate status : Enabled
Last Update NTP Server: 0.0.0.0 Port: 0
Last Update time: Dec 31 00:00:00 2000 UTC
NTP Server 192.168.3.20 version 3
NTP Server 192.168.3.21 version 3
NTP Server 192.168.4.22 version 2
NTP Server 192.168.5.23 version 3 key 19
NTP Authentication-Key 19 md5 Q33O16Q6338241J022S29Q731K7 7
NTP Authentication-Key 30 md5 D2V8777I51K1132K3552L26R6141O4 7
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-38
3
Web – Select SNTP, Clock Time Zone. Set the offset for your time zone relative to
the UTC using either a predefined or custom definition, and click Apply.
Figure 3-23 Setting the System Clock
CLI - This example shows how to set the time zone for the system clock using one of
the predefined time zone configurations.
Simple Network Management Protocol
SNMP is a communication protocol designed specifically for managing devices on a
network. Equipment commonly managed with SNMP includes switches, routers and
host computers. SNMP is typically used to configure these devices for proper
operation in a network environment, as well as to monitor them to evaluate
performance or detect potential problems.
Managed devices supporting SNMP contain software, which runs locally on the
device and is referred to as an agent. A defined set of variables, known as managed
objects, is maintained by the SNMP agent and used to manage the device. These
objects are defined in a Management Information Base (MIB) that provides a
standard presentation of the information controlled by the agent. SNMP defines both
the format of the MIB specifications and the protocol used to access this information
over the network.
The switch includes an onboard agent that supports SNMP versions 1, 2c, and 3.
This agent continuously monitors the status of the switch hardware, as well as the
traffic passing through its ports. A network management station can access this
information using software such as HP OpenView. Access to the onboard agent
from clients using SNMP v1 and v2c is controlled by community strings. To
communicate with the switch, the management station must first submit a valid
community string for authentication.
Console(config)#clock timezone-predefined GMT-0930-Taiohae 4-72
Console(config)#
Simple Network Management Protocol
3-39
3
Access to the switch using from clients using SNMPv3 provides additional security
features that cover message integrity, authentication, and encryption; as well as
controlling user access to specific areas of the MIB tree.
The SNMPv3 security structure consists of security models, with each model having
it’s own security levels. There are three security models defined, SNMPv1,
SNMPv2c, and SNMPv3. Users are assigned to “groups” that are defined by a
security model and specified security levels. Each group also has a defined security
access to set of MIB objects for reading and writing, which are known as “views.”
The switch has a default view (all MIB objects) and default groups defined for
security models v1 and v2c. The following table shows the security models and
levels available and the system default settings.
Note: The predefined default groups and view can be deleted from the system. You can
then define customized groups and views for the SNMP clients that require access.
Setting Community Access Strings
You may configure up to five community strings authorized for management access.
All community strings used for IP Trap Managers should be listed in this table. For
security reasons, you should consider removing the default strings.
Command Attributes
•SNMP Community Capability – Indicates that the switch supports up to five
community strings.
Table 3-4 SNMPv3 Security Models and Levels
Model Level Group Read View Write View Notify View Security
v1 noAuthNoPriv public
(read only)
defaultview none none Community string only
v1 noAuthNoPriv private
(read/write)
defaultview defaultview none Community string only
v1 noAuthNoPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined Community string only
v2c noAuthNoPriv public
(read only)
defaultview none none Community string only
v2c noAuthNoPriv private
(read/write)
defaultview defaultview none Community string only
v2c noAuthNoPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined Community string only
v3 noAuthNoPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined A user name match only
v3 AuthNoPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined Provides user
authentication via MD5 or
SHA algorithms
v3 AuthPriv user defined user defined user defined user defined Provides user
authentication via MD5 or
SHA algorithms and data
privacy using DES 56-bit
encryption
Configuring the Switch
3-40
3
•Community String – A community string that acts like a password and permits
access to the SNMP protocol.
Default strings: “public” (read-only), “private” (read/write)
Range: 1-32 characters, case sensitive
•Access Mode
-Read-Only – Specifies read-only access. Authorized management stations are
only able to retrieve MIB objects.
-Read/Write – Specifies read-write access. Authorized management stations are
able to both retrieve and modify MIB objects.
Web – Click SNMP, Configuration. Add new community strings as required, select
the access rights from the Access Mode drop-down list, then click Add.
Figure 3-24 Configuring SNMP Community Strings
CLI – The following example adds the string “spiderman” with read/write access.
Specifying Trap Managers and Trap Types
Traps indicating status changes are issued by the switch to specified trap managers.
You must specify trap managers so that key events are reported by this switch to
your management station (using network management platforms such as HP
OpenView). You can specify up to five management stations that will receive
authentication failure messages and other trap messages from the switch.
Command Attributes
•Trap Manager Capability – This switch supports up to five trap managers.
•Current – Displays a list of the trap managers currently configured.
•Trap Manager IP Address – IP address of the host (the targeted recipient).
•Trap Manager Community String – Community string sent with the notification
operation. (Range: 1-32 characters, case sensitive)
•Trap UDP Port – Sets the UDP port number. (Default: 162)
Console(config)#snmp-server community spiderman rw 4-152
Console(config)#
Simple Network Management Protocol
3-41
3
•Trap Version – Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP v1, v2c, or v3
traps. (The default is version 1.)
•Trap Security Level – Specifies the security level.
•Enable Authentication Traps – Issues a trap message whenever an invalid
community string is submitted during the SNMP access authentication process.
(Default: Enabled)
•Enable Link-up and Link-down Traps – Issues a trap message whenever a port
link is established or broken. (Default: Enabled)
Web – Click SNMP, Configuration. Fill in the IP address and community string for
each trap manager that will receive trap messages, and then click Add. Select the
trap types required using the check boxes for Authentication and Link-up/down
traps, and then click Apply.
Figure 3-25 Configuring IP Trap Managers
CLI – This example adds a trap manager and enables both authentication and
link-up, link-down traps.
Enabling SNMP Agent Status
Enables SNMPv3 service for all management clients (i.e., versions 1, 2c, 3).
Command Attributes
•SNMP Agent Status – Check the box to enable or disable the SNMP Agent.
Console(config)#snmp-server host 192.168.1.19 private version 2c 4-154
Console(config)#snmp-server enable traps 4-156
Configuring the Switch
3-42
3
Web – Click SNMP, Agent Status.
Figure 3-26 Enabling SNMP Agent Status
Configuring SNMPv3 Management Access
To configure SNMPv3 management access to the switch, follow these steps:
1. If you want to change the default engine ID, it must be changed first before
configuring other parameters.
2. Specify read and write access views for the switch MIB tree.
3. Configure SNMP user groups with the required security model (i.e., SNMP v1,
v2c or v3) and security level (i.e., authentication and privacy).
4. Assign SNMP users to groups, along with their specific authentication and
privacy passwords.
Setting the Local Engine ID
An SNMPv3 engine is an independent SNMP agent that resides on the switch. This
engine protects against message replay, delay, and redirection. The engine ID is
also used in combination with user passwords to generate the security keys for
authenticating and encrypting SNMPv3 packets.
A local engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the switch. This is
referred to as the default engine ID. If the local engine ID is deleted or changed, all
SNMP users will be cleared. You will need to reconfigure all existing users.
A new engine ID can be specified by entering 9 to 64 hexadecimal characters (5 to
32 octets in hexadecimal format). If an odd number of characters are specified, a
trailing zero is added to the value to fill in the last octet. For example, the value
“123456789” is equivalent to “1234567890”.
Simple Network Management Protocol
3-43
3
Web – Click SNMP, SNMPv3, Engine ID.
Figure 3-27 Setting an Engine ID
Specifying a Remote Engine ID
To send inform messages to an SNMPv3 user on a remote device, you must first
specify the engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where the
user resides. The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for
authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host.
SNMP passwords are localized using the engine ID of the authoritative agent. For
informs, the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent. You therefore need to
configure the remote agent’s SNMP engine ID before you can send proxy requests
or informs to it.
The engine ID can be specified by entering 9 to 64 hexadecimal characters (5 to 32
octets in hexadecimal format). If an odd number of characters are specified, a
trailing zero is added to the value to fill in the last octet. For example, the value
“123456789” is equivalent to “1234567890”.
Web – Click SNMP, SNMPv3, Remote Engine ID.
Figure 3-28 Setting a Remote Engine ID
Configuring SNMPv3 Users
Each SNMPv3 user is defined by a unique name. Users must be configured with a
specific security level and assigned to a group. The SNMPv3 group restricts users to
a specific read, write, and notify view.
Command Attributes
•User Name – The name of user connecting to the SNMP agent.
(Range: 1-32 characters)
Configuring the Switch
3-44
3
•Group Name – The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned.
(Range: 1-32 characters)
•Model – The user security model; SNMP v1, v2c or v3.
•Level – The security level used for the user:
-noAuthNoPriv – There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP
communications. (This is the default for SNMPv3.)
-AuthNoPriv – SNMP communications use authentication, but the data is not
encrypted (only available for the SNMPv3 security model).
-AuthPriv – SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption (only
available for the SNMPv3 security model).
•Authentication – The method used for user authentication.
(Options: MD5, SHA; Default: MD5)
•Authentication Password – A minimum of eight plain text characters is required.
•Privacy – The encryption algorithm use for data privacy; only 56-bit DES is
currently available.
•Actions – Enables the user to be assigned to another SNMPv3 group.
Simple Network Management Protocol
3-45
3
Web – Click SNMP, SNMPv3, Users. Click New to configure a user name. In the
New User page, define a name and assign it to a group, then click Add to save the
configuration and return to the User Name list. To delete a user, check the box next
to the user name, then click Delete. To change the assigned group of a user, click
Change Group in the Actions column of the users table and select the new group.
Figure 3-29 Configuring SNMPv3 Users
Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users
Each SNMPv3 user is defined by a unique name. Users must be configured with a
specific security level and assigned to a group. The SNMPv3 group restricts users to
a specific read, write, and notify view.
To send inform messages to an SNMPv3 user on a remote device, you must first
specify the engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where the
Configuring the Switch
3-46
3
user resides. The remote engine ID is used to compute the security digest for
authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on the remote host.
Command Attributes
•User Name – The name of user connecting to the SNMP agent.
(Range: 1-32 characters)
•Group Name – The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned.
(Range: 1-32 characters)
•Engine ID – The engine identifier for the SNMP agent on the remote device where
the remote user resides. Note that the remote engine identifier must be specified
before you configure a remote user. (See “Specifying a Remote Engine ID” on
page 44.)
•Model – The user security model; SNMP v1, v2c or v3.
•Level – The security level used for the user:
-noAuthNoPriv – There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP
communications. (This is the default for SNMPv3.)
-AuthNoPriv – SNMP communications use authentication, but the data is not
encrypted (only available for the SNMPv3 security model).
-AuthPriv – SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption (only
available for the SNMPv3 security model).
•Authentication – The method used for user authentication.
(Options: MD5, SHA; Default: MD5)
•Privacy – The encryption algorithm use for data privacy; only 56-bit DES is
currently available.
Web – Click SNMP, SNMPv3, Remote Users. Click New to configure a user name.
In the New User page, define a name and assign it to a group, then click Add to save
the configuration and return to the User Name list. To delete a user, check the box
next to the user name, then click Delete.
Figure 3-30 Configuring Remote SNMPv3 Users
Configuring SNMPv3 Groups
An SNMPv3 group sets the access policy for its assigned users, restricting them to
specific read, write, and notify views. You can use the pre-defined default groups or
create new groups to map a set of SNMP users to SNMP views.
Simple Network Management Protocol
3-47
3
Command Attributes
•Group Name – The name of the SNMP group to which the user is assigned.
(Range: 1-32 characters)
•Model – The user security model; SNMP v1, v2c or v3.
•Level – The security level used for the group:
-noAuthNoPriv – There is no authentication or encryption used in SNMP
communications. (This is the default for SNMPv3.)
-AuthNoPriv – SNMP communications use authentication, but the data is not
encrypted (only available for the SNMPv3 security model).
-AuthPriv – SNMP communications use both authentication and encryption (only
available for the SNMPv3 security model).
•Read View – The configured view for read access. (Range: 1-64 characters)
•Write View – The configured view for write access. (Range: 1-64 characters)
•Notify View – The configured view for notifications. (Range: 1-64 characters)
Table 3-5 Supported Notification Messages
Object Label Object ID Description
RFC 1493 Traps
newRoot 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.1 The newRoot trap indicates that the sending
agent has become the new root of the Spanning
Tree; the trap is sent by a bridge soon after its
election as the new root, e.g., upon expiration of
the Topology Change Timer immediately
subsequent to its election.
topologyChange 1.3.6.1.2.1.17.0.2 A topologyChange trap is sent by a bridge when
any of its configured ports transitions from the
Learning state to the Forwarding state, or from
the Forwarding state to the Discarding state.
The trap is not sent if a newRoot trap is sent for
the same transition.
SNMPv2 Traps
coldStart 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.1 A coldStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2
entity, acting in an agent role, is reinitializing
itself and that its configuration may have been
altered.
warmStart 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.2 A warmStart trap signifies that the SNMPv2
entity, acting in an agent role, is reinitializing
itself such that its configuration is unaltered.
linkDowna1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3 A linkDown trap signifies that the SNMP entity,
acting in an agent role, has detected that the
ifOperStatus object for one of its
communication links is about to enter the down
state from some other state (but not from the
notPresent state). This other state is indicated
by the included value of ifOperStatus.
Configuring the Switch
3-48
3
linkUp 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4 A linkUp trap signifies that the SNMP entity,
acting in an agent role, has detected that the
ifOperStatus object for one of its
communication links left the down state and
transitioned into some other state (but not into
the notPresent state). This other state is
indicated by the included value of ifOperStatus.
authenticationFailure 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.5 An authenticationFailure trap signifies that the
SNMPv2 entity, acting in an agent role, has
received a protocol message that is not
properly authenticated. While all
implementations of the SNMPv2 must be
capable of generating this trap, the
snmpEnableAuthenTraps object indicates
whether this trap will be generated.
RMON Events (V2)
risingAlarm 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.0.1 The SNMP trap that is generated when an
alarm entry crosses its rising threshold and
generates an event that is configured for
sending SNMP traps.
fallingAlarm 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.0.2 The SNMP trap that is generated when an
alarm entry crosses its falling threshold and
generates an event that is configured for
sending SNMP traps.
Private Traps
swPowerStatus
ChangeTrap
1.3.6.1.4.1.259.8.1.4.2.1.0.1 This trap is sent when the power state changes.
swIpFilterRejectTrap 1.3.6.1.4.1.259.8.1.4.2.1.0.40 This trap is sent when an incorrect IP address is
rejected by the IP Filter.
a. These are legacy notifications and therefore must be enabled in conjunction with the corresponding traps
on the SNMP Configuration menu.
Table 3-5 Supported Notification Messages (Continued)
Object Label Object ID Description
Simple Network Management Protocol
3-49
3
Web – Click SNMP, SNMPv3, Groups. Click New to configure a new group. In the
New Group page, define a name, assign a security model and level, and then select
read and write views. Click Add to save the new group and return to the Groups list.
To delete a group, check the box next to the group name, then click Delete.
Figure 3-31 Configuring SNMPv3 Groups
Setting SNMPv3 Views
SNMPv3 views are used to restrict user access to specified portions of the MIB tree.
The predefined view “defaultview” includes access to the entire MIB tree.
Command Attributes
•View Name – The name of the SNMP view. (Range: 1-64 characters)
•View OID Subtrees – Shows the currently configured object identifiers of branches
within the MIB tree that define the SNMP view.
•Edit OID Subtrees – Allows you to configure the object identifiers of branches
within the MIB tree. Wild cards can be used to mask a specific portion of the OID
string.
Configuring the Switch
3-50
3
•Type – Indicates if the object identifier of a branch within the MIB tree is included
or excluded from the SNMP view.
Web – Click SNMP, SNMPv3, Views. Click New to configure a new view. In the New
View page, define a name and specify OID subtrees in the switch MIB to be included
or excluded in the view. Click Back to save the new view and return to the SNMPv3
Views list. For a specific view, click on View OID Subtrees to display the current
configuration, or click on Edit OID Subtrees to make changes to the view settings. To
delete a view, check the box next to the view name, then click Delete.
Figure 3-32 Configuring SNMPv3 Views
User Authentication
3-51
3
User Authentication
You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system for
management access using local or remote authentication methods. Port-based
authentication using IEEE 802.1X can also be configured to control either
management access to the uplink ports or client access to the data ports. This
switch provides secure network management access using the following options:
• User Accounts – Manually configures management access rights for users.
• Authentication Settings – Uses remote authentication to configure access rights.
• AAA – Enables accounting of requested services for billing or security purposes.
• HTTPS Settings – Provides a secure web connection.
• SSH Settings – Provides a secure shell (for secure Telnet access).
• 802.1X – Uses IEEE 802.1X port authentication to control access to specific ports.
• IP Filter – Filters management access to the web, SNMP or Telnet interface.
• Port Security – Configures notification and automatic shutdown options for ports.
Configuring User Accounts
The guest only has read access for most configuration parameters. However, the
administrator has write access for all parameters governing the onboard agent. You
should therefore assign a new administrator password as soon as possible, and
store it in a safe place.
The default guest name is “guest” with the password “guest.” The default
administrator name is “admin” with the password “admin.”
Command Attributes
•Account List – Displays the current list of user accounts and associated access
levels. (Defaults: admin, and guest)
•New Account – Displays configuration settings for a new account.
-User Name – The name of the user.
(Maximum length: 8 characters; maximum number of users: 16)
-Access Level – Specifies the user level.
(Options: Normal and Privileged)
-Password – Specifies the user password.
(Range: 0-8 characters plain text, case sensitive)
•Change Password – Sets a new password for the specified user name.
•Add/Remove – Adds or removes an account from the list.
Configuring the Switch
3-52
3
Web – Click Security, User Accounts. To configure a new user account, specify a
user name, select the user’s access level, then enter a password and confirm it.
Click Add to save the new user account and add it to the Account List. To change the
password for a specific user, enter the user name and new password, confirm the
password by entering it again, then click Apply.
Figure 3-33 Access Levels
CLI – Assign a user name to access-level 15 (i.e., administrator), then specify the
password.
Console(config)#username bob access-level 15 4-38
Console(config)#username bob password 0 smith
Console(config)#
User Authentication
3-53
3
Configuring Local/Remote Logon Authentication
Use the Authentication Settings menu to restrict management access based on
specified user names and passwords. You can manually configure access rights on
the switch, or you can use a remote access authentication server based on RADIUS
or TACACS+ protocols.
Remote Authentication Dial-in
User Service (RADIUS) and
Terminal Access Controller
Access Control System Plus
(TACACS+) are logon
authentication protocols that
use software running on a
central server to control
access to RADIUS-aware or
TACACS-aware devices on the
network. An authentication
server contains a database of
multiple user name/password pairs with associated privilege levels for each user
that requires management access to the switch.
RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP. UDP only offers best effort delivery,
while TCP offers a connection-oriented transport. Also, note that RADIUS encrypts
only the password in the access-request packet from the client to the server, while
TACACS+ encrypts the entire body of the packet.
Command Usage
• By default, management access is always checked against the authentication
database stored on the local switch. If a remote authentication server is used, you
must specify the authentication sequence and the corresponding parameters for
the remote authentication protocol. Local and remote logon authentication control
management access via the console port, web browser, or Telnet.
• RADIUS and TACACS+ logon authentication assign a specific privilege level for
each user name/password pair. The user name, password, and privilege level
must be configured on the authentication server. The encryption methods used for
the authentication process must also be configured or negotiated between the
authentication server and logon client. This switch can pass authentication
messages between the server and client that have been encrypted using MD5
(Message-Digest 5), TLS (Transport Layer Security), or TTLS (Tunneled Transport
Layer Security).
• You can specify up to three authentication methods for any user to indicate the
authentication sequence. For example, if you select (1) RADIUS, (2) TACACS and
(3) Local, the user name and password on the RADIUS server is verified first. If the
RADIUS server is not available, then authentication is attempted using the
TACACS+ server, and finally the local user name and password is checked.
Web
Telnet
RADIUS/
TACACS+
server
console
1. Client attempts management access.
2. Switch contacts authentication server.
3. Authentication server challenges client.
4. Client responds with proper password or key.
5. Authentication server approves access.
6. Switch grants management access.
Configuring the Switch
3-54
3
Command Attributes
•Authentication – Select the authentication, or authentication sequence required:
-Local – User authentication is performed only locally by the switch.
-Radius – User authentication is performed using a RADIUS server only.
-TACACS – User authentication is performed using a TACACS+ server only.
- [authentication sequence] – User authentication is performed by up to three
authentication methods in the indicated sequence.
•RADIUS Settings
-Global – Provides globally applicable RADIUS settings.
-ServerIndex – Specifies one of five RADIUS servers that may be configured.
The switch attempts authentication using the listed sequence of servers. The
process ends when a server either approves or denies access to a user.
-Server IP Address3 – Address of authentication server. (Default: 10.1.0.1)
-Authentication Port Number – Network (UDP) port of authentication server
used for authentication messages. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 1812)
-Accounting Port Number – UDP port on authentication server used for
accounting messages. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 1813)
-Number of Server Transmits – Number of times the switch tries to authenticate
logon access via the authentication server. (Range: 1-30; Default: 2)
-Timeout for a reply – The number of seconds the switch waits for a reply from
the RADIUS server before it resends the request. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 5)
•TACACS Settings
-Server IP Address4 – Address of the TACACS+ server. (Default: 10.11.12.13)
-Server Port Number – Network (TCP) port of TACACS+ server used for
authentication messages. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 49)
-Number of Server Transmits – Number of times the switch tries to authenticate
logon access via the authentication server. (Range: 1-30; Default: 2)
-Timeout for a reply – The number of seconds the switch waits for a reply from
the RADIUS server before it resends the request. (Range: 1-540; Default: 5)
Note: The local switch user database has to be set up by manually entering user names
and passwords using the Web or CLI. (See “Configuring User Accounts” on
page 3-51 or “username” on page 4-38)
3. A Server Index must be selected to display this item.
4. A Server Index must be selected to display this item.
User Authentication
3-55
3
Web – Click Security, Authentication Settings. To configure local or remote
authentication preferences, specify the authentication sequence (i.e., one to three
methods), fill in the parameters for RADIUS or TACACS+ authentication if selected,
and click Apply.
Figure 3-34 Authentication Settings
Configuring the Switch
3-56
3
CLI – Specify all the required parameters to enable logon authentication.
Console(config)#authentication login radius 4-92
Console(config)#radius-server auth-port 181 4-96
Console(config)#radius-server key green 4-96
Console(config)#radius-server retransmit 5 4-97
Console(config)#radius-server timeout 10 4-97
Console(config)#radius-server 1 host 192.168.1.25 4-95
Console(config)#end
Console#show radius-server 4-97
Global Settings:
Communication Key with RADIUS Server:
Auth-Port: 181
Acct-port: 1813
Retransmit Times: 5
Request Timeout: 10
Server 1:
Server IP Address: 192.168.1.25
Communication Key with RADIUS Server: *****
Auth-Port: 181
Acct-port: 1813
Retransmit Times: 5
Request Timeout: 10
Radius server group:
Group Name Member Index
--------------------- -------------
radius 1
Console#
Console#configure
Console(config)#authentication login tacacs 4-92
Console(config)#tacacs-server 1 host 10.20.30.40 4-98
Console(config)#tacacs-server port 200 4-99
Console(config)#tacacs-server retransmit 5 4-100
Console(config)#tacacs-server timeout 10 4-100
Console(config)#tacacs-server key green 4-99
Console#show tacacs-server 4-101
Remote TACACS+ server configuration:
Global Settings:
Communication Key with TACACS+ Server:
Server Port Number: 200
Retransmit Times : 5
Request Times : 10
Server 1:
Server IP address: 10.20.30.40
Communication key with TACACS+ server: ****
Server port number: 200
Retransmit Times : 5
Request Times : 10
Tacacs server group:
Group Name Member Index
--------------------- -------------
tacacs+ 1
Console(config)#
User Authentication
3-57
3
Configuring Encryption Keys
The Encryption Key feature provides a central location for the management of all
RADIUS and TACACS+ server encryption keys.
Command Attributes
• RADIUS Settings
-Global – Provides globally applicable RADIUS encryption key settings.
-ServerIndex – Specifies one of five RADIUS servers for which an encryption
key may be configured.
- Secret Text String – Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for
client. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20 (48?)
characters)
- Confirm Secret Text String – Re-type the string entered in the previous field to
ensure no errors were made. The switch will not change the encryption key if
these two fields do not match.
- Change – Clicking this button adds or modifies the selected encryption key.
• TACACS+ Settings
-Global – Provides globally applicable TACACS+ encryption key settings.
-ServerIndex – Specifies the index number of the TACACS+ server for which an
encryption key may be configured. The switch currently supports only one
TACACS+ server.
- Secret Text String – Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for
client. Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20 (48?)
characters)
- Confirm Secret Text String – Re-type the string entered in the previous field to
ensure no errors were made. The switch will not change the encryption key if
these two fields do not match.
- Change – Clicking this button adds or modifies the selected encryption key.
Web – Click Security, Encryption Key. Choose the appropriate RADIUS or
TACACS+ ServerIndex, enter Secret Text String and confirm it, then click Change.
Figure 3-35 Encryption Key Settings
Configuring the Switch
3-58
3
AAA Authorization and Accounting
The Authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) feature provides the main
framework for configuring access control on the switch. The three security functions
can be summarized as follows:
• Authentication — Identifies users that request access to the network.
• Authorization — Determines if users can access specific services.
• Accounting — Provides reports, auditing, and billing for services that users have
accessed on the network.
The AAA functions require the use of configured RADIUS or TACACS+ servers in
the network. The security servers can be defined as sequential groups that are then
applied as a method for controlling user access to specified services. For example,
when the switch attempts to authenticate a user, a request is sent to the first server
in the defined group, if there is no response the second server will be tried, and so
on. If at any point a pass or fail is returned, the process stops.
The switch supports the following AAA features:
• Accounting for IEEE 802.1X authenticated users that access the network through
the switch.
• Accounting for users that access management interfaces on the switch through the
console and Telnet.
• Accounting for commands that users enter at specific CLI privilege levels.
• Authorization of users that access management interfaces on the switch through
the console and Telnet.
To configure AAA on the switch, you need to follow this general process:
1. Configure RADIUS and TACACS+ server access parameters. See “Configuring
Local/Remote Logon Authentication” on page 3-53.
2. Define RADIUS and TACACS+ server groups to support the accounting and
authorization of services.
3. Define a method name for each service to which you want to apply accounting
or authorization and specify the RADIUS or TACACS+ server groups to use.
4. Apply the method names to port or line interfaces.
Note: This guide assumes that RADIUS and TACACS+ servers have already been
configured to support AAA. The configuration of RADIUS and TACACS+ server
software is beyond the scope of this guide, refer to the documentation provided
with the RADIUS or TACACS+ server software.
User Authentication
3-59
3
Configuring AAA RADIUS Group Settings
The AAA RADIUS Group Settings screen defines the configured RADIUS servers to
use for accounting and authorization.
Command Attributes
•Group Name - Defines a name for the RADIUS server group. (1-255 characters)
•Server Index - Spefies the RADIUS server and sequence to use for the group.
(Range: 1-5)
When specifying the index for a RADIUS sever, the server index must already be
defined (see “Configuring Local/Remote Logon Authentication” on page 3-53).
Web – Click Security, AAA, Radius Group Settings. Enter the RADIUS group name,
followed by the number of the server, then click Add.
Figure 3-36 AAA Radius Group Settings
CLI – Specify the group name for a list of RADIUS servers, and then specify the
index number of a RADIUS server to add it to the group.
Configuring AAA TACACS+ Group Settings
The AAA TACACS+ Group Settings screen defines the configured TACACS+
servers to use for accounting and authorization.
Command Attributes
•Group Name - Defines a name for the TACACS+ server group. (1-255 characters)
•Server - Spefies the TACACS+ server to use for the group. (Range: 1)
When specifying the index for a TACACS+ server, the server index must already
be defined (see “Configuring Local/Remote Logon Authentication” on page 3-53).
Console(config)#aaa group server radius tps-radius 4-102
Console(config-sg-radius)#server 1 4-103
Console(config-sg-radius)#server 2 4-103
Console(config-sg-radius)#
Configuring the Switch
3-60
3
Web – Click Security, AAA, TACACS+ Group Settings. Enter the TACACS+ group
name, followed by the number of the server, then click Add.
Figure 3-37 AAA TACACS+ Group Settings
CLI – Specify the group name for a list of TACACS+ servers, and then specify the
index number of a TACACS+ server to add it to the group.
Configuring AAA Accounting
AAA accounting is a feature that enables the accounting of requested services for
billing or security purposes.
Command Attributes
•Method Name – Specifies an accounting method for service requests.
The “default” methods are used for a requested service if no other methods have
been defined. (Range: 1-255 characters)
The method name is only used to describe the accounting method(s) configured
on the specified accounting servers, and do not actually send any information to
the servers about the methods to use.
•Service Request – Specifies the service as either 802.1X (user accounting) or
Exec (administrative accounting for local console, Telnet, or SSH connections).
•Accounting Notice – Records user activity from log-in to log-off point.
•Group Name - Specifes the accounting server group. (Range: 1-255 characters)
The group names “radius” and “tacacs+” specifies all configured RADIUS and
TACACS+ hosts (see “Configuring Local/Remote Logon Authentication” on page
3-53). Any other group name refers to a server group configured on the RADIUS
or TACACS+ Group Settings pages.
Console(config)#aaa group server tacacs+ tps-tacacs+ 4-102
Console(config-sg-tacacs+)#server 1 4-103
Console(config-sg-tacacs+)#
User Authentication
3-61
3
Web – Click Security, AAA, Accounting, Settings. To configure a new accounting
method, specify a method name and a group name, then click Add.
Figure 3-38 AAA Accounting Settings
CLI – Specify the accounting method required, followed by the chosen parameters.
Console(config)#aaa accounting dot1x tps start-stop group radius 4-103
Console(config)#
Configuring the Switch
3-62
3
AAA Accounting Update
This feature sets the interval at which accounting updates are sent to accounting
servers.
Command Attributes
Periodic Update - Specifies the interval at which the local accounting service
updates information to the accounting server. (Range: 1-2147483647 minutes;
Default: Disabled)
Web – Click Security, AAA, Accounting, Periodic Update. Enter the required update
interval and click Apply.
Figure 3-39 AAA Accounting Update
CLI – This example sets the periodic accounting update interval at 10 minutes.
AAA Accounting 802.1X Port Settings
This feature applies the specified accounting method to an interface.
Command Attributes
•Port/Trunk - Specifies a port or trunk number.
•Method Name - Specifies a user defined method name to apply to the interface.
This method must be defined in the AAA Accounting Settings menu (page 3-59).
(Range: 1-255 characters)
Console(config)#aaa accounting update periodic 10 4-106
Console(config)#
User Authentication
3-63
3
Web – Click Security, AAA, Accounting, 802.1X Port Settings. Enter the required
accounting method and click Apply.
Figure 3-40 AAA Accounting 802.1X Port Settings
CLI – Specify the accounting method to apply to the selected interface.
AAA Accounting Exec Command Privileges
This feature specifies a method name to apply to commands entered at specific CLI
privilege levels.
Command Attributes
• Commands Privilege Level - The CLI privilege levels (0-15).
•Console/Telnet - Specifies a user-defined method name to apply to commands
entered at the specified CLI privilege level.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2
Console(config-if)#accounting dot1x tps-method 4-107
Console(config-if)#
Configuring the Switch
3-64
3
Web – Click Security, AAA, Accounting, Command Privileges. Enter a defined
method name for console and Telnet privilege levels. Click Apply.
Figure 3-41 AAA Accounting Exec Command Privileges
CLI – Specify the accounting method to use for console and Telnet privilege levels.
Console(config)#line console 4-13
Console(config-line)#accounting commands 15 tps-method 4-108
Console(config-line)#exit
Console(config)#line vty
Console(config-line)#accounting commands 15 tps-method
Console(config-line)#
User Authentication
3-65
3
AAA Accounting Exec Settings
This feature specifies a method name to apply to console and Telnet connections.
Command Attributes
Method Name - Specifies a user defined method name to apply to console and
Telnet connections.
Web – Click Security, AAA, Accounting, Exec Settings. Enter a defined method
name for console and Telnet connections, and click Apply.
Figure 3-42 AAA Accounting Exec Settings
CLI – Specify the accounting method to use for Console and Telnet interfaces.
AAA Accounting Summary
This feature displays all accounting configured accounting methods, the methods
applied to specified interfaces, and basic accounting information recorded for user
sessions.
Command Attributes
AAA Accounting Summary
•Accounting Type - Displays the accounting service.
•Method List - Displays the user-defined or default accounting method.
•Group List - Displays the accounting server group.
•Interface - Displays the port or trunk to which these rules apply. (This field is null
if the accounting method and associated server group has not been assigned to an
interface.)
AAA Accounting Statistics Summary
•User Name - Displays a registered user name.
•Interface - Displays the receive port number through which this user accessed the
switch.
•Time Elapsed - Displays the length of time this entry has been active.
Console(config)#line console 4-13
Console(config-line)#accounting exec tps-method 4-107
Console(config-line)#exit
Console(config)#line vty
Console(config-line)#accounting exec tps-method
Console(config-line)#
Configuring the Switch
3-66
3
Web – Click Security, AAA, Summary.
Figure 3-43 AAA Accounting Summary
CLI – Use the following command to display the currently applied accounting
methods, and registered users.
Console#show accounting 4-110
Accounting Type : dot1x
Method List : default
Group List : radius
Interface :
Method List : tps-method
Group List : tps-radius
Interface :
Accounting Type : Exec
Method List : default
Group List : tacacs+
Interface :
Accounting Type : Commands 0
Method List : default
Group List : tacacs+
Interface :
User Authentication
3-67
3
Authorization Settings
AAA authorization is a feature that verifies a user has access to specific services.
Command Attributes
•Method Name – Specifies an authorization method for service requests.
The “default” method is used for a requested service if no other methods have been
defined. (Range: 1-255 characters)
•Service Request – Specifies the service as Exec (authorization for local console
or Telnet connections).
•Group Name - Specifes the authorization server group. (Range: 1-255 characters)
The group name “tacacs+” specifies all configured TACACS+ hosts (see
“Configuring Local/Remote Logon Authentication” on page 3-53). Any other group
name refers to a server group configured on the TACACS+ Group Settings page.
Authorization is only supported for TACACS+ servers.
Web – Click Security, AAA, Authorization, Settings. To configure a new authorization
method, specify a method name and a group name, select the service, then click
Add.
Figure 3-44 AAA Authorization Settings
CLI – Specify the authorization method required and the server group.
Console#show accounting statistics
Total entries: 3
Acconting type : dot1x
Username : testpc
Interface : eth 1/1
Time elapsed since connected: 00:24:44
Acconting type : exec
Username : admin
Interface : vty 0
Time elapsed since connected: 00:25:09
Console#
Console(config)#aaa authorization exec default group tacacs+ 4-108
Console(config)#
Configuring the Switch
3-68
3
Authorization EXEC Settings
This feature specifies an authorization method name to apply to console and Telnet
connections.
Command Attributes
Method Name - Specifies a user-defined method name to apply to console and
Telnet connections.
Web – Click Security, AAA, Authorization, Exec Settings. Enter a defined method
name for console and Telnet connections, and click Apply.
Figure 3-45 AAA Authorization Exec Settings
CLI – Specify the authorization method to use for Console and Telnet interfaces.
Authorization Summary
The Authorization Summary displays the configured authorization methods and the
interfaces to which they are applied.
Command Attributes
•Authorization Type - Displays the authorization service.
•Method List - Displays the user-defined or default authorization method.
•Group List - Displays the authorization server group.
•Interface - Displays the console or Telnet interface to which the authorization
method applies. (This field is null if the authorization method and associated server
group has not been assigned.)
Console(config)#line console 4-13
Console(config-line)#authorization exec tps-auth 4-109
Console(config-line)#exit
Console(config)#line vty
Console(config-line)#authorization exec tps-auth
Console(config-line)#
User Authentication
3-69
3
Web – Click Security, AAA, Authorization, Summary.
Figure 3-46 AAA Authorization Summary
Configuring HTTPS
You can configure the switch to enable the Secure Hypertext Transfer Protocol
(HTTPS) over the Secure Socket Layer (SSL), providing secure access (i.e., an
encrypted connection) to the switch’s web interface.
Command Usage
• Both the HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch.
However, you cannot configure both services to use the same UDP port.
• If you enable HTTPS, you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in your
browser: https://device[:port_number]
• When you start HTTPS, the connection is established in this way:
- The client authenticates the server using the server’s digital certificate.
- The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the
connection.
- The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting data.
• The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection.
A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5.x or above
and Netscape Navigator 6.2 or above.
• The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS:
• To specify a secure-site certificate, see “Replacing the Default Secure-site
Certificate” on page 3-70.
Command Attributes
•HTTPS Status – Allows you to enable/disable the HTTPS server feature on the
switch. (Default: Enabled)
Table 3-6 HTTPS System Support
Web Browser Operating System
Internet Explorer 5.0 or later Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a),
Windows 2000, Windows XP
Netscape Navigator 6.2 or later Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a),
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Solaris 2.6
Configuring the Switch
3-70
3
•Change HTTPS Port Number – Specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS
connection to the switch’s web interface. (Default: Port 443)
Web – Click Security, HTTPS Settings. Enable HTTPS and specify the port number,
then click Apply.
Figure 3-47 HTTPS Settings
CLI – This example enables the HTTP secure server and modifies the port number.
Replacing the Default Secure-site Certificate
When you log onto the web interface using HTTPS (for secure access), a Secure
Sockets Layer (SSL) certificate appears for the switch. By default, the certificate that
Netscape and Internet Explorer display will be associated with a warning that the
site is not recognized as a secure site. This is because the certificate has not been
signed by an approved certification authority. If you want this warning to be replaced
by a message confirming that the connection to the switch is secure, you must
obtain a unique certificate and a private key and password from a recognized
certification authority.
Caution: For maximum security, we recommend you obtain a unique Secure Sockets
Layer certificate at the earliest opportunity. This is because the default
certificate for the switch is not unique to the hardware you have purchased.
When you have obtained these, place them on your TFTP server and transfer them
to the switch to replace the default (unrecognized) certificate with an authorized one.
Command Attributes
•TFTP Server IP Address – Specifies the IP address of the TFTP server which
contains the certificate file.
Console(config)#ip http secure-server 4-43
Console(config)#ip http secure-port 443 4-44
Console(config)#
User Authentication
3-71
3
•Source Certificate File Name – Specifies the name of certificate file as stored on
the TFTP server.
•Source Private File Name – Specifies the name of the private key file as stored
on the TFTP server.
•Private Password – The password for the private key file.
Web – Click Security, HTTPS Settings. Fill in the TFTP server, certificate and private
file name details, then click Copy Certificate.
Figure 3-48 HTTPS Settings
CLI – This example copies the certificate file from the designated TFTP server.
Note: The switch must be reset for the new certificate to be activated. To reset the
switch, See “Resetting the System” on page 3-33 or type: Console#reload
Configuring the Secure Shell
The Berkeley-standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix
systems. Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows
and other environments. These tools, including commands such as rlogin (remote
login), rsh (remote shell), and rcp (remote copy), are not secure from hostile attacks.
The Secure Shell (SSH) includes server/client applications intended as a secure
replacement for the older Berkeley remote access tools. SSH can also provide
remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Telnet.
When the client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol, the switch generates a
public-key that the client uses along with a local user name and password for access
authentication. SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and
Console#copy tftp https-certificate 4-85
TFTP server ip address: <server ip-address>
Source certificate file name: <certificate file name>
Source private file name: <private key file name>
Private password: <password for private key>
Configuring the Switch
3-72
3
SSH-enabled management station clients, and ensures that data traveling over the
network arrives unaltered.
Note: You need to install an SSH client on the management station to access the switch
for management via the SSH protocol.
Note: The switch supports both SSH Version 1.5 and 2.0 clients.
Command Usage
The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key
authentication. If password authentication is specified by the SSH client, then the
password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or TACACS+ remote
authentication server, as specified on the Authentication Settings page
(page 3-53). If public key authentication is specified by the client, then you must
configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the
following section. Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password
authentication, you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch (SSH
Host Key Settings) and enable the SSH server (Authentication Settings).
To use the SSH server, complete these steps:
1. Generate a Host Key Pair – On the SSH Host Key Settings page, create a host
public/private key pair.
2. Provide Host Public Key to Clients – Many SSH client programs automatically
import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch.
Otherwise, you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management
station and place the host public key in it. An entry for a public key in the known
hosts file would appear similar to the following example:
10.1.0.54 1024 35 15684995401867669259333946775054617325313674890836547254
15020245593199868544358361651999923329781766065830956 10825913212890233
76546801726272571413428762941301196195566782 59566410486957427888146206
51941746772984865468615717739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545
24083971752646358058176716709574804776117
3. Import Client’s Public Key to the Switch – See “Importing User Public Keys” on
page 3-76, or use the copy tftp public-key command (page 4-85) to copy a file
containing the public key for all the SSH client’s granted management access to
the switch. (Note that these clients must be configured locally on the switch via
the User Accounts page as described on page 3-51.) The clients are
subsequently authenticated using these keys. The current firmware only
accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown in the
following example for an RSA Version 1 key:
1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880
05553616163105177594083868631109291232226828519254374603100937187721199
69631781366277414168985132049117204830339254324101637997592371449011938
00609025394840848271781943722884025331159521348610229029789827213532671
31629432532818915045306393916643 steve@192.168.1.19
User Authentication
3-73
3
4. Set the Optional Parameters – On the SSH Settings page, configure the
optional parameters, including the authentication timeout, the number of retries,
and the server key size.
5. Enable SSH Service – On the SSH Settings page, enable the SSH server on
the switch.
6. Authentication – One of the following authentication methods is employed:
Password Authentication (for SSH v1.5 or V2 Clients)
a. The client sends its password to the server.
b. The switch compares the client's password to those stored in memory.
c. If a match is found, the connection is allowed.
Note: To use SSH with only password authentication, the host public key must still be
given to the client, either during initial connection or manually entered into the
known host file. However, you do not need to configure the client’s keys.
Public Key Authentication – When an SSH client attempts to contact the switch,
the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a session key and encryption
method. Only clients that have a private key corresponding to the public keys
stored on the switch can access it. The following exchanges take place during
this process:
Authenticating SSH v1.5 Clients
a. The client sends its RSA public key to the switch.
b. The switch compares the client's public key to those stored in memory.
c. If a match is found, the switch uses its secret key to generate a random
256-bit string as a challenge, encrypts this string with the user’s public key,
and sends it to the client.
d. The client uses its private key to decrypt the challenge string, computes the
MD5 checksum, and sends the checksum back to the switch.
e. The switch compares the checksum sent from the client against that
computed for the original string it sent. If the two checksums match, this
means that the client's private key corresponds to an authorized public key,
and the client is authenticated.
Authenticating SSH v2 Clients
a. The client first queries the switch to determine if DSA public key
authentication using a preferred algorithm is acceptable.
b. If the specified algorithm is supported by the switch, it notifies the client to
proceed with the authentication process. Otherwise, it rejects the request.
c. The client sends a signature generated using the private key to the switch.
d. When the server receives this message, it checks whether the supplied key
is acceptable for authentication, and if so, it then checks whether the
signature is correct. If both checks succeed, the client is authenticated.
Note: The SSH server supports up to four client sessions. The maximum number of
client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions.
Configuring the Switch
3-74
3
Configuring the SSH Server
The SSH server includes basic settings for authentication.
Field Attributes
•SSH Server Status – Allows you to enable/disable the SSH server on the switch.
(Default: Disabled)
•Version – The Secure Shell version number. Version 2.0 is displayed, but the
switch supports management access via either SSH Version 1.5 or 2.0 clients.
•SSH Authentication Timeout – Specifies the time interval in seconds that the
SSH server waits for a response from a client during an authentication attempt.
(Range: 1-120 seconds; Default: 120 seconds)
•SSH Authentication Retries – Specifies the number of authentication attempts
that a client is allowed before authentication fails and the client has to restart the
authentication process. (Range: 1-5 times; Default: 3)
•SSH Server-Key Size – Specifies the SSH server key size.
(Range: 512-896 bits; Default:768)
- The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch.
- The host key is shared with the SSH client, and is fixed at 1024 bits.
Web – Click Security, SSH, Settings. Enable SSH and adjust the authentication
parameters as required, then click Apply. Note that you must first generate the host
key pair on the SSH Host-Key Settings page before you can enable the SSH server.
Figure 3-49 SSH Server Settings
User Authentication
3-75
3
CLI – This example enables SSH, sets the authentication parameters, and displays
the current configuration. It shows that the administrator has made a connection via
SHH, and then disables this connection.
Generating the Host Key Pair
A host public/private key pair is used to provide secure communications between an
SSH client and the switch. After generating this key pair, you must provide the host
public key to SSH clients and import the client’s public key to the switch as
described in the section “Importing User Public Keys” on page 3-76.
Field Attributes
•Public-Key of Host-Key – The public key for the host.
- RSA (Version 1): The first field indicates the size of the host key (e.g., 1024), the
second field is the encoded public exponent (e.g., 65537), and the last string is
the encoded modulus.
- DSA (Version 2): The first field indicates that the encryption method used by
SSH is based on the Digital Signature Standard (DSS). The last string is the
encoded modulus.
•Host-Key Type – The key type used to generate the host key pair (i.e., public and
private keys). (Range: RSA (Version 1), DSA (Version 2), Both; Default: RSA)
The SSH server uses RSA or DSA for key exchange when the client first
establishes a connection with the switch, and then negotiates with the client to
select either DES (56-bit) or 3DES (168-bit) for data encryption.
•Save Host-Key from Memory to Flash – Saves the host key from RAM (i.e.,
volatile memory) to flash memory. Otherwise, the host key pair is stored to RAM
by default. Note that you must select this item prior to generating the host-key pair.
•Generate – This button is used to generate the host key pair. Note that you must
first generate the host key pair before you can enable the SSH server on the SSH
Server Settings page.
•Clear – This button clears the host key from both volatile memory (RAM) and
non-volatile memory (Flash).
Console(config)#ip ssh server 4-48
Console(config)#ip ssh timeout 100 4-49
Console(config)#ip ssh authentication-retries 5 4-49
Console(config)#ip ssh server-key size 512 4-50
Console(config)#end
Console#show ip ssh 4-52
SSH Enabled - version 2.0
Negotiation timeout: 120 secs; Authentication retries: 5
Server key size: 512 bits
Console#show ssh 4-53
Connection Version State Username Encryption
0 2.0 Session-Started admin ctos aes128-cbc-hmac-md5
stoc aes128-cbc-hmac-md5
Console#disconnect 0 4-20
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-76
3
Web – Click Security, SSH, Host-Key Settings. Select the host-key type from the
drop-down box, select the option to save the host key from memory to flash (if
required) prior to generating the key, and then click Generate.
Figure 3-50 SSH Host-Key Settings
CLI – This example generates a host-key pair using both the RSA and DSA
algorithms, stores the keys to flash memory, and then displays the host’s public keys.
Importing User Public Keys
A user’s Public Key must be uploaded to the switch in order for the user to be able to
log in using the public key authentication mechanism. If the user’s public key does
Console#ip ssh crypto host-key generate 4-48
Console#ip ssh save host-key 4-48
Console#show public-key host 4-48
Host:
RSA:
1024 65537 127250922544926402131336514546131189679055192360076028653006761
82409690947448320102524878965977592168322225584652387791546479807396314033
86925793105105765212243052807865885485789272602937866089236841423275912127
60325919683697053439336438445223335188287173896894511729290510813919642025
190932104328579045764891
DSA:
ssh-dss AAAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAN6zwIqCqDb3869jYVXlME1sHL0EcE/Re6hlasfEthIwmj
hLY4O0jqJZpcEQUgCfYlum0Y2uoLka+Py9ieGWQ8f2gobUZKIICuKg6vjO9XTs7XKc05xfzkBi
KviDa+2OrIz6UK+6vFOgvUDFedlnixYTVo+h5v8r0ea2rpnO6DkZAAAAFQCNZn/x17dwpW8RrV
DQnSWw4Qk+6QAAAIEAptkGeB6B5hwagH4gUOCY6i1TmrmSiJgfwO9OqRPUMbCAkCC+uzxatOo7
drnIZypMx+Sx5RUdMGgKS+9ywsa1cWqHeFY5ilc3lDCNBueeLykZzVS+RS+azTKIk/zrJh8GLG
Nq375R55yRxFvmcGIn/Q7IphPqyJ3o9MK8LFDfmJEAAACAL8A6tESiswP2OFqX7VGoEbzVDSOI
RTMFy3iUXtvGyQAOVSy67Mfc3lMtgqPRUOYXDiwIBp5NXgilCg5z7VqbmRm28mWc5a//f8TUAg
PNWKV6W0hqmshQdotVzDR1e+XKNTZj0uTwWfjO5Kytdn4MdoTHgrbl/DMdAfjnte8MZZs=
Console#
User Authentication
3-77
3
not exist on the switch, SSH will revert to the interactive password authentication
mechanism to complete authentication.
Field Attributes
•Public-Key of user – The RSA and DSA public keys for the selected user.
- RSA: The first field indicates the size of the host key (e.g., 1024), the second
field is the encoded public exponent (e.g., 37), and the last string is the encoded
modulus.
- DSA: The first field indicates that SSH version 2 was used to create the key. The
second field contains the key comment. The third string is the encoded modulus,
and the last field is a comment denoting the end of the key.
•User Name – This drop-down box selects the user who’s public key you wish to
manage. Note that you must first create users on the User Accounts page ( See
“Configuring User Accounts” on page 3-51).
•Public-Key Type – This drop-down box selects the type of public key you wish to
upload.
- RSA: The switch will accept an SSH version 1 formatted RSA encrypted public
key.
- DSA: The switch will accept an SSH version 2 formatted DSA encrypted public
key.
•TFTP Server IP Address – The IP address of the TFTP server that contains the
public key file you wish to import. (Default: 0.0.0.0)
•Source File Name – The IP address of the TFTP server where the public key file
to be imported is located. (Default: 0.0.0.0)
•Copy Public Key – This button initiates the public key TFTP import process. If you
are replacing an outdated public key file, it is not necessary to first delete the
original key from the switch. The import process will overwrite the existing key.
•Delete – This button deletes a selected RSA or DSA public key that has already
been imported to the switch.
Configuring the Switch
3-78
3
Web – Click Security, SSH, SSH User Public-Key Settings. Select the user name
and the public-key type from the respective drop-down boxes, input the TFTP server
IP address and the public key source file name, and then click Copy Public Key.
Figure 3-51 SSH User Public-Key Settings
User Authentication
3-79
3
CLI – This example imports an SSHv2 DSA public key for the user admin and then
displays admin’s imported public keys
.
Console#copy tftp public-key 4-85
TFTP server IP address: 192.168.1.254
Choose public key type:
1. RSA: 2. DSA: <1-2>: 2
Source file name: admin-ssh2-dsa-pub.key
Username: admin
TFTP Download
Success.
Write to FLASH Programming.
Success.
Console#show public-key user admin 4-54
admin:
RSA:
1024 37 154886675541099600242673908076171863880953984597454546825066951007
29617437427136900505591624068119579408716226078634780682201498685790475062
34519480679939485042653504179153032795337422103356695026441903823445835730
88823472889690842821665429031315937652815279387868298539820466143474130023
09979848162607182657 rsa-key-20071106
DSA:
---- BEGIN SSH2 PUBLIC KEY ----
Comment: "dsa-key-20071105"
AAAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAA
CAeqNnwpAVz82Z3zFif0KGF846S5m5useW8rQp8DBv1IQ/
sLYRuoCtW/+hllIaUu2F9Ps6D5gJdKj
yEPKRutJv1rAwq1YZ61/fat9OGpM3oaqM
f6UiVUK4gEsaq8T6UqrGsIDcXWyvmbI02+R/owN43kwE
JCfmpBXelhU962AA2G0A
AAAVAKxtZo+MjTVzRJ+9mFTFIUpawm7HAAAAgCINbco4jTWcdMKS1oQTA
+WnCehl
sd8j5MpDc3VccySMaFzcPgxT+N79WVxWNJQaS8l9TfY3EDg9VfCooLZDrn/yX67M
V3p/I
Jej57DsNjLnCHpaGE/OKfkAhvjRzlufS4f4wAzOYCBNxb6XY6Vew8Pi7Wri
L/Xrm4AQ0t4wSjjEAA
AAgDNcKKEpZw16wW7E9EmbQp5s5gu9lCVCqMz5r76EyEzc
9uIYvxy54GHMtyBwLTITh6lbxEGD6cO
nkCW+ieRye9fiJfs7u4QdL9NZb+WLZvcU
Xm6E1vUc70OpelDFxbfhQawgGFxvx7rzv85D75ffNEqb
LW2mKApehuQrHYbPZOnX
---- END SSH2 PUBLIC KEY ----
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-80
3
Configuring Port Security
Port security is a feature that allows you to configure a switch port with one or more
device MAC addresses that are authorized to access the network through that port.
When port security is enabled on a port, the switch stops learning new MAC
addresses on the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum
number. Only incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic
or static address table will be accepted as authorized to access the network through
that port. If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch
port, the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by
disabling the port and sending a trap message.
To use port security, specify a maximum number of addresses to allow on the port
and then let the switch dynamically learn the <source MAC address, VLAN> pair for
frames received on the port. Note that you can also manually add secure addresses
to the port using the Static Address Table (page 3-133). When the port has reached
the maximum number of MAC addresses the selected port will stop learning. The
MAC addresses already in the address table will be retained and will not age out.
Any other device that attempts to use the port will be prevented from accessing the
switch.
Command Usage
• A secure port has the following restrictions:
- It cannot use port monitoring.
- It cannot be a multi-VLAN port.
- It cannot be used as a member of a static or dynamic trunk.
- It should not be connected to a network interconnection device.
• The default maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a secure port is zero.
You must configure a maximum address count from 1 - 1024 for the port to allow
access.
• If a port is disabled (shut down) due to a security violation, it must be manually
re-enabled from the Port/Port Configuration page (page 3-112).
Command Attributes
•Port – Port number.
•Name – Descriptive text (page 4-167).
•Action – Indicates the action to be taken when a port security violation is detected:
-None: No action should be taken. (This is the default.)
-Trap: Send an SNMP trap message.
-Shutdown: Disable the port.
-Trap and Shutdown: Send an SNMP trap message and disable the port.
•Security Status – Enables or disables port security on the port. (Default: Disabled)
•Max MAC Count – The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned
on a port. (Range: 0 - 1024, where 0 means disabled)
•Trunk – Trunk number if port is a member (page 3-115 and 3-116).
User Authentication
3-81
3
Web – Click Security, Port Security. Set the action to take when an invalid address is
detected on a port, mark the checkbox in the Status column to enable security for a
port, set the maximum number of MAC addresses allowed on a port, and click Apply.
Figure 3-52 Configuring Port Security
CLI – This example selects the target port, sets the port security action to send a
trap and disable the port and sets the maximum MAC addresses allowed on the
port, and then enables port security for the port.
Configuring 802.1X Port Authentication
Network switches can provide open and easy access to network resources by
simply attaching a client PC. Although this automatic configuration and access is a
desirable feature, it also allows unauthorized personnel to easily intrude and
possibly gain access to sensitive network data.
The IEEE 802.1X (dot1X) standard defines a port-based access control procedure
that prevents unauthorized access to a network by requiring users to first submit
credentials for authentication. Access to all switch ports in a network can be
centrally controlled from a server, which means that authorized users can use the
same credentials for authentication from any point within the network.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#port security action trap-and-shutdown 4-111
Console(config-if)#port security max-mac-count 20 4-111
Console(config-if)#port security 4-111
Console(config-if)#
Configuring the Switch
3-82
3
This switch uses the
Extensible Authentication
Protocol over LANs (EAPOL)
to exchange authentication
protocol messages with the
client, and a remote RADIUS
authentication server to verify
user identity and access
rights. When a client (i.e.,
Supplicant) connects to a
switch port, the switch (i.e.,
Authenticator) responds with an EAPOL identity request. The client provides its
identity (such as a user name) in an EAPOL response to the switch, which it
forwards to the RADIUS server. The RADIUS server verifies the client identity and
sends an access challenge back to the client. The EAP packet from the RADIUS
server contains not only the challenge, but the authentication method to be used.
The client can reject the authentication method and request another, depending on
the configuration of the client software and the RADIUS server. The encryption
method used to pass authentication messages can be MD5 (Message-Digest 5),
TLS (Transport Layer Security), PEAP (Protected Extensible Authentication
Protocol), or TTLS (Tunneled Transport Layer Security). The client responds to the
appropriate method with its credentials, such as a password or certificate. The
RADIUS server verifies the client credentials and responds with an accept or reject
packet. If authentication is successful, the switch allows the client to access the
network. Otherwise, non-EAP traffic on the port is blocked or assigned to a guest
VLAN based on the “intrusion-action” setting. In “multi-host” mode, only one host
connected to a port needs to pass authentication for all other hosts to be granted
network access. Similarly, a port can become unauthorized for all hosts if one
attached host fails re-authentication or sends an EAPOL logoff message.
The operation of 802.1X on the switch requires the following:
• The switch must have an IP address assigned.
• RADIUS authentication must be enabled on the switch and the IP address of the
RADIUS server specified.
• 802.1X must be enabled globally for the switch.
• Each switch port that will be used must be set to dot1X “Auto” mode.
• Each client that needs to be authenticated must have dot1X client software
installed and properly configured.
• The RADIUS server and 802.1X client support EAP. (The switch only supports
EAPOL in order to pass the EAP packets from the server to the client.)
• The RADIUS server and client also have to support the same EAP authentication
type – MD5, PEAP, TLS, or TTLS. (Some clients have native support in the
operating system, otherwise the dot1x client must support the required
authentication method.)
802.1x
client
RADIUS
server
1. Client attempts to access a switch port.
2. Switch sends client an identity request.
3. Client sends back identity information.
4. Switch forwards this to authentication server.
5. Authentication server challenges client.
6. Client responds with proper credentials.
7. Authentication server approves access.
8. Switch grants client access to this port.
User Authentication
3-83
3
Displaying 802.1X Global Settings
The 802.1X protocol provides client authentication.
Command Attributes
•802.1X System Authentication Control – The global setting for 802.1X.
Web – Click Security, 802.1X, Information.
Figure 3-53 802.1X Global Information
CLI – This example shows the default global setting for 802.1X.
Configuring 802.1X Global Settings
The 802.1X protocol provides port authentication. The 802.1X protocol must be
enabled globally for the switch system before port settings are active.
Command Attributes
•802.1X System Authentication Control – Sets the global setting for 802.1X.
(Default: Disabled)
Console#show dot1x 4-118
Global 802.1X Parameters
system-auth-control: enable
802.1X Port Summary
Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized
1/1 disabled Single-Host ForceAuthorized n/a
1/2 disabled Single-Host ForceAuthorized n/a
.
.
.
802.1X Port Details
802.1X is disabled on port 1/1
.
.
.
802.1X is disabled on port 1/28
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-84
3
Web – Select Security, 802.1X, Configuration. Enable 802.1X globally for the switch,
and click Apply.
Figure 3-54 802.1X Global Configuration
CLI – This example enables 802.1X globally for the switch.
Configuring Port Settings for 802.1X
When 802.1X is enabled, you need to configure the parameters for the
authentication process that runs between the client and the switch (i.e.,
authenticator), as well as the client identity lookup process that runs between the
switch and authentication server. These parameters are described in this section.
Command Attributes
•Port – Port number.
•Status – Indicates if authentication is enabled or disabled on the port.
(Default: Disabled)
•Operation Mode – Allows single or multiple hosts (clients) to connect to an
802.1X-authorized port. (Options: Single-Host, Multi-Host; Default: Single-Host)
•Max Count – The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port when the
Multi-Host operation mode is selected. (Range: 1-1024; Default: 5)
•Mode – Sets the authentication mode to one of the following options:
-Auto – Requires a dot1x-aware client to be authorized by the authentication
server. Clients that are not dot1x-aware will be denied access.
-Force-Authorized – Forces the port to grant access to all clients, either
dot1x-aware or otherwise. (This is the default setting.)
-Force-Unauthorized – Forces the port to deny access to all clients, either
dot1x-aware or otherwise.
•Re-authentication – Sets the client to be re-authenticated after the interval
specified by the Re-authentication Period. Re-authentication can be used to detect
if a new device is plugged into a switch port. (Default: Disabled)
•Max-Request – Sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit
an EAP request packet to the client before it times out the authentication session.
(Range: 1-10; Default 2)
•Quiet Period – Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count
has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client.
(Range: 1-65535 seconds; Default: 60 seconds)
Console(config)#dot1x system-auth-control 4-113
Console(config)#
User Authentication
3-85
3
•Re-authentication Period – Sets the time period after which a connected client
must be re-authenticated. (Range: 1-65535 seconds; Default: 3600 seconds)
•Tx Period – Sets the time period during an authentication session that the switch
waits before re-transmitting an EAP packet. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 30 seconds)
• Intrusion Action – Sets the port’s response to a failed authentication.
- Block Traffic – Blocks all non-EAP traffic on the port. (This is the default setting.)
- Guest VLAN – All traffic for the port is assigned to a guest VLAN. The guest
VLAN must be separately configured (See “Creating VLANs” on page 3-161)
and mapped on each port (See “Configuring MAC Authentication for Ports” on
page 3-94).
•Authorized – Displays the 802.1X authorization status of connected clients.
-Yes – Connected client is authorized.
-No – Connected client is not authorized.
-Blank – Displays nothing when dot1x is disabled on a port.
•Supplicant – Indicates the MAC address of a connected client.
•Trunk – Indicates if the port is configured as a trunk port.
Web – Click Security, 802.1X, Port Configuration. Modify the parameters required,
and click Apply.
Figure 3-55 802.1X Port Configuration
Configuring the Switch
3-86
3
CLI – This example sets the 802.1X parameters on port 2. For a description of the
additional fields displayed in this example, see “show dot1x” on page 4-118.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2 4-166
Console(config-if)#dot1x port-control auto 4-114
Console(config-if)#dot1x re-authentication 4-116
Console(config-if)#dot1x max-req 5 4-114
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout quiet-period 30 4-116
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout re-authperiod 1800 4-117
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout tx-period 40 4-117
Console(config-if)#dot1x intrusion-action guest-vlan 4-118
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#exit
Console#show dot1x 4-118
Global 802.1X Parameters
system-auth-control: enable
802.1X Port Summary
Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized
1/1 disabled Single-Host ForceAuthorized n/a
1/2 enabled Single-Host auto yes
.
.
.
1/28 disabled Single-Host ForceAuthorized n/a
802.1X Port Details
802.1X is disabled on port 1/1
802.1X is enabled on port 1/2
reauth-enabled: Enable
reauth-period: 1800
quiet-period: 30
tx-period: 40
supplicant-timeout: 30
server-timeout: 10
reauth-max: 2
max-req: 5
Status Authorized
Operation mode Single-Host
Max count 5
Port-control Auto
Supplicant 00-12-CF-49-5e-dc
Current Identifier 3
Intrusion action Guest VLAN
Authenticator State Machine
State Authenticated
Reauth Count 0
Backend State Machine
State Idle
Request Count 0
Identifier(Server) 2
Reauthentication State Machine
State Initialize
.
.
.
802.1X is disabled on port 1/28
Console#
User Authentication
3-87
3
Displaying 802.1X Statistics
This switch can display statistics for dot1x protocol exchanges for any port.
Table 3-7 802.1X Statistics
Parameter Description
Rx EAPOL Start The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by this Authenticator.
Rx EAPOL Logoff The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by this Authenticator.
Rx EAPOL Invalid The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which
the frame type is not recognized.
Rx EAPOL Total The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this
Authenticator.
Rx EAP Resp/Id The number of EAP Resp/Id frames that have been received by this Authenticator.
Rx EAP Resp/Oth The number of valid EAP Response frames (other than Resp/Id frames) that have
been received by this Authenticator.
Rx EAP LenError The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which
the Packet Body Length field is invalid.
Rx Last EAPOLVer The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame.
Rx Last EAPOLSrc The source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame.
Tx EAPOL Total The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this
Authenticator.
Tx EAP Req/Id The number of EAP Req/Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator.
Tx EAP Req/Oth The number of EAP Request frames (other than Rq/Id frames) that have been
transmitted by this Authenticator.
Configuring the Switch
3-88
3
Web – Select Security, 802.1X, Statistics. Select the required port and then click
Query. Click Refresh to update the statistics.
Figure 3-56 Displaying 802.1X Port Statistics
CLI – This example displays the 802.1X statistics for port 4.
Web Authentication
Web authentication allows stations to authenticate and access the network in
situations where 802.1X or Network Access authentication are infeasible or
impractical. The web authentication feature allows unauthenticated hosts to request
and receive a DHCP assigned IP address and perform DNS queries. All other traffic,
except for HTTP protocol traffic, is blocked. The switch intercepts HTTP protocol
traffic and redirects it to a switch-generated web page that facilitates username and
password authentication via RADIUS. Once authentication is successful, the web
browser is forwarded on to the originally requested web page. Successful
authentication is valid for all hosts connected to the port.
Console#show dot1x statistics interface ethernet 1/4 4-118
Eth 1/4
Rx: EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAPOL EAP EAP EAP
Start Logoff Invalid Total Resp/Id Resp/Oth LenError
2 0 0 1007 672 0 0
Last Last
EAPOLVer EAPOLSrc
1 00-12-CF-94-34-DE
Tx: EAPOL EAP EAP
Total Req/Id Req/Oth
2017 1005 0
Console#
User Authentication
3-89
3
Notes: 1. MAC authentication, web authentication, 802.1X, and port security cannot be
configured together on the same port. Only one security mechanism can be
applied.
2. RADIUS authentication must be activated and configured properly for the
web authentication feature to work properly. (See “Configuring Local/Remote
Logon Authentication” on page 3-53)
3. Web authentication cannot be configured on trunk ports.
Configuring Web Authentication
Web authentication is configured on a per-port basis, however there are four
configurable parameters that apply globally to all ports on the switch.
Command Attributes
• System Authentication Control – Enables Web Authentication for the switch.
(Default: Disabled)
• Session Timeout – Configures how long an authenticated session stays active
before it must re-authenticate itself. (Default: 3600 seconds; Range: 300-3600
seconds)
• Quiet Period – Configures how long a host must wait to attempt authentication
again after it has exceeded the maximum allowable failed login attempts. (Default:
60 seconds; Range: 1-180 seconds)
• Login Attempts – Configures the amount of times a supplicant may attempt and
fail authentication before it must wait the configured quiet period. (Default: 3
attempts; Range: 1-3 attempts)
Web – Click Security, Web Authentication, Configuration.
Figure 3-57 Web Authentication Configuration
Configuring the Switch
3-90
3
CLI – This example globally enables the system authentication control, configures
the session timeout, quiet period and login attempts, and displays the configured
global parameters.
Configuring Web Authentication for Ports
Web authentication is configured on a per-port basis. The following parameters are
associated with each port.
Command Attributes
•Port – Indicates the port being configured
• Status – Configures the web authentication status for the port.
• Authenticated Host Counts – Indicates how many authenticated hosts are
connected to the port.
Web – Click Security, Web Authentication, Port Configuration.
Figure 3-58 Web Authentication Port Configuration
Console(config)#mac-authentication reauth-time 3000 4-127
Console(config)#web-auth system-auth-control 4-134
Console(config)#web-auth session-timeout 1800 4-133
Console(config)#web-auth quiet-period 20 4-133
Console(config)#web-auth login-attempts 2 4-131
Console(config)#end
Console#show web-auth 4-135
Global Web-Auth Parameters
System Auth Control : Enabled
Login Page URL :
Login Fail Page URL :
Login Success Page URL :
Session Timeout : 1800
Quiet Period : 20
Max Login Attempts : 2
Console#
User Authentication
3-91
3
CLI – This example enables web authentication for ethernet port 1/5 and displays a
summary of web authentication parameters.
Displaying Web Authentication Port Information
This switch can display web authentication information for all ports and connected
hosts.
Command Attributes
• Interface – Indicates the ethernet port to query.
• IP Address – Indicates the IP address of each connected host.
• Status – Indicates the authorization status of each connected host.
• Remaining Session Time (seconds) – Indicates the remaining time until the
current authorization session for the host expires.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5 4-166
Console(config-if)#web-auth 4-134
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show web-auth summary 4-137
Global Web-Auth Parameters
System Auth Control : Enabled
Port Status Authenticated Host Count
---- ------ ------------------------
1/ 1 Disabled 0
1/ 2 Enabled 0
1/ 3 Disabled 0
1/ 4 Disabled 0
1/ 5 Enabled 0
1/ 6 Disabled 0
1/ 7 Disabled 0
1/ 8 Disabled 0
1/ 9 Disabled 0
1/10 Disabled 0
1/11 Disabled 0
1/12 Disabled 0
1/13 Disabled 0
1/14 Disabled 0
1/15 Disabled 0
1/16 Disabled 0
1/17 Disabled 0
1/18 Disabled 0
1/19 Disabled 0
1/20 Disabled 0
1/21 Disabled 0
1/22 Disabled 0
1/23 Disabled 0
1/24 Disabled 0
1/25 Disabled 0
1/26 Disabled 0
1/27 Disabled 0
1/28 Disabled 0
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-92
3
Web – Click Security, Web Authentication, Port Information.
Figure 3-59 Web Authentication Port Information
CLI – This example displays web authentication parameters for port 1/5.
Re-authenticating Web Authenticated Ports
The switch allows an administrator to manually force re-authentication of any
web-authenticated host connected to any port.
Command Attributes
• Interface – Indicates the ethernet port to query.
•Host IP – Indicates the IP address of the host selected for re-authentication.
Web – Click Security, Web Authentication, Re-authentication.
Figure 3-60 Web Authentication Port Re-authentication
Console#show web-auth interface ethernet 1/5 4-135
Web Auth Status : Enabled
Host Summary
IP address Web-Auth-State Remaining-Session-Time
--------------- -------------- ----------------------
Console#
User Authentication
3-93
3
CLI – This example forces the re-authentication of all hosts connected to port 1/5.
Network Access – MAC Address Authentication
Some devices connected to switch ports may not be able to support 802.1X
authentication due to hardware or software limitations. This is often true for devices
such as network printers, IP phones, and some wireless access points. The switch
enables network access from these devices to be controlled by authenticating
device MAC addresses with a central RADIUS server.
Note: MAC authentication, web authentication, 802.1X, and port security cannot be
configured together on the same port. Only one security mechanism can be
applied.
The Network Access feature controls host access to the network by authenticating
its MAC address on the connected switch port. Traffic received from a specific MAC
address is forwarded by the switch only if the source MAC address is successfully
authenticated by a central RADIUS server. While authentication for a MAC address
is in progress, all traffic is blocked until authentication is completed. On successful
authentication, the RADIUS server may optionally assign VLAN settings for the
switch port
When enabled on a port interface, the authentication process sends a Password
Authentication Protocol (PAP) request to a configured RADIUS server. The
username and password are both equal to the MAC address being authenticated.
On the RADIUS server, PAP username and passwords must be configured in the
MAC address format XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX (all in upper case).
Authenticated MAC addresses are stored as dynamic entries in the switch secure
MAC address table and are removed when the aging time expires. The maximum
number of secure MAC addresses supported for the switch system is 1024.
Note: MAC authentication cannot be configured on trunk ports.
The RADIUS server may optionally return a VLAN identifier list to be applied to the
switch port. The following attributes need to be configured on the RADIUS server.
•Tunnel-Type = VLAN
•Tunnel-Medium-Type = 802
•Tunnel-Private-Group-ID = 1u,2t [VLAN ID list]
The VLAN identifier list is carried in the RADIUS “Tunnel-Private-Group-ID” attribute.
The VLAN list can contain multiple VLAN identifiers in the format “1u,2t,3u” where
“u” indicates an untagged VLAN and “t” a tagged VLAN.
Console#web-auth re-authenticate interface ethernet 1/5 4-136
Failed to reauth .
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-94
3
Configuring the MAC Authentication Reauthentication Time
MAC address authentication is configured on a per-port basis, however there are
two configurable parameters that apply globally to all ports on the switch.
Command Attributes
•Authenticated Age – The secure MAC address table aging time. This parameter
setting is the same as switch MAC address table aging time and is only
configurable from the Address Table, Aging Time web page (see page 3-136).
(Default: 300 seconds)
•MAC Authentication Reauthentication Time – Sets the time period after which
a connected MAC address must be reauthenticated. When the reauthentication
time expires for a secure MAC address, it is reauthenticated with the RADIUS
server. During the reauthentication process traffic through the port remains
unaffected. (Default: 1800 seconds; Range: 120-1000000 seconds)
Web – Click Security, Network Access, Configuration.
Figure 3-61 Network Access Configuration
CLI – This example sets and displays the reauthentication time.
Configuring MAC Authentication for Ports
Configures MAC authentication on switch ports, including setting the maximum MAC
count, applying a MAC address filter, and enabling dynamic VLAN assignment.
Command Attributes
•Mode – Enables MAC authentication on a port. (Default: None)
Console(config)#mac-authentication reauth-time 3000 4-127
Console(config)#exit
Console#show network-access interface ethernet 1/1 4-128
Global secure port information
Reauthentication Time : 1800
--------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------
Port : 1/1
MAC Authentication : Disabled
MAC Authentication Intrusion action : Block traffic
MAC Authentication Maximum MAC Counts : 1024
Maximum MAC Counts : 2048
Dynamic VLAN Assignment : Enabled
Guest VLAN : Disabled
Console#
User Authentication
3-95
3
•Maximum MAC Count – Sets the maximum number of MAC addresses that can
be authenticated on a port. The maximum number of MAC addresses per port is
2048, and the maximum number of secure MAC addresses supported for the
switch system is 1024. When the limit is reached, all new MAC addresses are
treated as authentication failed. (Default: 2048; Range: 1 to 2048)
•Guest VLAN – Specifies the VLAN to be assigned to the port when MAC
Authentication or 802.1X Authentication fails. The VLAN must already be created
and active. (Default: Disabled; Range: 1 to 4092)
•Dynamic VLAN – Enables dynamic VLAN assignment for an authenticated port.
When enabled, any VLAN identifiers returned by the RADIUS server are applied to
the port, providing the VLANs have already been created on the switch. (GVRP is
not used to create the VLANs.) The VLAN settings specified by the first
authenticated MAC address are implemented for a port. Other authenticated MAC
addresses on the port must have the same VLAN configuration, or they are treated
as authentication failures. (Default: Enabled)
•Dynamic QoS – Enables the dynamic QoS feature for an authenticated port.
(Default: Disabled)
Note: MAC authentication cannot be configured on trunk ports. Ports configured as trunk
members are indicated on the Network Access Port Configuration page in the
“Trunk” column.
Web – Click Security, Network Access, Port Configuration.
Figure 3-62 Network Access Port Configuration
Configuring the Switch
3-96
3
CLI – This example configures MAC authentication for port 1.
Configuring Port Link Detection
The Port Link Detection feature can send an SNMP trap and/or shut down a port
when a link event occurs.
Command Attributes
•Port – Indicates the port being configured.
•Status – Configures whether Link Detection is enabled or disabled for a port.
•Condition – The link event type which will trigger the port action.
- Link Up – Only link up events will trigger the port action.
- Link Down – Only link down events will trigger the port action.
- Link Up and Down – All link up and link down events will trigger the port action.
•Action – The switch can respond in three ways to a link up or down trigger event.
-Trap – An SNMP trap is sent.
-Trap and Shutdown – An SNMP trap is sent and the port is shut down.
-Shutdown – The port is shut down.
•Trunk – Indicates if the port is a trunk member.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#network-access mode mac-authentication 4-121
Console(config-if)#network-access max-mac-count 10 4-122
Console(config-if)#mac-authentication max-mac-count 24 4-123
Console(config-if)#network-access dynamic-vlan 4-124
Console(config-if)#network-access dynamic-qos 4-124
Console(config-if)#network-access guest-vlan 4-125
Console(config-if)#network-access link-detection 4-125
Console(config-if)#network-access link-detection link-up action trap4-126
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show network-access interface ethernet 1/1
Global secure port information
Reauthentication Time : 1800
--------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------
Port : 1/1
MAC Authentication : Enabled
MAC Authentication Intrusion action : Block traffic
MAC Authentication Maximum MAC Counts : 1024
Maximum MAC Counts : 2048
Dynamic VLAN Assignment : Enabled
Dynamic QoS Assignment : Enabled
Guest VLAN : Enabled
Link Detection : Enabled
Detection Mode : Link-up
Detection Action : Trap
Console#
User Authentication
3-97
3
Web – Click Security, Network Access, Port Link Detection Configuration. Modify the
Status, Condition and Action. Click Apply.
Figure 3-63 Network Access Port Link Detection Configuration
CLI – This example configures Port Link Detection to send an SNMP trap for all link
events on port 1.
Displaying Secure MAC Address Information
Authenticated MAC addresses are stored in the secure MAC address table.
Information on the secure MAC entries can be displayed and selected entries can be
removed from the table.
Command Attributes
•Network Access MAC Address Count – The number of MAC addresses
currently in the secure MAC address table.
•Query By – Specifies parameters to use in the MAC address query.
•Port – Specifies a port interface.
•MAC Address – Specifies a single MAC address information.
•Attribute – Displays static or dynamic addresses.
•Address Table Sort Key – Sorts the information displayed based on MAC
address or port interface.
•Unit/Port – The port interface associated with a secure MAC address.
•MAC Address – The authenticated MAC address.
•RADIUS Server – The IP address of the RADIUS server that authenticated the
MAC address.
•Time – The time when the MAC address was last authenticated.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 4-166
Console(config-if)#network-access link-detection link-up-down
actiontrap 4-127
Console(config-if)#
Configuring the Switch
3-98
3
•Attribute – Indicates a static or dynamic address.
•Remove – Click the Remove button to remove selected MAC addresses from the
secure MAC address table.
Web – Click Security, Network Access, MAC Address Information. Restrict the
displayed addresses by port, MAC Address, or attribute, then select the method of
sorting the displayed addresses. Click Query.
Figure 3-64 Network Access MAC Address Information
CLI – This example displays all entries currently in the secure MAC address table.
MAC Authentication
Each port’s MAC authentication settings are configured independently.
Configuring MAC authentication parameters for ports
Use the MAC Authentication Port Configuration page to designate MAC
authentication maximum MAC counts and the intrusion action for each port.
Command Attributes
•Port – Indicates the port being configured.
Console#show network-access mac-address-table 4-129
---- ----------------- --------------- --------- -------------------------
Port MAC-Address RADIUS-Server Attribute Time
---- ----------------- --------------- --------- -------------------------
1/1 00-00-01-02-03-04 172.155.120.17 Static 00d06h32m50s
1/1 00-00-01-02-03-05 172.155.120.17 Dynamic 00d06h33m20s
1/1 00-00-01-02-03-06 172.155.120.17 Static 00d06h35m10s
1/3 00-00-01-02-03-07 172.155.120.17 Dynamic 00d06h34m20s
Console#
Access Control Lists
3-99
3
•Status – Indicates whether MAC Authentication is enabled or disabled for the port.
See “Configuring MAC Authentication for Ports” on page 3-94. The following
parameters are unavailable for modification if MAC Authentication is not enabled
for the port.
•Max MAC Count – The maximum allowed amount of MAC authenticated MAC
addresses on the port. (Default: 1024; Range: 1-1024)
•Intrusion Action – The switch can respond in two ways to an intrusion.
-Block Traffic – All traffic for the unauthenticated host is blocked.
-Pass Traffic – All traffic for the unauthenticated host is allowed.
•Trunk – Indicates if the port is a trunk member.
Web – Click Security, MAC Authentication. Modify the Maximum MAC Count and
Intrusion Action. Click Apply.
Figure 3-65 MAC Authentication Port Configuration
CLI – This example configures the maximum MAC count to 32 and sets the intrusion
action to block all traffic for port 1.
Access Control Lists
Access Control Lists (ACL) provide packet filtering for IP frames (based on address,
protocol, Layer 4 protocol port number or TCP control code) or any frames (based
on MAC address or Ethernet type). To filter incoming packets, first create an access
list, add the required rules, and then bind the list to a specific port.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 4-166
Console(config-if)#mac-authentication max-mac-count 24 4-123
Console(config-if)#mac-authentication intrusion-action block-traffic4-123
Console(config-if)#
Configuring the Switch
3-100
3
Configuring Access Control Lists
An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses,
MAC addresses, or other more specific criteria. This switch tests ingress or egress
packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one. A packet will be accepted as
soon as it matches a permit rule, or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule. If no
rules match for a list of all permit rules, the packet is dropped; and if no rules match
for a list of all deny rules, the packet is accepted.
Command Usage
The following restrictions apply to ACLs:
• Each ACL can have up to 100 rules.
• However, due to resource restrictions, the average number of rules bound to the
ports should not exceed 20.
• When an ACL is bound to an interface as an egress filter, all entries in the ACL
must be deny rules. Otherwise, the bind operation will fail.
• The switch does not support the explicit “deny any any” rule for the egress IP ACL.
If these rules are included in ACL, and you attempt to bind the ACL to an interface
for egress checking, the bind operation will fail.
The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows:
1. User-defined rules in the Egress IP ACL for egress ports.
2. User-defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports.
3. Explicit default rule (permit any any) in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports.
4. If no explicit rule is matched, the implicit default is permit all.
Setting the ACL Name and Type
Use the ACL Configuration page to designate the name and type of an ACL.
Command Attributes
•Name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 15 characters)
•Type – There are three filtering modes:
-Standard – IP ACL mode that filters packets based on the source IP address.
-Extended – IP ACL mode that filters packets based on source or destination IP
address, as well as protocol type and protocol port number.
-MAC – MAC ACL mode that filters packets based on the source or destination
MAC address and the Ethernet frame type (RFC 1060).
Web – Select Security, ACL, Configuration. Enter an ACL name in the Name field,
select the list type (IP Standard, IP Extended, or MAC), and click Add to open the
configuration page for the new list.
Access Control Lists
3-101
3
Figure 3-66 Selecting ACL Type
CLI – This example creates a standard IP ACL named david.
Configuring a Standard IP ACL
Command Attributes
•Action – An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny rules.
•Address Type – Specifies the source IP address. Use “Any” to include all possible
addresses, “Host” to specify a specific host address in the Address field, or “IP” to
specify a range of addresses with the Address and SubMask fields. (Options: Any,
Host, IP; Default: Any)
•IP Address – Source IP address.
•Subnet Mask – A subnet mask containing four integers from 0 to 255, each
separated by a period. The mask uses 1 bits to indicate “match” and 0 bits to
indicate “ignore.” The mask is bitwise ANDed with the specified source IP address,
and compared with the address for each IP packet entering the port(s) to which this
ACL has been assigned.
Web – Specify the action (i.e., Permit or Deny). Select the address type (Any, Host,
or IP). If you select “Host,” enter a specific address. If you select “IP,” enter a subnet
address and the mask for an address range. Then click Add.
Console(config)#access-list ip standard david 4-140
Console(config-std-acl)#
Configuring the Switch
3-102
3
Figure 3-67 Configuring Standard IP ACLs
CLI – This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10.1.1.21
and another rule for the address range 168.92.16.x – 168.92.31.x using a bitmask.
Configuring an Extended IP ACL
Command Attributes
•Action – An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny rules.
•Source/Destination Address Type – Specifies the source or destination IP
address. Use “Any” to include all possible addresses, “Host” to specify a specific
host address in the Address field, or “IP” to specify a range of addresses with the
Address and SubMask fields. (Options: Any, Host, IP; Default: Any)
•Source/Destination IP Address – Source or destination IP address.
•Source/Destination Subnet Mask – Subnet mask for source or destination
address.
•Service Type – Packet priority settings based on the following criteria:
-Precedence – IP precedence level. (Range: 0-7)
-TOS – Type of Service level. (Range: 0-15)
-DSCP – DSCP priority level. (Range: 0-63)
•Protocol – Specifies the protocol type to match as TCP, UDP or Others, where
others indicates a specific protocol number (0-255). (Options: TCP, UDP, Others;
Default: TCP)
•Source/Destination Port – Source/destination port number for the specified
protocol type. (Range: 0-65535)
•Source/Destination Port Bitmask – Decimal number representing the port bits to
match. (Range: 0-65535)
Console(config-std-acl)#permit host 10.1.1.21 4-141
Console(config-std-acl)#permit 168.92.16.0 255.255.240.0
Console(config-std-acl)#
Access Control Lists
3-103
3
•Control Code – Decimal number (representing a bit string) that specifies flag bits
in byte 14 of the TCP header. (Range: 0-63)
•Control Code Bit Mask – Decimal number representing the code bits to match.
The control bitmask is a decimal number (for an equivalent binary bit mask) that is
applied to the control code. Enter a decimal number, where the equivalent binary bit
“1” means to match a bit and “0” means to ignore a bit. The following bits may be
specified:
- 1 (fin) – Finish
- 2 (syn) – Synchronize
- 4 (rst) – Reset
- 8 (psh) – Push
- 16 (ack) – Acknowledgement
- 32 (urg) – Urgent pointer
For example, use the code value and mask below to catch packets with the following
flags set:
- SYN flag valid, use control-code 2, control bitmask 2
- Both SYN and ACK valid, use control-code 18, control bitmask 18
- SYN valid and ACK invalid, use control-code 2, control bitmask 18
Configuring the Switch
3-104
3
Web – Specify the action (i.e., Permit or Deny). Specify the source and/or
destination addresses. Select the address type (Any, Host, or IP). If you select
“Host,” enter a specific address. If you select “IP,” enter a subnet address and the
mask for an address range. Set any other required criteria, such as service type,
protocol type, or TCP control code. Then click Add.
Figure 3-68 Configuring Extended IP ACLs
CLI – This example adds two rules:
(1) Accept any incoming packets if the source address is in subnet 10.7.1.x. For
example, if the rule is matched; i.e., the rule (10.7.1.0 & 255.255.255.0) equals
the masked address (10.7.1.2 & 255.255.255.0), the packet passes through.
(2) Allow TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 to any destination
address when set for destination TCP port 80 (i.e., HTTP).
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit 10.7.1.1 255.255.255.0 any 4-141
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit tcp 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any
destination-port 80
Console(config-std-acl)#
Access Control Lists
3-105
3
Configuring a MAC ACL
Command Attributes
•Action – An ACL can contain any combination of permit or deny rules.
•Source/Destination Address Type – Use “Any” to include all possible addresses,
“Host” to indicate a specific MAC address, or “MAC” to specify an address range
with the Address and Bitmask fields. (Options: Any, Host, MAC; Default: Any)
•Source/Destination MAC Address – Source or destination MAC address.
•Source/Destination Bitmask – Hexadecimal mask for source or destination MAC
address.
•VID – VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4094)
•VID Mask – VLAN bitmask. (Range: 1-4095)
•Ethernet Type – This option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted
packets. (Range: 600-fff hex.)
A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060. A few of the
more common types include 0800 (IP), 0806 (ARP), 8137 (IPX).
• Ethernet Type Bitmask – Protocol bitmask. (Range: 600-fff hex.)
•Packet Format – This attribute includes the following packet types:
-Any – Any Ethernet packet type.
-Untagged-eth2 – Untagged Ethernet II packets.
-Untagged-802.3 – Untagged Ethernet 802.3 packets.
-Tagged-802.3 – Tagged Ethernet 802.3 packets.
-Tagged-802.3 – Tagged Ethernet 802.3 packets.
Command Usage
Egress MAC ACLs only work for destination-mac-known packets, not for multicast,
broadcast, or destination-mac-unknown packets.
Configuring the Switch
3-106
3
Web – Specify the action (i.e., Permit or Deny). Specify the source and/or
destination addresses. Select the address type (Any, Host, or MAC). If you select
“Host,” enter a specific address (e.g., 11-22-33-44-55-66). If you select “MAC,” enter
a base address and a hexadecimal bitmask for an address range. Set any other
required criteria, such as VID, Ethernet type, or packet format. Then click Add.
Figure 3-69 Configuring MAC ACLs
CLI – This example configures one permit rule for all source mac addresses to
communicate with all destination mac addresses on VLAN 12, and another permit
rule for source mac address to communicate with all destination mac addresses.
Binding a Port to an Access Control List
After configuring the Access Control Lists (ACL), you can bind the ports that need to
filter traffic to the appropriate ACLs. You can assign one IP access list to any port.
Command Usage
• Each ACL can have up to 100 rules.
• This switch supports ACLs for ingress filtering only. However, you only bind one IP
ACL to any port for ingress filtering. In other words, only one ACL can be bound to
an interface - Ingress IP ACL.
Console(config-mac-acl)#permit any any vid 12 4095 4-146
Console(config-mac-acl)#permit host 00-10-b5-e9-52-79 any
Console(config-mac-acl)#
Access Control Lists
3-107
3
Command Attributes
•Port – Fixed port or SFP module. (Range: 1-28)
•IP – Specifies the IP ACL to bind to a port.
•MAC – Specifies the MAC ACL to bind to a port.
•IN – ACL for ingress packets.
Web – Click Security, ACL, Port Binding. Click Edit to open the configuration page
for the ACL type. Mark the Enable field for the port you want to bind to an ACL for
ingress or egress traffic, select the required ACL from the drop-down list, then click
Apply.
Figure 3-70 Configuring ACL Port Binding
CLI – This example assigns an IP access list to port 1, and an IP access list to
port 3.
Filtering IP Addresses for Management Access
You can create a list of up to 16 IP addresses or IP address groups that are allowed
management access to the switch through the web interface, SNMP, or Telnet.
Command Usage
• The management interfaces are open to all IP addresses by default. Once you add
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 4-166
Console(config-if)#ip access-group david in 4-143
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3
Console(config-if)#ip access-group david in
Console(config-if)#
Configuring the Switch
3-108
3
an entry to a filter list, access to that interface is restricted to the specified
addresses.
• If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid
address, the switch will reject the connection, enter an event message in the
system log, and send a trap message to the trap manager.
• IP address can be configured for SNMP, web and Telnet access respectively. Each
of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses, either individual
addresses or address ranges.
• When entering addresses for the same group (i.e., SNMP, web or Telnet), the
switch will not accept overlapping address ranges. When entering addresses for
different groups, the switch will accept overlapping address ranges.
• You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range. You must delete
the entire range, and reenter the addresses.
• You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address, or by
specifying both the start address and end address.
Command Attributes
•Web IP Filter – Configures IP address(es) for the web group.
•SNMP IP Filter – Configures IP address(es) for the SNMP group.
•Telnet IP Filter – Configures IP address(es) for the Telnet group.
•IP Filter List – IP address which are allowed management access to this interface.
•Start IP Address – A single IP address, or the starting address of a range.
•End IP Address – The end address of a range.
•Add/Remove Filtering Entry – Adds/removes an IP address from the list.
Access Control Lists
3-109
3
Web – Click Security, IP Filter. Enter the IP addresses or range of addresses that
are allowed management access to an interface, and click Add Web IP Filtering
Entry to update the filter list.
Figure 3-71 Creating an IP Filter List
CLI – This example allows SNMP access for a specific client.
Console(config)#management snmp-client 10.1.2.3 4-40
Console(config)#end
Console#show management all-client
Management IP Filter
HTTP-Client:
Start IP address End IP address
-----------------------------------------------
SNMP-Client:
Start IP address End IP address
-----------------------------------------------
1. 10.1.2.3 10.1.2.3
TELNET-Client:
Start IP address End IP address
-----------------------------------------------
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-110
3
Port Configuration
Displaying Connection Status
You can use the Port Information or Trunk Information pages to display the current
connection status, including link state, speed/duplex mode, flow control, and
auto-negotiation.
Field Attributes (Web)
•Name – Interface label.
•Type – Indicates the port type. (100BASE-FX, 1000BASE-T, or SFP)
•Admin Status – Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled.
•Oper Status – Indicates if the link is Up or Down.
•Speed Duplex Status – Shows the current speed and duplex mode.
(Auto, or fixed choice)
•Flow Control Status – Indicates the type of flow control currently in use.
(IEEE 802.3x, Back-Pressure or None)
•Autonegotiation – Shows if auto-negotiation is enabled or disabled.
•Media Type5 – Media type used for the combo ports. (Options: Coppper-Forced,
SFP-Forced, or SFP-Preferred-Auto; Default: SFP-Preferred-Auto)
•Trunk Member6 – Shows if port is a trunk member.
•Creation7 – Shows if a trunk is manually configured or dynamically set via LACP.
Web – Click Port, Port Information or Trunk Information.
Figure 3-72 Displaying Port/Trunk Information
5. Port information only.
6. Port information only.
7. Trunk information only.
Port Configuration
3-111
3
Field Attributes (CLI)
Basic Information:
•Port type – Indicates the port type. (100BASE-FX, 1000BASE-T, or SFP)
•MAC address – The physical layer address for this port. (To access this item on
the web, see “Setting the Switch’s IP Address” on page 3-16.)
Configuration:
•Name – Interface label.
•Port admin – Shows if the interface is enabled or disabled (i.e., up or down).
•
Speed-duplex
– Shows the current speed and duplex mode. (Auto, or fixed choice)
•Capabilities – Specifies the capabilities to be advertised for a port during
auto-negotiation. (To access this item on the web, see “Configuring Interface
Connections” on page 3-48.) The following capabilities are supported.
-10half - Supports 10 Mbps half-duplex operation
-10full - Supports 10 Mbps full-duplex operation
-100half - Supports 100 Mbps half-duplex operation
-100full - Supports 100 Mbps full-duplex operation
-1000full - Supports 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation
-Sym - Transmits and receives pause frames for flow control
-FC - Supports flow control
•Broadcast storm – Shows if broadcast storm control is enabled or disabled.
•Broadcast storm limit – Shows the broadcast storm threshold. (240-1488100
packets per second)
•Flow control – Shows if flow control is enabled or disabled.
•LACP – Shows if LACP is enabled or disabled.
•Port Security – Shows if port security is enabled or disabled.
•Max MAC count – Shows the maximum number of MAC address that can be
learned by a port. (0 - 1024 addresses)
•Port security action – Shows the response to take when a security violation is
detected. (shutdown, trap, trap-and-shutdown, or none)
Current Status:
•Link Status – Indicates if the link is up or down.
•Port Operation Status – Provides detailed information on port state.
(Displayed only when the link is up.)
•Operation speed-duplex – Shows the current speed and duplex mode.
•Flow control type – Indicates the type of flow control currently in use.
(IEEE 802.3x, Back-Pressure or none)
Configuring the Switch
3-112
3
CLI – This example shows the connection status for Port 5.
Configuring Interface Connections
You can use the Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration page to enable/disable an
interface, set auto-negotiation and the interface capabilities to advertise, or manually
fix the speed, duplex mode, and flow control.
Command Attributes
•Name – Allows you to label an interface. (Range: 1-64 characters)
•Admin – Allows you to manually disable an interface. You can disable an interface
due to abnormal behavior (e.g., excessive collisions), and then reenable it after the
problem has been resolved. You may also disable an interface for security
reasons.
•Speed/Duplex – Allows you to manually set the port speed and duplex mode.
(i.e., with auto-negotiation disabled)
•Flow Control – Allows automatic or manual selection of flow control.
•Autonegotiation (Port Capabilities) – Allows auto-negotiation to be enabled/
disabled. When auto-negotiation is enabled, you need to specify the capabilities to
be advertised. When auto-negotiation is disabled, you can force the settings for
speed, mode, and flow control.The following capabilities are supported.
-10half - Supports 10 Mbps half-duplex operation
-10full - Supports 10 Mbps full-duplex operation
-100half - Supports 100 Mbps half-duplex operation
-100full - Supports 100 Mbps full-duplex operation
-1000full (Gigabit ports only) - Supports 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation
Console#show interfaces status ethernet 1/5 4-173
Information of Eth 1/5
Basic information:
Port type: 100FX
Mac address: 00-12-CF-12-34-61
Configuration:
Name:
Port admin: Up
Speed-duplex: Auto
Capabilities: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full
Broadcast storm: Enabled
Broadcast storm limit: 500 packets/second
Flow control: Disabled
Lacp: Disabled
Port security: Disabled
Max MAC count: 0
Port security action: None
Current status:
Link status: Down
Operation speed-duplex: 100full
Flow control type: None
Console#
Port Configuration
3-113
3
(Default: Autonegotiation enabled; Advertised capabilities for 100BASE-FX –
100full; 1000BASE-T – 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full; 1000BASE-SX/
LX/LH – 1000full)
• Media Type – Media type used for the combo ports. (Options: Coppper-Forced,
SFP-Forced, or SFP-Preferred-Auto; Default: SFP-Preferred-Auto)
•Trunk – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. To create trunks and select port
members, see “Creating Trunk Groups” on page 3-114.
Notes: 1. Auto-negotiation must be disabled before you can configure or force the
interface to use the Speed/Duplex Mode or Flow Control options.
2. 1000full operation cannot be forced. The Gigabit Combo ports can only
operate at 1000full when auto-negotiation is enabled.
Web – Click Port, Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration. Modify the required
interface settings, and click Apply.
Figure 3-73 Port/Trunk Configuration
CLI – Select the interface, and then enter the required settings.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/13 4-166
Console(config-if)#description RD SW#13 4-167
Console(config-if)#shutdown 4-171
.
Console(config-if)#no shutdown
Console(config-if)#no negotiation 4-168
Console(config-if)#speed-duplex 100half 4-167
Console(config-if)#flowcontrol 4-170
.
Console(config-if)#negotiation
Console(config-if)#capabilities 100half 4-169
Console(config-if)#capabilities 100full
Console(config-if)#capabilities flowcontrol
Configuring the Switch
3-114
3
Creating Trunk Groups
You can create multiple links between devices that work as one virtual, aggregate
link. A port trunk offers a dramatic increase in bandwidth for network segments
where bottlenecks exist, as well as providing a fault-tolerant link between two
devices. You can create up to eight trunks at a time.
The switch supports both static trunking and dynamic Link Aggregation Control
Protocol (LACP). Static trunks have to be manually configured at both ends of the
link, and the switches must comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard. On the
other hand, LACP configured ports can automatically negotiate a trunked link with
LACP-configured ports on another device. You can configure any number of ports
on the switch as LACP, as long as they are not already configured as part of a static
trunk. If ports on another device are also configured as LACP, the switch and the
other device will negotiate a trunk link between them. If an LACP trunk consists of
more than eight ports, all other ports will be placed in a standby mode. Should one
link in the trunk fail, one of the standby ports will automatically be activated to
replace it.
Command Usage
Besides balancing the load across each port in the trunk, the other ports provide
redundancy by taking over the load if a port in the trunk fails. However, before
making any physical connections between devices, use the web interface or CLI to
specify the trunk on the devices at both ends. When using a port trunk, take note of
the following points:
• Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network
cables between switches to avoid creating a loop.
• You can create up to eight trunks on a switch, with up to eight ports per trunk.
• The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports.
• When configuring static trunks on switches of different types, they must be
compatible with the Cisco EtherChannel standard.
• The ports at both ends of a trunk must be configured in an identical manner,
including communication mode (i.e., speed, duplex mode and flow control), VLAN
assignments, and CoS settings.
• All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from/to, added
or deleted from a VLAN.
• STP, VLAN, and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk.
Port Configuration
3-115
3
Statically Configuring a Trunk
Command Usage
• When configuring static trunks, you may not be
able to link switches of different types,
depending on the manufacturer’s
implementation. However, note that the static
trunks on this switch are Cisco EtherChannel
compatible.
• To avoid creating a loop in the network, be sure
you add a static trunk via the configuration
interface before connecting the ports, and also
disconnect the ports before removing a static
trunk via the configuration interface.
Command Attributes
•Member List (Current) – Shows configured trunks (Trunk ID, Unit, Port).
•New – Includes entry fields for creating new trunks.
- Trunk – Trunk identifier. (Range: 1-8)
-Port – Port identifier.
Web – Click Port, Trunk Membership. Enter a trunk ID of 1-8 in the Trunk field,
select any of the switch ports from the scroll-down port list, and click Add. After you
have completed adding ports to the member list, click Apply.
Figure 3-74 Configuring Static Trunks
active
links
}
statically
configured
Configuring the Switch
3-116
3
CLI – This example creates trunk 2 with ports 1 and 2. Just connect these ports to
two static trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk.
Enabling LACP on Selected Ports
Command Usage
• To avoid creating a loop in the network, be sure
you enable LACP before connecting the ports,
and also disconnect the ports before disabling
LACP.
• If the target switch has also enabled LACP on the
connected ports, the trunk will be activated
automatically.
• A trunk formed with another switch using LACP
will automatically be assigned the next available
trunk ID.
• If more than eight ports attached to the same
target switch have LACP enabled, the additional ports will be placed in standby
mode, and will only be enabled if one of the active links fails.
• All ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex, and
auto-negotiation.
• Trunks dynamically established through LACP will also be shown in the Member
List on the Trunk Membership menu (see page 3-115).
Console(config)#interface port-channel 2 4-166
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 4-166
Console(config-if)#channel-group 2 4-181
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2
Console(config-if)#channel-group 2
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show interfaces status port-channel 2 4-173
Information of Trunk 2
Basic information:
Port type: 100FX
Mac address: 00-12-CF-12-34-84
Configuration:
Name:
Port admin: Up
Speed-duplex: Auto
Capabilities: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full
Flow control: Disabled
Port security: Disabled
Max MAC count: 0
Current status:
Created by: User
Link status: Up
Port operation status: Up
Operation speed-duplex: 100full
Flow control type: None
Member Ports: Eth1/1, Eth1/2,
Console#
active
links
}
}
dynamically
enabled
configured
members
backup
link
Port Configuration
3-117
3
Command Attributes
•Member List (Current) – Shows configured trunks (Port).
•New – Includes entry fields for creating new trunks.
-Port – Port identifier. (Range: 1-28)
Web – Click Port, LACP, Configuration. Select any of the switch ports from the
scroll-down port list and click Add. After you have completed adding ports to the
member list, click Apply.
Figure 3-75 LACP Trunk Configuration
Configuring the Switch
3-118
3
CLI – The following example enables LACP for ports 1 to 6. Just connect these ports
to LACP-enabled trunk ports on another switch to form a trunk.
Configuring LACP Parameters
Dynamically Creating a Port Channel –
Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria:
• Ports must have the same LACP System Priority.
• Ports must have the same LACP port Admin Key.
• However, if the “port channel” Admin Key is set (page 4-142), then the port Admin
Key must be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group.
Note – If the port channel admin key (lacp admin key, page 4-185) is not set (through
the CLI) when a channel group is formed (i.e., it has a null value of 0), this key is set to
the same value as the port admin key used by the interfaces that joined the group (lacp
admin key, as described in this section and on page 4-184).
Command Attributes
Set Port Actor – This menu sets the local side of an aggregate link; i.e., the ports on
this switch.
•Port – Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•System Priority – LACP system priority is used to determine link aggregation
group (LAG) membership, and to identify this device to other switches during LAG
negotiations. (Range: 0-65535; Default: 32768)
- Ports must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 4-166
Console(config-if)#lacp 4-182
Console(config-if)#exit
.
.
.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/6
Console(config-if)#lacp
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show interfaces status port-channel 1 4-173
Information of Trunk 1
Basic information:
Port type: 100FX
Mac address: 00-12-CF-12-34-89
Configuration:
Name:
Port admin: Up
Speed-duplex: Auto
Capabilities: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full
Flow control status: Disabled
Port security: Disabled
Max MAC count: 0
Current status:
Created by: Lacp
Link status: Up
Port operation status: Up
Operation speed-duplex: 100full
Flow control type: None
Member Ports: Eth1/1, Eth1/2, Eth1/3, Eth1/4, Eth1/5, Eth1/6,
Console#
Port Configuration
3-119
3
- System priority is combined with the switch’s MAC address to form the LAG
identifier. This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP
negotiations with other systems.
•Admin Key – The LACP administration key must be set to the same value for ports
that belong to the same LAG. (Range: 0-65535; Default: 1)
•Port Priority – If a link goes down, LACP port priority is used to select a backup
link. (Range: 0-65535; Default: 32768)
Set Port Partner – This menu sets the remote side of an aggregate link; i.e., the
ports on the attached device. The command attributes have the same meaning as
those used for the port actor. However, configuring LACP settings for the partner
only applies to its administrative state, not its operational state, and will only take
effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the partner.
Web – Click Port, LACP, Aggregation Port. Set the System Priority, Admin Key, and
Port Priority for the Port Actor. You can optionally configure these settings for the
Port Partner. (Be aware that these settings only affect the administrative state of the
partner, and will not take effect until the next time an aggregate link is formed with
this device.) After you have completed setting the port LACP parameters, click Apply.
Figure 3-76 LACP Port Configuration
Configuring the Switch
3-120
3
CLI – The following example configures LACP parameters for ports 1-4. Ports 1-4
are used as active members of the LAG.
Displaying LACP Port Counters
You can display statistics for LACP protocol messages.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 4-166
Console(config-if)#lacp actor system-priority 3 4-183
Console(config-if)#lacp actor admin-key 120 4-184
Console(config-if)#lacp actor port-priority 128 4-186
Console(config-if)#exit
.
.
.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/4
Console(config-if)#lacp actor system-priority 3
Console(config-if)#lacp actor admin-key 120
Console(config-if)#lacp actor port-priority 512
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show lacp sysid 4-186
Port Channel System Priority System MAC Address
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 3 00-12-CF-31-31-31
2 32768 00-12-CF-31-31-31
3 32768 00-12-CF-31-31-31
4 32768 00-12-CF-31-31-31
Console#show lacp 1 internal 4-186
Port channel : 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Oper Key : 120
Admin Key : 0
Eth 1/1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
LACPDUs Internal: 30 sec
LACP System Priority: 3
LACP Port Priority: 128
Admin Key: 120
Oper Key: 120
Admin State : defaulted, aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity
Oper State: distributing, collecting, synchronization,
aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity
.
.
.
Table 3-8 LACP Port Counters
Field Description
LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group.
LACPDUs Received Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group.
Marker Sent Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group.
Marker Received Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group.
Port Configuration
3-121
3
Web – Click Port, LACP, Port Counters Information. Select a member port to display
the corresponding information.
Figure 3-77 LACP - Port Counters Information
CLI – The following example displays LACP counters.
Marker Unknown Pkts Number of frames received that either (1) Carry the Slow Protocols
Ethernet Type value, but contain an unknown PDU, or (2) are addressed
to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address, but do not carry the Slow
Protocols Ethernet Type.
Marker Illegal Pkts Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value, but
contain a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype.
Console#show lacp counters 4-186
Port channel : 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eth 1/ 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
LACPDUs Sent: 91
LACPDUs Receive: 43
Marker Sent: 0
Marker Receive: 0
LACPDUs Unknown Pkts: 0
LACPDUs Illegal Pkts: 0
.
.
.
Table 3-8 LACP Port Counters (Continued)
Field Description
Configuring the Switch
3-122
3
Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Local Side
You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the local side of
an link aggregation.
Table 3-9 LACP Internal Configuration Information
Field Description
Oper Key Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port.
Admin Key Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port.
LACPDUs Interval Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU information.
LACP System Priority LACP system priority assigned to this port channel.
LACP Port Priority LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group.
Admin State,
Oper State
Administrative or operational values of the actor’s state parameters:
• Expired – The actor’s receive machine is in the expired state;
• Defaulted – The actor’s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner
information, administratively configured for the partner.
• Distributing – If false, distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled; i.e.,
distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence
of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information.
• Collecting – Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled; i.e., collection
is currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of
administrative changes or changes in received protocol information.
• Synchronization – The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC; i.e., it has
been allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group, the group has been
associated with a compatible Aggregator, and the identity of the Link Aggregation
Group is consistent with the System ID and operational Key information
transmitted.
• Aggregation – The system considers this link to be aggregatable; i.e., a potential
candidate for aggregation.
• Long timeout – Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate.
• LACP-Activity – Activity control value with regard to this link.
(0: Passive; 1: Active)
Port Configuration
3-123
3
Web – Click Port, LACP, Port Internal Information. Select a port channel to display
the corresponding information.
Figure 3-78 LACP - Port Internal Information
CLI – The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and
operational state for the local side of port channel 1.
Console#show lacp 1 internal 4-186
Port channel : 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Oper Key : 120
Admin Key : 0
Eth 1/1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
LACPDUs Internal: 30 sec
LACP System Priority: 3
LACP Port Priority: 128
Admin Key: 120
Oper Key: 120
Admin State : defaulted, aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity
Oper State: distributing, collecting, synchronization,
aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity
.
.
.
Configuring the Switch
3-124
3
Displaying LACP Settings and Status for the Remote Side
You can display configuration settings and the operational state for the remote side
of an link aggregation.
Web – Click Port, LACP, Port Neighbors Information. Select a port channel to
display the corresponding information.
Figure 3-79 LACP - Port Neighbors Information
Table 3-10 LACP Neighbor Configuration Information
Field Description
Partner Admin System ID LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the user.
Partner Oper System ID LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol.
Partner Admin Port Number Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner.
Partner Oper Port Number Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port’s
protocol partner.
Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner.
Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner.
Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner.
Oper Key Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner.
Admin State Administrative values of the partner’s state parameters. (See preceding table.)
Oper State Operational values of the partner’s state parameters. (See preceding table.)
Port Configuration
3-125
3
CLI – The following example displays the LACP configuration settings and
operational state for the remote side of port channel 1.
Setting Broadcast Storm Thresholds
Broadcast storms may occur when a device on your network is malfunctioning, or if
application programs are not well designed or properly configured. If there is too
much broadcast traffic on your network, performance can be severely degraded or
everything can come to complete halt.
You can protect your network from broadcast storms by setting a threshold for
broadcast traffic. Any broadcast packets exceeding the specified threshold will then
be dropped.
Command Usage
• Broadcast Storm Control is enabled by default.
• Broadcast control does not effect IP multicast traffic.
Command Attributes
•Port - Port number.
•Type – Indicates the port type. (100BASE-FX, 1000BASE-T, or SFP)
•Protect Status – Shows whether or not broadcast storm control has been enabled.
(Default: Enabled)
• Threshold – Threshold as kilobits per second. (Range: 64-100000 kilobits per
second for Fast Ethernet ports; 64-1000000 kilobits per second for Gigabit ports)
•Trunk – Shows if a port is a trunk member.
Console#show lacp 1 neighbors 4-186
Port channel 1 neighbors
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eth 1/1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Partner Admin System ID: 32768, 00-00-00-00-00-00
Partner Oper System ID: 3, 00-12-CF-CE-2A-20
Partner Admin Port Number: 5
Partner Oper Port Number: 3
Port Admin Priority: 32768
Port Oper Priority: 128
Admin Key: 0
Oper Key: 120
Admin State: defaulted, distributing, collecting,
synchronization, long timeout,
Oper State: distributing, collecting, synchronization,
aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity
.
.
.
Configuring the Switch
3-126
3
Web – Click Port, Port/Trunk Broadcast Control. Set the threshold, mark the
Enabled field for the desired interface and click Apply.
Figure 3-80 Port Broadcast Control
CLI – Specify any interface, and then enter the threshold. The following disables
broadcast storm control for port 1, and then sets broadcast suppression at 500
kilobits per second for port 2.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 4-166
Console(config-if)#no switchport broadcast 4-172
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2
Console(config-if)#switchport broadcast packet-rate 500 4-172
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show interfaces switchport ethernet 1/2 4-175
Information of Eth 1/2
Broadcast threshold: Enabled, 500 Kbits/second
LACP status: Disabled
Ingress Rate Limit: Disabled, 100000 Kbits per second
Egress Rate Limit: Disabled, 100000 Kbits per second
VLAN membership mode: Hybrid
Ingress rule: Enabled
Acceptable frame type: All frames
Native VLAN: 1
Priority for untagged traffic: 0
GVRP status: Disabled
Allowed VLAN: 1(u),
Forbidden VLAN:
Private-VLAN mode: NONE
Private-VLAN host-association: NONE
Private-VLAN mapping: NONE
Console#
Port Configuration
3-127
3
Configuring Port Mirroring
You can mirror traffic from any source port to a
target port for real-time analysis. You can then
attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the
target port and study the traffic crossing the
source port in a completely unobtrusive manner.
Command Usage
• Monitor port speed should match or exceed source port speed, otherwise traffic
may be dropped from the monitor port.
• All mirror sessions must share the same destination port.
• When mirroring port traffic, the target port must be included in the same VLAN as
the source port.
Command Attributes
•Mirror Sessions – Displays a list of current mirror sessions.
•Source Port – The port whose traffic will be monitored. (Range: 1-28)
•Type – Allows you to select which traffic to mirror to the target port, Rx (receive),
or Tx (transmit). (Default: Rx)
•Target Port – The port that will mirror the traffic on the source port.
(Range: 1-28)
Web – Click Port, Mirror Port Configuration. Specify the source port, the traffic type
to be mirrored, and the monitor port, then click Add.
Figure 3-81 Mirror Port Configuration
CLI – Use the interface command to select the monitor port, then use the port
monitor command to specify the source port and traffic type.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/10 4-166
Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/13 tx 4-177
Console(config-if)#
Source
port(s)
Single
target
port
Configuring the Switch
3-128
3
Configuring Rate Limits
This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic
received on a port or transmitted from a port. Rate limiting is configured on ports at
the edge of a network to limit traffic coming in and out of the network. Packets that
exceed the acceptable amount of traffic are dropped.
Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks. When an interface is
configured with this feature, the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to
verify conformity. Non-conforming traffic is dropped, conforming traffic is forwarded
without any changes.
Rate Limit Configuration
Use the rate limit configuration pages to apply rate limiting.
Command Usage
• Input and output rate limits can be enabled or disabled for individual interfaces.
Command Attributes
•Port/Trunk – Displays the port/trunk number.
•Input/Output Rate Limit Status – Enables or disables the rate limit. (Default:
Enabled)
•Input/Output Rate Limit – Sets the rate limit level.
Web – Click Port, Rate Limit, Input/Output Port/Trunk Configuration. Enable the
Rate Limit Status for the required interfaces, set the Rate Limit Level, and click
Apply.
Figure 3-82 Input Rate Limit Port Configuration
CLI - This example sets the rate limit level for input traffic passing through port 3.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3 4-166
Console(config-if)#rate-limit input 500 4-179
Console(config-if)#
Port Configuration
3-129
3
Showing Port Statistics
You can display standard statistics on network traffic from the Interfaces Group and
Ethernet-like MIBs, as well as a detailed breakdown of traffic based on the RMON
MIB. Interfaces and Ethernet-like statistics display errors on the traffic passing
through each port. This information can be used to identify potential problems with
the switch (such as a faulty port or unusually heavy loading). RMON statistics
provide access to a broad range of statistics, including a total count of different
frame types and sizes passing through each port. All values displayed have been
accumulated since the last system reboot, and are shown as counts per second.
Statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds by default.
Note: RMON groups 2, 3 and 9 can only be accessed using SNMP management
software such as HP OpenView.
Table 3-11 Port Statistics
Parameter Description
Interface Statistics
Received Octets The total number of octetts received on the interface, including framing
characters.
Received Unicast Packets The number of subnetwork-unicast packets delivered to a higher-layer
protocol.
Received Multicast Packets The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer,
which were addressed to a multicast address at this sub-layer.
Received Broadcast Packets The number of packets, delivered by this sub-layer to a higher (sub-)layer,
which were addressed to a broadcast address at this sub-layer.
Received Discarded Packets The number of inbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even
though no errors had been detected to prevent their being deliverable to a
higher-layer protocol. One possible reason for discarding such a packet
could be to free up buffer space.
Received Unknown Packets The number of packets received via the interface which were discarded
because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.
Received Errors The number of inbound packets that contained errors preventing them
from being deliverable to a higher-layer protocol.
Transmit Octets The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including
framing characters.
Transmit Unicast Packets The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be
transmitted to a subnetwork-unicast address, including those that were
discarded or not sent.
Transmit Multicast Packets The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be
transmitted, and which were addressed to a multicast address at this
sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.
Transmit Broadcast Packets The total number of packets that higher-level protocols requested be
transmitted, and which were addressed to a broadcast address at this
sub-layer, including those that were discarded or not sent.
Configuring the Switch
3-130
3
Transmit Discarded Packets The number of outbound packets which were chosen to be discarded even
though no errors had been detected to prevent their being transmitted.
One possible reason for discarding such a packet could be to free up
buffer space.
Transmit Errors The number of outbound packets that could not be transmitted because of
errors.
Etherlike Statistics
Alignment Errors The number of alignment errors (missynchronized data packets).
Late Collisions The number of times that a collision is detected later than 512 bit-times
into the transmission of a packet.
FCS Errors A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an integral
number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check. This count does
not include frames received with frame-too-long or frame-too-short error.
Excessive Collisions A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due
to excessive collisions. This counter does not increment when the
interface is operating in full-duplex mode.
Single Collision Frames The number of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is
inhibited by exactly one collision.
Internal MAC Transmit Errors A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface fails due
to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error.
Multiple Collision Frames A count of successfully transmitted frames for which transmission is
inhibited by more than one collision.
Carrier Sense Errors The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or never
asserted when attempting to transmit a frame.
SQE Test Errors A count of times that the SQE TEST ERROR message is generated by the
PLS sublayer for a particular interface.
Frames Too Long A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed the
maximum permitted frame size.
Deferred Transmissions A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a particular
interface is delayed because the medium was busy.
Internal MAC Receive Errors A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface fails due to
an internal MAC sublayer receive error.
RMON Statistics
Drop Events The total number of events in which packets were dropped due to lack of
resources.
Jabbers The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets), and had either an FCS
or alignment error.
Received Bytes Total number of bytes of data received on the network. This statistic can
be used as a reasonable indication of Ethernet utilization.
Collisions The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet
segment.
Table 3-11 Port Statistics (Continued)
Parameter Description
Port Configuration
3-131
3
Received Frames The total number of frames (bad, broadcast and multicast) received.
Broadcast Frames The total number of good frames received that were directed to the
broadcast address. Note that this does not include multicast packets.
Multicast Frames The total number of good frames received that were directed to this
multicast address.
CRC/Alignment Errors The number of CRC/alignment errors (FCS or alignment errors).
Undersize Frames The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets long
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well
formed.
Oversize Frames The total number of frames received that were longer than 1518 octets
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and were otherwise well
formed.
Fragments The total number of frames received that were less than 64 octets in length
(excluding framing bits, but including FCS octets) and had either an FCS
or alignment error.
64 Bytes Frames The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and
transmitted that were 64 octets in length (excluding framing bits but
including FCS octets).
65-127 Byte Frames
128-255 Byte Frames
256-511 Byte Frames
512-1023 Byte Frames
1024-1518 Byte Frames
1519-1536 Byte Frames
The total number of frames (including bad packets) received and
transmitted where the number of octets fall within the specified range
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).
Table 3-11 Port Statistics (Continued)
Parameter Description
Configuring the Switch
3-132
3
Web – Click Port, Port Statistics. Select the required interface, and click Query. You
can also use the Refresh button at the bottom of the page to update the screen.
Figure 3-83 Port Statistics
Address Table Settings
3-133
3
CLI – This example shows statistics for port 13.
Address Table Settings
Switches store the addresses for all known devices. This information is used to pass
traffic directly between the inbound and outbound ports. All the addresses learned
by monitoring traffic are stored in the dynamic address table. You can also manually
configure static addresses that are bound to a specific port.
Setting Static Addresses
A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch. Static
addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved. When a static
address is seen on another interface, the address will be ignored and will not be
written to the address table.
Command Attributes
•Static Address Counts8 – The number of manually configured addresses.
•Current Static Address Table – Lists all the static addresses.
•Interface – Port or trunk associated with the device assigned a static address.
•MAC Address – Physical address of a device mapped to this interface.
•VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4093).
Console#show interfaces counters ethernet 1/13 4-174
Ethernet 1/13
Iftable stats:
Octets input: 868453, Octets output: 3492122
Unicast input: 7315, Unitcast output: 6658
Discard input: 0, Discard output: 0
Error input: 0, Error output: 0
Unknown protos input: 0, QLen output: 0
Extended iftable stats:
Multi-cast input: 0, Multi-cast output: 17027
Broadcast input: 231, Broadcast output: 7
Ether-like stats:
Alignment errors: 0, FCS errors: 0
Single Collision frames: 0, Multiple collision frames: 0
SQE Test errors: 0, Deferred transmissions: 0
Late collisions: 0, Excessive collisions: 0
Internal mac transmit errors: 0, Internal mac receive errors: 0
Frame too longs: 0, Carrier sense errors: 0
Symbol errors: 0
RMON stats:
Drop events: 0, Octets: 4422579, Packets: 31552
Broadcast pkts: 238, Multi-cast pkts: 17033
Undersize pkts: 0, Oversize pkts: 0
Fragments: 0, Jabbers: 0
CRC align errors: 0, Collisions: 0
Packet size <= 64 octets: 25568, Packet size 65 to 127 octets: 1616
Packet size 128 to 255 octets: 1249, Packet size 256 to 511 octets: 1449
Packet size 512 to 1023 octets: 802, Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets: 871
Console#
8. Web only.
Configuring the Switch
3-134
3
Web – Click Address Table, Static Addresses. Specify the interface, the MAC
address and VLAN, then click Add Static Address.
Figure 3-84 Configuring a Static Address Table
CLI – This example adds an address to the static address table, but sets it to be
deleted when the switch is reset.
Displaying the Address Table
The Dynamic Address Table contains the MAC addresses learned by monitoring the
source address for traffic entering the switch. When the destination address for
inbound traffic is found in the database, the packets intended for that address are
forwarded directly to the associated port. Otherwise, the traffic is flooded to all ports.
Command Attributes
•Interface – Indicates a port or trunk.
•MAC Address – Physical address associated with this interface.
•VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4093).
•Address Table Sort Key – You can sort the information displayed based on MAC
address, VLAN or interface (port or trunk).
•Dynamic Address Counts – The number of addresses dynamically learned.
•Current Dynamic Address Table – Lists all the dynamic addresses.
Console(config)#mac-address-table static 00-12-cf-94-34-de
interface ethernet 1/1 vlan 1 delete-on-reset 4-190
Console(config)#
Address Table Settings
3-135
3
Web – Click Address Table, Dynamic Addresses. Specify the search type (i.e., mark
the Interface, MAC Address, or VLAN checkbox), select the method of sorting the
displayed addresses, and then click Query.
Figure 3-85 Configuring a Dynamic Address Table
CLI – This example also displays the address table entries for port 1.
Console#show mac-address-table interface ethernet 1/1 4-191
Interface Mac Address Vlan Type
--------- ----------------- ---- -----------------
Eth 1/ 1 00-12-CF-48-82-93 1 Delete-on-reset
Eth 1/ 1 00-12-CF-94-34-DE 2 Learned
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-136
3
Changing the Aging Time
You can set the aging time for entries in the dynamic address table.
Command Attributes
•Aging Status – Enables/disables the function.
•Aging Time – The time after which a learned entry is discarded.
(Range: 10-630 seconds; Default: 300 seconds)
Web – Click Address Table, Address Aging. Specify the new aging time, click Apply.
Figure 3-86 Setting the Address Aging Time
CLI – This example sets the aging time to 300 seconds.
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration
The Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA) can be used to detect and disable network
loops, and to provide backup links between switches, bridges or routers. This allows
the switch to interact with other bridging devices (that is, an STA-compliant switch,
bridge or router) in your network to ensure that only one route exists between any
two stations on the network, and provide backup links which automatically take over
when a primary link goes down.
The spanning tree algorithms supported by this switch include these versions:
• STP – Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)
• RSTP – Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w)
• MSTP – Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1s)
STP – STP uses a distributed algorithm to select a bridging device (STP-compliant
switch, bridge or router) that serves as the root of the spanning tree network. It
selects a root port on each bridging device (except for the root device) which incurs
the lowest path cost when forwarding a packet from that device to the root device.
Then it selects a designated bridging device from each LAN which incurs the lowest
path cost when forwarding a packet from that LAN to the root device. All ports
connected to designated bridging devices are assigned as designated ports. After
determining the lowest cost spanning tree, it enables all root ports and designated
Console(config)#mac-address-table aging-time 300 4-192
Console(config)#
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration
3-137
3
ports, and disables all other ports. Network packets are therefore only forwarded
between root ports and designated ports, eliminating any possible network loops.
Once a stable network topology has been established, all bridges listen for Hello
BPDUs (Bridge Protocol Data Units) transmitted from the Root Bridge. If a bridge
does not get a Hello BPDU after a predefined interval (Maximum Age), the bridge
assumes that the link to the Root Bridge is down. This bridge will then initiate
negotiations with other bridges to reconfigure the network to reestablish a valid
network topology.
RSTP – RSTP is designed as a general replacement for the slower, legacy STP.
RSTP is also incorporated into MSTP. RSTP achieves much faster reconfiguration
(i.e., around 1 to 3 seconds, compared to 30 seconds or more for STP) by reducing
the number of state changes before active ports start learning, predefining an
alternate route that can be used when a node or port fails, and retaining the
forwarding database for ports insensitive to changes in the tree structure when
reconfiguration occurs.
MSTP – When using STP or RSTP, it may be difficult to maintain a stable path
between all VLAN members. Frequent changes in the tree structure can easily
isolate some of the group members. MSTP (which is based on RSTP for fast
convergence) is designed to support independent spanning trees based on VLAN
groups. Using multiple spanning trees can provide multiple forwarding paths and
enable load balancing. One or more VLANs can be grouped into a Multiple Spanning
Tree Instance (MSTI). MSTP builds a separate Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) for
each instance to maintain connectivity among each of the assigned VLAN groups.
x
Designated
Root
Designated
Port
Designated
Bridge
x x
x
Root
Port
x
Configuring the Switch
3-138
3
MSTP then builds a Internal Spanning Tree (IST) for the Region containing all
commonly configured MSTP bridges.
An MST Region consists of a group of interconnected bridges that have the same
MST Configuration Identifiers (including the Region Name, Revision Level and
Configuration Digest – see “Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees” on page 3-149).
An MST Region may contain multiple MSTP Instances. An Internal Spanning Tree
(IST) is used to connect all the MSTP switches within an MST region. A Common
Spanning Tree (CST) interconnects all adjacent MST Regions, and acts as a virtual
bridge node for communications with STP or RSTP nodes in the global network.
MSTP connects all bridges and LAN segments with a single Common and Internal
Spanning Tree (CIST). The CIST is formed as a result of the running spanning tree
algorithm between switches that support the STP, RSTP, MSTP protocols.
Displaying Global Settings
You can display a summary of the current bridge STA information that applies to the
entire switch using the STA Information screen.
Field Attributes
•Spanning Tree State – Shows if the switch is enabled to participate in an
STA-compliant network.
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration
3-139
3
•Bridge ID – A unique identifier for this bridge, consisting of the bridge priority and
MAC address (where the address is taken from the switch system).
•Max Age – The maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without receiving a
configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device ports (except
for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at regular intervals.
Any port that ages out STA information (provided in the last configuration
message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is a root port, a
new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the network.
(References to “ports” in this section mean “interfaces,” which includes both ports
and trunks.)
•Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which the root device transmits a
configuration message.
•Forward Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) the root device will wait before
changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is required
because every device must receive information about topology changes before it
starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting
information that would make it return to a discarding state; otherwise, temporary
data loops might result.
•Designated Root – The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning
Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device.
-Root Port – The number of the port on this switch that is closest to the root. This
switch communicates with the root device through this port. If there is no root
port, then this switch has been accepted as the root device of the Spanning Tree
network.
-Root Path Cost – The path cost from the root port on this switch to the root
device.
•Configuration Changes – The number of times the Spanning Tree has been
reconfigured.
•Last Topology Change – Time since the Spanning Tree was last reconfigured.
These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI:
•Spanning tree mode – Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch:
-STP: Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)
-RSTP: Rapid Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1w)
-MSTP: Multiple Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1s)
•Priority – Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and
designated port. The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device.
However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest MAC
address will then become the root device.
•Root Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which this device transmits a
configuration message.
•Root Maximum Age – The maximum time (in seconds) this device can wait
without receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All
device ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages
at regular intervals. If the root port ages out STA information (provided in the last
Configuring the Switch
3-140
3
configuration message), a new root port is selected from among the device ports
attached to the network. (References to “ports” in this section means “interfaces,”
which includes both ports and trunks.)
•Root Forward Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) this device will wait before
changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is required
because every device must receive information about topology changes before it
starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting
information that would make it return to a discarding state; otherwise, temporary
data loops might result.
•Transmission limit – The minimum interval between the transmission of
consecutive RSTP/MSTP BPDUs.
•Path Cost Method – The path cost is used to determine the best path between
devices. The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can
be assigned to each interface.
Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Information.
Figure 3-87 Displaying Spanning Tree Information
CLI
– This command displays global STA settings, followed by settings for each port
.
Console#show spanning-tree 4-235
Spanning-tree information
---------------------------------------------------------------
Spanning tree mode: RSTP
Spanning tree enabled/disabled: enabled
Priority: 32768
Bridge Hello Time (sec.): 2
Bridge Max Age (sec.): 20
Bridge Forward Delay (sec.): 15
Root Hello Time (sec.): 2
Root Max Age (sec.): 20
Root Forward Delay (sec.): 15
Designated Root: 32768.0012CF0B0D00
Current root port: 0
Current root cost: 0
Number of topology changes: 1
Last topology changes time (sec.):2262
Transmission limit: 3
Path Cost Method: long
.
.
.
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration
3-141
3
Note: The current root port and current root cost display as zero when this device is not
connected to the network.
Configuring Global Settings
Global settings apply to the entire switch.
Command Usage
• Spanning Tree Protocol9
Uses RSTP for the internal state machine, but sends only 802.1D BPDUs. This
creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network. If multiple VLANs are
implemented on a network, the path between specific VLAN members may be
inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops, thus isolating group members.
When operating multiple VLANs, we recommend selecting the MSTP option.
• Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol9
RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring the
incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of protocol
messages the RSTP node transmits, as described below:
- STP Mode – If the switch receives an 802.1D BPDU (i.e., STP BPDU) after a
port’s migration delay timer expires, the switch assumes it is connected to an
802.1D bridge and starts using only 802.1D BPDUs.
- RSTP Mode – If RSTP is using 802.1D BPDUs on a port and receives an RSTP
BPDU after the migration delay expires, RSTP restarts the migration delay timer
and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port.
• Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
- To allow multiple spanning trees to operate over the network, you must configure
a related set of bridges with the same MSTP configuration, allowing them to
participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances.
- A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible VLAN
instance assignments.
- Be careful when switching between spanning tree modes. Changing modes
stops all spanning-tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the system
in the new mode, temporarily disrupting user traffic.
Command Attributes
Basic Configuration of Global Settings
•Spanning Tree State – Enables/disables STA on this switch. (Default: Enabled)
•Spanning Tree Type – Specifies the type of spanning tree used on this switch:
-STP: Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D); i.e., when this option is selected,
the switch will use RSTP set to STP forced compatibility mode).
-RSTP: Rapid Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1w); RSTP is the default.
-MSTP: Multiple Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1s);
9. STP and RSTP BPDUs are transmitted as untagged frames, and will cross any VLAN
boundaries.
Configuring the Switch
3-142
3
•Priority – Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and
designated port. The device with the highest priority becomes the STA root device.
However, if all devices have the same priority, the device with the lowest MAC
address will then become the root device. (Note that lower numeric values indicate
higher priority.)
- Default: 32768
- Range: 0-61440, in steps of 4096
- Options: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864,
40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, 61440
Root Device Configuration
•Hello Time – Interval (in seconds) at which the root device transmits a
configuration message.
- Default: 2
-Minimum: 1
- Maximum: The lower of 10 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) -1]
•Maximum Age – The maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without
receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device
ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at
regular intervals. Any port that ages out STA information (provided in the last
configuration message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If it is
a root port, a new root port is selected from among the device ports attached to the
network. (References to “ports” in this section mean “interfaces,” which includes
both ports and trunks.)
- Default: 20
- Minimum: The higher of 6 or [2 x (Hello Time + 1)].
- Maximum: The lower of 40 or [2 x (Forward Delay - 1)]
•Forward Delay – The maximum time (in seconds) this device will wait before
changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is required
because every device must receive information about topology changes before it
starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to listen for conflicting
information that would make it return to a discarding state; otherwise, temporary
data loops might result.
- Default: 15
- Minimum: The higher of 4 or [(Max. Message Age / 2) + 1]
- Maximum: 30
Configuration Settings for RSTP
The following attributes apply to both RSTP and MSTP:
•Path Cost Method – The path cost is used to determine the best path between
devices. The path cost method is used to determine the range of values that can
be assigned to each interface.
- Long: Specifies 32-bit based values that range from 1-200,000,000.
(This is the default.)
- Short: Specifies 16-bit based values that range from 1-65535.
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration
3-143
3
•Transmission Limit – The maximum transmission rate for BPDUs is specified by
setting the minimum interval between the transmission of consecutive protocol
messages. (Range: 1-10; Default: 3)
Configuration Settings for MSTP
•Max Instance Numbers – The maximum number of MSTP instances to which this
switch can be assigned.
•Region Revision – The revision for this MSTI. (Range: 0-65535; Default: 0)
•Region Name – The name for this MSTI. (Maximum length: 32 characters)
•Maximum Hop Count – The maximum number of hops allowed in the MST region
before a BPDU is discarded. (Range: 1-40; Default: 20)
Note: The MST name and revision number are both required to uniquely identify an MST
region.
Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Configuration. Modify the required attributes, and
click Apply.
Figure 3-88 Configuring Spanning Tree
Configuring the Switch
3-144
3
CLI – This example enables Spanning Tree Protocol, sets the mode to RSTP, and
then configures the STA and RSTP parameters.
Displaying Interface Settings
The STA Port Information and STA Trunk Information pages display the current
status of ports and trunks in the Spanning Tree.
Field Attributes
•Spanning Tree – Shows if STA has been enabled on this interface.
•STA Status – Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree:
•Discarding - Port receives STA configuration messages, but does not forward
packets.
•Learning - Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by
the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information. Port
address table is cleared, and the port begins learning addresses.
•Forwarding - Port forwards packets, and continues learning addresses.
The rules defining port status are:
- A port on a network segment with no other STA compliant bridging device is
always forwarding.
- If two ports of a switch are connected to the same segment and there is no other
STA device attached to this segment, the port with the smaller ID forwards
packets and the other is discarding.
- All ports are discarding when the switch is booted, then some of them change
state to learning, and then to forwarding.
•Forward Transitions – The number of times this port has transitioned from the
Learning state to the Forwarding state.
•Designated Cost – The cost for a packet to travel from this port to the root in the
current Spanning Tree configuration. The slower the media, the higher the cost.
•Designated Bridge – The bridge priority and MAC address of the device through
which this port must communicate to reach the root of the Spanning Tree.
•Designated Port – The port priority and number of the port on the designated
bridging device through which this switch must communicate with the root of the
Spanning Tree.
•Oper Link Type – The operational point-to-point status of the LAN segment
attached to this interface. This parameter is determined by manual configuration or
Console(config)#spanning-tree 4-218
Console(config)#spanning-tree mode rstp 4-219
Console(config)#spanning-tree priority 45056 4-222
Console(config)#spanning-tree hello-time 5 4-221
Console(config)#spanning-tree max-age 38 4-221
Console(config)#spanning-tree forward-time 20 4-220
Console(config)#spanning-tree pathcost method long 4-222
Console(config)#spanning-tree transmission-limit 4 4-223
Console(config)#
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration
3-145
3
by auto-detection, as described for Admin Link Type in STA Port Configuration on
page 3-147.
•Oper Edge Port – This parameter is initialized to the setting for Admin Edge Port
in STA Port Configuration on page 3-147 (i.e., true or false), but will be set to false
if a BPDU is received, indicating that another bridge is attached to this port.
•Port Role – Roles are assigned according to whether the port is part of the active
topology connecting the bridge to the root bridge (i.e., root port), connecting a LAN
through the bridge to the root bridge (i.e., designated port), or is an alternate or
backup port that may provide connectivity if other bridges, bridge ports, or LANs
fail or are removed. The role is set to disabled (i.e., disabled port) if a port has no
role within the spanning tree.
•Trunk Member – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk.
(STA Port Information only)
These additional parameters are only displayed for the CLI:
•Admin status – Shows if this interface is enabled.
•Path cost – This parameter is used by the STA to determine the best path
between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to
faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. (Path cost
takes precedence over port priority.)
•Priority – Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Algorithm. If
the path cost for all ports on a switch is the same, the port with the highest priority
(i.e., lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree. This
makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree
Alternate port receives more
useful BPDUs from another
bridge and is therefore not
selected as the designated
port.
x
R: Root Port
A: Alternate Port
D: Designated Port
B: Backup Port
RR
ADB
Backup port receives more
useful BPDUs from the same
bridge and is therefore not
selected as the designated
port.
x
RR
ADB
Configuring the Switch
3-146
3
Algorithm is detecting network loops. Where more than one port is assigned the
highest priority, the port with the lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.
•Designated root – The priority and MAC address of the device in the Spanning
Tree that this switch has accepted as the root device.
•Fast forwarding – This field provides the same information as Admin Edge port,
and is only included for backward compatibility with earlier products.
•Admin Edge Port – You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN
segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node. Since end nodes
cannot cause forwarding loops, they can pass directly through to the spanning tree
forwarding state. Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for devices
such as workstations or servers, retains the current forwarding database to reduce
the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address tables during
reconfiguration events, does not cause the spanning tree to reconfigure when the
interface changes state, and also overcomes other STA-related timeout problems.
However, remember that Edge Port should only be enabled for ports connected to
an end-node device.
•Admin Link Type – The link type attached to this interface.
- Point-to-Point – A connection to exactly one other bridge.
- Shared – A connection to two or more bridges.
- Auto – The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a
point-to-point link or to shared media.
Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Port Information or STA Trunk Information.
Figure 3-89 Displaying Spanning Tree Port Information
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration
3-147
3
CLI – This example shows the STA attributes for port 5.
Configuring Interface Settings
You can configure RSTP and MSTP attributes for specific interfaces, including port
priority, path cost, link type, and edge port. You may use a different priority or path
cost for ports of the same media type to indicate the preferred path, link type to
indicate a point-to-point connection or shared-media connection, and edge port to
indicate if the attached device can support fast forwarding. (References to “ports” in
this section means “interfaces,” which includes both ports and trunks.)
Command Attributes
The following attributes are read-only and cannot be changed:
•STA State – Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree.
(See Displaying Interface Settings on page 3-144 for additional information.)
-Discarding - Port receives STA configuration messages, but does not forward
packets.
-Learning - Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by
the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information. Port
address table is cleared, and the port begins learning addresses.
-Forwarding - Port forwards packets, and continues learning addresses.
•Trunk – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. (STA Port Configuration only)
The following interface attributes can be configured:
•Spanning Tree – Enables/disables STA on this interface. (Default: Enabled).
•Priority – Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol. If
the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same, the port with the highest priority
(i.e., lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree. This
makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree
Console#show spanning-tree ethernet 1/5 4-235
Eth 1/ 5 information
--------------------------------------------------------------
Admin status: enabled
Role: disable
State: discarding
Path cost: 10000
Priority: 128
Designated cost: 0
Designated port : 128.5
Designated root: 32768.0012CF0B0D00
Designated bridge: 32768.0012CF0B0D00
Fast forwarding: disabled
Forward transitions: 0
Admin edge port: disabled
Oper edge port: disabled
Admin Link type: auto
Oper Link type: point-to-point
Spanning Tree Status: enabled
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-148
3
Protocol is detecting network loops. Where more than one port is assigned the
highest priority, the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.
• Default: 128
• Range: 0-240, in steps of 16
•Path Cost – This parameter is used by the STP to determine the best path
between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to
faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. (Path cost
takes precedence over port priority.) Note that when the Path Cost Method is set
to short, the maximum path cost is 65,535.
• Range –
- Ethernet: 200,000-20,000,000
- Fast Ethernet: 20,000-2,000,000
- Gigabit Ethernet: 2,000-200,000
• Default –
- Ethernet – Half duplex: 2,000,000; full duplex: 1,000,000; trunk: 500,000
- Fast Ethernet – Half duplex: 200,000; full duplex: 100,000; trunk: 50,000
- Gigabit Ethernet – Full duplex: 10,000; trunk: 5,000
•Admin Link Type – The link type attached to this interface.
- Point-to-Point – A connection to exactly one other bridge.
- Shared – A connection to two or more bridges.
- Auto – The switch automatically determines if the interface is attached to a
point-to-point link or to shared media. (This is the default setting.)
•Admin Edge Port (Fast Forwarding) – You can enable this option if an interface is
attached to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node.
Since end nodes cannot cause forwarding loops, they can pass directly through to
the spanning tree forwarding state. Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker
convergence for devices such as workstations or servers, retains the current
forwarding database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild
address tables during reconfiguration events, does not cause the spanning tree to
initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state, and also overcomes
other STA-related timeout problems. However, remember that Edge Port should
only be enabled for ports connected to an end-node device. (Default: Disabled)
•Migration – If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs, including Configuration
or Topology Change Notification BPDUs, it will automatically set the selected
interface to forced STP-compatible mode. However, you can also use the Protocol
Migration button to manually re-check the appropriate BPDU format (RSTP or
STP-compatible) to send on the selected interfaces. (Default: Disabled)
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration
3-149
3
Web – Click Spanning Tree, STA, Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration. Modify
the required attributes, then click Apply.
Figure 3-90 Configuring Spanning Tree per Port
CLI – This example sets STA attributes for port 7.
Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees
MSTP generates a unique spanning tree for each instance. This provides multiple
pathways across the network, thereby balancing the traffic load, preventing
wide-scale disruption when a bridge node in a single instance fails, and allowing for
faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance.
By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree (MST Instance 0)
that connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region. This switch supports up
to 9 instances. You should try to group VLANs which cover the same general area of
your network. However, remember that you must configure all bridges within the
same MSTI Region (page 3-133) with the same set of instances, and the same
instance (on each bridge) with the same set of VLANs. Also, note that RSTP treats
each MSTI region as a single node, connecting all regions to the Common Spanning
Tree.
To use multiple spanning trees:
1. Set the spanning tree type to MSTP (STA Configuration, page 3-130).
2. Enter the spanning tree priority for the selected MST instance (MSTP VLAN
Configuration).
3. Add the VLANs that will share this MSTI (MSTP VLAN Configuration). Note: All
VLANs are automatically added to the IST (Instance 0).
To ensure that the MSTI maintains connectivity across the network, you must
configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTI settings.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/7 4-166
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree port-priority 0 4-228
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree cost 50 4-227
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree link-type auto 4-231
Console(config-if)#no spanning-tree edge-port 4-229
Console(config-if)#
Configuring the Switch
3-150
3
Command Attributes
•MST Instance – Instance identifier of this spanning tree. (Default: 0)
•Priority – The priority of a spanning tree instance. (Range: 0-61440 in steps of
4096; Options: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864,
40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, 61440; Default: 32768)
•VLANs in MST Instance – VLANs assigned to this instance.
•MST ID – Instance identifier to configure. (Range: 0-57; Default: 0)
•VLAN ID – VLAN to assign to this selected MST instance. (Range: 1-4092)
Web – Click Spanning Tree, MSTP, VLAN Configuration. Select an instance
identifier from the list, set the instance priority, and click Apply. To add the VLAN
members to an MSTI instance, enter the instance identifier, the VLAN identifier, and
click Add.
Figure 3-91 Configuring Multiple Spanning Trees
CLI – This example sets the priority for MSTI 1, and adds VLANs 1-5 to this MSTI.
Console(config)#spanning-tree mst configuration 4-223
Console(config-mst)#mst 1 priority 4096 4-225
Console(config-mstp)#mst 1 vlan 1-5 4-224
Console(config-mst)#
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration
3-151
3
CLI – This example sets STA attributes for port 1, followed by settings for each port.
Displaying Interface Settings for MSTP
The MSTP Port Information and MSTP Trunk Information pages display the current
status of ports and trunks in the selected MST instance.
Command Attributes
•MST Instance ID – Instance identifier to configure. (Default: 0)
Note: The other attributes are described under “Displaying Interface Settings” on page
3-144
Console#show spanning-tree mst 2
Spanning-tree information
---------------------------------------------------------------
Spanning tree mode :MSTP
Spanning tree enable/disable :enable
Instance :2
Vlans configuration :2
Priority :4096
Bridge Hello Time (sec.) :2
Bridge Max Age (sec.) :20
Bridge Forward Delay (sec.) :15
Root Hello Time (sec.) :2
Root Max Age (sec.) :20
Root Forward Delay (sec.) :15
Max hops :20
Remaining hops :20
Designated Root :4096.2.0000E9313131
Current root port :0
Current root cost :0
Number of topology changes :0
Last topology changes time (sec.):646
Transmission limit :3
Path Cost Method :long
---------------------------------------------------------------
Eth 1/ 7 information
---------------------------------------------------------------
Admin status : enable
Role : disable
State : discarding
External path cost : 10000
Internal path cost : 10000
Priority : 128
Designated cost : 0
Designated port : 128.7
Designated root : 4096.2.0000E9313131
Designated bridge : 4096.2.0000E9313131
Fast forwarding : enable
Forward transitions : 0
Admin edge port : enable
Oper edge port : enable
Admin Link type : auto
Oper Link type : point-to-point
Spanning Tree Status : enable
...
Configuring the Switch
3-152
3
Web – Click Spanning Tree, MSTP, Port or Trunk Information. Select the required
MST instance to display the current spanning tree values.
Figure 3-92 Displaying MSTP Interface Settings
Spanning Tree Algorithm Configuration
3-153
3
CLI – This displays STA settings for instance 0, followed by settings for each port.
The settings for instance 0 are global settings that apply to the IST, the settings for
other instances only apply to the local spanning tree.
Configuring Interface Settings for MSTP
You can configure the STA interface settings for an MST Instance using the MSTP
Port Configuration and MSTP Trunk Configuration pages.
Field Attributes
The following attributes are read-only and cannot be changed:
•STA State – Displays current state of this port within the Spanning Tree. (See
“Displaying Interface Settings” on page 3-144 for additional information.)
Console#show spanning-tree mst 0 4-231 4-235
Spanning-tree information
---------------------------------------------------------------
Spanning tree mode :MSTP
Spanning tree enable/disable :enable
Instance :0
Vlans configuration :1-4092
Priority :32768
Bridge Hello Time (sec.) :2
Bridge Max Age (sec.) :20
Bridge Forward Delay (sec.) :15
Root Hello Time (sec.) :2
Root Max Age (sec.) :20
Root Forward Delay (sec.) :15
Max hops :20
Remaining hops :20
Designated Root :32768.0.0000ABCD0000
Current root port :1
Current root cost :200000
Number of topology changes :1
Last topology changes time (sec.):645
Transmission limit :3
Path Cost Method :long
---------------------------------------------------------------
Eth 1/ 1 information
---------------------------------------------------------------
Admin status : enable
Role : root
State : forwarding
External path cost : 100000
Internal path cost : 100000
Priority : 128
Designated cost : 200000
Designated port : 128.24
Designated root : 32768.0.0000ABCD0000
Designated bridge : 32768.0.0030F1552000
Fast forwarding : disable
Forward transitions : 1
Admin edge port : enable
Oper edge port : disable
Admin Link type : auto
Oper Link type : point-to-point
Spanning Tree Status : enable
...
Configuring the Switch
3-154
3
-Discarding – Port receives STA configuration messages, but does not forward
packets.
-Learning – Port has transmitted configuration messages for an interval set by
the Forward Delay parameter without receiving contradictory information. Port
address table is cleared, and the port begins learning addresses.
-Forwarding – Port forwards packets, and continues learning addresses.
•Trunk – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. (STA Port Configuration only)
The following interface attributes can be configured:
•MST Instance ID – Instance identifier to configure. (Default: 0)
•Priority – Defines the priority used for this port in the Spanning Tree Protocol. If
the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same, the port with the highest priority
(i.e., lowest value) will be configured as an active link in the Spanning Tree. This
makes a port with higher priority less likely to be blocked if the Spanning Tree
Protocol is detecting network loops. Where more than one port is assigned the
highest priority, the port with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.
(Default: 128; Range: 0-240, in steps of 16)
•MST Path Cost – This parameter is used by the MSTP to determine the best path
between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to
faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. (Path cost
takes precedence over port priority.) Note that when the Path Cost Method is set
to short (page 3-63), the maximum path cost is 65,535.
- Range:
Ethernet: 200,000-20,000,000
Fast Ethernet: 20,000-2,000,000
Gigabit Ethernet: 2,000-200,000
- Default:
Ethernet – Half duplex: 2,000,000; full duplex: 1,000,000; trunk: 500,000
Fast Ethernet – Half duplex: 200,000; full duplex: 100,000; trunk: 50,000
Gigabit Ethernet – Full duplex: 10,000; trunk: 5,000
VLAN Configuration
3-155
3
Web – Click Spanning Tree, MSTP, Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration. Enter
the priority and path cost for an interface, and click Apply.
Figure 3-93 Displaying MSTP Interface Settings
CLI – This example sets the MSTP attributes for port 4.
VLAN Configuration
IEEE 802.1Q VLANs
In large networks, routers are used to isolate broadcast traffic for each subnet into
separate domains. This switch provides a similar service at Layer 2 by using VLANs
to organize any group of network nodes into separate broadcast domains. VLANs
confine broadcast traffic to the originating group, and can eliminate broadcast
storms in large networks. This also provides a more secure and cleaner network
environment.
An IEEE 802.1Q VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the
network, but communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment.
VLANs help to simplify network management by allowing you to move devices to a
new VLAN without having to change any physical connections. VLANs can be easily
organized to reflect departmental groups (such as Marketing or R&D), usage groups
(such as e-mail), or multicast groups (used for multimedia applications such as
videoconferencing).
VLANs provide greater network efficiency by reducing broadcast traffic, and allow
you to make network changes without having to update IP addresses or IP subnets.
VLANs inherently provide a high level of network security since traffic must pass
through a configured Layer 3 link to reach a different VLAN.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/4
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree mst port-priority 0
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree mst cost 50
Console(config-if)
Configuring the Switch
3-156
3
This switch supports the following VLAN features:
• Up to 255 VLANs based on the IEEE 802.1Q standard
• Distributed VLAN learning across multiple switches using explicit or implicit tagging
and GVRP protocol
• Port overlapping, allowing a port to participate in multiple VLANs
• End stations can belong to multiple VLANs
• Passing traffic between VLAN-aware and VLAN-unaware devices
• Priority tagging
Note: The switch allows 255 user-manageable VLANs. One extra, unmanageable VLAN
(VLAN ID 4093) is maintained for IP clustering.
Assigning Ports to VLANs
Before enabling VLANs for the switch, you must first assign each port to the VLAN
group(s) in which it will participate. By default all ports are assigned to VLAN 1 as
untagged ports. Add a port as a tagged port if you want it to carry traffic for one or
more VLANs, and any intermediate network devices or the host at the other end of
the connection supports VLANs. Then assign ports on the other VLAN-aware
network devices along the path that will carry this traffic to the same VLAN(s), either
manually or dynamically using GVRP. However, if you want a port on this switch to
participate in one or more VLANs, but none of the intermediate network devices nor
the host at the other end of the connection supports VLANs, then you should add
this port to the VLAN as an untagged port.
Note: VLAN-tagged frames can pass through VLAN-aware or VLAN-unaware network
interconnection devices, but the VLAN tags should be stripped off before passing it
on to any end-node host that does not support VLAN tagging.
VLAN Classification – When the switch receives a frame, it classifies the frame in
one of two ways. If the frame is untagged, the switch assigns the frame to an
associated VLAN (based on the default VLAN ID of the receiving port). But if the
frame is tagged, the switch uses the tagged VLAN ID to identify the port broadcast
domain of the frame.
Port Overlapping – Port overlapping can be used to allow access to commonly
shared network resources among different VLAN groups, such as file servers or
printers. Note that if you implement VLANs which do not overlap, but still need to
communicate, you can connect them by enabled routing on this switch.
VA
VA: VLAN Aware
VU: VLAN Unaware
VA
tagged frames
VA VUVA
tagged
frames
untagged
frames
VLAN Configuration
3-157
3
Untagged VLANs – Untagged (or static) VLANs are typically used to reduce
broadcast traffic and to increase security. A group of network users assigned to a
VLAN form a broadcast domain that is separate from other VLANs configured on the
switch. Packets are forwarded only between ports that are designated for the same
VLAN. Untagged VLANs can be used to manually isolate user groups or subnets.
However, you should use IEEE 802.3 tagged VLANs with GVRP whenever possible
to fully automate VLAN registration.
Automatic VLAN Registration – GVRP (GARP VLAN Registration Protocol)
defines a system whereby the switch can automatically learn the VLANs to which
each end station should be assigned. If an end station (or its network adapter)
supports the IEEE 802.1Q VLAN protocol, it can be configured to broadcast a
message to your network indicating the VLAN groups it wants to join. When this
switch receives these messages, it will automatically place the receiving port in the
specified VLANs, and then forward the message to all other ports. When the
message arrives at another switch that supports GVRP, it will also place the
receiving port in the specified VLANs, and pass the message on to all other ports.
VLAN requirements are propagated in this way throughout the network. This allows
GVRP-compliant devices to be automatically configured for VLAN groups based
solely on endstation requests.
To implement GVRP in a network, first add the host devices to the required VLANs
(using the operating system or other application software), so that these VLANs can
be propagated onto the network. For both the edge switches attached directly to
these hosts, and core switches in the network, enable GVRP on the links between
these devices. You should also determine security boundaries in the network and
disable GVRP on the boundary ports to prevent advertisements from being
propagated, or forbid those ports from joining restricted VLANs.
Note: If you have host devices that do not support GVRP, you should configure static or
untagged VLANs for the switch ports connected to these devices (as described in
“Adding Static Members to VLANs (VLAN Index)” on page 3-162). But you can still
enable GVRP on these edge switches, as well as on the core switches in the
network.
Port-based VLAN
1
2
93 4
10 11 12
13
14
5 6 7 8
15 16 18
19
Configuring the Switch
3-158
3
Forwarding Tagged/Untagged Frames
If you want to create a small port-based VLAN for devices attached directly to a
single switch, you can assign ports to the same untagged VLAN. However, to
participate in a VLAN group that crosses several switches, you should create a
VLAN for that group and enable tagging on all ports.
Ports can be assigned to multiple tagged VLANs, but are only allowed one untagged
VLAN. Each port on the switch is capable of passing tagged or untagged frames.
When forwarding a frame from this switch along a path that contains any
VLAN-aware devices, the switch should include VLAN tags. When forwarding a
frame from this switch along a path that does not contain any VLAN-aware devices
(including the destination host), the switch must first strip off the VLAN tag before
forwarding the frame. When the switch receives a tagged frame, it will pass this
frame onto the VLAN(s) indicated by the frame tag. However, when this switch
receives an untagged frame from a VLAN-unaware device, it first decides where to
forward the frame, and then inserts a VLAN tag reflecting the ingress port’s default
VID.
Enabling or Disabling GVRP (Global Setting)
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP) defines a way for switches to exchange
VLAN information in order to register VLAN members on ports across the network.
VLANs are dynamically configured based on join messages issued by host devices
and propagated throughout the network. GVRP must be enabled to permit automatic
VLAN registration, and to support VLANs which extend beyond the local switch.
(Default: Disabled)
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, GVRP Status. Enable or disable GVRP, click
Apply
Figure 3-94 Globally Enabling GVRP
CLI – This example enables GVRP for the switch.
Console(config)#bridge-ext gvrp 4-239
Console(config)#
VLAN Configuration
3-159
3
Displaying Basic VLAN Information
The VLAN Basic Information page displays basic information on the VLAN type
supported by the switch.
Field Attributes
•VLAN Version Number10 – The VLAN version used by this switch as specified in
the IEEE 802.1Q standard.
•Maximum VLAN ID – Maximum VLAN ID recognized by this switch.
•Maximum Number of Supported VLANs – Maximum number of VLANs that can
be configured on this switch.
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Basic Information.
Figure 3-95 Displaying Basic VLAN Information
CLI – Enter the following command.
Displaying Current VLANs
The VLAN Current Table shows the current port members of each VLAN and
whether or not the port supports VLAN tagging. Ports assigned to a large VLAN
group that crosses several switches should use VLAN tagging. However, if you just
want to create a small port-based VLAN for one or two switches, you can disable
tagging.
Command Attributes (Web)
•VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4093).
•Up Time at Creation – Time this VLAN was created (i.e., System Up Time).
10. Web Only.
Console#show bridge-ext 4-239
Max support vlan numbers: 256
Max support vlan ID: 4092
Extended multicast filtering services: No
Static entry individual port: Yes
VLAN learning: IVL
Configurable PVID tagging: Yes
Local VLAN capable: No
Traffic classes: Enabled
Global GVRP status: Enabled
GMRP: Disabled
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-160
3
•Status – Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch.
- Dynamic GVRP: Automatically learned via GVRP.
- Permanent: Added as a static entry.
•Egress Ports – Shows all the VLAN port members.
•Untagged Ports – Shows the untagged VLAN port members.
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Current Table. Select any ID from the scroll-down
list.
Figure 3-96 Displaying Current VLANs
Command Attributes (CLI)
•VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4092, no leading zeroes).
•Type – Shows how this VLAN was added to the switch.
- Dynamic: Automatically learned via GVRP.
- Static: Added as a static entry.
•Name – Name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters).
•Status – Shows if this VLAN is enabled or disabled.
- Active: VLAN is operational.
- Suspend: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.
•Ports / Channel groups – Shows the VLAN interface members.
VLAN Configuration
3-161
3
CLI – Current VLAN information can be displayed with the following command.
Creating VLANs
Use the VLAN Static List to create or remove VLAN groups. To propagate
information about VLAN groups used on this switch to external network devices, you
must specify a VLAN ID for each of these groups.
Command Attributes
•Current – Lists all the current VLAN groups created for this system. Up to 255
VLAN groups can be defined. VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN. VLAN 4093
is reserved for IP clustering and is not user-configurable or removable.
•New – Allows you to specify the name and numeric identifier for a new VLAN
group. (The VLAN name is only used for management on this system; it is not
added to the VLAN tag.)
•VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4092, no leading zeroes).
•VLAN Name – Name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters, no spaces).
•Status (Web) – Enables or disables the specified VLAN.
- Enabled: VLAN is operational.
- Disabled: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.
•State (CLI) – Enables or disables the specified VLAN.
- Active: VLAN is operational.
- Suspend: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.
•Add – Adds a new VLAN group to the current list.
•Remove – Removes a VLAN group from the current list. If any port is assigned to
this group as untagged, it will be reassigned to VLAN group 1 as untagged.
Console#show vlan id 1 4-250
Vlan ID: 1
Type: Static
Name: DefaultVlan
Status: Active
Ports/Port channel: Eth1/ 1(S) Eth1/ 2(S) Eth1/ 3(S) Eth1/ 4(S) Eth1/ 5(S)
Eth1/ 6(S) Eth1/ 7(S) Eth1/ 8(S) Eth1/ 9(S) Eth1/10(S)
Eth1/11(S) Eth1/12(S) Eth1/13(S) Eth1/14(S) Eth1/15(S)
Eth1/16(S) Eth1/17(S) Eth1/18(S) Eth1/19(S) Eth1/20(S)
Eth1/21(S) Eth1/22(S) Eth1/23(S) Eth1/24(S) Eth1/25(S)
Eth1/26(S) Eth1/27(S) Eth1/28(S)
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-162
3
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Static List. To create a new VLAN, enter the
VLAN ID and VLAN name, mark the Enable checkbox to activate the VLAN, and
then click Add.
Figure 3-97 Configuring a VLAN Static List
CLI – This example creates a new VLAN.
Adding Static Members to VLANs (VLAN Index)
Use the VLAN Static Table to configure port members for the selected VLAN index.
Assign ports as tagged if they are connected to 802.1Q VLAN compliant devices, or
untagged they are not connected to any VLAN-aware devices. Or configure a port
as forbidden to prevent the switch from automatically adding it to a VLAN via the
GVRP protocol.
Notes: 1. You can also use the VLAN Static Membership by Port page to configure
VLAN groups based on the port index (page 3-164). However, note that this
configuration page can only add ports to a VLAN as tagged members.
2. VLAN 1 is the default untagged VLAN containing all ports on the switch, and
can only be modified by first reassigning the default port VLAN ID as
described under “Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces” on page 3-165.
Console(config)#vlan database 4-242
Console(config-vlan)#vlan 2 name R&D media ethernet state active 4-243
Console(config-vlan)#end
Console#show vlan 4-250
Vlan ID: 1
Type: Static
Name: DefaultVlan
Status: Active
Ports/Port channel: Eth1/ 1(S) Eth1/ 2(S) Eth1/ 3(S) Eth1/ 4(S) Eth1/ 5(S)
Eth1/ 6(S) Eth1/ 7(S) Eth1/ 8(S) Eth1/ 9(S) Eth1/10(S)
Eth1/11(S) Eth1/12(S) Eth1/13(S) Eth1/14(S) Eth1/15(S)
Eth1/16(S) Eth1/17(S) Eth1/18(S) Eth1/19(S) Eth1/20(S)
Eth1/21(S) Eth1/22(S) Eth1/23(S) Eth1/24(S) Eth1/25(S)
Eth1/26(S) Eth1/27(S) Eth1/28(S)
Vlan ID: 2
Type: Static
Name: R&D
Status: Active
Ports/Port Channel:
Console#
VLAN Configuration
3-163
3
Command Attributes
•VLAN – ID of configured VLAN (1-4093).
•Name – Name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters).
•Status – Enables or disables the specified VLAN.
-Enable: VLAN is operational.
-Disable: VLAN is suspended; i.e., does not pass packets.
•Port – Port identifier.
•Membership Type – Select VLAN membership for each interface by marking the
appropriate radio button for a port or trunk:
-Tagged: Interface is a member of the VLAN. All packets transmitted by the port
will be tagged, that is, carry a tag and therefore carry VLAN or CoS information.
-Untagged: Interface is a member of the VLAN. All packets transmitted by the
port will be untagged, that is, not carry a tag and therefore not carry VLAN or
CoS information. Note that an interface can only have one untagged VLAN,
which must be the same as the Port VID. See “Configuring VLAN Behavior for
Interfaces” on page 3-165 for configuring PVID.
-Forbidden: Interface is forbidden from automatically joining the VLAN via
GVRP. For more information, see “Automatic VLAN Registration” on page
3-157.
-None: Interface is not a member of the VLAN. Packets associated with this
VLAN will not be transmitted by the interface.
-Trunk Member – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. To add a trunk to the
selected VLAN, use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page.
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Static Table. Select a VLAN ID from the
scroll-down list. Modify the VLAN name and status if required. Select the
membership type by marking the appropriate radio button in the list of ports or
trunks. Click Apply.
Configuring the Switch
3-164
3
Figure 3-98 Configuring a VLAN Static Table
CLI – The following example adds tagged and untagged ports to VLAN 2.
Adding Static Members to VLANs (Port Index)
Use the VLAN Static Membership by Port menu to assign VLAN groups to the
selected interface as a tagged member.
Command Attributes
•Interface – Port or trunk identifier.
•Member – VLANs for which the selected interface is a tagged member.
•Non-Member – VLANs for which the selected interface is not a tagged member.
Web – Open VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Static Membership by Port. Select an interface
from the scroll-down box (Port or Trunk). Click Query to display membership
information for the interface. Select a VLAN ID, and then click Add to add the
interface as a tagged member, or click Remove to remove the interface. After
configuring VLAN membership for each interface, click Apply.
Figure 3-99 VLAN Static Membership by Port
CLI – This example adds Port 3 to VLAN 1 as a tagged port, and removes Port 3
from VLAN 2.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 4-166
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged 4-248
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 2 untagged
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/13
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 2 tagged
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3 4-166
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 1 tagged 4-248
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan remove 2
VLAN Configuration
3-165
3
Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces
You can configure VLAN behavior for specific interfaces, including the default VLAN
identifier (PVID), accepted frame types, ingress filtering, GVRP status, and GARP
timers.
Command Usage
•GVRP – GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to
exchange VLAN information in order to automatically register VLAN members on
interfaces across the network.
•GARP – Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP to register or
deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN. The default
values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access method or data
rate. These values should not be changed unless you are experiencing difficulties
with GVRP registration/deregistration.
Command Attributes
•PVID –
VLAN ID assigned to untagged frames received on the interface. (Default: 1)
- If an interface is not a member of VLAN 1 and you assign its PVID to this VLAN,
the interface will automatically be added to VLAN 1 as an untagged member. For
all other VLANs, the PVID must be defined first, then the status of the VLAN can
be configured as a tagged or untagged member.
•Acceptable Frame Type – Sets the interface to accept all frame types, including
tagged or untagged frames, or only tagged frames. When set to receive all frame
types, any received frames that are untagged are assigned to the default VLAN.
(Options: All, Tagged; Default: All)
•Ingress Filtering – Determines how to process frames tagged for VLANs for which
the ingress port is not a member. Ingress Filtering is always enabled.
(Default: Enabled)
- Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames.
- If a port receives frames tagged for VLANs for which it is not a member, these
frames will be discarded.
-
Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames, such as GVRP
or STP. However, they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames, such as GMRP.
•GVRP Status – Enables/disables GVRP for the interface. GVRP must be globally
enabled for the switch before this setting can take effect. (See “Displaying Bridge
Extension Capabilities” on page 3-15.) When disabled, any GVRP packets
received on this port will be discarded and no GVRP registrations will be
propagated from other ports. (Default: Disabled)
•GARP Join Timer11 – The interval between transmitting requests/queries to
participate in a VLAN group. (Range: 20-1000 centiseconds; Default: 20)
•GARP Leave Timer9 – The interval a port waits before leaving a VLAN group. This
time should be set to more than twice the join time. This ensures that after a Leave
11. Timer settings must follow this rule: 2 x (join timer) < leave timer < leaveAll timer
Configuring the Switch
3-166
3
or LeaveAll message has been issued, the applicants can rejoin before the port
actually leaves the group. (Range: 60-3000 centiseconds; Default: 60)
•GARP LeaveAll Timer9 – The interval between sending out a LeaveAll query
message for VLAN group participants and the port leaving the group. This interval
should be considerably larger than the Leave Time to minimize the amount of traffic
generated by nodes rejoining the group.
(Range: 500-18000 centiseconds; Default: 1000)
•Mode – Indicates VLAN membership mode for an interface. (Default: Hybrid)
-1Q Trunk – Specifies a port as an end-point for a VLAN trunk. A trunk is a direct
link between two switches, so the port transmits tagged frames that identify the
source VLAN. Note that frames belonging to the port’s default VLAN (i.e.,
associated with the PVID) are also transmitted as tagged frames.
-Hybrid – Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface. The port may transmit tagged or
untagged frames.
•Trunk Member – Indicates if a port is a member of a trunk. To add a trunk to the
selected VLAN, use the last table on the VLAN Static Table page.
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration. Fill in
the required settings for each interface, click Apply.
Figure 3-100 Configuring VLANs per Port
VLAN Configuration
3-167
3
CLI – This example sets port 3 to accept only tagged frames, assigns PVID 3 as the
native VLAN ID, enables GVRP, sets the GARP timers, and then sets the switchport
mode to hybrid.
Configuring IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling
IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling (QinQ) is designed for service providers carrying traffic for
multiple customers across their networks. QinQ tunneling is used to maintain
customer-specific VLAN and Layer 2 protocol configurations even when different
customers use the same internal VLAN IDs. This is accomplished by inserting
Service Provider VLAN (SPVLAN) tags into the customer’s frames when they enter
the service provider’s network, and then stripping the tags when the frames leave
the network.
A service provider’s customers may have specific requirements for their internal
VLAN IDs and number of VLANs supported. VLAN ranges required by different
customers in the same service-provider network might easily overlap, and traffic
passing through the infrastructure might be mixed. Assigning a unique range of
VLAN IDs to each customer would restrict customer configurations, require intensive
processing of VLAN mapping tables, and could easily exceed the maximum VLAN
limit of 4096.
QinQ tunneling uses a single Service Provider VLAN (SPVLAN) for customers who
have multiple VLANs. Customer VLAN IDs are preserved and traffic from different
customers is segregated within the service provider’s network even when they use
the same customer-specific VLAN IDs. QinQ tunneling expands VLAN space by
using a VLAN-in-VLAN hierarchy, preserving the customer’s original tagged packets,
and adding SPVLAN tags to each frame (also called double tagging).
A port configured to support QinQ tunneling must be set to tunnel port mode. The
Service Provider VLAN (SPVLAN) ID for the specific customer must be assigned to
the QinQ tunnel access port on the edge switch where the customer traffic enters
the service provider’s network. Each customer requires a separate SPVLAN, but this
VLAN supports all of the customer's internal VLANs. The QinQ tunnel uplink port
that passes traffic from the edge switch into the service provider’s metro network
must also be added to this SPVLAN. The uplink port can be added to multiple
SPVLANs to carry inbound traffic for different customers onto the service provider’s
network.
When a double-tagged packet enters another trunk port in an intermediate or core
switch in the service provider’s network, the outer tag is stripped for packet
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3 4-166
Console(config-if)#switchport acceptable-frame-types tagged 4-246
Console(config-if)#switchport ingress-filtering 4-246
Console(config-if)#switchport native vlan 3 4-247
Console(config-if)#switchport gvrp 4-240
Console(config-if)#garp timer join 20 4-241
Console(config-if)#garp timer leave 90
Console(config-if)#garp timer leaveall 2000
Console(config-if)#switchport mode hybrid 4-245
Console(config-if)#
Configuring the Switch
3-168
3
processing. When the packet exits another trunk port on the same core switch, the
same SPVLAN tag is again added to the packet.
When a packet enters the trunk port on the service provider’s egress switch, the
outer tag is again stripped for packet processing. However, the SPVLAN tag is not
added when it is sent out the tunnel access port on the edge switch into the
customer’s network. The packet is sent as a normal IEEE 802.1Q-tagged frame,
preserving the original VLAN numbers used in the customer’s network.
Layer 2 Flow for Packets Coming into a Tunnel Access Port
A QinQ tunnel port may receive either tagged or untagged packets. No matter how
many tags the incoming packet has, it is treated as tagged packet.
The ingress process does source and destination lookups. If both lookups are
successful, the ingress process writes the packet to memory. Then the egress
process transmits the packet. Packets entering a QinQ tunnel port are processed in
the following manner:
1. New SPVLAN tags are added to all incoming packets, no matter how many tags
they already have. The ingress process constructs and inserts the outer tag
(SPVLAN) into the packet based on the default VLAN ID and Tag Protocol
Identifier (TPID, that is, the ether-type of the tag). This outer tag is used for
learning and switching packets. The priority of the inner tag is copied to the outer
tag if it is a tagged or priority tagged packet.
2. After successful source and destination lookup, the ingress process sends the
packet to the switching process with two tags. If the incoming packet is
untagged, the outer tag is an SPVLAN tag, and the inner tag is a dummy tag
(8100 0000). If the incoming packet is tagged, the outer tag is an SPVLAN tag,
and the inner tag is a CVLAN tag.
3. After packet classification through the switching process, the packet is written to
memory with one tag (an outer tag) or with two tags (both an outer tag and inner
tag).
4. The switch sends the packet to the proper egress port.
Tunnel Uplink Ports
Double-Tagged Packets
Outer Tag - Service Provider VID
Inner Tag - Customer VID
QinQ Tunneling
Service Provider
(edge switch A)
Customer A
(VLANs 1-10)
Customer B
(VLANs 1-50)
Customer A
(VLANs 1-10)
Customer B
(VLANs 1-50)
Service Provider
(edge switch B) VLAN 10
Tunnel PortAccess
Tunnel Port
VLAN 20
Access
VLAN 10
Tunnel PortAccess
Tunnel Port
VLAN 20
Access
VLAN Configuration
3-169
3
5. If the egress port is an untagged member of the SPVLAN, the outer tag will be
stripped. If it is a tagged member, the outgoing packets will have two tags.
Layer 2 Flow for Packets Coming into a Tunnel Uplink Port
An uplink port receives one of the following packets:
• Untagged
• One tag (CVLAN or SPVLAN)
• Double tag (CVLAN + SPVLAN)
The ingress process does source and destination lookups. If both lookups are
successful, the ingress process writes the packet to memory. Then the egress
process transmits the packet. Packets entering a QinQ uplink port are processed in
the following manner:
1. If incoming packets are untagged, the PVID VLAN native tag is added.
2. If the ether-type of an incoming packet (single or double tagged) is not equal to
the TPID of the uplink port, the VLAN tag is determined to be a Customer VLAN
(CVLAN) tag. The uplink port’s PVID VLAN native tag is added to the packet.
This outer tag is used for learning and switching packets within the service
provider’s network. The TPID must be configured on a per port basis, and the
verification cannot be disabled.
3. If the ether-type of an incoming packet (single or double tagged) is equal to the
TPID of the uplink port, no new VLAN tag is added. If the uplink port is not the
member of the outer VLAN of the incoming packets, the packet will be dropped
when ingress filtering is enabled. If ingress filtering is not enabled, the packet will
still be forwarded. If the VLAN is not listed in the VLAN table, the packet will be
dropped.
4. After successful source and destination lookups, the packet is double tagged.
The switch uses the TPID of 0x8100 to indicate that an incoming packet is
double-tagged. If the outer tag of an incoming double-tagged packet is equal to
the port TPID and the inner tag is 0x8100, it is treated as a double-tagged
packet. If a single-tagged packet has 0x8100 as its TPID, and port TPID is not
0x8100, a new VLAN tag is added and it is also treated as double-tagged packet.
5. If the destination address lookup fails, the packet is sent to all member ports of
the outer tag's VLAN.
6. After packet classification, the packet is written to memory for processing as a
single-tagged or double-tagged packet.
7. The switch sends the packet to the proper egress port.
8. If the egress port is an untagged member of the SPVLAN, the outer tag will be
stripped. If it is a tagged member, the outgoing packet will have two tags.
Configuring the Switch
3-170
3
Configuration Limitations for QinQ
• The native VLAN of uplink ports should not be used as the SPVLAN. If the SPVLAN
is the uplink port's native VLAN, the uplink port must be an untagged member of
the SPVLAN. Then the outer SPVLAN tag will be stripped when the packets are
sent out. Another reason is that it causes non-customer packets to be forwarded
to the SPVLAN.
• Static trunk port groups are compatible with QinQ tunnel ports as long as the QinQ
configuration is consistent within a trunk port group.
• The native VLAN (VLAN 1) is not normally added to transmitted frames. Avoid
using VLAN 1 as an SPVLAN tag for customer traffic to reduce the risk of
misconfiguration. Instead, use VLAN 1 as a management VLAN instead of a data
VLAN in the service provider network.
• There are some inherent incompatibilities between Layer 2 and Layer 3 switching:
- Tunnel ports do not support IP Access Control Lists.
- Layer 3 Quality of Service (QoS) and other QoS features containing Layer 3
information are not supported on tunnel ports.
- Spanning tree bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) filtering is automatically disabled
on a tunnel port.
General Configuration Guidelines for QinQ
1. Configure the switch to QinQ mode (see “Enabling QinQ Tunneling on the
Switch” on page 3-170).
2. Set the Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) value of the tunnel access port. This step is
required if the attached client is using a nonstandard 2-byte ethertype to identify
802.1Q tagged frames. The default ethertype value is 0x8100. (See “Adding an
Interface to a QinQ Tunnel” on page 3-172.)
3. Create a Service Provider VLAN, also referred to as an SPVLAN (see “Creating
VLANs” on page 3-161).
4. Configure the QinQ tunnel access port to 802.1Q Tunnel mode (see “Adding an
Interface to a QinQ Tunnel” on page 3-172).
5. Configure the QinQ tunnel access port to join the SPVLAN as an untagged
member (see “Adding Static Members to VLANs (VLAN Index)” on page 3-162).
6. Configure the SPVLAN ID as the native VID on the QinQ tunnel access port (see
“Configuring VLAN Behavior for Interfaces” on page 3-165).
7. Configure the QinQ tunnel uplink port to 802.1Q Tunnel Uplink mode (see
“Adding an Interface to a QinQ Tunnel” on page 3-172).
8. Configure the QinQ tunnel uplink port to join the SPVLAN as a tagged member
(see “Adding Static Members to VLANs (VLAN Index)” on page 3-162).
Enabling QinQ Tunneling on the Switch
The switch can be configured to operate in normal VLAN mode or IEEE 802.1Q
(QinQ) tunneling mode which is used for passing Layer 2 traffic across a service
provider’s metropolitan area network. You can also globally set the Tag Protocol
VLAN Configuration
3-171
3
Identifier (TPID) value of the tunnel port if the attached client is using a nonstandard
2-byte ethertype to identify 802.1Q tagged frames.
Command Usage
• Use the TPID field to set a custom 802.1Q ethertype value on the selected
interface. This feature allows the switch to interoperate with third-party switches
that do not use the standard 0x8100 ethertype to identify 802.1Q-tagged frames.
For example, if 0x1234 is set as the custom 802.1Q ethertype on a trunk port,
incoming frames containing that ethertype are assigned to the VLAN contained in
the tag following the ethertype field, as they would be with a standard 802.1Q trunk.
Frames arriving on the port containing any other ethertype are looked upon as
untagged frames, and assigned to the native VLAN of that port.
• All ports on the switch will be set to the same ethertype.
Command Attributes
•802.1Q Tunnel – Sets the switch to QinQ mode, sets the 802.1Q Ethernet Type
(TPID), and allows the QinQ tunnel port to be configured. The default is for the
switch to function in normal mode.
•802.1Q Ethernet Type – The Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) specifies the ethertype
of incoming packets on a tunnel port. (Range: hexadecimal 0800-FFFF;
Default: 8100)
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, 802.1Q Tunnel Status. Check the Enabled box,
set the TPID of the ports if the client is using a non-standard ethertype to identify
802.1Q tagged frames, and click Apply.
Figure 3-101 802.1Q Tunnel Status and Ethernet Type
Configuring the Switch
3-172
3
CLI – This example sets the switch to operate in QinQ mode.
Adding an Interface to a QinQ Tunnel
Follow the guidelines in the preceding section to set up a QinQ tunnel on the switch.
Use the VLAN Port Configuration or VLAN Trunk Configuration screen to set the
access port on the edge switch to 802.1Q Tunnel mode.
Command Usage
Use the 802.1Q Tunnel Status screen to set the switch to QinQ mode before
configuring a tunnel port (see “Enabling QinQ Tunneling on the Switch” on page
3-170).
Command Attributes
Mode – Set the VLAN membership mode of the port. (Default: None)
•None – The port operates in its normal VLAN mode.
•802.1Q Tunnel – Configures IEEE 802.1Q tunneling (QinQ) for a client access port
to segregate and preserve customer VLAN IDs for traffic crossing the service
provider network.
•802.1Q Tunnel Uplink – Configures IEEE 802.1Q tunneling (QinQ) for an uplink
port to another device within the service provider network.
Console(config)#dot1q-tunnel system-tunnel-control 4-251
Console(config)#exit
Console#show dot1q-tunnel 4-253
Current double-tagged status of the system is Enabled
The dot1q-tunnel mode of the set interface 1/1 is Access mode, TPID is 0x8100.
The dot1q-tunnel mode of the set interface 1/2 is Uplink mode, TPID is 0x8100.
The dot1q-tunnel mode of the set interface 1/3 is Normal mode, TPID is 0x8100.
The dot1q-tunnel mode of the set interface 1/4 is Normal mode, TPID is 0x8100.
The dot1q-tunnel mode of the set interface 1/5 is Normal mode, TPID is 0x8100.
.
.
.
The dot1q-tunnel mode of the set interface 1/24 is Normal mode, TPID is 0x8100.
Console#
VLAN Configuration
3-173
3
Web – Click VLAN, 802.1Q VLAN, 802.1Q Tunnel Configuration or Tunnel Trunk
Configuration. Set the mode for a tunnel access port to 802.1Q Tunnel and a tunnel
uplink port to 802.1Q Tunnel Uplink. Click Apply.
Figure 3-102 Tunnel Port Configuration
CLI – This example sets port 1 to tunnel access mode, indicates that the TPID used
for 802.1Q tagged frames is 9100 hexadecimal, and sets port 2 to tunnel uplink
mode.
Private VLANs
Private VLANs provide port-based security and isolation between ports within
the assigned VLAN. This switch supports two types of private VLANs: primary/
secondary associated groups, and stand-alone isolated VLANs. A primary VLAN
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 4-166
Console(config-if)#switchport dot1q-tunnel mode access 4-252
Console(config-if)#switchport dot1q-tunnel tpid 9100 4-253
Console(config-if)#interface ethernet 1/2
Console(config-if)#switchport dot1q-tunnel mode uplink 4-252
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show dot1q-tunnel 4-253
Current double-tagged status of the system is Enabled
The dot1q-tunnel mode of the set interface 1/1 is Access mode, TPID is 0x9100.
The dot1q-tunnel mode of the set interface 1/2 is Uplink mode, TPID is 0x8100.
The dot1q-tunnel mode of the set interface 1/3 is Normal mode, TPID is 0x8100.
The dot1q-tunnel mode of the set interface 1/4 is Normal mode, TPID is 0x8100.
The dot1q-tunnel mode of the set interface 1/5 is Normal mode, TPID is 0x8100.
The dot1q-tunnel mode of the set interface 1/6 is Normal mode, TPID is 0x8100.
The dot1q-tunnel mode of the set interface 1/7 is Normal mode, TPID is 0x8100.
.
.
.
.
The dot1q-tunnel mode of the set interface 1/24 is Normal mode, TPID is 0x8100.
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-174
3
contains promiscuous ports that can communicate with all other ports in the private
VLAN group, while a secondary (or community) VLAN contains community ports
that can only communicate with other hosts within the secondary VLAN and with any
of the promiscuous ports in the associated primary VLAN. Isolated VLANs, on the
other hand, consist a single stand-alone VLAN that contains one promiscuous port
and one or more isolated (or host) ports. In all cases, the promiscuous ports are
designed to provide open access to an external network such as the Internet, while
the community or isolated ports provide restricted access to local users.
Multiple primary VLANs can be configured on this switch, and multiple community
VLANs can be associated with each primary VLAN. One or more isolated VLANs
can also be configured. (Note that private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist
simultaneously within the same switch.)
To configure primary/secondary associated groups, follow these steps:
1. Use the Private VLAN Configuration menu (page 3-175) to designate one or
more community VLANs, and the primary VLAN that will channel traffic outside
of the VLAN groups.
2. Use the Private VLAN Association menu (page 3-176) to map the secondary
(i.e., community) VLAN(s) to the primary VLAN.
3. Use the Private VLAN Port Configuration menu (page 3-178) to set the port
type to promiscuous (i.e., having access to all ports in the primary VLAN), or
host (i.e., having access restricted to community VLAN members, and
channeling all other traffic through promiscuous ports). Then assign any
promiscuous ports to a primary VLAN and any host ports a community VLAN.
To configure an isolated VLAN, follow these steps:
1. Use the Private VLAN Configuration menu (page 3-175) to designate an
isolated VLAN that will channel all traffic through a single promiscuous port.
2. Use the Private VLAN Port Configuration menu (page 3-178) to set the port
type to promiscuous (i.e., the single channel to the external network), or
isolated (i.e., having access only to the promiscuous port in its own VLAN).
Then assign the promiscuous port and all host ports to an isolated VLAN.
Displaying Current Private VLANs
The Private VLAN Information page displays information on the private VLANs
configured on the switch, including primary, community, and isolated VLANs, and
their assigned interfaces.
Command Attributes
•VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4092), and VLAN type.
•Primary VLAN – The VLAN with which the selected VLAN ID is associated. A
primary VLAN displays its own ID, a community VLAN displays the associated
primary VLAN, and an isolated VLAN displays the stand-alone VLAN.
•Ports List – The list of ports (and assigned port type) in the selected private VLAN.
VLAN Configuration
3-175
3
Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Information. Select the desired port from the
VLAN ID drop-down menu.
Figure 3-103 Private VLAN Information
CLI – This example shows the switch configured with primary VLAN 5 and
secondary VLAN 6. Port 3 has been configured as a promiscuous port and mapped
to VLAN 5, while ports 4 and 5 have been configured as a host ports and are
associated with VLAN 6. This means that traffic for port 4 and 5 can only pass
through port 3.
Configuring Private VLANs
The Private VLAN Configuration page is used to create/remove primary, community,
or isolated VLANs.
Command Attributes
•VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (2-4092).
•Type – There are three types of private VLANs:
-Primary VLANs – Conveys traffic between promiscuous ports, and to
community ports within secondary (or community) VLANs.
-Community VLANs - Conveys traffic between community ports, and to their
promiscuous ports in the associated primary VLAN.
•Current – Displays a list of the currently configured VLANs.
Console#show vlan private-vlan 4-153
Primary Secondary Type Interfaces
-------- ----------- ---------- --------------------------------------
5 primary Eth1/ 3
5 6 community Eth1/ 4 Eth1/ 5
Configuring the Switch
3-176
3
Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Configuration. Enter the VLAN ID number, select
Primary, Isolated or Community type, then click Add. To remove a private VLAN from
the switch, highlight an entry in the Current list box and then click Remove. Note that
all member ports must be removed from the VLAN before it can be deleted.
Figure 3-104 Private VLAN Configuration
CLI – This example configures VLAN 5 as a primary VLAN, and VLAN 6 as a
community VLAN.
Associating VLANs
Each community VLAN must be associated with a primary VLAN.
Command Attributes
•Primary VLAN ID – ID of primary VLAN (2-4092).
•Association – Community VLANs associated with the selected primary VLAN.
•Non-Association – Community VLANs not associated with the selected VLAN.
Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Association. Select the required primary VLAN
from the scroll-down box, highlight one or more community VLANs in the
Non-Association list box, and click Add to associate these entries with the selected
primary VLAN. (A community VLAN can only be associated with one primary VLAN.)
Figure 3-105 Private VLAN Association
Console(config)#vlan database 4-242
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 5 primary 4-256
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 6 community
Console(config-vlan)#
VLAN Configuration
3-177
3
CLI – This example associates community VLANs 6 and 7 with primary VLAN 5.
Displaying Private VLAN Interface Information
Use the Private VLAN Port Information and Private VLAN Trunk Information menus
to display the interfaces associated with private VLANs.
Command Attributes
•Port/Trunk – The switch interface.
•PVLAN Port Type – Displays private VLAN port types.
-Normal – The port is not configured in a private VLAN.
-Host – The port is a community port and can only communicate with other ports
in its own community VLAN, and with the designated promiscuous port(s). Or the
port is an isolated port that can only communicate with the lone promiscuous
port within its own isolated VLAN.
-Promiscuous – A promiscuous port can communicate with all the interfaces
within a private VLAN.
•Primary VLAN – Conveys traffic between promiscuous ports, and between
promiscuous ports and community ports within the associated secondary VLANs.
•Community VLAN – A community VLAN conveys traffic between community
ports, and from community ports to their designated promiscuous ports.
•Trunk – The trunk identifier. (Port Information only)
Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Port Information or Trunk Information.
Figure 3-106 Private VLAN Port Information
Console(config)#vlan database 4-242
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 5 association 6 4-256
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 5 association 7 4-256
Console(config)#
Configuring the Switch
3-178
3
CLI – This example shows the switch configured with primary VLAN 5 and
community VLAN 6. Port 3 has been configured as a promiscuous port and mapped
to VLAN 5, while ports 4 and 5 have been configured as host ports and associated
with VLAN 6. This means that traffic for port 4 and 5 can only pass through port 3.
Configuring Private VLAN Interfaces
Use the Private VLAN Port Configuration and Private VLAN Trunk Configuration
menus to set the private VLAN interface type, and assign the interfaces to a private
VLAN.
Command Attributes
•Port/Trunk – The switch interface.
•PVLAN Port Type – Sets the private VLAN port types.
-Normal – The port is not assigned to a private VLAN.
-Host – The port is a community port or an isolated port. A community port can
communicate with other ports in its own community VLAN and with designated
promiscuous port(s). An isolated port can only communicate with the single
designated promiscuous port in the isolated VLAN; it cannot communicate with
any other host ports.
-Promiscuous – A promiscuous port can communicate with all interfaces within
a private VLAN.
•Primary VLAN – Conveys traffic between promiscuous ports, and between
promiscuous ports and community ports within the associated secondary VLANs.
If PVLAN type is “Promiscuous,” then specify the associated primary VLAN.
•Community VLAN – A community VLAN conveys traffic between community
ports, and from community ports to their designated promiscuous ports. Set
PVLAN Port Type to “Host,” and then specify the associated Community VLAN.
•Trunk – The trunk identifier. (Port Information only)
Console#show vlan private-vlan 4-259
Primary Secondary Type Interfaces
-------- ----------- ---------- ------------------------------
5 primary Eth1/ 3
5 6 community Eth1/ 4 Eth1/ 5
Console#
VLAN Configuration
3-179
3
Web – Click VLAN, Private VLAN, Port Configuration or Trunk Configuration. Set the
PVLAN Port Type for each port that will join a private VLAN. Assign promiscuous
ports to a primary VLAN. Assign host ports to a community VLAN. After all the ports
have been configured, click Apply.
Figure 3-107 Private VLAN Port Configuration
CLI – This example shows the switch configured with primary VLAN 5 and
secondary VLAN 6. Port 3 has been configured as a promiscuous port and mapped
to VLAN 5, while ports 4 and 5 have been configured as a host ports and associated
with VLAN 6. This means that traffic for port 4 and 5 can only pass through port 3.
Protocol VLANs
You can configure VLAN behavior to support multiple protocols to allow traffic to
pass through different VLANs. When a packet is received at a port, its VLAN
membership is determined by the protocol type of the packet.
Protocol VLAN Group Configuration
Command Attributes
•Protocol Group ID – Protocol Group ID assigned to the Protocol VLAN Group.
(Range: 1-2147483647)
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3
Console(config-if)#switchport mode private-vlan promiscuous 4-257
Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan mapping 5 4-259
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/4
Console(config-if)#switchport mode private-vlan host 4-257
Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan host-association 6 4-258
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#switchport mode private-vlan host
Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan host-association 6
Console(config-if)#
Configuring the Switch
3-180
3
•Frame Type – Choose either Ethernet, RFC 1042, or LLC Other as the frame type
used by this protocol.
•Protocol Type – Specifies the protocol type to match. The available options are
IP, ARP, and RARP. If LLC Other is chosen for the Frame Type, the only available
Protocol Type is IPX Raw
Note: Traffic which matches IP Protocol Ethernet Frames is mapped to the VLAN
(VLAN 1) that has been configured with the switch’s administrative IP. IP Protocol
Ethernet traffic must not be mapped to another VLAN or you will lose
administrative network connectivity to the switch. If lost in this manner, network
access can be regained by removing the offending Protocol VLAN rule via the
console. Alternately, the switch can be power-cycled, however all unsaved
configuration changes will be lost.
Web – Click VLAN, Protocol VLAN, Configuration.
Figure 3-108 Protocol VLAN Configuration
CLI – This example shows the switch configured with Protocol Group 2 which
matches RFC 1042 IP traffic.
Protocol VLAN System Configuration
Use the Protocol VLAN System Configuration menu to map a Protocol VLAN Group
to a VLAN.
Command Attributes
•Protocol Group ID – Protocol Group ID assigned to the Protocol VLAN Group.
(Range: 1-2147483647)
•VLAN ID – VLAN to which matching protocol traffic is forwarded. (Range: 1-4092)
Console(config)#protocol-vlan protocol group 2 add frame-type
rfc-1042 protocol-type ip 4-261
Console(config)#
Link Layer Discovery Protocol
3-181
3
Web – Click VLAN, Protocol VLAN, System Configuration.
Figure 3-109 Protocol VLAN System Configuration
CLI – This example shows the switch configured with Protocol Group 2 mapped to
VLAN 2.
Link Layer Discovery Protocol
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is used to discover basic information about
neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain. LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that
uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device.
Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value (TLV) format according
to the IEEE 802.1ab standard, and can include details such as device identification,
capabilities and configuration settings. LLDP also defines how to store and maintain
information gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers.
Link Layer Discovery Protocol - Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) is an
extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP
phones and network switches. The LLDP-MED TLVs advertise information such as
network policy, power, inventory, and device location details. The LLDP and
LLDP-MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify
troubleshooting, enhance network management, and maintain an accurate network
topology.
Setting LLDP Timing Attributes
Use the LLDP Configuration screen to set attributes for general functions such as
globally enabling LLDP on the switch, setting the message ageout time, and setting
the frequency for broadcasting general advertisements or reports about changes in
the LLDP MIB.
Console(config)#protocol-vlan protocol-group 2 vlan 2 4-262
Console(config)#
Configuring the Switch
3-182
3
Command Attributes
•LLDP – Enables LLDP globally on the switch. (Default: Enabled)
•Transmission Interval – Configures the periodic transmit interval for LLDP
advertisements. (Range: 5-32768 seconds; Default: 30 seconds)
This attribute must comply with the following rule:
(transmission-interval * holdtime-multiplier) ≤ 65536
•Hold Time Multiplier – Configures the time-to-live (TTL) value sent in LLDP
advertisements as shown in the formula below. (Range: 2-10; Default: 4)
The time-to-live tells the receiving LLDP agent how long to retain all information
pertaining to the sending LLDP agent if it does not transmit updates in a timely
manner. TTL in seconds is based on (refresh-interval * holdtime-multiplier) ≤
65536
Therefore, the default TTL is 4*30 = 120 seconds.
•Delay Interval – Configures a delay between the successive transmission of
advertisements initiated by a change in local LLDP MIB variables.
(Range: 1-8192 seconds; Default: 2 seconds)
The transmit delay is used to prevent a series of successive LLDP transmissions
during a short period of rapid changes in local LLDP MIB objects, and to increase
the probability that multiple, rather than single changes, are reported in each
transmission.
This attribute must comply with the rule: (4 * delay-interval) ≤ transmission-interval
•Reinitialization Delay – Configures the delay before attempting to re-initialize
after LLDP ports are disabled or the link goes down. (Range: 1-10 seconds;
Default: 2 seconds)
When LLDP is re-initialized on a port, all information in the remote systems LLDP
MIB associated with this port is deleted.
•Notification Interval – Configures the allowed interval for sending SNMP
notifications about LLDP MIB changes. (Range: 5-3600 seconds; Default: 5
seconds)
This parameter only applies to SNMP applications which use data stored in the
LLDP MIB for network monitoring or management.
Information about changes in LLDP neighbors that occur between SNMP
notifications is not transmitted. Only state changes that exist at the time of a
notification are included in the transmission. An SNMP agent should therefore
periodically check the value of lldpStatsRemTableLastChangeTime to detect any
lldpRemTablesChange notification-events missed due to throttling or transmission
loss.
• MED Fast Start Count – Configures the amount of LLDP MED Fast Start
LLDPDUs to transmit during the activation process of the LLDP-MED Fast Start
mechanisim. (Range: 1-10 packets; Default: 4 packets)
The MED Fast Start Count parameter is part of the timer which ensures that the
LLDP-MED Fast Start mechanism is active for the port. LLDP-MED Fast Start is
Link Layer Discovery Protocol
3-183
3
critical to the timely startup of LLDP, and therefore integral to the rapid availability
of Emergency Call Service.
Web – Click LLDP, Configuration. Enable LLDP, modify any of the timing parameters
as required, and click Apply.
Figure 3-110 LLDP Configuration
CLI – This example sets several attributes which control basic LLDP message
timing.
Configuring LLDP Interface Attributes
Use the LLDP Port/Trunk Configuration to specify the message attributes for
individual interfaces, including whether messages are transmitted, received, or both
transmitted and received, whether SNMP notifications are sent, and the type of
information advertised.
Console(config)#lldp 4-195
Console(config)#lldp refresh-interval 60 4-197
Console(config)#lldp holdtime-multiplier 10 4-195
Console(config)#lldp tx-delay 10 4-198
Console(config)#lldp reinit-delay 10 4-198
Console(config)#lldp notification-interval 30 4-196
Console(config)#lldp medFastStartCount 6 4-196
Console(config)#exit
Console#show lldp config
LLDP Global Configuation
LLDP Enable : Yes
LLDP Transmit interval : 60
LLDP Hold Time Multiplier : 10
LLDP Delay Interval : 10
LLDP Reinit Delay : 10
LLDP Notification Interval : 30
.
.
.
Configuring the Switch
3-184
3
Command Attributes
•Admin Status – Enables LLDP message transmit and receive modes for LLDP
Protocol Data Units. (Options: Tx only, Rx only, TxRx, Disabled; Default: TxRx)
•SNMP Notification – Enables the transmission of SNMP trap notifications about
LLDP and LLDP-MED changes. (Default: Enabled)
This option sends out SNMP trap notifications to designated target stations at the
interval specified by the Notification Interval in the preceding section. Trap
notifications include information about state changes in the LLDP MIB (IEEE
802.1AB), the LLDP-MED MIB (ANSI/TIA-1057), or vendor-specific
LLDP-EXT-DOT1 and LLDP-EXT-DOT3 MIBs.
For information on defining SNMP trap destinations, see “Specifying Trap
Managers and Trap Types” on page 3-40.
Information about additional changes in LLDP neighbors that occur between
SNMP notifications is not transmitted. Only state changes that exist at the time of
a trap notification are included in the transmission. An SNMP agent should
therefore periodically check the value of lldpStatsRemTableLastChangeTime to
detect any lldpRemTablesChange notification-events missed due to throttling or
transmission loss.
•TLV Type – Configures the information included in the TLV field of advertised
messages.
-Port Description – The port description is taken from the ifDescr object in
RFC 2863, which includes information about the manufacturer, the product
name, and the version of the interface hardware/software.
-System Description – The system description is taken from the sysDescr
object in RFC 3418, which includes the full name and version identification of the
system's hardware type, software operating system, and networking software.
-Management Address – The management address protocol packet includes
the IPv4 address of the switch. If no management address is available, the
address should be the MAC address for the CPU or for the port sending this
advertisement.
The management address TLV may also include information about the specific
interface associated with this address, and an object identifier indicating the type
of hardware component or protocol entity associated with this address. The
interface number and OID are included to assist SNMP applications in the
performance of network discovery by indicating enterprise specific or other
starting points for the search, such as the Interface or Entity MIB.
Since there are typically a number of different addresses associated with a
Layer 3 device, an individual LLDP PDU may contain more than one
management address TLV.
Every management address TLV that reports an address that is accessible on a
port and protocol VLAN through the particular port should be accompanied by a
port and protocol VLAN TLV that indicates the VLAN identifier (VID) associated
with the management address reported by this TLV.
- System Name – The system name is taken from the sysName object in
RFC 3418, which contains the system’s administratively assigned name. To
Link Layer Discovery Protocol
3-185
3
configure the system name, see “Displaying System Information” on page 3-12.
-System Capabilities – The system capabilities identifies the primary function(s)
of the system and whether or not these primary functions are enabled. The
information advertised by this TLV is described in IEEE 802.1AB.
• MED TLV Type – Configures the information included in the MED TLV field of
advertised messages.
-Port Capabilities – This option advertises LLDP-MED TLV capabilities, allowing
Media Endpoint and Connectivity Devices to efficiently discover which
LLDP-MED related TLVs are supported on the switch.
-Network Policy – This option advertises network policy configuration
information, aiding in the discovery and diagnosis of VLAN configuration
mismatches on a port. Improper network policy configurations frequently result
in voice quality degradation or complete service disruption.
-Location – This option advertises location identification details.
-Extended Power – This option advertises extended Power-over-Ethernet
capability details, such as power availability from the switch, and power state of
the switch, including whether the switch is operating from primary or backup
power (the Endpoint Device could use this information to decide to enter power
conservation mode). Note that this device does not support PoE capabilities.
-Inventory – This option advertises device details useful for inventory
management, such as manufacturer, model, software version and other
pertinent information.
•MED Notification – Enables the transmission of SNMP trap notifications about
LLDP-MED changes. (Default: Enabled)
• Trunk – The trunk identifier. (Port Information only)
Web – Click LLDP, Port/Trunk Configuration. Set the LLDP transmit/receive mode,
specify whether or not to send SNMP trap messages, select the information to
advertise in LLDP messages, select the information to advertise in MED-TLV
messages and specify whether or not to send MED notifications. Then click Apply.
Figure 3-111 LLDP Port Configuration
Configuring the Switch
3-186
3
CLI – This example sets the interface to both transmit and receive LLDP messages,
enables SNMP trap messages, enables MED notification, and specifies the TLV,
MED-TLV, dot1-TLV and dot3-TLV parameters to advertise.
Displaying LLDP Local Device Information
Use the LLDP Local Device Information screen to display information about the
switch, such as its MAC address, chassis ID, management IP address, and port
information.
Web – Click LLDP, Local Information.
Figure 3-112 LLDP Local Device Information
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 4-166
Console(config-if)#lldp admin-status tx-rx 4-199
Console(config-if)#lldp notification 4-199
Console(config-if)#lldp medNotification 4-200
Console(config-if)#lldp basic-tlv port-description 4-201
Console(config-if)#lldp basic-tlv system-description 4-202
Console(config-if)#lldp basic-tlv management-ip-address 4-201
Console(config-if)#lldp basic-tlv system-name 4-203
Console(config-if)#lldp basic-tlv system-capabilities 4-202
Console(config-if)#lldp medtlv extPoe 4-207
Console(config-if)#lldp medtlv inventory 4-208
Console(config-if)#lldp medtlv location 4-208
Console(config-if)#lldp medtlv med-cap 4-209
Console(config-if)#lldp medtlv network-policy 4-209
Console(config-if)#lldp dot1-tlv proto-ident 4-203
Console(config-if)#lldp dot1-tlv proto-vid 4-204
Console(config-if)#lldp dot1-tlv pvid 4-204
Console(config-if)#lldp dot1-tlv vlan-name 4-205
Console(config-if)#lldp dot3-tlv link-agg 4-205
Console(config-if)#lldp dot3-tlv mac-phy 4-206
Console(config-if)#lldp dot3-tlv max-frame 4-206
Console(config-if)#lldp dot3-tlv poe 4-207
Console(config-if)#
Link Layer Discovery Protocol
3-187
3
CLI – This example displays LLDP information for the local switch.
This example displays detailed information for a specific port on the local switch.
Displaying LLDP Remote Port Information
Use the LLDP Remote Port/Trunk Information screen to display information about
devices connected directly to the switch’s ports which are advertising information
through LLDP.
Web – Click LLDP, Remote Port/Trunk Information.
Figure 3-113 LLDP Remote Port Information
Console#show lldp info local-device 4-212
LLDP Local System Information
Chassis Type : MAC Address
Chassis ID : 00-01-02-03-04-05
System Name :
System Description : Model ABC123
System Capabilities Support : Bridge
System Capabilities Enable : Bridge
Management Address : 192.168.0.101 (IPv4)
LLDP Port Information
Interface |PortID Type PortID PortDesc
--------- + ---------------- ----------------- ---------------------------
Eth 1/1 |MAC Address 00-01-02-03-04-06 Ethernet Port on unit 1, port 1
Eth 1/2 |MAC Address 00-01-02-03-04-07 Ethernet Port on unit 1, port 2
Eth 1/3 |MAC Address 00-01-02-03-04-08 Ethernet Port on unit 1, port 3
Eth 1/4 |MAC Address 00-01-02-03-04-09 Ethernet Port on unit 1, port 4
Eth 1/5 |MAC Address 00-01-02-03-04-0A Ethernet Port on unit 1, port 5
.
.
.
Console#show lldp info local-device ethernet 1/1 4-212
LLDP Port Information Detail
Port : Eth 1/1
Port Type : MAC Address
Port ID : 00-01-02-03-04-06
Port Desc : Ethernet Port on unit 1, port 1
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-188
3
CLI – This example displays LLDP information for remote devices attached to this
switch which are advertising information through LLDP.
Displaying LLDP Remote Information Details
Use the LLDP Remote Information Details screen to display detailed information
about an LLDP-enabled device connected to a specific port on the local switch.
Web – Click LLDP, Remote Information Details. Select an interface from the drop
down lists, and click Query.
Figure 3-114 LLDP Remote Information Details
Console#show lldp info remote-device 4-213
LLDP Remote Devices Information
Interface | ChassisId PortId SysName
--------- + ----------------- ----------------- ---------------------
Eth 1/1 | 00-01-02-03-04-05 00-01-02-03-04-06
Console#
Link Layer Discovery Protocol
3-189
3
CLI – This example displays LLDP information for an LLDP-enabled remote device
attached to a specific port on this switch.
Displaying Device Statistics
Use the LLDP Device Statistics screen to display aggregate statistics about all
LLDP-enabled device connected to this switch.
Web – Click LLDP, Device Statistics.
Figure 3-115 LLDP Device Statistics
Console#show lldp info remote-device detail ethernet 1/1 4-213
LLDP Remote Devices Information Detail
---------------------------------------------------------------
Local PortName : Eth 1/1
Chassis Type : MAC Address
Chassis Id : 00-01-02-03-04-05
PortID Type : MAC Address
PortID : 00-01-02-03-04-06
SysName :
SysDescr : SMC Networks SMC6128L2
PortDescr : Ethernet Port on unit 1, port 1
SystemCapSupported : Bridge
SystemCapEnabled : Bridge
Remote Management Address :
00-01-02-03-04-05 (MAC Address)
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-190
3
CLI – This example displays LLDP statistics received from all LLDP-enabled remote
devices connected directly to this switch.
Displaying Detailed Device Statistics
Use the LLDP Device Statistics Details screen to display statistics based on traffic
received through all attached LLDP-enabled interfaces.
Web – Click LLDP, Device Statistics Details.
Figure 3-116 LLDP Device Statistics Details
switch#show lldp info statistics 4-213
LLDP Device Statistics
Neighbor Entries List Last Updated : 2450279 seconds
New Neighbor Entries Count : 1
Neighbor Entries Deleted Count : 0
Neighbor Entries Dropped Count : 0
Neighbor Entries Ageout Count : 0
Interface | NumFramesRecvd NumFramesSent NumFramesDiscarded
--------- + -------------- ------------- ------------------
Eth 1/1 | 10 11 0
Eth 1/2 | 0 0 0
Eth 1/3 | 0 0 0
Eth 1/4 | 0 0 0
Eth 1/5 | 0 0 0
.
.
.
Class of Service Configuration
3-191
3
CLI – This example displays detailed LLDP statistics for an LLDP-enabled remote
device attached to a specific port on this switch.
Class of Service Configuration
Class of Service (CoS) allows you to specify which data packets have greater
precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion. This switch
supports CoS with four priority queues for each port. Data packets in a port’s
high-priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower-priority queues. You
can set the default priority for each interface, and configure the mapping of frame
priority tags to the switch’s priority queues.
Layer 2 Queue Settings
Setting the Default Priority for Interfaces
You can specify the default port priority for each interface on the switch. All untagged
packets entering the switch are tagged with the specified default port priority, and
then sorted into the appropriate priority queue at the output port.
Command Usage
• This switch provides four priority queues for each port. It uses Weighted Round
Robin to prevent head-of-queue blockage.
• The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to accept
all frame types (i.e, receives both untagged and tagged frames). This priority does
not apply to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged frames. If the incoming frame is an IEEE
802.1Q VLAN tagged frame, the IEEE 802.1p User Priority bits will be used.
• If the output port is an untagged member of the associated VLAN, these frames are
stripped of all VLAN tags prior to transmission.
switch#show lldp info statistics detail ethernet 1/1 4-213
LLDP Port Statistics Detail
PortName : Eth 1/1
Frames Discarded : 0
Frames Invalid : 0
Frames Received : 12
Frames Sent : 13
TLVs Unrecognized : 0
TLVs Discarded : 0
Neighbor Ageouts : 0
switch#
Configuring the Switch
3-192
3
Command Attributes
•Default Priority12 – The priority that is assigned to untagged frames received on
the specified interface. (Range: 0-7; Default: 0)
•Number of Egress Traffic Classes – The number of queue buffers provided for
each port.
Web – Click Priority, Default Port Priority or Default Trunk Priority. Modify the default
priority for any interface, then click Apply.
Figure 3-117 Port Priority Configuration
CLI – This example assigns a default priority of 5 to port 3.
Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues
This switch processes Class of Service (CoS) priority tagged traffic by using four
priority queues for each port, with service schedules based on strict or Weighted
12. CLI displays this information as “Priority for untagged traffic.”
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3 4-166
Console(config-if)#switchport priority default 5 4-265
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show interfaces switchport ethernet 1/3 4-175
Information of Eth 1/3
Broadcast threshold: Enabled, 500 packets/second
LACP status: Disabled
Ingress rate limit: enable, K bits per second: 25
VLAN membership mode: Hybrid
Ingress rule: Enabled
Acceptable frame type: All frames
Native VLAN: 1
Priority for untagged traffic: 5
GVRP status: Disabled
Allowed VLAN: 1(u),
Forbidden VLAN:
Private-VLAN mode: NONE
Private-VLAN host-association: NONE
Private-VLAN mapping: NONE
Console#
Class of Service Configuration
3-193
3
Round Robin (WRR). Up to eight separate traffic priorities are defined in IEEE
802.1p. The default priority levels are assigned according to recommendations in
the IEEE 802.1p standard as shown in the following table.
The priority levels recommended in the IEEE 802.1p standard for various network
applications are shown in the following table. However, you can map the priority
levels to the switch’s output queues in any way that benefits application traffic for
your own network.
Command Attributes
•Priority – CoS value. (Range: 0-7, where 7 is the highest priority)
•Traffic Class13 – Output queue buffer. (Range: 0-3, where 3 is the highest CoS
priority queue)
Table 3-12 Mapping CoS Values to Egress Queues
Queue 0123
Priority 1,20,34,56,7
Table 3-13 CoS Priority Levels
Priority Level Traffic Type
1 Background
2(Spare)
0 (default) Best Effort
3 Excellent Effort
4 Controlled Load
5 Video, less than 100 milliseconds latency and jitter
6 Voice, less than 10 milliseconds latency and jitter
7 Network Control
13. CLI shows Queue ID.
Configuring the Switch
3-194
3
Web – Click Priority, Traffic Classes. The current mapping of CoS values to output
queues is displayed. Assign priorities to the traffic classes (i.e., output queues),
then click Apply.
Figure 3-118 Traffic Classes
CLI – The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments.
* Mapping specific values for CoS priorities is implemented as an interface configuration
command, but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch.
Enabling CoS
Enable or disable Class of Service (CoS). Command Attributes
•Traffic Classes – Click to enable Class of Service. (Default: Enabled)
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 4-166
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 0 0 4-267
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 1 1
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 2 2
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show queue cos-map ethernet 1/1 4-269
Information of Eth 1/1
CoS Value: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Priority Queue: 0 1 2 1 2 2 3 3
Console#
Class of Service Configuration
3-195
3
Web – Click Priority, Traffic Classes Status.
Figure 3-119 Enable Traffic Classes
Selecting the Queue Mode
You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that requires all
traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower priority queues are
serviced, or use Weighted Round-Robin (WRR) queuing that specifies a relative
weight of each queue. WRR uses a predefined relative weight for each queue that
determines the percentage of service time the switch services each queue before
moving on to the next queue. This prevents the head-of-line blocking that can occur
with strict priority queuing.
Command Attributes
•WRR - Weighted Round-Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using
scheduling weights 1, 2, 4, 8, for queues 0 through 3 respectively. (This is the
default selection.)
•Strict - Services the egress queues in sequential order, transmitting all traffic in the
higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues.
Web – Click Priority, Queue Mode. Select Strict or WRR, then click Apply.
Figure 3-120 Queue Mode
CLI – The following sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode.
Setting the Service Weight for Traffic Classes
This switch uses the Weighted Round Robin (WRR) algorithm to determine the
frequency at which it services each priority queue. As described in “Mapping CoS
Console(config)#queue mode wrr 4-265
Console(config)#exit
Console#show queue mode 4-268
Queue mode: wrr
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-196
3
Values to Egress Queues” on page 3-192, the traffic classes are mapped to one of
the eight egress queues provided for each port. You can assign a weight to each of
these queues (and thereby to the corresponding traffic priorities). This weight sets
the frequency at which each queue will be polled for service, and subsequently
affects the response time for software applications assigned a specific priority value.
Note: This switch does not allow the queue service weights to be set. The weights are
fixed as 1, 2, 4, 8, for queues 0 through 3 respectively.
Command Attributes
• Interface – Select port or trunk as an interface.
•WRR Setting Table14 – Displays a list of weights for each traffic class (i.e., queue).
•Weight Value – Set a new weight for the selected traffic class. (Range: 1-15)
Web – Click Priority, Queue Scheduling. Select the required interface, highlight a
traffic class (i.e., output queue), enter a weight, then click Apply.
Figure 3-121 Configuring Queue Scheduling
CLI – The following example shows how to display the WRR weights assigned to
each of the priority queues.
Layer 3/4 Priority Settings
Mapping Layer 3/4 Priorities to CoS Values
This switch supports one method of prioritizing layer 3/4 traffic to meet application
requirements. Traffic priorities can be specified in the IP header of a frame using the
number of the TCP port. When these service is enabled, the priorities are mapped to
14. CLI shows Queue ID.
Console#show queue bandwidth 4-268
Queue ID Weight
-------- ------
0 1
1 2
2 4
3 8
Console
Class of Service Configuration
3-197
3
a Class of Service value by the switch, and the traffic then sent to the corresponding
output queue.
Because different priority information may be contained in the traffic, this switch
maps priority values to the output queues in the following manner:
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP DSCP Priority, and then Default Port
Priority.
Enabling IP DSCP Priority
The switch allows you to enable or disable the IP DSCP priority.
Command Attributes
• IP DSCP Priority Status – The following options are:
-Disabled – Disables the priority service. (Default Setting: Disabled)
-IP DSCP – Maps layer 3/4 priorities using Differentiated Services Code Point
Mapping.
Web – Click Priority, IP DSCP Priority Status. Select IP DSCP from the drop down
menu, then click Apply.
Figure 3-122 IP DSCP Priority Status
Configuring the Switch
3-198
3
Mapping DSCP Priority
The DSCP is six bits wide, allowing coding for up to 64 different forwarding
behaviors. The DSCP retains backward compatibility with the three precedence bits
so that non-DSCP compliant will not conflict with the DSCP mapping. Based on
network policies, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of
forwarding. The DSCP default values are defined in the following table. Note that all
the DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0.
Command Attributes
•DSCP Priority Table – Shows the DSCP Priority to CoS map.
•Class of Service Value – Maps a CoS value to the selected DSCP Priority value.
Note that “0” represents low priority and “7” represent high priority.
Note: IP DSCP settings apply to all interfaces.
Web – Click Priority, IP DSCP Priority. Select an entry from the DSCP table, enter a
value in the Class of Service Value field, then click Apply.
Figure 3-123 Mapping IP DSCP Priority Values
Table 3-14 Mapping DSCP Priority Values
IP DSCP Value CoS Value
00
81
10, 12, 14, 16 2
18, 20, 22, 24 3
26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36 4
38, 40, 42 5
48 6
46, 56 7
Quality of Service
3-199
3
CLI – The following example globally enables DSCP Priority service on the switch,
maps DSCP value 0 to CoS value 1 (on port 1), and then displays the DSCP Priority
settings.
* Mapping specific values for IP DSCP is implemented as an interface configuration
command, but any changes will apply to the all interfaces on the switch.
Quality of Service
The commands described in this section are used to configure Quality of Service
(QoS) classification criteria and service policies. Differentiated Services (DiffServ)
provides policy-based management mechanisms used for prioritizing network
resources to meet the requirements of specific traffic types on a per hop basis.
Each packet is classified upon entry into the network based on access lists, IP
Precedence, DSCP values, or VLAN lists. Using access lists allows you select traffic
based on Layer 2, Layer 3, or Layer 4 information contained in each packet. Based
on configured network policies, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different
kinds of forwarding.
All switches or routers that access the Internet rely on class information to provide
the same forwarding treatment to packets in the same class. Class information can
be assigned by end hosts, or switches or routers along the path. Priority can then be
assigned based on a general policy, or a detailed examination of the packet.
However, note that detailed examination of packets should take place close to the
network edge so that core switches and routers are not overloaded.
Switches and routers along the path can use class information to prioritize the
resources allocated to different traffic classes. The manner in which an individual
device handles traffic in the DiffServ architecture is called per-hop behavior. All
devices along a path should be configured in a consistent manner to construct a
consistent end-to-end QoS solution.
Notes: 1. You can configure up to 16 rules per Class Map. You can also include
multiple classes in a Policy Map.
Console(config)#map ip dscp 4-269
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 4-166
Console(config-if)#map ip dscp 1 cos 0 4-270
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show map ip dscp ethernet 1/1 4-271
DSCP mapping status: disabled
Port DSCP COS
--------- ---- ---
Eth 1/ 1 0 0
Eth 1/ 1 1 0
Eth 1/ 1 2 0
Eth 1/ 1 3 0
.
.
.
Eth 1/ 1 61 0
Eth 1/ 1 62 0
Eth 1/ 1 63 0
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-200
3
2. You should create a Class Map before creating a Policy Map. Otherwise, you
will not be able to select a Class Map from the Policy Rule Settings screen
(see page 3-205).
Configuring Quality of Service Parameters
To create a service policy for a specific category or ingress traffic, follow these steps:
1. Use the “Class Map” to designate a class name for a specific category of traffic.
2. Edit the rules for each class to specify a type of traffic based on an access list, a
DSCP or IP Precedence value, or a VLAN.
3. Use the “Policy Map” to designate a policy name for a specific manner in which
ingress traffic will be handled.
4. Add one or more classes to the Policy Map. Assign policy rules to each class by
“setting” the QoS value to be assigned to the matching traffic class. The policy
rule can also be configured to monitor the average flow and burst rate, and drop
any traffic that exceeds the specified rate, or just reduce the DSCP service level
for traffic exceeding the specified rate.
5. Use the “Service Policy” to assign a policy map to a specific interface.
Configuring a Class Map
A class map is used for matching packets to a specified class.
Command Usage
• To configure a Class Map, follow these steps:
- Open the Class Map page, and click Add Class.
- When the Class Configuration page opens, fill in the “Class Name” field, and
click Add.
- When the Match Class Settings page opens, specify type of traffic for this class
based on an access list, a DSCP or IP Precedence value, or a VLAN, and click
the Add button next to the field for the selected traffic criteria. You can specify up
to 16 items to match when assigning ingress traffic to a class map.
• The class map is used with a policy map (page 3-203) to create a service policy
(page 3-206) for a specific interface that defines packet classification, service
tagging, and bandwidth policing. Note that one or more class maps can be
assigned to a policy map.
Command Attributes
Class Map
•Modify Name and Description – Configures the name and a brief description of
a class map. (Range: 1-16 characters for the name; 1-64 characters for the
description)
•Edit Rules – Opens the “Match Class Settings” page for the selected class entry.
Modify the criteria used to classify ingress traffic on this page.
Quality of Service
3-201
3
•Add Class – Opens the “Class Configuration” page. Enter a class name and
description on this page, and click Add to open the “Match Class Settings” page.
Enter the criteria used to classify ingress traffic on this page.
•Remove Class – Removes the selected class.
Class Configuration
•Class Name – Name of the class map. (Range: 1-16 characters)
•Type – Only one match command is permitted per class map, so the match-any
field refers to the criteria specified by the lone match command.
•Description – A brief description of a class map. (Range: 1-64 characters)
•Add – Adds the specified class.
•Back – Returns to previous page with making any changes.
Match Class Settings
•Class Name – List of class maps.
•ACL List – Name of an access control list. Any type of ACL can be specified,
including standard or extended IP ACLs and MAC ACLs. (Range: 1-16 characters)
•IP DSCP – A DSCP value. (Range: 0-63)
•IP Precedence – An IP Precedence value. (Range: 0-7)
•VLAN – A VLAN. (Range:1-4092)
•Add – Adds specified criteria to the class. Up to 16 items are permitted per class.
•Remove – Deletes the selected criteria from the class.
Configuring the Switch
3-202
3
Web – Click QoS, DiffServ, then click Add Class to create a new class, or Edit Rules
to change the rules of an existing class.
Figure 3-124 Configuring Class Maps
CLI - This example creates a class map call “rd_class,” and sets it to match packets
marked for DSCP service value 3.
Console(config)#class-map rd_class match-any 4-273
Console(config-cmap)#match ip dscp 3 4-274
Console(config-cmap)#
Quality of Service
3-203
3
Creating QoS Policies
This function creates a policy map that can be attached to multiple interfaces.
Command Usage
• To configure a Policy Map, follow these steps:
- Create a Class Map as described on page 3-200.
- Open the Policy Map page, and click Add Policy.
- When the Policy Configuration page opens, fill in the “Policy Name” field, and
click Add.
- When the Policy Rule Settings page opens, select a class name from the
scroll-down list (Class Name field). Configure a policy for traffic that matches
criteria defined in this class by setting the quality of service that an IP packet will
receive (in the Action field), defining the maximum throughput and burst rate (in
the Meter field), and the action that results from a policy violation (in the Exceed
field). Then finally click Add to register the new policy.
• A policy map can contain multiple class statements that can be applied to the same
interface with the Service Policy Settings (page 3-206). You can configure up to 64
policers (i.e., meters or class maps) for each of the following access list types:
MAC ACL, IP ACL (including Standard ACL and Extended ACL). Also, note that
the maximum number of classes that can be applied to a policy map is 16.
Policing is based on a token bucket, where bucket depth (i.e., the maximum burst
before the bucket overflows) is specified by the “Burst” field, and the average rate
at which tokens are removed from the bucket is specified by the “Rate” option.
• After using the policy map to define packet classification, service tagging, and
bandwidth policing, it must be assigned to a specific interface by a service policy
(page 3-206) to take effect.
Command Attributes
Policy Map
•Modify Name and Description – Configures the name and a brief description of
a policy map. (Range: 1-16 characters for the name; 1-64 characters for the
description)
•Edit Classes – Opens the “Policy Rule Settings” page for the selected class entry.
Modify the criteria used to service ingress traffic on this page.
•Add Policy – Opens the “Policy Configuration” page. Enter a policy name and
description on this page, and click Add to open the “Policy Rule Settings” page.
Enter the criteria used to service ingress traffic on this page.
•Remove Policy – Deletes a specified policy.
Policy Configuration
•Policy Name — Name of policy map. (Range: 1-16 characters)
•Description – A brief description of a policy map. (Range: 1-64 characters)
•Add – Adds the specified policy.
•Back – Returns to previous page with making any changes.
Configuring the Switch
3-204
3
Policy Rule Settings
- Class Settings -
•Class Name – Name of class map.
•Action – Shows the service provided to ingress traffic by setting a CoS, DSCP, or
IP Precedence value in a matching packet (as specified in Match Class Settings on
page 3-200).
•Meter – The maximum throughput and burst rate.
-Rate (kbps) – Rate in kilobits per second.
-Burst (byte) – Burst in bytes.
•Exceed Action – Specifies whether the traffic that exceeds the specified rate will
be dropped or the DSCP service level will be reduced.
•Remove Class – Deletes a class.
- Policy Options -
•Class Name – Name of class map.
•Action – Configures the service provided to ingress traffic by setting a CoS, DSCP,
or IP Precedence value in a matching packet (as specified in Match Class Settings
on page 3-200). (Range - CoS: 0-7, DSCP: 0-63, IP Precedence: 0-7,
IPv6 DSCP: 0-63)
•Meter – Check this to define the maximum throughput, burst rate, and the action
that results from a policy violation.
-Rate (kbps) – Rate in kilobits per second. (Range: 1-100000 kbps or maximum
port speed, whichever is lower)
-Burst (byte) – Burst in bytes. (Range: 64-1522)
•Exceed – Specifies whether the traffic that exceeds the specified rate or burst will
be dropped or the DSCP service level will be reduced.
-Set – Decreases DSCP priority for out of conformance traffic. (Range: 0-63).
-Drop – Drops out of conformance traffic.
•Add – Adds the specified criteria to the policy map.
Quality of Service
3-205
3
Web – Click QoS, DiffServ, Policy Map to display the list of existing policy maps. To
add a new policy map click Add Policy. To configure the policy rule settings click Edit
Classes.
Figure 3-125 Configuring Policy Maps
Configuring the Switch
3-206
3
CLI – This example creates a policy map called “rd-policy,” sets the average
bandwidth the 1 Mbps, the burst rate to 1522 bps, and the response to reduce the
DSCP value for violating packets to 0.
Attaching a Policy Map to Ingress Queues
This function binds a policy map to the ingress queue of a particular interface.
Command Usage
• You must first define a class map, then define a policy map, and finally bind the
service policy to the required interface.
• You can only bind one policy map to an interface.
• The current firmware does not allow you to bind a policy map to an egress queue.
Command Attributes
•Ports – Specifies a port.
•Ingress – Applies the rule to ingress traffic.
•Enabled – Check this to enable a policy map on the specified port.
• Policy Map – Select the appropriate policy map from the scroll-down box.
Web – Click QoS, DiffServ, Service Policy Settings. Check Enabled and choose a
Policy Map for a port from the scroll-down box, then click Apply.
Figure 3-126 Service Policy Settings
CLI - This example applies a service policy to an ingress interface.
Console(config)#policy-map rd_policy#3 4-275
Console(config-pmap)#class rd_class#3 4-276
Console(config-pmap-c)#set ip dscp 4 4-277
Console(config-pmap-c)#police 100000 1522 exceed-action
set ip dscp 0 4-277
Console(config-pmap-c)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5 4-278
Console(config-if)#service-policy input rd_policy#3 4-278
Console(config-if)#
VoIP Traffic Configuration
3-207
3
VoIP Traffic Configuration
When IP telephony is deployed in an enterprise network, it is recommended to
isolate the Voice over IP (VoIP) network traffic from other data traffic. Traffic isolation
helps prevent excessive packet delays, packet loss, and jitter, which results in higher
voice quality. This is best achieved by assigning all VoIP traffic to a single Voice
VLAN.
The use of a Voice VLAN has several advantages. It provides security by isolating
the VoIP traffic from other data traffic. End-to-end QoS policies and high priority can
be applied to the VoIP VLAN traffic across the network, guaranteeing the bandwidth
it needs. The VLAN isolation also protects against disruptive broadcast and
multicast traffic that can seriously affect voice quality.
The switch allows you to specify the Voice VLAN for the network and set a CoS
priority for the VoIP traffic. VoIP traffic can be detected on switch ports by using the
source MAC address of packets, or by using LLDP (IEEE 802.1AB) to discover
connected VoIP devices. When VoIP traffic is detected on a configured port, the
switch automatically assigns the port as a tagged member the Voice VLAN.
Alternatively, switch ports can be manually configured.
Configuring VoIP Traffic
To configure the switch for VoIP traffic, first enable the automatic detection of VoIP
devices attached to switch ports, then set the Voice VLAN ID for the network. The
Voice VLAN aging time can also be set to remove a port from the Voice VLAN when
VoIP traffic is no longer received on the port.
Command Attributes
•Auto Detection Status – Enables the automatic detection of VoIP traffic on switch
ports. (Default: Disabled)
•Voice VLAN ID – Sets the Voice VLAN ID for the network. Only one Voice VLAN
is supported and it must already be created on the switch. (Range: 1-4094)
•Vioce VLAN Aging Time – The time after which a port is removed from the Voice
VLAN when VoIP traffic is no longer received on the port.
(Range: 5-43200 minutes; Default: 1440 minutes).
Note: The Voice VLAN ID cannot be modified when the global Auto Detection Status is
enabled.
Configuring the Switch
3-208
3
Web – Click QoS, VoIP Traffic Setting, Configuration. Enable Auto Detection,
specify the Voice VLAN ID, the set the Voice VLAN Aging Time. Click Apply.
Figure 3-127 Configuring VoIP Traffic
CLI – This example enables VoIP traffic detection and specifies the Voice VLAN ID
as 1234, then sets the VLAN aging time to 3000 seconds.
Configuring VoIP Traffic Port
To configure ports for VoIP traffic, you need to set the mode (Auto or Manual),
specify the discovery method to use, and set the traffic priority. You can also enable
security filtering to ensure that only VoIP traffic is forwarded on the Voice VLAN.
Command Attributes
•Mode – Specifies if the port will be added to the Voice VLAN when VoIP traffic is
detected. (Default: None)
•None – The Voice VLAN feature is disabled on the port. The port will not detect
VoIP traffic or be added to the Voice VLAN.
•Auto – The port will be added as a tagged member to the Voice VLAN when
VoIP traffic is detected on the port. You must select a method for detecting VoIP
traffic, either OUI or 802.1ab (LLDP). When OUI is selected, be sure to configure
the MAC address ranges in the Telephony OUI list.
•Manual – The Voice VLAN feature is enabled on the port, but the port must be
manually added to the Voice VLAN.
•Security – Enables security filtering that discards any non-VoIP packets received
on the port that are tagged with voice VLAN ID. VoIP traffic is identified by source
MAC addresses configured in the Telephony OUI list, or through LLDP that
discovers VoIP devices attached to the switch. Packets received from non-VoIP
sources are dropped. (Default: Disabled)
•Discovery Protocol – Selects a method to use for detecting VoIP traffic on the
port. (Default: OUI)
•OUI – Traffic from VoIP devices is detected by the Organizationally Unique
Identifier (OUI) of the source MAC address. OUI numbers are assigned to
manufacturers and form the first three octets of a device MAC address. MAC
Console(config)#voice vlan 1234 4-281
Console(config)#voice vlan aging 3000 4-282
Console(config)#
VoIP Traffic Configuration
3-209
3
address OUI numbers must be configured in the Telephony OUI list so that the
switch recognizes the traffic as being from a VoIP device.
•802.1ab – Uses LLDP to discover VoIP devices attached to the port. LLDP
checks that the “telephone bit” in the system capability TLV is turned on. See
“Link Layer Discovery Protocol” on page 3-181 for more information on LLDP.
•Priority – Defines a CoS priority for the port traffic on the Voice VLAN. The priority
of any received VoIP packet is overwritten with the new priority when the Voice
VLAN feature is active for the port.
Web – Click QoS, VoIP Traffic Setting, Port Configuration. Set the mode for a VoIP
traffic port, select the detection mechanism to use, and specify the VoIP traffic
priority. Click Apply.
Figure 3-128 VoIP Traffic Port Configuration
Configuring the Switch
3-210
3
CLI – This example configures VoIP traffic settings for port 2 and displays the
current Voice VLAN status.
Configuring Telephony OUI
VoIP devices attached to the switch can be identified by the manufacturer’s
Organizational Unique Identifier (OUI) in the source MAC address of received
packets. OUI numbers are assigned to manufacturers and form the first three octets
of device MAC addresses. The MAC OUI numbers for VoIP equipment can be
configured on the switch so that traffic from these devices is recognized as VoIP.
Command Attributes
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2
Console(config-if)#switchport voice vlan auto 4-283
Console(config-if)#switchport voice vlan security 4-284
Console(config-if)#switchport voice vlan rule oui 4-284
Console(config-if)#switchport voice vlan priority 5 4-285
Console(config-if)#exit
Console#show voice vlan status 4-286
Global Voice VLAN Status
Voice VLAN Status : Enabled
Voice VLAN ID : 1234
Voice VLAN aging time : 1440 minutes
Voice VLAN Port Summary
Port Mode Security Rule Priority
-------- -------- -------- --------- --------
Eth 1/ 1 Auto Enabled OUI 6
Eth 1/ 2 Auto Enabled OUI 5
Eth 1/ 3 Manual Enabled OUI 5
Eth 1/ 4 Auto Enabled OUI 6
Eth 1/ 5 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/ 6 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/ 7 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/ 8 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/ 9 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/10 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/11 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/12 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/13 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/14 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/15 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/16 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/17 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/18 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/19 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/20 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/21 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/22 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/23 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/24 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/25 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/26 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/27 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/28 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Console#
VoIP Traffic Configuration
3-211
3
•Telephony OUI – Specifies a MAC address range to add to the list. Enter the MAC
address in format 01-23-45-67-89-AB.
•Mask – Identifies a range of MAC addresses. Selecting a mask of
FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 identifies all devices with the same OUI (the first three octets).
Other masks restrict the MAC address range. Selecting FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF
specifies a single MAC address. (Default: FF-FF-FF-00-00-00)
•Description – User-defined text that identifies the VoIP devices.
Web – Click QoS, VoIP Traffic Setting, OUI Configuration. Enter a MAC address that
specifies the OUI for VoIP devices in the network. Select a mask from the pull-down
list to define a MAC address range. Enter a description for the devices, then click
Add.
Figure 3-129 Telephony OUI List
CLI – This example adds an identifier to the list, then displays the current list
Console(config)#voice vlan mac-address 00-e0-bb-00-00-00 mask
ff-ff-ff-00-00-00 description old phones 4-282
Console(config)#exit
Console#show voice vlan oui 4-286
OUIAddress Mask Description
00-e0-bb-00-00-00 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 old phones
00-11-22-33-44-55 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 new phones
00-98-76-54-32-10 FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF Chris' phone
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-212
3
Multicast Filtering
Multicasting is used to support real-time
applications such as videoconferencing or
streaming audio. A multicast server does not have
to establish a separate connection with each
client. It merely broadcasts its service to the
network, and any hosts that want to receive the
multicast register with their local multicast switch/
router. Although this approach reduces the
network overhead required by a multicast server,
the broadcast traffic must be carefully pruned at
every multicast switch/router it passes through to
ensure that traffic is only passed on to the hosts
which subscribed to this service.
This switch uses IGMP (Internet Group
Management Protocol) to query for any attached
hosts that want to receive a specific multicast
service. It identifies the ports containing hosts
requesting to join the service and sends data out
to those ports only. It then propagates the service request up to any neighboring
multicast switch/router to ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service.
This procedure is called multicast filtering.
The purpose of IP multicast filtering is to optimize a switched network’s
performance, so multicast packets will only be forwarded to those ports containing
multicast group hosts or multicast routers/switches, instead of flooding traffic to all
ports in the subnet (VLAN).
Layer 2 IGMP (Snooping and Query)
IGMP Snooping and Query – If multicast routing is not supported on other switches
in your network, you can use IGMP Snooping and Query (page 3-213) to monitor
IGMP service requests passing between multicast clients and servers, and
dynamically configure the switch ports which need to forward multicast traffic.
When using IGMPv3 snooping, service requests from IGMP Version 1, 2 or 3 hosts
are all forwarded to the upstream router as IGMPv3 reports. The primary
enhancement provided by IGMPv3 snooping is in keeping track of information about
the specific multicast sources which downstream IGMPv3 hosts have requested or
refused. The switch maintains information about both multicast groups and
channels, where a group indicates a multicast flow for which the hosts have not
requested a specific source (the only option for IGMPv1 and v2 hosts unless
statically configured on the switch), and a channel indicates a flow for which the
hosts have requested service from a specific source.
Only IGMPv3 hosts can request service from a specific multicast source. When
downstream hosts request service from a specific source for a multicast service,
Unicast
Flow
Multicast
Flow
Multicast Filtering
3-213
3
these sources are all placed in the Include list, and traffic is forwarded to the hosts
from each of these sources. IGMPv3 hosts may also request that service be
forwarded from all sources except for those specified. In this case, traffic is filtered
from sources in the Exclude list, and forwarded from all other available sources.
Notes: 1. When the switch is configured to use IGMPv3 snooping, the snooping
version may be downgraded to version 2 or version 1, depending on the
version of the IGMP query packets detected on each VLAN.
2. IGMP snooping will not function unless a multicast router port is enabled on
the switch. This can be accomplished in one of two ways. A static router port
can be manually configured (see “Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast
Router” on page 3-217). Using this method, the router port is never timed
out, and will continue to function until explicitly removed. The other method
relies on the switch to dynamically create multicast routing ports whenever
multicast routing protocol packets or IGMP query packets are detected on a
port.
3. A maximum of up to 255 multicast entries can be maintained for IGMP
snooping, and 255 entries for Multicast Routing, when both of these features
are enabled. If the table’s capacity is exceeded, the IGMPv3 snooping will
not support multicast source filtering, but will forward multicast traffic from all
relevant sources to the requesting hosts.
Static IGMP Router Interface – If IGMP snooping cannot locate the IGMP querier,
you can manually designate a known IGMP querier (i.e., a multicast router/switch)
connected over the network to an interface on your switch (page 3-217). This
interface will then join all the current multicast groups supported by the attached
router/switch to ensure that multicast traffic is passed to all appropriate interfaces
within the switch.
Static IGMP Host Interface – For multicast applications that you need to control
more carefully, you can manually assign a multicast service to specific interfaces on
the switch (page 3-219).
Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters
You can configure the switch to forward multicast traffic intelligently. Based on the
IGMP query and report messages, the switch forwards traffic only to the ports that
request multicast traffic. This prevents the switch from broadcasting the traffic to all
ports and possibly disrupting network performance.
Command Usage
•IGMP Snooping – This switch can passively snoop on IGMP Query and Report
packets transferred between IP multicast routers/switches and IP multicast host
groups to identify the IP multicast group members. It simply monitors the IGMP
packets passing through it, picks out the group registration information, and
configures the multicast filters accordingly.
Note: Unknown multicast traffic is flooded to all ports in the VLAN for several seconds
when first received. If a multicast router port exists on the VLAN, the traffic will be
filtered by subjecting it to IGMP snooping. If no router port exists on the VLAN or
Configuring the Switch
3-214
3
the multicast filtering table is already full, the switch will continue flooding the traffic
into the VLAN.
•IGMP Querier – A router, or multicast-enabled switch, can periodically ask their
hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic. If there is more than one router/switch
on the LAN performing IP multicasting, one of these devices is elected “querier”
and assumes the role of querying the LAN for group members. It then propagates
the service requests on to any upstream multicast switch/router to ensure that it will
continue to receive the multicast service.
Note: Multicast routers use this information, along with a multicast routing protocol such
as DVMRP or PIM, to support IP multicasting across the Internet.
Command Attributes
•IGMP Status — When enabled, the switch will monitor network traffic to determine
which hosts want to receive multicast traffic. This is also referred to as IGMP
Snooping. (Default: Enabled)
•Act as IGMP Querier — When enabled, the switch can serve as the Querier,
which is responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic. This
feature is not supported for IGMPv3 snooping. (Default: Disabled)
•IGMP Query Count — Sets the maximum number of queries issued for which
there has been no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the
multicast group. (Range: 2-10; Default: 2)
•IGMP Query Interval — Sets the frequency at which the switch sends IGMP
host-query messages. (Range: 60-125 seconds; Default: 125)
•IGMP Report Delay — Sets the time between receiving an IGMP Report for an IP
multicast address on a port before the switch sends an IGMP Query out of that port
and removes the entry from its list. (Range: 5-25 seconds; Default: 10)
• IGMP Query Timeout — The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops
before it considers the router port (i.e., the interface which had been receiving
query packets) to have expired. (Range: 300-500 seconds; Default: 300)
•IGMP Version — Sets the protocol version for compatibility with other devices on
the network. (Range: 1-3; Default: 2)
Notes: 1. All systems on the subnet must support the same version.
2. Some attributes are only enabled for IGMPv2 and/or v3, including Act as
IGMP Querier, IGMP Report Delay and IGMP Query Timeout.
Multicast Filtering
3-215
3
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IGMP Configuration. Adjust the IGMP settings as
required, and then click Apply. (The default settings are shown below.)
Figure 3-130 IGMP Configuration
CLI – This example modifies the settings for multicast filtering, and then displays the
current status.
Enabling IGMP Immediate Leave
The switch can be configured to immediately delete a member port of a multicast
service if a leave packet is received at that port and the immediate-leave function is
enabled for the parent VLAN.
Command Usage
• If immediate leave is not used, a multicast router (or querier) will send a
group-specific query message when an IGMPv2/v3 group leave message is
received. The router/querier stops forwarding traffic for that group only if no host
replies to the query within the specified timeout perid. Note that the timeout period
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping 4-288
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping querier 4-292
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-count 10 4-293
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-interval 100 4-293
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time 20 4-294
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time 300 4-295
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping version 2 4-289
Console(config)#exit
Console#show ip igmp snooping 4-289
Service status: Enabled
Querier status: Enabled
Leave proxy status: Disabled
Query count: 10
Query interval: 100 sec
Query max response time: 20 sec
Router port expire time: 300 sec
Immediate Leave Processing: Disabled on all VLAN
IGMP snooping version: Version 2
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-216
3
is determined by the IGMP Query Report Delay (see “Configuring IGMP Snooping
and Query Parameters” on page 3-213).
• If immediate leave is enabled, the switch assumes that only one host is connected
to the interface. Therefore, immediate leave should only be enabled on an interface
if it is connected to only one IGMP-enabled device, either a service host or a
neighbor running IGMP snooping.
• Immediate leave is only effective if IGMP snooping is enabled, and IGMPv2 or
IGMPv3 snooping is used.
Command Attributes
•VLAN ID – VLAN Identifier. (Range: 1-4093).
•Immediate Leave – Sets the status for immediate leave on the specified VLAN.
(Default: Disabled)
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IGMP Immediate Leave. Select the VLAN interface to
configure, set the status for immediate leave, and click Apply.
Figure 3-131 IGMP Immediate Leave
CLI – This example enables IGMP immediate leave for VLAN 1 and then displays
the current IGMP snooping status.
Displaying Interfaces Attached to a Multicast Router
Multicast routers that are attached to ports on the switch use information obtained
from IGMP, along with a multicast routing protocol such as DVMRP or PIM, to
Console(config)#interface vlan 1
Console(config-if)#ip igmp snooping immediate-leave 4-290
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show ip igmp snooping 4-289
Service Status: Enabled
Querier Status: Disabled
Leave proxy status: Enabled
Query Count: 2
Query Interval: 125 sec
Query Max Response Time: 10 sec
Router Port Expire Time: 300 sec
Immediate Leave Processing: Enabled on VLAN 1,
IGMP Snooping Version: Version 2
Console#
Multicast Filtering
3-217
3
support IP multicasting across the Internet. These routers may be dynamically
discovered by the switch or statically assigned to an interface on the switch.
You can use the Multicast Router Port Information page to display the ports on this
switch attached to a neighboring multicast router/switch for each VLAN ID.
Command Attributes
•VLAN ID – ID of configured VLAN (1-4093).
•Multicast Router List – Multicast routers dynamically discovered by this switch or
those that are statically assigned to an interface on this switch.
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, Multicast Router Port Information. Select the required
VLAN ID from the scroll-down list to display the associated multicast routers.
Figure 3-132 Displaying Multicast Router Port Information
CLI – This example shows that Port 11 has been statically configured as a port
attached to a multicast router.
Specifying Static Interfaces for a Multicast Router
Depending on your network connections, IGMP snooping may not always be able to
locate the IGMP querier. Therefore, if the IGMP querier is a known multicast router/
switch connected over the network to an interface (port or trunk) on your switch, you
can manually configure the interface (and a specified VLAN) to join all the current
multicast groups supported by the attached router. This can ensure that multicast
traffic is passed to all the appropriate interfaces within the switch.
Command Attributes
•Interface – Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list.
•VLAN ID – Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the
attached multicast router.
Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 14-296
VLAN M'cast Router Port Type
---- ------------------ -------
1 Eth 1/11 Static
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-218
3
•Port or Trunk – Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router.
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, Static Multicast Router Port Configuration. Specify the
interfaces attached to a multicast router, indicate the VLAN which will forward all the
corresponding multicast traffic, and then click Add. After you have finished adding
interfaces to the list, click Apply.
Figure 3-133 Static Multicast Router Port Configuration
CLI – This example configures port 1 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1.
Displaying Port Members of Multicast Services
You can display the port members associated with a specified VLAN and multicast
service.
Command Attributes
•VLAN ID – Selects the VLAN for which to display port members. (Range: 1-4093)
•Multicast IP Address – The IP address for a specific multicast service.
•Multicast Group Port List – Shows the interfaces that have already been
assigned to the selected VLAN to propagate a specific multicast service.
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1/14-296
Console(config)#exit
Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 14-296
VLAN M'cast Router Port Type
---- ------------------ -------
1 Eth 1/1 Static
Console#
Multicast Filtering
3-219
3
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IP Multicast Registration Table. Select a VLAN ID and
the IP address for a multicast service from the scroll-down lists. The switch will
display all the interfaces that are propagating this multicast service.
Figure 3-134 IP Multicast Registration Table
CLI – This example displays all the known multicast services supported on VLAN 1,
along with the ports propagating the corresponding services. The Type field shows if
this entry was learned dynamically or was statically configured.
Assigning Ports to Multicast Services
Multicast filtering can be dynamically configured using IGMP Snooping and IGMP
Query messages as described in “Configuring IGMP snooping and Query
Parameters” on page 3-133. For certain applications that require tighter control, you
may need to statically configure a multicast service on the switch. First add all the
ports attached to participating hosts to a common VLAN, and then assign the
multicast service to that VLAN group.
Command Usage
• Static multicast addresses are never aged out.
• When a multicast address is assigned to an interface in a specific VLAN, the
corresponding traffic can only be forwarded to ports within that VLAN.
Command Attributes
•Interface – Activates the Port or Trunk scroll down list.
•VLAN ID – Selects the VLAN to propagate all multicast traffic coming from the
attached multicast router/switch. (Range: 1-4093)
Console#show bridge 1 multicast vlan 14-291
VLAN M'cast IP addr. Member ports Type
---- --------------- ------------ -------
1 224.1.1.12 Eth1/12 USER
1 224.1.2.3 Eth1/12 IGMP
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-220
3
•Multicast IP – The IP address for a specific multicast service
•Port or Trunk – Specifies the interface attached to a multicast router/switch.
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IGMP Member Port Table. Specify the interface
attached to a multicast service (via an IGMP-enabled switch or multicast router),
indicate the VLAN that will propagate the multicast service, specify the multicast IP
address, and click Add. After you have completed adding ports to the member list,
click Apply.
Figure 3-135 IGMP Member Port Table
CLI – This example assigns a multicast address to VLAN 1, and then displays all the
known multicast services supported on VLAN 1.
IGMP Filtering and Throttling
In certain switch applications, the administrator may want to control the multicast
services that are available to end users. For example, an IP/TV service based on a
specific subscription plan. The IGMP filtering feature fulfills this requirement by
restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port, and IGMP
throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join.
IGMP filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies multicast
groups that are permitted or denied on the port. An IGMP filter profile can contain
one or more, or a range of multicast addresses; but only one profile can be assigned
to a port. When enabled, IGMP join reports received on the port are checked against
the filter profile. If a requested multicast group is permitted, the IGMP join report is
forwarded as normal. If a requested multicast group is denied, the IGMP join report
is dropped.
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224.1.1.12
ethernet 1/12 4-288
Console(config)#exit
Console#show mac-address-table multicast vlan 1 4-291
VLAN M'cast IP addr. Member ports Type
---- --------------- ------------ -------
1 224.1.1.12 Eth1/12 USER
1 224.1.2.3 Eth1/12 IGMP
Console#
Multicast Filtering
3-221
3
IGMP throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at
the same time. When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port, the
switch can take one of two actions; either “deny” or “replace”. If the action is set to
deny, any new IGMP join reports will be dropped. If the action is set to replace, the
switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast
group.
Note: IGMP filtering and throttling only applies to dynamically learned multicast groups.
It does not apply to statically configured groups.
Enabling IGMP Filtering and Throttling
To implement IGMP filtering and throttling on the switch, you must first enable the
feature globally and create IGMP profile numbers.
Command Attributes
•IGMP Filter – Enables IGMP filtering and throttling globally for the switch. (Default:
Disabled)
•IGMP Profile – Creates IGMP profile numbers. (Range: 1-4294967295)
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IGMP Filter Configuration. Create a profile group by
entering a number in the text box and clicking Add. Enable the IGMP filter status,
then click Apply.
Figure 3-136 Enabling IGMP Filtering and Throttling
Configuring the Switch
3-222
3
CLI – This example enables IGMP filtering and creates a profile number. It then
displays the current status and the existing profile numbers.
Configuring IGMP Filter Profiles
When you have created an IGMP profile number, you can then configure the
multicast groups to filter and set the access mode.
Command Usage
• Each profile has only one access mode; either permit or deny.
• When the access mode is set to permit, IGMP join reports are processed when a
multicust group falls within the controlled range. When the access mode is set to
deny, IGMP join reports are only processed when the multicast group is not in the
controlled range.
Command Attributes
•Profile ID – Selects an existing profile number to configure. After selecting an ID
number, click the Query button to display the current configuration.
•Access Mode – Sets the access mode of the profile; either permit or deny.
(Default: Deny)
•New Multicast Address Range List – Specifies multicast groups to include in the
profile. Specify a multicast group range by entering the same IP address for the
start and end of the range. Click the Add button to add a range to the current list.
•Current Multicast Address Range List – Lists multicast groups currently
included in the profile. Select an entry and click the Remove button to delete it from
the list.
Console(config)#ip igmp filter 4-298
Console(config)#ip igmp profile 19 4-298
Console(config)#end
Console#show ip igmp profile 4-302
IGMP Profile 19
IGMP Profile 25
Console#
Multicast Filtering
3-223
3
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IGMP Filter Profile Configuration. Select the profile
number you want to configure; then click Query to display the current settings.
Specify the access mode for the profile and then add multicast groups to the profile
list. Click Apply.
Figure 3-137 IGMP Profile Configuration
CLI – This example configures profile number 19 by setting the access mode to
“permit” and then specifying a range of multicast groups that a user can join. The
current profile configuration is then displayed.
Configuring IGMP Filtering and Throttling for Interfaces
Once you have configured IGMP profiles, you can assign them to interfaces on the
switch. Also you can set the IGMP throttling number to limit the number of multicast
groups an interface can join at the same time.
Command Usage
• Only one profile can be assigned to an interface.
Console(config)#ip igmp profile 19 4-298
Console(config-igmp-profile)#permit 4-299
Console(config-igmp-profile)#range 239.1.2.3 4-299
Console(config-igmp-profile)#range 239.2.3.1 239.2.3.200
Console(config-igmp-profile)#end
Console#show ip igmp profile 19 4-302
IGMP Profile 19
permit
range 239.1.2.3 239.1.2.3
range 239.2.3.1 239.2.3.200
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-224
3
• An IGMP profile or throttling setting can also be applied to a trunk interface. When
ports are configured as trunk members, the trunk uses the settings applied to the
first port member in the trunk.
• IGMP throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can join at
the same time. When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port, the
switch can take one of two actions; either “deny” or “replace”. If the action is set to
deny, any new IGMP join reports will be dropped. If the action is set to replace, the
switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new multicast
group.
Command Attributes
•Profile – Selects an existing profile number to assign to an interface.
•Max Multicast Groups – Sets the maximum number of multicast groups an
interface can join at the same time. (Range: 0-255; Default: 255)
•Current Multicast Groups – Displays the current multicast groups the interface
has joined.
•Throttling Action Mode – Sets the action to take when the maximum number of
multicast groups for the interface has been exceeded. (Default: Deny)
-deny - The new multicast group join report is dropped.
-replace - The new multicast group replaces an existing group.
•Throttling Status – Indicates if the throttling action has been implemented on the
interface. (Options: True or False)
•Trunk – Indicates if a port is a trunk member.
Web – Click IGMP Snooping, IGMP Filter/Throttling Port Configuration or IGMP
Filter/Throttling Trunk Configuration. Select a profile to assign to an interface, then
set the throttling number and action. Click Apply.
Figure 3-138 IGMP Filter and Throttling Port Configuration
Multicast VLAN Registration
3-225
3
CLI – This example assigns IGMP profile number 19 to port 1, and then sets the
throttling number and action. The current IGMP filtering and throttling settings for the
interface are then displayed.
Multicast VLAN Registration
Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) is a protocol that controls access to a single
network-wide VLAN most commonly used for transmitting multicast traffic (such as
television channels or video-on-demand) across a service provider’s network. Any
multicast traffic entering an MVR VLAN is sent to all attached subscribers. This
protocol can significantly reduce the processing overhead required to dynamically
monitor and establish the distribution tree for a normal multicast VLAN. This makes
it possible to support common multicast services over a wide part of the network
without having to use any multicast routing protocol.
MVR maintains the user isolation and data security provided by VLAN segregation
by passing only multicast traffic into other VLANs to which the subscribers belong.
Even though common multicast streams are passed onto different VLAN groups
from the MVR VLAN, users in different IEEE 802.1Q or private VLANs cannot
exchange any information (except through upper-level routing services).
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1 4-166
Console(config-if)#ip igmp filter 19 4-300
Console(config-if)#ip igmp max-groups 64 4-300
Console(config-if)#ip igmp max-groups action deny 4-301
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show ip igmp filter interface ethernet 1/1 4-302
Information of Eth 1/1
IGMP Profile 19
permit
range 239.1.2.3 239.1.2.3
range 239.2.3.1 239.2.3.200
Console#show ip igmp throttle interface ethernet 1/1 4-303
Information of Eth 1/1
status : TRUE
action : deny
max multicast groups : 64
current multicast groups: 0
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-226
3
General Configuration Guidelines for MVR
1. Enable MVR globally on the switch, select the MVR VLAN, and add the
multicast groups that will stream traffic to attached hosts (see “Configuring
Global MVR Settings” on page 3-226).
2. Set the interfaces that will join the MVR as source ports or receiver ports (see
“Configuring MVR Interface Status” on page 3-229).
3. Enable IGMP Snooping to a allow a subscriber to dynamically join or leave an
MVR group (see “Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters” on
page 3-213). Note that only IGMP version 2 or 3 hosts can issue multicast join
or leave messages.
4. For multicast streams that will run for a long term and be associated with a
stable set of hosts, you can statically bind the multicast group to the
participating interfaces (see “Assigning Static Multicast Groups to Interfaces” on
page 3-231).
Configuring Global MVR Settings
The global settings for Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) include enabling or
disabling MVR for the switch, selecting the VLAN that will serve as the sole channel
for common multicast streams supported by the service provider, and assigning the
multicast group address for each of these services to the MVR VLAN.
Command Attributes
•MVR Status – When MVR is enabled on the switch, any multicast data associated
with an MVR group is sent from all designated source ports, and to all receiver
ports that have registered to receive data from that multicast group. (Default:
Disabled)
Multicast Router
Layer 2 Switch
Multicast Server
PC TV
Set-top Box
TV
Set-top Box
Satellite Services
Service
Network
Source
Port
Receiver
Ports
Multicast VLAN Registration
3-227
3
•MVR Running Status – Indicates whether or not all necessary conditions in the
MVR environment are satisfied.
•MVR VLAN – Identifier of the VLAN that serves as the channel for streaming
multicast services using MVR. (Range: 1-4093; Default: 1)
•MVR Group IP – IP address for an MVR multicast group. The IP address range of
224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 is used for multicast streams. MVR group addresses
cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast address range of 224.0.0.x. (Range:
224.0.1.0 - 239.255.255.255; Default: no groups are assigned to the MVR VLAN)
•Count – The number of contiguous MVR group addresses. (Range: 1-255;
Default: 0)
Web – Click MVR, Configuration. Enable MVR globally on the switch, select the
MVR VLAN, add the multicast groups that will stream traffic to attached hosts, and
then click Apply.
Figure 3-139 MVR Global Configuration
CLI – This example first enables IGMP snooping, enables MVR globally, and then
configures a range of MVR group addresses.
Displaying MVR Interface Status
You can display information about the interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN.
Field Attributes
•Type – Shows the MVR port type.
•Oper Status – Shows the link status.
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping 4-288
Console(config)#mvr 4-304
Console(config)#mvr group 228.1.23.1 10 4-304
Console(config)#
Configuring the Switch
3-228
3
•MVR Status – Shows the MVR status. MVR status for source ports is “ACTIVE” if
MVR is globally enabled on the switch. MVR status for receiver ports is “ACTIVE”
only if there are subscribers receiving multicast traffic from one of the MVR groups,
or a multicast group has been statically assigned to an interface.
•Immediate Leave – Shows if immediate leave is enabled or disabled.
•Trunk Member15 – Shows if port is a trunk member.
Web – Click MVR, Port or Trunk Information.
Figure 3-140 MVR Port Information
CLI – This example shows information about interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN.
Displaying Port Members of Multicast Groups
You can display the multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN either through
IGMP snooping or static configuration.
Field Attributes
•Group IP – Multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN.
•Group Port List – Shows the interfaces with subscribers for multicast services
provided through the MVR VLAN.
15. Port Information only.
Console#show mvr interface 4-307
Port Type Status Immediate Leave
------- -------- ------------- ---------------
eth1/1 SOURCE ACTIVE/UP Disable
eth1/2 RECEIVER ACTIVE/UP Disable
Console#
Multicast VLAN Registration
3-229
3
Web – Click MVR, Group IP Information.
Figure 3-141 MVR Group IP Information
CLI – This example following shows information about the interfaces associated with
multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN.
Configuring MVR Interface Status
Each interface that participates in the MVR VLAN must be configured as an MVR
source port or receiver port. If only one subscriber attached to an interface is
receiving multicast services, you can enable the immediate leave function.
Command Usage
• One or more interfaces may be configured as MVR source ports.
• MVR receiver ports cannot be members of a trunk. Receiver ports can belong to
different VLANs, but should not be configured as a member of the MVR VLAN.
• IGMP snooping can be used to allow a source port or receiver port to dynamically
join or leave multicast groups within the MVR VLAN using the standard rules for
multicast filtering. Multicast groups can also be statically assigned to a source port
or receiver port (see “Assigning Static Multicast Groups to Interfaces” on page
3-231).
Console#show mvr interface 4-307
MVR Group IP Status Members
---------------- -------- -------
225.0.0.1 ACTIVE eth1/1(d), eth1/2(s)
225.0.0.2 INACTIVE None
225.0.0.3 INACTIVE None
225.0.0.4 INACTIVE None
225.0.0.5 INACTIVE None
225.0.0.6 INACTIVE None
225.0.0.7 INACTIVE None
225.0.0.8 INACTIVE None
225.0.0.9 INACTIVE None
225.0.0.10 INACTIVE None
Console#
Configuring the Switch
3-230
3
• Immediate leave applies only to receiver ports. When enabled, the receiver port is
immediately removed from the multicast group identified in the leave message.
When immediate leave is disabled, the switch follows the standard rules by
sending a group-specific query to the receiver port and waiting for a response to
determine if there are any remaining subscribers for that multicast group before
removing the port from the group list. Using immediate leave can speed up leave\
latency, but should only be enabled on a port attached to one multicast subscriber
to avoid disrupting services to other group members attached to the same
interface. Note that immediate leave does not apply to multicast groups which have
been statically assigned to a port.
Command Attributes
•MVR Type – The following interface types are supported:
- Source – An uplink port that can send and receive multicast data for the groups
assigned to the MVR VLAN.
- Receiver – A subscriber port that can receive multicast data sent through the
MVR VLAN.
- Non-MVR – An interface that does not participate in the MVR VLAN. (This is the
default type.)
•Immediate Leave – Configures the switch to immediately remove an interface
from a multicast stream as soon as it receives a leave message for that group.
•Trunk16 – Shows if port is a trunk member.
Web – Click MVR, Port or Trunk Configuration.
Figure 3-142 MVR Port Configuration
16. Port Information only.
Multicast VLAN Registration
3-231
3
CLI – This example configures an MVR source port and receiver port, and then
enables immediate leave on the receiver port.
Assigning Static Multicast Groups to Interfaces
For multicast streams that will run for a long term and be associated with a stable set
of hosts, you can statically bind the multicast group to the participating interfaces.
Command Usage
• Any multicast groups that use the MVR VLAN must be statically assigned to it
under the MVR Configuration menu (see“Configuring Global MVR Settings” on
page 3-226).
• The IP address range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 is used for multicast
streams. MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast
address range of 224.0.0.x.
Command Attributes
•Interface – Indicates a port or trunk.
•Member – Shows the IP addresses for MVR multicast groups which have been
statically assigned to the selected interface.
•Non-Member – Shows the IP addresses for all MVR multicast groups which have
not been statically assigned to the selected interface.
Web – Click MVR, Group Member Configuration. Select a port or trunk from the
“Interface” field, and click Query to display the assigned multicast groups. Select a
multicast address from the displayed lists, and click the Add or Remove button to
modify the Member list.
Figure 3-143 MVR Group Member Configuration
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#mvr type source 4-305
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2
Console(config-if)#mvr type receiver 4-305
Console(config-if)#mvr immediate 4-305
Console(config-if)#
Configuring the Switch
3-232
3
CLI – This example statically assigns a multicast group to a receiver port.
DHCP Snooping
DHCP snooping allows a switch to protect a network from rogue DHCP servers or
other devices which send port-related information to a DHCP server. This
information can be useful in tracking an IP address back to a physical port.
Network traffic may be disrupted when malicious DHCP messages are received
from an outside source. DHCP snooping is used to filter DHCP messages received
on a non-secure interface from outside the network or firewall. When DHCP
snooping is enabled globally and enabled on a VLAN interface, DHCP messages
received on an untrusted interface from a device not listed in the DHCP snooping
table will be dropped.
When enabled, DHCP messages entering an untrusted interface are filtered based
upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping.
Filtering rules are implemented as follows:
• If the global DHCP snooping is disabled, all DHCP packets are forwarded.
• If DHCP snooping is enabled globally, and also enabled on the VLAN where the
DHCP packet is received, all DHCP packets are forwarded for a trusted port. If the
received packet is a DHCP ACK message, a dynamic DHCP snooping entry is also
added to the binding table.
• If DHCP snooping is enabled globally, and also enabled on the VLAN where the
DHCP packet is received, but the port is not trusted, it is processed as follows:
• If the DHCP packet is a reply packet from a DHCP server (including OFFER,
ACK or NAK messages), the packet is dropped.
• If the DHCP packet is from a client, such as a DECLINE or RELEASE message,
the switch forwards the packet only if the corresponding entry is found in the
binding table.
• If the DHCP packet is from a client, such as a DISCOVER, REQUEST, INFORM,
DECLINE or RELEASE message, the packet is forwarded if MAC address
verification is disabled. However, if MAC address verification is enabled, then
the packet will only be forwarded if the client’s hardware address stored in the
DHCP packet is the same as the source MAC address in the Ethernet header.
• If the DHCP packet is not a recognizable type, it is dropped.
• If a DHCP packet from a client passes the filtering criteria above, it will only be
forwarded to trusted ports in the same VLAN.
• If a DHCP packet is from server is received on a trusted port, it will be forwarded
to both trusted and untrusted ports in the same VLAN.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2
Console(config-if)#mvr group 228.1.23.1 4-305
Console(config-if)#
DHCP Snooping
3-233
3
If the DHCP snooping is globally disabled, all dynamic bindings are removed from
the binding table.
Additional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCP client – The port(s)
through which the switch submits a client request to the DHCP server must be
configured as trusted. Note that the switch will not add a dynamic entry for itself to
the binding table when it receives an ACK message from a DHCP server. Also,
when the switch sends out DHCP client packets for itself, no filtering takes place.
However, when the switch receives any messages from a DHCP server, any packets
received from untrusted ports are dropped.
DHCP Snooping Configuration
Command Attributes
•DHCP Snooping Status – Enables or disables DHCP snooping globally.
•DHCP Snooping MAC-Address Verification – Enables or disables MAC address
verification. DHCP packets will be dropped if the source MAC address in the
Ethernet header of the packet is not same as the client’s hardware address in the
DHCP packet.
Web – Click DHCP Snooping, Configuration.
Figure 3-144 DHCP Snooping Configuration
CLI – This example first enables DHCP Snooping, and then enables DHCP
Snooping MAC-Address Verification.
DHCP Snooping VLAN Configuration
Enables DHCP snooping on the specified VLAN.
Command Attributes
•VLAN ID – ID of a configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4093)
•DHCP Snooping Status – Enables or disables DHCP snooping for the selected
VLAN. When DHCP snooping is enabled globally on the switch, and enabled on
the specified VLAN, DHCP packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports
within the VLAN.
Console(config)#ip dhcp snooping 4-317
Console(config)#ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address 4-321
Console(config)#
Configuring the Switch
3-234
3
Web – Click DHCP Snooping, VLAN Configuration.
Figure 3-145 DHCP Snooping VLAN Configuration
CLI – This example first enables DHCP Snooping for VLAN 1.
DHCP Snooping Information Option Configuration
DHCP provides a relay mechanism for sending information about the switch and its
DHCP clients to the DHCP server. Known as DHCP Option 82, it allows compatible
DHCP servers to use the information when assigning IP addresses, or to set other
services or policies for clients.
When the DHCP Snooping Information Option is enabled, clients can be identified
by the switch port to which they are connected rather than just their MAC address.
DHCP client-server exchange messages are then forwarded directly between the
server and client without having to flood them to the entire VLAN.
In some cases, the switch may receive DHCP packets from a client that already
includes DHCP Option 82 information. The switch can be configured to set the
action policy for these packets. Either the switch can drop the DHCP packets, keep
the existing information, or replace it with the switch’s relay information.
Note: DHCP snooping must be enabled on the switch for the DHCP Option 82
information to be inserted into packets.
Command Attributes
•DHCP Snooping Information Option Status – Enables or disables DHCP Option
82 information relay.
•DHCP Snooping Information Option Policy – Sets the DHCP snooping
information option policy for DHCP client packets that include Option 82
information.
•Replace – Overwrites the DHCP client packet information with the switch’s relay
information.
•Keep – Retains the client’s DHCP information.
•Drop – Discards the Option 82 information in a packet and then floods it to the
entire VLAN.
Console(config)#ip dhcp snooping vlan 1 4-319
Console(config)#
DHCP Snooping
3-235
3
Web – Click DHCP Snooping, Information Option Configuration.
Figure 3-146 DHCP Snooping Information Option Configuration
CLI – This example enables DHCP Snooping Information Option, and sets the policy
as replace.
DHCP Snooping Port Configuration
Configures switch ports as trusted or untrusted. An untrusted interface is an
interface that is configured to receive messages from outside the network or firewall.
A trusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive only messages from
within the network.
Command Attributes
•Trust Status – Enables or disables port as trusted.
Web – Click DHCP Snooping, Information Option Configuration.
Figure 3-147 DHCP Snooping Port Configuration
Console(config)#ip dhcp snooping information option 4-321
Console(config)#ip dhcp snooping information policy replace 4-322
Console(config)#
Configuring the Switch
3-236
3
CLI – This example shows how to enable the DHCP Snooping Trust Status for ports.
DHCP Snooping Binding Information
Displays the DHCP snooping binding information.
Command Attributes
•No. – Entry number for DHCP snooping binding information.
•Unit – Stack unit.
•Port – Port number.
•VLAN ID – ID of a configured VLAN (Range: 1-4093)
•MAC Address – A valid unicast MAC address.
•IP Address – A valid unicast IP address.
•IP Address Type – Indicates an IPv4 or IPv6 address type.
•Lease Time (Seconds) – The time after which an entry is removed from the table.
Web – Click DHCP Snooping, DHCP Snooping Binding Information.
Figure 3-148 DHCP Snooping Binding Information
CLI – This example shows how to display the DHCP Snooping binding table entries.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#ip dhcp snooping trust 4-320
Console(config-if)#
Console#show ip dhcp snooping binding 4-324
MacAddress IpAddress Lease(sec) Type VLAN Interface
----------------- --------------- ---------- -------------------- ---- ---------
11-22-33-44-55-66 192.168.0.99 0 Dynamic 1 Eth 1/5
Console#
IP Source Guard
3-237
3
IP Source Guard
IP Source Guard is a security feature that filters IP traffic on network interfaces
based on manually configured entries in the IP Source Guard table, or static and
dynamic entries in the DHCP Snooping table when enabled (see “DHCP Snooping”
on page 3-232). IP source guard can be used to prevent traffic attacks caused when
a host tries to use the IP address of a neighbor to access the network. This section
describes commands used to configure IP Source Guard.
IP Source Guard Port Configuration
IP Source Guard is used to filter traffic on an unsecure port which receives
messages from outside the network or firewall, and therefore may be subject to
traffic attacks caused by a host trying to use the IP address of a neighbor.
When enabled, traffic is filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP
snooping or static addresses configured in the source guard binding table. An
inbound packet’s IP address (sip option) or both its IP address and corresponding
MAC address (sip-mac option) are checked against the binding table. If no matching
entry is found, the packet is dropped.
Command Attributes
•Filter Type – Configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based source IP
address, or source IP address and corresponding MAC address. (Default: None)
•None – Disables IP source guard filtering on the port.
•SIP – Enables traffic filtering based on IP addresses stored in the binding table.
•SIP-MAC – Enables traffic filtering based on IP addresses and corresponding
MAC addresses stored in the binding table.
Web – Click IP Source Guard, Port Configuration.
Figure 3-149 IP Source Guard Port Configuration
Configuring the Switch
3-238
3
CLI – This example shows how to enable IP source guard on port 5.
Static IP Source Guard Binding Configuration
Adds a static addresses to the source-guard binding table. Table entries include a
MAC address, IP address, lease time, entry type (Static, Dynamic), VLAN identifier,
and port identifier. All static entries are configured with an infinite lease time, which
is indicated with a value of zero in the table.
Command Attributes
•Static Binding Table Counts – The total number of static entries in the table.
•Port – Switch port number. (Range: 1-28)
•VLAN ID – ID of a configured VLAN (Range: 1-4093)
•MAC Address – A valid unicast MAC address.
•IP Address – A valid unicast IP address, including classful types A, B or C.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#ip source-guard sip 4-313
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show ip source-guard 4-316
Interface Filter-type
--------- -----------
Eth 1/1 DISABLED
Eth 1/2 DISABLED
Eth 1/3 DISABLED
Eth 1/4 DISABLED
Eth 1/5 SIP
Eth 1/6 DISABLED
.
.
IP Source Guard
3-239
3
Web – Click IP Source Guard, Static Configuration.
Figure 3-150 Static IP Source Guard Binding Configuration
CLI – This example shows how to configure a static source-guard binding on port 5.
Dynamic IP Source Guard Binding Information
Displays the source-guard binding table for a selected interface.
Command Attributes
•Query by – Select an interface to display the source-guard binding. (Options: Port,
VLAN, MAC Address, or IP Address)
•Dynamic Binding Table Counts – Displays the number of IP addresses in the
source-guard binding table.
•Current Dynamic Binding Table – Displays the IP addresses in the source-guard
binding table.
Console(config)#ip source-guard binding 11-22-33-44-55-66 vlan 1
192.168.0.99 interface ethernet 1/5 4-315
Console(config)#
Configuring the Switch
3-240
3
Web – Click IP Source Guard, Dynamic Information.
Figure 3-151 Dynamic IP Source Guard Binding Information
CLI – This example shows how to configure a static source-guard binding on port 5.
IP Clustering
IP Clustering is a method of grouping switches together to enable centralized
management through a single unit. Switches that support clustering can be grouped
together regardless of physical location or switch type, as long as they are
connected to the same local network.
A switch cluster has a “Commander” unit that is used to manage all other “Member”
switches in the cluster. The management station can use both Telnet and the web
interface to communicate directly with the Commander throught its IP address, while
the Commander manages Member switches using cluster “internal” IP addresses.
There can be up to 36 Member switches in one cluster, and Cluster switches must
be in the same IP subnet.
Once a switch has been configured to be a cluster Commander, it automatically
discovers other cluster-enabled switches in the network. These “Candidate”
Console#show ip source-guard binding 4-316
MacAddress IpAddress Lease(sec) Type VLAN
Interface
----------------- --------------- ---------- -------------------- ---- --------
11-22-33-44-55-66 192.168.0.99 0 Static 1 Eth 1/5
Console#
IP Clustering
3-241
3
switches only become cluster Members when manually selected by the
administrator through the management station.
After the Commander and Members have been configured, any switch in the cluster
can be managed from the web agent by choosing the desired Member ID from the
Cluster drop down menu. From the Commander CLI prompt, use the “rcommand”
command (see page 4-327) to connect to the Member switch.
Figure 3-152 Cluster Member Choice
Cluster Configuration
To create a switch cluster, first be sure that clustering is enabled on the switch (the
default is enabled), then set the switch as a Cluster Commander. Set a Cluster IP
Pool that does not conflict with the network IP subnet. Cluster IP addresses are
assigned to switches when they become Members and are used for communication
between Member switches and the Commander.
Command Attributes
•Cluster Status – Enables or disables clustering on the switch. (Default: Enabled)
•Cluster Commander – Enables or disables the switch as a cluster Commander.
•Role – Indicates the current role of the switch in the cluster; either Commander,
Member, or Candidate.
•Cluster IP Pool – An “internal” IP address pool that is used to assign IP addresses
to Member switches in the cluster. Internal cluster IP addresses are in the form
10.x.x.member-ID. Only the base IP address of the pool needs to be set since
Member IDs can only be between 1 and 36. Note that you cannot change the cluster
IP pool when the switch is currently in Commander mode. Commander mode must first
be disabled. (Default: 10.254.254.1)
•Number of Members – The current number of Member switches in the cluster.
•Number of Candidates – The current number of Candidate switches discovered
in the network that are available to become Members.
Configuring the Switch
3-242
3
Web – Click Cluster, Configuration.
Figure 3-153 Cluster Configuration
CLI – This example first enables clustering on the switch, sets the switch as the
cluster Commander, and then configures the cluster IP pool.
Cluster Member Configuration
Adds Candidate switches to the cluster as Members.
Command Attributes
•Member ID – Specify a Member ID number for the selected Candidate switch.
(Range: 1-36)
•MAC Address – Select a discoverd switch MAC address from the Candidate
Table, or enter a specific MAC address of a known switch.
Web – Click Cluster, Member Configuration.
Figure 3-154 Cluster Member Configuration
Console(config)#cluster 4-324
Console(config)#cluster commander 4-325
Console(config)#cluster ip-pool 10.2.3.4 4-326
Console(config)#
IP Clustering
3-243
3
CLI – This example creates a new cluster Member by specifying the Candidate
switch MAC address and setting a Member ID.
Cluster Member Information
Displays current cluster Member switch information.
Command Attributes
•Member ID – The ID number of the Member switch. (Range: 1-36)
•Role – Indicates the current status of the switch in the cluster.
•IP Address – The internal cluster IP address assigned to the Member switch.
•MAC Address – The MAC address of the Member switch.
•Description – The system description string of the Member switch.
Web – Click Cluster, Member Information.
Figure 3-155 Cluster Member Information
CLI – This example shows information about cluster Member switches.
Cluster Candidate Information
Displays information about discovered switches in the network that are already
cluster Members or are available to become cluster Members.
Command Attributes
•Role – Indicates the current status of Candidate switches in the network.
•MAC Address – The MAC address of the Candidate switch.
•Description – The system description string of the Candidate switch.
Console(config)#cluster member mac-address 00-12-34-56-78-9a id 5 4-326
Console(config)#
Vty-0#show cluster members 4-328
Cluster Members:
ID: 1
Role: Active member
IP Address: 10.254.254.2
MAC Address: 00-12-cf-23-49-c0
Description: 24/48 L2/L4 IPV4/IPV6 GE Switch
Vty-0#
Configuring the Switch
3-244
3
Web – Click Cluster, Candidate Information.
Figure 3-156 Cluster Candidate Information
CLI – This example shows information about cluster Candidate switches.
Vty-0#show cluster candidates 4-328
Cluster Candidates:
Role Mac Description
--------------- ----------------- -----------------------------------------
ACTIVE MEMBER 00-12-cf-23-49-c0 24/48 L2/L4 IPV4/IPV6 GE Switch
CANDIDATE 00-12-cf-0b-47-a0 24/48 L2/L4 IPV4/IPV6 GE Switch
Vty-0#
UPnP
3-245
3
UPnP
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a set of protocols that allows devices to connect
seamlessly and simplifies the deployment of home and office networks. UPnP
achieves this by issuing UPnP device control protocols designed upon open,
Internet-based communication standards.
The first step in UPnP networking is discovery. When a device is added to the
network, the UPnP discovery protocol allows that device to broadcast its services to
control points on the network. Similarly, when a control point is added to the network,
the UPnP discovery protocol allows that control point to search for UPnP enabled
devices on the network.
Once a control point has discovered a device its next step is to learn more about the
device and its capabilities by retrieving the device's description from the URL
provided by the device in the discovery message. After a control point has retrieved
a description of the device, it can send actions to the device’s service. To do this, a
control point sends a suitable control message to the control URL for the service
(provided in the device description).
When a device is known to the control point, periodic event notication messages are
sent. A UPnP description for a service includes a list of actions the service responds
to and a list of variables that model the state of the service at run time.
If a device has a URL for presentation, then the control point can retrieve a page
from this URL, load the page into a web browser, and depending on the capabilities
of the page, allow a user to control the device and/or view device status.
UPnP Configuration
This page allows you to enable or disable UPnP, and to set time out values.
Command Attributes
•UPNP Status – Enables/disables UPnP on the device.
•Advertising Duration – This sets the duration of which a device will advertise its
status to the control point. (Range: 60-86400 seconds; Default: 100 seconds)
•TTL Value – Sets the time-to-live (TTL) value for UPnP messages transmitted by
the device. (Range: 1-255; Default: 4)
Web – Click UPNP, Configuration and enter the desired variables
Figure 3-157 UPnP Configuration
Configuring the Switch
3-246
3
CLI – This example enables UPnP, sets the device advertise duration to 200
seconds, the device TTL to 6, and displays information about basic UPnP
configuration.
Console(config)#upnp device 4-215
Console(config)#upnp device advertise duration 200 4-216
Console(config)#upnp device ttl 6 4-216
Console(config)#end
Console#sh upnp 4-217
UPnP global settings:
Status: Enabled
Advertise duration: 200
TTL: 6
Console#
4-1
Chapter 4: Command Line Interface
This chapter describes how to use the Command Line Interface (CLI).
Using the Command Line Interface
Accessing the CLI
When accessing the management interface for the switch over a direct connection
to the server’s console port, or via a Telnet connection, the switch can be managed
by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt. Using the switch's
command-line interface (CLI) is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX
system.
Console Connection
To access the switch through the console port, perform these steps:
1. At the console prompt, enter the user name and password. (The default user
names are “admin” and “guest” with corresponding passwords of “admin” and
“guest.”) When the administrator user name and password is entered, the CLI
displays the “Console#” prompt and enters privileged access mode
(i.e., Privileged Exec). But when the guest user name and password is entered,
the CLI displays the “Console>” prompt and enters normal access mode
(i.e., Normal Exec).
2. Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks.
3. When finished, exit the session with the “quit” or “exit” command.
After connecting to the system through the console port, the login screen displays:
User Access Verification
Username: admin
Password:
CLI session with the ES3528M-SFP is opened.
To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-2
4
Telnet Connection
Telnet operates over the IP transport protocol. In this environment, your
management station and any network device you want to manage over the network
must have a valid IP address. Valid IP addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255,
separated by periods. Each address consists of a network portion and host portion.
For example, the IP address assigned to this switch, 10.1.0.1, with subnet mask
255.255.255.0, consists of a network portion (10.1.0) and a host portion (1).
Note: The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default.
To access the switch through a Telnet session, you must first set the IP address for
the Master unit, and set the default gateway if you are managing the switch from a
different IP subnet. For example,
If your corporate network is connected to another network outside your office or to
the Internet, you need to apply for a registered IP address. However, if you are
attached to an isolated network, then you can use any IP address that matches the
network segment to which you are attached.
After you configure the switch with an IP address, you can open a Telnet session by
performing these steps:
1. From the remote host, enter the Telnet command and the IP address of the
device you want to access.
2. At the prompt, enter the user name and system password. The CLI will display
the “Vty-n#” prompt for the administrator to show that you are using privileged
access mode (i.e., Privileged Exec), or “Vty-n>” for the guest to show that you
are using normal access mode (i.e., Normal Exec), where n indicates the
number of the current Telnet session.
3. Enter the necessary commands to complete your desired tasks.
4. When finished, exit the session with the “quit” or “exit” command.
After entering the Telnet command, the login screen displays:
Note: You can open up to four sessions to the device via Telnet.
Console(config)#interface vlan 1
Console(config-if)#ip address 10.1.0.254 255.255.255.0
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#ip default-gateway 10.1.0.254
Username: admin
Password:
CLI session with the ES3528M-SFP is opened.
To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].
Vty-0#
Entering Commands
4-3
4
Entering Commands
This section describes how to enter CLI commands.
Keywords and Arguments
A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments. Keywords identify a
command, and arguments specify configuration parameters. For example, in the
command “show interfaces status ethernet 1/5,” show interfaces and status are
keywords, ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type, and 1/5
specifies the unit/port.
You can enter commands as follows:
• To enter a simple command, enter the command keyword.
• To enter multiple commands, enter each command in the required order. For
example, to enable Privileged Exec command mode, and display the startup
configuration, enter:
Console>enable
Console#show startup-config
• To enter commands that require parameters, enter the required parameters after
the command keyword. For example, to set a password for the administrator,
enter:
Console(config)#username admin password 0 smith
Minimum Abbreviation
The CLI will accept a minimum number of characters that uniquely identify a
command. For example, the command “configure” can be entered as con. If an
entry is ambiguous, the system will prompt for further input.
Command Completion
If you terminate input with a Tab key, the CLI will print the remaining characters of a
partial keyword up to the point of ambiguity. In the “logging history” example, typing
log followed by a tab will result in printing the command up to “logging.”
Getting Help on Commands
You can display a brief description of the help system by entering the help
command. You can also display command syntax by using the “?” character to list
keywords or parameters.
Command Line Interface
4-4
4
Showing Commands
If you enter a “?” at the command prompt, the system will display the first level of
keywords for the current command class (Normal Exec or Privileged Exec) or
configuration class (Global, ACL, Interface, Line or VLAN Database). You can also
Entering Commands
4-5
4
display a list of valid keywords for a specific command. For example, the command
“show ?” displays a list of possible show commands:
Console#show ?
access-group Access groups
access-list Access lists
accounting Uses an accounting list with this name
banner Banner info
bridge-ext Bridge extension information
calendar Date and time information
class-map Displays class maps
cluster Display cluster
dot1q-tunnel dot1q-tunnel
dot1x 802.1x content
garp GARP properties
gvrp GVRP interface information
history History information
interfaces Interface information
ip IP information
lacp LACP statistics
line TTY line information
lldp LLDP
log Login records
logging Logging setting
mac MAC access list
mac-address-table Shows the MAC address table
management Show management information
map Maps priority
memory Memory utilization
mvr Shows MVR global parameters
network-access Shows the entries of the secure port.
ntp Network Time Protocol configuration
policy-map Displays policy maps
port Port characteristics
privilege Shows current privilege level
process Device process
protocol-vlan Protocol-VLAN information
public-key Public key information
queue Priority queue information
radius-server RADIUS server information
reload Shows the reload settings
running-config Information on the running configuration
snmp Simple Network Management Protocol statistics
sntp Simple Network Time Protocol configuration
spanning-tree Spanning-tree configuration
ssh Secure shell server connections
startup-config Startup system configuration
system System information
tacacs-server TACACS server settings
upnp UPnP settings
users Information about terminal lines
version System hardware and software versions
vlan Virtual LAN settings
voice Shows the voice VLAN information
web-auth Shows web authentication configuration
Console#show
Command Line Interface
4-6
4
The command “show interfaces ?” will display the following information:
Partial Keyword Lookup
If you terminate a partial keyword with a question mark, alternatives that match the
initial letters are provided. (Remember not to leave a space between the command
and question mark.) For example “s?” shows all the keywords starting with “s.”
Negating the Effect of Commands
For many configuration commands you can enter the prefix keyword “no” to cancel
the effect of a command or reset the configuration to the default value. For example,
the logging command will log system messages to a host server. To disable
logging, specify the no logging command. This guide describes the negation effect
for all applicable commands.
Using Command History
The CLI maintains a history of commands that have been entered. You can scroll
back through the history of commands by pressing the up arrow key. Any command
displayed in the history list can be executed again, or first modified and then
executed.
Using the show history command displays a longer list of recently executed
commands.
Understanding Command Modes
The command set is divided into Exec and Configuration classes. Exec commands
generally display information on system status or clear statistical counters.
Configuration commands, on the other hand, modify interface parameters or enable
certain switching functions. These classes are further divided into different modes.
Available commands depend on the selected mode. You can always enter a
question mark “?” at the prompt to display a list of the commands available for the
Console#show interfaces ?
counters Interface counters information
status Interface status information
switchport Interface switchport information
Console#show interfaces
Console#show s?
snmp sntp spanning-tree ssh startup-config
system
Console#show s
Entering Commands
4-7
4
current mode. The command classes and associated modes are displayed in the
following table:
Exec Commands
When you open a new console session on the switch with the user name and
password “guest,” the system enters the Normal Exec command mode (or guest
mode), displaying the “Console>” command prompt. Only a limited number of the
commands are available in this mode. You can access all commands only from the
Privileged Exec command mode (or administrator mode). To access Privilege Exec
mode, open a new console session with the user name and password “admin.” The
system will now display the “Console#” command prompt. You can also enter
Privileged Exec mode from within Normal Exec mode, by entering the enable
command, followed by the privileged level password “super” (page 4-39).
To enter Privileged Exec mode, enter the following user names and passwords:
Table 4-1 Command Modes
Class Mode
Exec Normal
Privileged
Configuration Global*Access Control List
Class Map
Interface
Line
Multiple Spanning Tree
Policy Map
Server Group
VLAN Database
* You must be in Privileged Exec mode to access the Global configuration mode.
You must be in Global Configuration mode to access any of the other configuration modes.
Username: admin
Password: [admin login password]
CLI session with the ES3528M-SFP is opened.
To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].
Console#
Username: guest
Password: [guest login password]
CLI session with the ES3528M-SFP is opened.
To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].
Console>enable
Password: [privileged level password]
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-8
4
Configuration Commands
Configuration commands are privileged level commands used to modify switch
settings. These commands modify the running configuration only and are not saved
when the switch is rebooted. To store the running configuration in non-volatile
storage, use the copy running-config startup-config command.
The configuration commands are organized into different modes:
• Global Configuration - These commands modify the system level configuration,
and include commands such as hostname and snmp-server community.
• Access Control List Configuration - These commands are used for packet filtering.
• Interface Configuration - These commands modify the port configuration such as
speed-duplex and negotiation.
• Line Configuration - These commands modify the console port and Telnet
configuration, and include command such as parity and databits.
• VLAN Configuration - Includes the command to create VLAN groups.
To enter the Global Configuration mode, enter the command configure in Privileged
Exec mode. The system prompt will change to “Console(config)#” which gives you
access privilege to all Global Configuration commands.
To enter the other modes, at the configuration prompt type one of the following
commands. Use the exit or end command to return to the Privileged Exec mode.
Console#configure
Console(config)#
Table 4-2 Configuration Modes
Mode Command Prompt Page
Line line {console | vty} Console(config-line)# 4-12
Access
Control List
access-list ip standard
access-list ip extended
access-list mac
Console(config-std-acl)
Console(config-ext-acl)
Console(config-mac-acl)
4-139
4-141
4-146
Class Map class map Console(config-cmap) 4-276
Interface interface {ethernet port | port-channel id| vlan id} Console(config-if)# 4-166
MSTP spanning-tree mst-configuration Console(config-mstp)# 4-223
Policy Map policy map Console(config-pmap) 4-275
Server Group aaa group server {radius | tacacs+} Console(config-sg-radius)#
Console(config-sg-tacacs+)#
4-102
VLAN vlan database Console(config-vlan) 4-242
Entering Commands
4-9
4
For example, you can use the following commands to enter interface configuration
mode, and then return to Privileged Exec mode
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
.
.
.
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-10
4
Command Line Processing
Commands are not case sensitive. You can abbreviate commands and parameters
as long as they contain enough letters to differentiate them from any other currently
available commands or parameters. You can use the Tab key to complete partial
commands, or enter a partial command followed by the “?” character to display a list
of possible matches. You can also use the following editing keystrokes for
command-line processing:
Table 4-3 Command Line Processing
Keystroke Function
Ctrl-A Shifts cursor to start of command line.
Ctrl-B Shifts cursor to the left one character.
Ctrl-C Terminates the current task and displays the command prompt.
Ctrl-E Shifts cursor to end of command line.
Ctrl-F Shifts cursor to the right one character.
Ctrl-K Deletes all characters from the cursor to the end of the line.
Ctrl-L Repeats current command line on a new line.
Ctrl-N Enters the next command line in the history buffer.
Ctrl-P Enters the last command.
Ctrl-R Repeats current command line on a new line.
Ctrl-U Deletes from the cursor to the beginning of the line.
Ctrl-W Deletes the last word typed.
Esc-B Moves the cursor back one word.
Esc-D Deletes from the cursor to the end of the word.
Esc-F Moves the cursor forward one word.
Delete key or backspace key Erases a mistake when entering a command.
Command Groups
4-11
4
Command Groups
The system commands can be broken down into the functional groups shown below.
Table 4-4 Command Groups
Command Group Description Page
Line Sets communication parameters for the serial port and Telnet,
including baud rate and console time-out
4-12
General Basic commands for entering privileged access mode, restarting the
system, or quitting the CLI
4-21
System Management Controls system logs, system passwords, user name, browser
management options, and a variety of other system information
4-27
Flash/File Manages code image or switch configuration files 4-85
Authentication Configures AAA security and other network access controls 4-91
Access Control List Provides filtering for IP frames (based on address, protocol, or TCP/
UDP port number) or non-IP frames (based on MAC address or
Ethernet type)
4-139
SNMP Activates authentication failure traps; configures community access
strings, and trap managers; also configures IP address filtering
4-150
Interface Configures the connection parameters for all Ethernet ports,
aggregated links, and VLANs
4-166
Mirror Port Mirrors data to another port for analysis without affecting the data
passing through or the performance of the monitored port
4-177
Rate Limiting Controls the maximum rate for traffic transmitted or received on a port 4-179
Link Aggregation Statically groups multiple ports into a single logical trunk; configures
Link Aggregation Control Protocol for port trunks
4-180
Address Table Configures the address table for filtering specified addresses, displays
current entries, clears the table, or sets the aging time
4-190
Spanning Tree Configures Spanning Tree settings for the switch 4-217
VLANs Configures VLAN settings, and defines port membership for VLAN
groups; also enables or configures private VLANs and protocol VLANs
4-238
LLDP Configures LLDP settings to enable information discovery about
neighbor devices
4-193
Class of Service Sets port priority for untagged frames, selects strict priority or weighted
round robin, relative weight for each priority queue, also sets priority for
TCP/UDP traffic types, and DSCP
4-264
Quality of Service Configures Differentiated Services 4-272
Voice VLAN Configures VoIP traffic detection and enables a Voice VLAN 4-280
Multicast Filtering Configures IGMP multicast filtering, query parameters, specifies ports
attached to a multicast router, and enables multicast VLAN registration
4-287
IP Interface Configures IP address for the switch 4-309
DHCP Snooping Configures DHCP snooping 4-317
IP Source Guard Configures IP source guard security 4-313
Command Line Interface
4-12
4
The access mode shown in the following tables is indicated by these abbreviations:
ACL (Access Control List Configuration) MST (Multiple Spanning Tree)
CM (Class Map Configuration) NE (Normal Exec)
GC (Global Configuration) PE (Privileged Exec)
IC (Interface Configuration) PM (Policy Map Configuration)
LC (Line Configuration) VC (VLAN Database Configuration)
SG (Server Group)
Line Commands
You can access the onboard configuration program by attaching a VT100
compatible device to the server’s serial port. These commands are used to set
communication parameters for the serial port or Telnet (i.e., a virtual terminal).
IP Cluster Configures IP clustering 4-324
UPnP Configures UPnP settings 4-324
Table 4-5 Line Commands
Command Function Mode Page
line Identifies a specific line for configuration and starts the line
configuration mode
GC 4-13
login Enables password checking at login LC 4-13
password Specifies a password on a line LC 4-14
timeout login
response
Sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the
CLI
LC 4-15
exec-timeout Sets the interval that the command interpreter waits until user
input is detected
LC 4-15
password-thresh Sets the password intrusion threshold, which limits the number
of failed logon attempts
LC 4-16
silent-time* Sets the amount of time the management console is
inaccessible after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts
exceeds the threshold set by the password-thresh command
LC 4-17
databits* Sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted
and generated by hardware
LC 4-17
parity* Defines the generation of a parity bit LC 4-18
speed* Sets the terminal baud rate LC 4-19
stopbits* Sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte LC 4-19
disconnect Terminates a line connection PE 4-20
show line Displays a terminal line's parameters NE, PE 4-20
* These commands only apply to the serial port.
Table 4-4 Command Groups (Continued)
Command Group Description Page
Line Commands
4-13
4
line
This command identifies a specific line for configuration, and to process subsequent
line configuration commands.
Syntax
line {console | vty}
•console - Console terminal line.
•vty - Virtual terminal for remote console access (i.e., Telnet).
Default Setting
There is no default line.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
Telnet is considered a virtual terminal connection and will be shown as “Vty” in
screen displays such as show users. However, the serial communication
parameters (e.g., databits) do not affect Telnet connections.
Example
To enter console line mode, enter the following command:
Related Commands
show line (4-20)
show users (4-82)
login
This command enables password checking at login. Use the no form to disable
password checking and allow connections without a password.
Syntax
login [local]
no login
local - Selects local password checking. Authentication is based on the
user name specified with the username command.
Default Setting
login local
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
• There are three authentication modes provided by the switch itself at login:
Console(config)#line console
Console(config-line)#
Command Line Interface
4-14
4
-login selects authentication by a single global password as specified by the
password line configuration command. When using this method, the
management interface starts in Normal Exec (NE) mode.
-login local selects authentication via the user name and password
specified by the username command (i.e., default setting). When using this
method, the management interface starts in Normal Exec (NE) or Privileged
Exec (PE) mode, depending on the user’s privilege level (0 or 15
respectively).
-no login selects no authentication. When using this method, the
management interface starts in Normal Exec (NE) mode.
• This command controls login authentication via the switch itself. To configure
user names and passwords for remote authentication servers, you must use
the RADIUS or TACACS software installed on those servers.
Example
Related Commands
username (4-38)
password (4-14)
password
This command specifies the password for a line. Use the no form to remove the
password.
Syntax
password {0 | 7} password
no password
•{0 | 7} - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password
•password - Character string that specifies the line password.
(Maximum length: 8 characters plain text, 32 encrypted, case sensitive)
Default Setting
No password is specified.
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
• When a connection is started on a line with password protection, the system
prompts for the password. If you enter the correct password, the system
shows a prompt. You can use the password-thresh command to set the
number of times a user can enter an incorrect password before the system
terminates the line connection and returns the terminal to the idle state.
• The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password
settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the configuration file
Console(config-line)#login local
Console(config-line)#
Line Commands
4-15
4
during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP
server. There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords.
Example
Related Commands
login (4-13)
password-thresh (4-16)
timeout login response
This command sets the interval that the system waits for a user to log into the CLI.
Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
timeout login response [seconds]
no timeout login response
seconds - Integer that specifies the timeout interval.
(Range: 0 - 300 seconds; 0: disabled)
Default Setting
• CLI: Disabled (0 seconds)
• Telnet: 600 seconds
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
• If a login attempt is not detected within the timeout interval, the connection is
terminated for the session.
• This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections.
• The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled.
• Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting.
Example
To set the timeout to two minutes, enter this command:
Related Commands
silent-time (4-17)
exec-timeout (4-14)
exec-timeout
This command sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected.
Use the no form to restore the default.
Console(config-line)#password 0 secret
Console(config-line)#
Console(config-line)#timeout login response 120
Console(config-line)#
Command Line Interface
4-16
4
Syntax
exec-timeout [seconds]
no exec-timeout
seconds - Integer that specifies the number of seconds.
(Range: 0-65535 seconds; 0: no timeout)
Default Setting
CLI: No timeout
Telnet: 10 minutes
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
• If user input is detected within the timeout interval, the session is kept open;
otherwise the session is terminated.
• This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections.
• The timeout for Telnet cannot be disabled.
• Using the command without specifying a timeout restores the default setting.
Example
To set the timeout to two minutes, enter this command:
Related Commands
silent-time (4-17)
timeout login response (4-13)
password-thresh
This command sets the password intrusion threshold which limits the number of
failed logon attempts. Use the no form to remove the threshold value.
Syntax
password-thresh [threshold]
no password-thresh
threshold - The number of allowed password attempts.
(Range: 1-120; 0: no threshold)
Default Setting
The default value is three attempts.
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Console(config-line)#exec-timeout 120
Console(config-line)#
Line Commands
4-17
4
Command Usage
• When the logon attempt threshold is reached, the system interface becomes
silent for a specified amount of time before allowing the next logon attempt.
(Use the silent-time command to set this interval.) When this threshold is
reached for Telnet, the Telnet logon interface shuts down.
• This command applies to both the local console and Telnet connections.
Example
To set the password threshold to five attempts, enter this command:
Related Commands
silent-time (4-17)
timeout login response (4-13)
silent-time
This command sets the amount of time the management console is inaccessible
after the number of unsuccessful logon attempts exceeds the threshold set by the
password-thresh command. Use the no form to remove the silent time value.
Syntax
silent-time [seconds]
no silent-time
seconds - The number of seconds to disable console response.
(Range: 0-65535; 0: no silent-time)
Default Setting
The default value is no silent-time.
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Example
To set the silent time to 60 seconds, enter this command:
Related Commands
password-thresh (4-16)
databits
This command sets the number of data bits per character that are interpreted and
generated by the console port. Use the no form to restore the default value.
Console(config-line)#password-thresh 5
Console(config-line)#
Console(config-line)#silent-time 60
Console(config-line)#
Command Line Interface
4-18
4
Syntax
databits {7 | 8}
no databits
• 7 - Seven data bits per character.
• 8 - Eight data bits per character.
Default Setting
8 data bits per character
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
The databits command can be used to mask the high bit on input from
devices that generate 7 data bits with parity. If parity is being generated,
specify 7 data bits per character. If no parity is required, specify 8 data bits per
character.
Example
To specify 7 data bits, enter this command:
Related Commands
parity (4-18)
parity
This command defines the generation of a parity bit. Use the no form to restore the
default setting.
Syntax
parity {none | even | odd}
no parity
•none - No parity
•even - Even parity
•odd - Odd parity
Default Setting
No parity
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
Communication protocols provided by devices such as terminals and modems
often require a specific parity bit setting.
Console(config-line)#databits 7
Console(config-line)#
Line Commands
4-19
4
Example
To specify no parity, enter this command:
speed
This command sets the terminal line’s baud rate. This command sets both the
transmit (to terminal) and receive (from terminal) speeds. Use the no form to restore
the default setting.
Syntax
speed bps
no speed
bps - Baud rate in bits per second.
(Options: 9600, 19200, 38400 bps)
Default Setting
9600
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Command Usage
Set the speed to match the baud rate of the device connected to the serial
port. Some baud rates available on devices connected to the port might not be
supported. The system indicates if the speed you selected is not supported.
Example
To specify 38400 bps, enter this command:
stopbits
This command sets the number of the stop bits transmitted per byte. Use the no
form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
stopbits {1 | 2}
• 1 - One stop bit
• 2 - Two stop bits
Default Setting
1 stop bit
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Console(config-line)#parity none
Console(config-line)#
Console(config-line)#speed 38400
Console(config-line)#
Command Line Interface
4-20
4
Example
To specify 2 stop bits, enter this command:
disconnect
This command terminates an SSH, Telnet, or console connection.
Syntax
disconnect session-id
session-id – The session identifier for an SSH, Telnet or console
connection. (Range: 0-4)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Specifying session identifier “0” will disconnect the console connection.
Specifying any other identifiers for an active session will disconnect an SSH or
Telnet connection.
Example
Related Commands
show ssh (4-53)
show users (4-82)
show line
This command displays the terminal line’s parameters.
Syntax
show line [console | vty]
•console - Console terminal line.
•vty - Virtual terminal for remote console access (i.e., Telnet).
Default Setting
Shows all lines
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Console(config-line)#stopbits 2
Console(config-line)#
Console#disconnect 1
Console#
General Commands
4-21
4
Example
To show all lines, enter this command:
General Commands
enable
This command activates Privileged Exec mode. In privileged mode, additional
commands are available, and certain commands display additional information. See
“Understanding Command Modes” on page 4-6.
Syntax
enable [level]
level - Privilege level to log into the device.
Console#show line
Console configuration:
Password threshold: 3 times
Interactive timeout: Disabled
Login timeout: Disabled
Silent time: Disabled
Baudrate: 9600
Databits: 8
Parity: none
Stopbits: 1
VTY configuration:
Password threshold: 3 times
Interactive timeout: 600 sec
Login timeout: 300 sec
console#
Table 4-6 General Commands
Command Function Mode Page
enable Activates privileged mode NE 4-21
disable Returns to normal mode from privileged mode PE 4-22
configure Activates global configuration mode PE 4-23
show history Shows the command history buffer NE, PE 4-23
reload Restarts the system PE 4-24
reload cancel Cancels a delayed reset of the system PE 4-24
show reload Displays the time remaining until a delayed reset will take place PE 4-25
end Returns to Privileged Exec mode any
config.
mode
4-25
exit Returns to the previous configuration mode, or exits the CLI any 4-26
quit Exits a CLI session NE, PE 4-26
help Shows how to use help any NA
? Shows options for command completion (context sensitive) any NA
Command Line Interface
4-22
4
The device has two predefined privilege levels: 0: Normal Exec,
15: Privileged Exec. Enter level 15 to access Privileged Exec mode.
Default Setting
Level 15
Command Mode
Normal Exec
Command Usage
• “super” is the default password required to change the command mode from
Normal Exec to Privileged Exec. (To set this password, see the enable
password command on page 4-39.)
• The “#” character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the
system is in privileged access mode.
Example
Related Commands
disable (4-22)
enable password (4-39)
disable
This command returns to Normal Exec mode from privileged mode. In normal
access mode, you can only display basic information on the switch's configuration or
Ethernet statistics. To gain access to all commands, you must use the privileged
mode. See “Understanding Command Modes” on page 4-6.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
The “>” character is appended to the end of the prompt to indicate that the
system is in normal access mode.
Example
Related Commands
enable (4-21)
Console>enable
Password: [privileged level password]
Console#
Console#disable
Console>
General Commands
4-23
4
configure
This command activates Global Configuration mode. You must enter this mode to
modify any settings on the switch. You must also enter Global Configuration mode
prior to enabling some of the other configuration modes, including Interface
Configuration, Line Configuration, and VLAN Database Configuration. See
“Understanding Command Modes” on page 4-6.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Related Commands
end (4-25)
show history
This command shows the contents of the command history buffer.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Command Usage
The history buffer size is fixed at 10 Execution commands and
10 Configuration commands.
Example
In this example, the show history command lists the contents of the command
history buffer:
Console#configure
Console(config)#
Console#show history
Execution command history:
2 config
1 show history
Configuration command history:
4 interface vlan 1
3 exit
2 interface vlan 1
1 end
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-24
4
The ! command repeats commands from the Execution command history buffer
when you are in Normal Exec or Privileged Exec Mode, and commands from the
Configuration command history buffer when you are in any of the configuration
modes. In this example, the !2 command repeats the second command in the
Execution history buffer (config).
reload
This command restarts the system. You can reboot the system immediately, or you
can configure the switch to reset after a specified amount of time.
Syntax
reload [in hour hours | minute minutes]
hours - Specifies the amount of hours to wait, combined with the minutes,
before the switch resets. (Range: 0-576; Default: 0)
minutes - Specifies the amount of minutes to wait, combined with the hours,
before the switch resets. (Range: 1-34560; Default: 0)
Note: When the system is restarted, it will always run the Power-On Self-Test. It will also
retain all configuration information stored in non-volatile memory by the copy
running-config startup-config command (See “copy” on page 4-85).
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command resets the entire system. The switch will wait the designated
amount of time before resetting. If a delayed reset was already scheduled,
then the newly configured reset will overwrite the original delay configuration.
The configured delay time cannot exceed 24 days (576 hours, or 34560
minutes). If no time is specified, then the switch will reboot immediately.
Example
This example shows how to reset the switch:
reload cancel
This command cancels a pending delayed reset.
Syntax
reload cancel
Console#!2
Console#config
Console(config)#
Console#reload
System will be restarted, continue <y/n>? y
General Commands
4-25
4
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
This example shows how to cancel a configured delayed reset of the switch:
show reload
This command displays the remaining time until a pending delayed reset will take
place.
Syntax
show reload
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
This example shows how to display the remaining time until a configured delayed
reset of the switch will take place:
end
This command returns to Privileged Exec mode.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration, Interface Configuration, Line Configuration, and VLAN
Database Configuration.
Example
This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Interface
Configuration mode:
Console#reload cancel
Console#
Console#show reload
The switch will be rebooted at Nov 23 22:52:14 2007.
Remaining Time : 0 days, 4 hours, 31 minutes, 46 seconds.
Console#
Console(config-if)#end
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-26
4
exit
This command returns to the previous configuration mode or exit the configuration
program.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Any
Example
This example shows how to return to the Privileged Exec mode from the Global
Configuration mode, and then quit the CLI session:
quit
This command exits the configuration program.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Command Usage
The quit and exit commands can both exit the configuration program.
Example
This example shows how to quit a CLI session:
Console(config)#exit
Console#exit
Press ENTER to start session
User Access Verification
Username:
Console#quit
Press ENTER to start session
User Access Verification
Username:
System Management Commands
4-27
4
System Management Commands
These commands are used to control system logs, passwords, user names, browser
configuration options, and display or configure a variety of other system information.
Device Designation Commands
prompt
This command customizes the CLI prompt. Use the no form to restore the default
prompt.
Syntax
prompt string
no prompt
string - Any alphanumeric string to use for the CLI prompt. (Maximum
length: 255 characters)
Default Setting
Console
Table 4-7 System Management Commands
Command Group Function Page
Device Designation Configures information that uniquely identifies this switch 4-27
Banner Configures administrative contact and device indentification and location
information
4-28
User Access Configures the basic user names and passwords for management access 4-38
IP Filter Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access 4-40
Web Server Enables management access via a web browser 4-42
Telnet Server Enables management access via Telnet 4-45
Secure Shell Provides secure replacement for Telnet 4-46
Event Logging Controls logging of error messages 4-55
Time (System Clock) Sets the system clock automatically via NTP/SNTP server or manually 4-65
System Status Displays system configuration, active managers, and version information 4-78
Frame Size Enables support for jumbo frames 4-84
Table 4-8 Device Designation Commands
Command Function Mode Page
prompt Customizes the prompt used in PE and NE mode GC 4-27
hostname Specifies the host name for the switch GC 4-28
snmp-server contact Sets the system contact string GC 4-153
snmp-server location Sets the system location string GC 4-153
Command Line Interface
4-28
4
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
hostname
This command specifies or modifies the host name for this device. Use the no form
to restore the default host name.
Syntax
hostname name
no hostname
name - The name of this host. (Maximum length: 255 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Banner
These commands are used to configure and manage administrative information
about the switch, its exact data center location, details of the electrical and network
circuits that supply the switch, as well as network administrator and manager contact
information. This information is only available via the CLI and is automatically
displayed before login as soon as a console or telnet connection has been
established.
Console(config)#prompt RD2
RD2(config)#
Console(config)#hostname RD#1
Console(config)#
Table 4-9 Banner Commands
Command Function Mode Page
banner configure Configures the banner information that is displayed before login GC 4-29
banner configure
company
Configures the Company information that is displayed by banner GC 4-30
banner configure
dc-power-info
Configures the DC Power information that is displayed by
banner
GC 4-31
banner configure
department
Configures the Department information that is displayed by
banner
GC 4-31
banner configure
equipment-info
Configures the Equipment information that is displayed by
banner
GC 4-32
System Management Commands
4-29
4
banner configure
This command allows the administrator to interactively specify administrative
information for this device.
Syntax
banner configure
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The administrator can batch-input all details for the switch with one command.
When the administrator finishes typing the company name and presses the
enter key, the script prompts for the next piece of information, and so on, until
all information has been entered. Pressing enter without inputting information
at any prompt during the script’s operation will leave the field empty. Spaces
can be used during script mode because pressing the enter key signifies the
end of data input. The delete and left-arrow keys terminate the script. The use
of the backspace key during script mode is not supported. If, for example, a
mistake is made in the company name, it can be corrected with the banner
configure company command.
banner configure
equipment-location
Configures the Equipment Location information that is displayed
by banner
GC 4-33
banner configure
ip-lan
Configures the IP and LAN information that is displayed by
banner
GC 4-33
banner configure
lp-number
Configures the LP Number information that is displayed by
banner
GC 4-34
banner configure
manager-info
Configures the Manager contact information that is displayed by
banner
GC 4-35
banner configure
mux
Configures the MUX information that is displayed by banner GC 4-35
banner configure
note
Configures miscellaneous information that is displayed by
banner under the Notes heading
GC 4-36
show banner Displays all banner information NE, PE 4-37
Table 4-9 Banner Commands
Command Function Mode Page
Command Line Interface
4-30
4
Example
banner configure company
This command allows the administrator to configure the company information
displayed in the banner. Use the no form to remove the company name information
from the banner display.
Syntax
banner configure company name
no banner configure company
name - The name of the company. (Maximum length: 32 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Console(config)#banner configure
Company: Edgecore
Responsible department: R&D Dept
Name and telephone to Contact the management people
Manager1 name: Sr. Network Admin
phone number: 123-555-1212
Manager2 name: Jr. Network Admin
phone number: 123-555-1213
Manager3 name: Night-shift Net Admin / Janitor
phone number: 123-555-1214
The physical location of the equipment.
City and street address: 12 Straight St. Motown, Zimbabwe
Information about this equipment:
Manufacturer: Edgecore
ID: 123_unique_id_number
Floor: 2
Row: 7
Rack: 29
Shelf in this rack: 8
Information about DC power supply.
Floor: 2
Row: 7
Rack: 25
Electrical circuit: : ec-177743209-xb
Number of LP:12
Position of the equipment in the MUX:1/23
IP LAN:192.168.1.1
Note: This is a random note about this managed switch and can contain
miscellaneous information.
Console(config)#
System Management Commands
4-31
4
Command Usage
The user-entered data cannot contain spaces. The banner configure
company command interprets spaces as data input boundaries. The use of
underscores ( _ ) or other unobtrusive non-letter characters is suggested for
situations where whitespace is necessary for clarity.
Example
banner configure dc-power-info
This command allows the administrator to configure the DC power information
displayed in the banner. Use the no form to remove the DC power information from
the banner display.
Syntax
banner configure dc-power-info floor floor-id row row-id rack rack-id
electrical-circuit ec-id
no banner configure dc-power-info [floor | row | rack | electrical-circuit]
floor-id - The floor number. (Maximum length: 32 characters)
row-id - The row number. (Maximum length: 32 characters)
rack-id - The rack number. (Maximum length: 32 characters)
ec-id - The electrical circuit ID. (Maximum length: 32 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The user-entered data cannot contain spaces. The banner configure
dc-power-info command interprets spaces as data input boundaries. The use
of underscores ( _ ) or other unobtrusive non-letter characters is suggested for
situations where whitespace is necessary for clarity.
Example
banner configure department
This command allows the administrator to configure the department information
displayed in the banner. Use the no form to remove the department information from
the banner display.
Console(config)#banner configure company Edgecore
Console(config)#
Console(config)#banner configure floor 3 row 15 rack 24
electrical-circuit 48v-id_3.15.24.2
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-32
4
Syntax
banner configure department dept-name
no banner configure company
dept-name - The name of the department. (Maximum length: 32
characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The user-entered data cannot contain spaces. The banner configure
department command interprets spaces as data input boundaries. The use of
underscores ( _ ) or other unobtrusive non-letter characters is suggested for
situations where whitespace is necessary for clarity.
Example
banner configure equipment-info
This command allows the administrator to configure the equipment information
displayed in the banner. Use the no form to remove the equipment information from
the banner display.
Syntax
banner configure equipment-info manufacturer-id mfr-id floor floor-id row
row-id rack rack-id shelf-rack sr-id manufacturer mfr-name
no banner configure equipment-info [floor | manufacturer |
manufacturer-id | rack | row | shelf-rack]
mfr-id - The name of the device model number. (Maximum length: 32
characters)
floor-id - The floor number. (Maximum length: 32 characters)
row-id - The row number. (Maximum length: 32 characters)
rack-id - The rack number. (Maximum length: 32 characters)
sr-id - The shelf number in the rack. (Maximum length: 32 characters)
mfr-name - The name of the device manufacturer. (Maximum length: 32
characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Console(config)#banner configure department R&D
Console(config)#
System Management Commands
4-33
4
Command Usage
The user-entered data cannot contain spaces. The banner configure
equipment-info command interprets spaces as data input boundaries. The
use of underscores ( _ ) or other unobtrusive non-letter characters is
suggested for situations where whitespace is necessary for clarity.
Example
banner configure equipment-location
This command allows the administrator to configure the equipment location
information displayed in the banner. Use the no form to remove the equipment
location information from the banner display.
Syntax
banner configure equipment-location location
no banner configure equipment-location
location - The address location of the device. (Maximum length: 32
characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The user-entered data cannot contain spaces. The banner configure
equipment-location command interprets spaces as data input boundaries.
The use of underscores ( _ ) or other unobtrusive non-letter characters is
suggested for situations where whitespace is necessary for clarity.
Example
banner configure ip-lan
This command allows the administrator to configure the device IP address and
subnet mask information displayed in the banner. Use the no form to remove the IP
and subnet information from the banner display.
Syntax
banner configure ip-lan ip-mask
no banner configure ip-lan
Console(config)#banner configure equipment-info manufacturer-id
ES3528M-SFP floor 3 row 10 rack 15 shelf-rack 12 manufacturer Edgecore
Console(config)#
Console(config)#banner configure equipment-location
710_Network_Path,_Indianapolis
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-34
4
ip-mask - The IP address and subnet mask of the device. (Maximum
length: 32 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The user-entered data cannot contain spaces. The banner configure ip-lan
command interprets spaces as data input boundaries. The use of underscores
( _ ) or other unobtrusive non-letter characters is suggested for situations
where whitespace is necessary for clarity.
Example
banner configure lp-number
This command allows the administrator to configure the LP number information
displayed in the banner. Use the no form to remove the LP number information from
the banner display.
Syntax
banner configure lp-number lp-num
no banner configure lp-number
lp-num - The LP number. (Maximum length: 32 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The user-entered data cannot contain spaces. The banner configure
lp-number command interprets spaces as data input boundaries. The use of
underscores ( _ ) or other unobtrusive non-letter characters is suggested for
situations where whitespace is necessary for clarity.
Example
Console(config)#banner configure ip-lan 192.168.1.1/255.255.255.0
Console(config)#
Console(config)#banner configure lp-number 12
Console(config)#
System Management Commands
4-35
4
banner configure manager-info
This command allows the administrator to configure the manager contact
information displayed in the banner. Use the no form to remove the manager contact
information from the banner display.
Syntax
banner configure manager-info name mgr1-name phone-number
mgr1-number [name2 mgr2-name phone-number mgr2-number | name3
mgr3-name phone-number mgr3-number]
no banner configure manager-info [name1 | name2 | name3]
mgr1-name - The name of the first manager. (Maximum length: 32
characters)
mgr1-number - The phone number of the first manager. (Maximum length:
32 characters)
mgr2-name - The name of the second manager. (Maximum length: 32
characters)
mgr2-number - The phone number of the second manager. (Maximum
length: 32 characters)
mgr3-name - The name of the third manager. (Maximum length: 32
characters)
mgr3-number - The phone number of the third manager. (Maximum length:
32 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The user-entered data cannot contain spaces. The banner configure
manager-info command interprets spaces as data input boundaries. The use
of underscores ( _ ) or other unobtrusive non-letter characters is suggested for
situations where whitespace is necessary for clarity.
Example
banner configure mux
This command allows the administrator to configure the mux information displayed
in the banner. Use the no form to remove the mux information from the banner
display.
Syntax
banner configure mux muxinfo
Console(config)#banner configure manager-info name Albert_Einstein
phone-number 123-555-1212 name2 Lamar phone-number 123-555-1219
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-36
4
no banner configure mux
muxinfo - The circuit and PVC to which the switch is connected.
(Maximum length: 32 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The user-entered data cannot contain spaces. The banner configure mux
command interprets spaces as data input boundaries. The use of underscores
( _ ) or other unobtrusive non-letter characters is suggested for situations
where whitespace is necessary for clarity.
Example
banner configure note
This command allows the administrator to configure the note information displayed
in the banner. Use the no form to remove the note information from the banner
display.
Syntax
banner configure note note-info
no banner configure note
note-info - Miscellaneous information that does not fit the other banner
categories, or any other information of importance to users of the switch
CLI. (Maximum length: 150 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The user-entered data cannot contain spaces. The banner configure note
command interprets spaces as data input boundaries. The use of underscores
( _ ) or other unobtrusive non-letter characters is suggested for situations
where whitespace is necessary for clarity.
Console(config)#banner configure mux telco-8734212kx_PVC-1/23
Console(config)#
System Management Commands
4-37
4
Example
show banner
This command displays all banner information.
Syntax
show banner
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Example
Console(config)#banner configure note !!!!!ROUTINE_MAINTENANCE_firmware-
upgrade_0100-0500_GMT-0500_20071022!!!!!_20min_network_impact_expected
Console(config)#
Console#show banner
WARNING - MONITORED ACTIONS AND ACCESSES
R&D_Dept
Albert_Einstein - 123-555-1212
Steve - 123-555-9876
Lamar - 123-555-3322
Station's information:
710_Network_Path,Indianapolis
Edgecore - ES3528M-SFP
Floor / Row / Rack / Sub-Rack
7 / 10 / 15 / 6
DC power supply:
Power Source A: Floor / Row / Rack / Electrical circuit
3 / 15 / 24 / 48V-id_3.15.24.2
Number of LP: 4
Position MUX: telco-9734212kx_PVC-1/23
IP LAN: 216.241.132.3/255.255.255.0
Note:
!!!!!ROUTINE_MAINTENANCE_firmware-upgrade_0100--0500_GMT-0500_20071022!!!
!!_20min_network_impact_expected
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-38
4
User Access Commands
The basic commands required for management access are listed in this section.
This switch also includes other options for password checking via the console or a
Telnet connection (page 4-12), user authentication via a remote authentication
server (page 4-91), and host access authentication for specific ports (page 4-112).
username
This command adds named users, requires authentication at login, specifies or
changes a user's password (or specify that no password is required), or specifies or
changes a user's access level. Use the no form to remove a user name.
Syntax
username name {access-level level | nopassword |
password {0|7}password}
no username name
•name - The name of the user.
(Maximum length: 8 characters, case sensitive. Maximum users: 16)
•access-level level - Specifies the user level.
The device has two predefined privilege levels:
0: Normal Exec, 15: Privileged Exec.
•nopassword - No password is required for this user to log in.
•{0 | 7} - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password.
•password password - The authentication password for the user.
(Maximum length: 8 characters plain text, 32 encrypted, case sensitive)
Default Setting
• The default access level is Normal Exec.
• The factory defaults for the user names and passwords are:
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Table 4-10 User Access Commands
Command Function Mode Page
username Establishes a user name-based authentication system at login GC 4-38
enable password Sets a password to control access to the Privileged Exec level GC 4-39
Table 4-11 Default Login Settings
username access-level password
guest
admin
0
15
guest
admin
System Management Commands
4-39
4
Command Usage
The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password
settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the configuration file during
system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP server.
There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords.
Example
This example shows how to set the access level and password for a user.
enable password
After initially logging onto the system, you should set the Privileged Exec password.
Remember to record it in a safe place. This command controls access to the
Privileged Exec level from the Normal Exec level. Use the no form to reset the
default password.
Syntax
enable password [level level] {0 | 7} password
no enable password [level level]
•level level - Level 15 for Privileged Exec. (Levels 0-14 are not used.)
•{0 | 7} - 0 means plain password, 7 means encrypted password.
•password - password for this privilege level.
(Maximum length: 8 characters plain text, 32 encrypted, case sensitive)
Default Setting
• The default is level 15.
• The default password is “super”
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• You cannot set a null password. You will have to enter a password to change
the command mode from Normal Exec to Privileged Exec with the enable
command (page 4-21).
• The encrypted password is required for compatibility with legacy password
settings (i.e., plain text or encrypted) when reading the configuration file
during system bootup or when downloading the configuration file from a TFTP
server. There is no need for you to manually configure encrypted passwords.
Example
Console(config)#username bob access-level 15
Console(config)#username bob password 0 smith
Console(config)#
Console(config)#enable password level 15 0 admin
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-40
4
Related Commands
enable (4-21)
authentication enable (4-93)
IP Filter Commands
management
This command specifies the client IP addresses that are allowed management
access to the switch through various protocols. Use the no form to restore the
default setting.
Syntax
[no] management {all-client | http-client | snmp-client | telnet-client}
start-address [end-address]
•all-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP, web and Telnet groups.
• http-client - Adds IP address(es) to the web group.
• snmp-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP group.
•telnet-client - Adds IP address(es) to the Telnet group.
• start-address - A single IP address, or the starting address of a range.
• end-address - The end address of a range.
Default Setting
All addresses
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• If anyone tries to access a management interface on the switch from an invalid
address, the switch will reject the connection, enter an event message in the
system log, and send a trap message to the trap manager.
• IP address can be configured for SNMP, web and Telnet access respectively.
Each of these groups can include up to five different sets of addresses, either
individual addresses or address ranges.
• When entering addresses for the same group (i.e., SNMP, web or Telnet), the
switch will not accept overlapping address ranges. When entering addresses
for different groups, the switch will accept overlapping address ranges.
• You cannot delete an individual address from a specified range. You must
delete the entire range, and reenter the addresses.
Table 4-12 IP Filter Commands
Command Function Mode Page
management Configures IP addresses that are allowed management access GC 4-40
show management Displays the switch to be monitored or configured from a
browser
PE 4-41
System Management Commands
4-41
4
• You can delete an address range just by specifying the start address, or by
specifying both the start address and end address.
Example
This example restricts management access to the indicated addresses.
show management
This command displays the client IP addresses that are allowed management
access to the switch through various protocols.
Syntax
show management {all-client | http-client | snmp-client | telnet-client}
•all-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP, web and Telnet groups.
•http-client - Adds IP address(es) to the web group.
•snmp-client - Adds IP address(es) to the SNMP group.
•telnet-client - Adds IP address(es) to the Telnet group.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console(config)#management all-client 192.168.1.19
Console(config)#management all-client 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30
Console(config)#
Console#show management all-client
Management IP Filter
HTTP-Client:
Start IP address End IP address
-----------------------------------------------
1. 192.168.1.19 192.168.1.19
2. 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30
SNMP-Client:
Start IP address End IP address
-----------------------------------------------
1. 192.168.1.19 192.168.1.19
2. 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30
TELNET-Client:
Start IP address End IP address
-----------------------------------------------
1. 192.168.1.19 192.168.1.19
2. 192.168.1.25 192.168.1.30
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-42
4
Web Server Commands
ip http port
This command specifies the TCP port number used by the web browser interface.
Use the no form to use the default port.
Syntax
ip http port port-number
no ip http port
port-number - The TCP port to be used by the browser interface.
(Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
80
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Related Commands
ip http server (4-42)
ip http server
This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from a browser. Use
the no form to disable this function.
Syntax
[no] ip http server
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Table 4-13 Web Server Commands
Command Function Mode Page
ip http port Specifies the port to be used by the web browser interface GC 4-42
ip http server Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from a browser GC 4-42
ip http secure-server Enables HTTPS for encrypted communications GC 4-43
ip http secure-port Specifies the UDP port number for HTTPS GC 4-44
Console(config)#ip http port 769
Console(config)#
System Management Commands
4-43
4
Example
Related Commands
ip http port (4-42)
ip http secure-server
This command enables the secure hypertext transfer protocol (HTTPS) over the
Secure Socket Layer (SSL), providing secure access (i.e., an encrypted connection)
to the switch’s web interface. Use the no form to disable this function.
Syntax
[no] ip http secure-server
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• Both HTTP and HTTPS service can be enabled independently on the switch.
However, you cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the
same UDP port.
• If you enable HTTPS, you must indicate this in the URL that you specify in
your browser: https://device[:port_number]
• When you start HTTPS, the connection is established in this way:
- The client authenticates the server using the server’s digital certificate.
- The client and server negotiate a set of security protocols to use for the
connection.
- The client and server generate session keys for encrypting and decrypting
data.
• The client and server establish a secure encrypted connection.
A padlock icon should appear in the status bar for Internet Explorer 5.x and
Netscape Navigator 6.2 or later versions.
• The following web browsers and operating systems currently support HTTPS:
• To specify a secure-site certificate, see “Replacing the Default Secure-site
Certificate” on page 3-70. Also refer to the copy command on page 4-85.
Console(config)#ip http server
Console(config)#
Table 4-14 HTTPS System Support
Web Browser Operating System
Internet Explorer 5.0 or later Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a),
Windows 2000, Windows XP
Netscape Navigator 6.2 or later Windows 98,Windows NT (with service pack 6a),
Windows 2000, Windows XP, Solaris 2.6
Command Line Interface
4-44
4
Example
Related Commands
ip http secure-port (4-44)
copy tftp https-certificate (4-85)
ip http secure-port
This command specifies the UDP port number used for HTTPS connection to the
switch’s web interface. Use the no form to restore the default port.
Syntax
ip http secure-port port_number
no ip http secure-port
port_number – The UDP port used for HTTPS.
(Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
443
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• You cannot configure the HTTP and HTTPS servers to use the same port.
• If you change the HTTPS port number, clients attempting to connect to the
HTTPS server must specify the port number in the URL, in this format:
https://device:port_number
Example
Related Commands
ip http secure-server (4-43)
Console(config)#ip http secure-server
Console(config)#
Console(config)#ip http secure-port 1000
Console(config)#
System Management Commands
4-45
4
Telnet Server Commands
ip telnet port
This command specifies the TCP port number used by the Telnet interface. Use the
no form to use the default port.
Syntax
ip telnet port port-number
no ip telnet port
port-number - The TCP port to be used by the browser interface.
(Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
23
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Related Commands
ip telnet server (4-45)
ip telnet server
This command allows this device to be monitored or configured from Telnet. Use the
no form to disable this function.
Syntax
[no] ip telnet server
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Table 4-15 Telnet Server Commands
Command Function Mode Page
ip telnet port Specifies the port to be used by the Telnet interface GC 4-42
ip telnet server Allows the switch to be monitored or configured from Telnet GC 4-42
Console(config)#ip telnet port 123
Console(config)#
Console(config)#ip telnet server
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-46
4
Related Commands
ip telnet port (4-45)
Secure Shell Commands
The Berkley-standard includes remote access tools originally designed for Unix
systems. Some of these tools have also been implemented for Microsoft Windows
and other environments. These tools, including commands such as rlogin (remote
login), rsh (remote shell), and rcp (remote copy), are not secure from hostile attacks.
The Secure Shell (SSH) includes server/client applications intended as a secure
replacement for the older Berkley remote access tools. SSH can also provide
remote management access to this switch as a secure replacement for Telnet.
When a client contacts the switch via the SSH protocol, the switch uses a public-key
that the client must match along with a local user name and password for access
authentication. SSH also encrypts all data transfers passing between the switch and
SSH-enabled management station clients, and ensures that data traveling over the
network arrives unaltered.
This section describes the commands used to configure the SSH server. However,
note that you also need to install a SSH client on the management station when
using this protocol to configure the switch.
Note: The switch supports both SSH Version 1.5 and 2.0.
Table 4-16 SSH Commands
Command Function Mode Page
ip ssh server Enables the SSH server on the switch GC 4-48
ip ssh timeout Specifies the authentication timeout for the SSH server GC 4-49
ip ssh
authentication-retries
Specifies the number of retries allowed by a client GC 4-49
ip ssh server-key size Sets the SSH server key size GC 4-50
copy tftp public-key Copies the user’s public key from a TFTP server to the switch PE 4-85
delete public-key Deletes the public key for the specified user PE 4-50
ip ssh crypto host-key
generate
Generates the host key PE 4-51
ip ssh crypto zeroize Clear the host key from RAM PE 4-51
ip ssh save host-key Saves the host key from RAM to flash memory PE 4-52
disconnect Terminates a line connection PE 4-20
show ip ssh Displays the status of the SSH server and the configured values
for authentication timeout and retries
PE 4-52
show ssh Displays the status of current SSH sessions PE 4-53
show public-key Shows the public key for the specified user or for the host PE 4-54
show users Shows SSH users, including privilege level and public key type PE 4-82
System Management Commands
4-47
4
The SSH server on this switch supports both password and public key
authentication. If password authentication is specified by the SSH client, then the
password can be authenticated either locally or via a RADIUS or TACACS+ remote
authentication server, as specified by the authentication login command on
page 4-92. If public key authentication is specified by the client, then you must
configure authentication keys on both the client and the switch as described in the
following section. Note that regardless of whether you use public key or password
authentication, you still have to generate authentication keys on the switch and
enable the SSH server.
To use the SSH server, complete these steps:
1. Generate a Host Key Pair – Use the ip ssh crypto host-key generate
command to create a host public/private key pair.
2. Provide Host Public Key to Clients – Many SSH client programs automatically
import the host public key during the initial connection setup with the switch.
Otherwise, you need to manually create a known hosts file on the management
station and place the host public key in it. An entry for a public key in the known
hosts file would appear similar to the following example:
10.1.0.54 1024 35 15684995401867669259333946775054617325313674890836547254
15020245593199868544358361651999923329781766065830956 10825913212890233
76546801726272571413428762941301196195566782 59566410486957427888146206
51941746772984865468615717739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545
24083971752646358058176716709574804776117
3. Import Client’s Public Key to the Switch – Use the copy tftp public-key
command to copy a file containing the public key for all the SSH client’s granted
management access to the switch. (Note that these clients must be configured
locally on the switch via the User Accounts page as described on page 3-51.)
The clients are subsequently authenticated using these keys. The current
firmware only accepts public key files based on standard UNIX format as shown
in the following example for an RSA Version 1 key:
1024 35 1341081685609893921040944920155425347631641921872958921143173880
05553616163105177594083868631109291232226828519254374603100937187721199
69631781366277414168985132049117204830339254324101637997592371449011938
00609025394840848271781943722884025331159521348610229029789827213532671
31629432532818915045306393916643 steve@192.168.1.19
4. Set the Optional Parameters – Set other optional parameters, including the
authentication timeout, the number of retries, and the server key size.
5. Enable SSH Service – Use the ip ssh server command to enable the SSH
server on the switch.
6. Configure Challenge-Response Authentication – When an SSH client attempts
to contact the switch, the SSH server uses the host key pair to negotiate a
session key and encryption method. Only clients that have a private key
Command Line Interface
4-48
4
corresponding to the public keys stored on the switch can gain access. The
following exchanges take place during this process:
a. The client sends its public key to the switch.
b. The switch compares the client's public key to those stored in memory.
c. If a match is found, the switch uses the public key to encrypt a random
sequence of bytes, and sends this string to the client.
d. The client uses its private key to decrypt the bytes, and sends the
decrypted bytes back to the switch.
e. The switch compares the decrypted bytes to the original bytes it sent. If the
two sets match, this means that the client's private key corresponds to an
authorized public key, and the client is authenticated.
Note: To use SSH with only password authentication, the host public key must still be
given to the client, either during initial connection or manually entered into the
known host file. However, you do not need to configure the client’s keys.
ip ssh server
This command enables the Secure Shell (SSH) server on this switch. Use the no
form to disable this service.
Syntax
[no] ip ssh server
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• The SSH server supports up to four client sessions. The maximum number of
client sessions includes both current Telnet sessions and SSH sessions.
• The SSH server uses DSA or RSA for key exchange when the client first
establishes a connection with the switch, and then negotiates with the client
to select either DES (56-bit) or 3DES (168-bit) for data encryption.
• You must generate the host key before enabling the SSH server.
Example
Related Commands
ip ssh crypto host-key generate (4-51)
show ssh (4-53)
Console#ip ssh crypto host-key generate dsa
Console#configure
Console(config)#ip ssh server
Console(config)#
System Management Commands
4-49
4
ip ssh timeout
This command configures the timeout for the SSH server. Use the no form to restore
the default setting.
Syntax
ip ssh timeout seconds
no ip ssh timeout
seconds – The timeout for client response during SSH negotiation.
(Range: 1-120)
Default Setting
10 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The timeout specifies the interval the switch will wait for a response from the
client during the SSH negotiation phase. Once an SSH session has been
established, the timeout for user input is controlled by the exec-timeout
command for vty sessions.
Example
Related Commands
exec-timeout (4-15)
show ip ssh (4-52)
ip ssh authentication-retries
This command configures the number of times the SSH server attempts to
reauthenticate a user. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
ip ssh authentication-retries count
no ip ssh authentication-retries
count – The number of authentication attempts permitted after which the
interface is reset. (Range: 1-5)
Default Setting
3
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Console(config)#ip ssh timeout 60
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-50
4
Example
Related Commands
show ip ssh (4-52)
ip ssh server-key size
This command sets the SSH server key size. Use the no form to restore the default
setting.
Syntax
ip ssh server-key size key-size
no ip ssh server-key size
key-size – The size of server key. (Range: 512-896 bits)
Default Setting
768 bits
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• The server key is a private key that is never shared outside the switch.
• The host key is shared with the SSH client, and is fixed at 1024 bits.
Example
delete public-key
This command deletes the specified user’s public key.
Syntax
delete public-key username [dsa | rsa]
• username – Name of an SSH user. (Range: 1-8 characters)
•dsa – DSA public key type.
•rsa – RSA public key type.
Default Setting
Deletes both the DSA and RSA key.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Console(config)#ip ssh authentication-retires 2
Console(config)#
Console(config)#ip ssh server-key size 512
Console(config)#
System Management Commands
4-51
4
Example
ip ssh crypto host-key generate
This command generates the host key pair (i.e., public and private).
Syntax
ip ssh crypto host-key generate [dsa | rsa]
•dsa – DSA (Version 2) key type.
•rsa – RSA (Version 1) key type.
Default Setting
Generates both the DSA and RSA key pairs.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• This command stores the host key pair in memory (i.e., RAM). Use the ip ssh
save host-key command to save the host key pair to flash memory.
• Some SSH client programs automatically add the public key to the known
hosts file as part of the configuration process. Otherwise, you must manually
create a known hosts file and place the host public key in it.
• The SSH server uses this host key to negotiate a session key and encryption
method with the client trying to connect to it.
Example
Related Commands
ip ssh crypto zeroize (4-51)
ip ssh save host-key (4-52)
ip ssh crypto zeroize
This command clears the host key from memory (i.e. RAM).
Syntax
ip ssh crypto zeroize [dsa | rsa]
•dsa – DSA key type.
•rsa – RSA key type.
Default Setting
Clears both the DSA and RSA key.
Console#delete public-key admin dsa
Console#
Console#ip ssh crypto host-key generate dsa
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-52
4
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• This command clears the host key from volatile memory (RAM). Use the no
ip ssh save host-key command to clear the host key from flash memory.
• The SSH server must be disabled before you can execute this command.
Example
Related Commands
ip ssh crypto host-key generate (4-51)
ip ssh save host-key (4-52)
no ip ssh server (4-48)
ip ssh save host-key
This command saves host key from RAM to flash memory.
Syntax
ip ssh save host-key [dsa | rsa]
•dsa – DSA key type.
•rsa – RSA key type.
Default Setting
Saves both the DSA and RSA key.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Related Commands
ip ssh crypto host-key generate (4-51)
show ip ssh
This command displays the connection settings used when authenticating client
access to the SSH server.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Console#ip ssh crypto zeroize dsa
Console#
Console#ip ssh save host-key dsa
Console#
System Management Commands
4-53
4
Example
show ssh
This command displays the current SSH server connections.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show ip ssh
SSH Enabled - version 1.99
Negotiation timeout: 120 secs; Authentication retries: 3
Server key size: 768 bits
Console#
Console#show ssh
Connection Version State Username Encryption
0 2.0 Session-Started admin ctos aes128-cbc-hmac-md5
stoc aes128-cbc-hmac-md5
Console#
Table 4-17 show ssh - display description
Field Description
Session The session number. (Range: 0-3)
Version The Secure Shell version number.
State The authentication negotiation state.
(Values: Negotiation-Started, Authentication-Started, Session-Started)
Username The user name of the client.
Encryption The encryption method is automatically negotiated between the client and server.
Options for SSHv1.5 include: DES, 3DES
Options for SSHv2.0 can include different algorithms for the client-to-server (ctos)
and server-to-client (stoc):
aes128-cbc-hmac-sha1
aes192-cbc-hmac-sha1
aes256-cbc-hmac-sha1
3des-cbc-hmac-sha1
blowfish-cbc-hmac-sha1
aes128-cbc-hmac-md5
aes192-cbc-hmac-md5
aes256-cbc-hmac-md5
3des-cbc-hmac-md5
blowfish-cbc-hmac-md5
Te r m in o l o g y :
DES – Data Encryption Standard (56-bit key)
3DES – Triple-DES (Uses three iterations of DES, 112-bit key)
aes – Advanced Encryption Standard (160 or 224-bit key)
blowfish – Blowfish (32-448 bit key)
cbc – cypher-block chaining
sha1 – Secure Hash Algorithm 1 (160-bit hashes)
md5 – Message Digest algorithm number 5 (128-bit hashes)
Command Line Interface
4-54
4
show public-key
This command shows the public key for the specified user or for the host.
Syntax
show public-key [user [username]| host]
username – Name of an SSH user. (Range: 1-8 characters)
Default Setting
Shows all public keys.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• If no parameters are entered, all keys are displayed. If the user keyword is
entered, but no user name is specified, then the public keys for all users are
displayed.
• When an RSA key is displayed, the first field indicates the size of the host key
(e.g., 1024), the second field is the encoded public exponent (e.g., 35), and
the last string is the encoded modulus. When a DSA key is displayed, the first
field indicates that the encryption method used by SSH is based on the Digital
Signature Standard (DSS), and the last string is the encoded modulus.
Example
Console#show public-key host
Host:
RSA:
1024 35
1568499540186766925933394677505461732531367489083654725415020245593199868
5443583616519999233297817660658309586108259132128902337654680172627257141
3428762941301196195566782595664104869574278881462065194174677298486546861
5717739390164779355942303577413098022737087794545240839717526463580581767
16709574804776117
DSA:
ssh-dss AAAB3NzaC1kc3MAAACBAPWKZTPbsRIB8ydEXcxM3dyV/yrDbKStIlnzD/Dg0h2Hxc
YV44sXZ2JXhamLK6P8bvuiyacWbUW/a4PAtp1KMSdqsKeh3hKoA3vRRSy1N2XFfAKxl5fwFfv
JlPdOkFgzLGMinvSNYQwiQXbKTBH0Z4mUZpE85PWxDZMaCNBPjBrRAAAAFQChb4vsdfQGNIjw
bvwrNLaQ77isiwAAAIEAsy5YWDC99ebYHNRj5kh47wY4i8cZvH+/p9cnrfwFTMU01VFDly3IR
2G395NLy5Qd7ZDxfA9mCOfT/yyEfbobMJZi8oGCstSNOxrZZVnMqWrTYfdrKX7YKBw/Kjw6Bm
iFq7O+jAhf1Dg45loAc27s6TLdtny1wRq/ow2eTCD5nekAAACBAJ8rMccXTxHLFAczWS7EjOy
DbsloBfPuSAb4oAsyjKXKVYNLQkTLZfcFRu41bS2KV5LAwecsigF/+DjKGWtPNIQqabKgYCw2
o/dVzX4Gg+yqdTlYmGA7fHGm8ARGeiG4ssFKy4Z6DmYPXFum1Yg0fhLwuHpOSKdxT3kk475S7
w0W
Console#
System Management Commands
4-55
4
Event Logging Commands
logging on
This command controls logging of error messages, sending debug or error
messages to switch memory. The no form disables the logging process.
Syntax
[no] logging on
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The logging process controls error messages saved to switch memory. You
can use the logging history command to control the type of error messages
that are stored.
Example
Related Commands
logging history (4-56)
clear logging (4-58)
Table 4-18 Event Logging Commands
Command Function Mode Page
logging on Controls logging of error messages GC 4-55
logging history Limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on
severity
GC 4-56
logging host Adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging
messages
GC 4-57
logging facility Sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages GC 4-57
logging trap Limits syslog messages saved to a remote server based on
severity
GC 4-58
clear logging Clears messages from the logging buffer PE 4-58
show logging Displays the state of logging PE 4-59
show log Displays log messages PE 4-60
Console(config)#logging on
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-56
4
logging history
This command limits syslog messages saved to switch memory based on severity.
The no form returns the logging of syslog messages to the default level.
Syntax
logging history {flash | ram} level
no logging history {flash | ram}
•flash - Event history stored in flash memory (i.e., permanent memory).
•ram - Event history stored in temporary RAM (i.e., memory flushed on
power reset).
•level - One of the levels listed below. Messages sent include the selected
level down to level 0. (Range: 0-7)
Default Setting
Flash: errors (level 3 - 0)
RAM: warnings (level 6 - 0)
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The message level specified for flash memory must be a higher priority (i.e.,
numerically lower) than that specified for RAM.
Example
Table 4-19 Logging Levels
Level Severity Name Description
7 debugging Debugging messages
6 informational Informational messages only
5 notifications Normal but significant condition, such as cold start
4 warnings Warning conditions (e.g., return false, unexpected return)
3 errors Error conditions (e.g., invalid input, default used)
2 critical Critical conditions (e.g., memory allocation, or free
memory error - resource exhausted)
1 alerts Immediate action needed
0 emergencies System unusable
* There are only Level 2, 5 and 6 error messages for the current firmware release.
Console(config)#logging history ram 0
Console(config)#
System Management Commands
4-57
4
logging host
This command adds a syslog server host IP address that will receive logging
messages. Use the no form to remove a syslog server host.
Syntax
[no] logging host host_ip_address
host_ip_address - The IP address of a syslog server.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• By using this command more than once you can build up a list of host IP
addresses.
• The maximum number of host IP addresses allowed is five.
Example
logging facility
This command sets the facility type for remote logging of syslog messages. Use the
no form to return the type to the default.
Syntax
[no] logging facility type
type - A number that indicates the facility used by the syslog server to
dispatch log messages to an appropriate service. (Range: 16-23)
Default Setting
23
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The command specifies the facility type tag sent in syslog messages. (See
RFC 3164.) This type has no effect on the kind of messages reported by the
switch. However, it may be used by the syslog server to sort messages or to
store messages in the corresponding database.
Example
Console(config)#logging host 10.1.0.3
Console(config)#
Console(config)#logging facility 19
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-58
4
logging trap
This command enables the logging of system messages to a remote server, or
limits the syslog messages saved to a remote server based on severity. Use this
command without a specified level to enable remote logging. Use the no form to
disable remote logging.
Syntax
logging trap [level]
no logging trap
level - One of the level arguments listed below. Messages sent include the
selected level up through level 0. (Refer to the table on page 4-56.)
Default Setting
• Enabled
• Level 6 - 0
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• Using this command with a specified level enables remote logging and sets
the minimum severity level to be saved.
• Using this command without a specified level also enables remote logging, but
restores the minimum severity level to the default.
Example
clear logging
This command clears messages from the log buffer.
Syntax
clear logging [flash | ram]
•flash - Event history stored in flash memory (i.e., permanent memory).
•ram - Event history stored in temporary RAM (i.e., memory flushed on
power reset).
Default Setting
Flash and RAM
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console(config)#logging trap 4
Console(config)#
Console#clear logging
Console#
System Management Commands
4-59
4
Related Commands
show logging (4-59)
show logging
This command displays the configuration settings for logging messages to local
switch memory, to an SMTP event handler, or to a remote syslog server.
Syntax
show logging {flash | ram | sendmail | trap}
•flash - Displays settings for storing event messages in flash memory
(i.e., permanent memory).
•ram - Displays settings for storing event messages in temporary RAM
(i.e., memory flushed on power reset).
•sendmail - Displays settings for the SMTP event handler (page 4-64).
•trap - Displays settings for the trap function.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
The following example shows that system logging is enabled, the message level for
flash memory is “errors” (i.e., default level 3 - 0), the message level for RAM is
“informational” (i.e., default level 6 - 0).
Console#show logging flash
Syslog logging: Enabled
History logging in FLASH: level errors
Console#show logging ram
Syslog logging: Enabled
History logging in RAM: level informational
Console#
Table 4-20 show logging flash/ram - display description
Field Description
Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command.
History logging in FLASH The message level(s) reported based on the logging history command.
History logging in RAM The message level(s) reported based on the logging history command.
Command Line Interface
4-60
4
The following example displays settings for the trap function.
Related Commands
show logging sendmail (4-64)
show log
This command displays the system and event messages stored in memory.
Syntax
show log {flash | ram} [login] [tail]
•flash - Event history stored in flash memory (i.e., permanent memory).
•ram - Event history stored in temporary RAM (i.e., memory flushed on
power reset).
•tail - Shows event history starting from the most recent entry.
•login - Shows the login record only.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command shows the system and event messages stored in memory,
including the time stamp, message level (page 4-56), program module,
function, and event number.
Console#show logging trap
Syslog logging: Enable
REMOTELOG status: disable
REMOTELOG facility type: local use 7
REMOTELOG level type: Debugging messages
REMOTELOG server IP address: 1.2.3.4
REMOTELOG server IP address: 0.0.0.0
REMOTELOG server IP address: 0.0.0.0
REMOTELOG server IP address: 0.0.0.0
REMOTELOG server IP address: 0.0.0.0
Console#
Table 4-21 show logging trap - display description
Field Description
Syslog logging Shows if system logging has been enabled via the logging on command.
REMOTELOG status Shows if remote logging has been enabled via the logging trap command.
REMOTELOG
facility type
The facility type for remote logging of syslog messages as specified in the logging
facility command.
REMOTELOG level type The severity threshold for syslog messages sent to a remote server as specified in
the logging trap command.
REMOTELOG
server IP address
The address of syslog servers as specified in the logging host command.
System Management Commands
4-61
4
Example
The following example shows sample messages stored in RAM.
SMTP Alert Commands
These commands configure SMTP event handling, and forwarding of alert
messages to the specified SMTP servers and email recipients.
logging sendmail host
This command specifies SMTP servers that will be sent alert messages. Use the no
form to remove an SMTP server.
Syntax
[no] logging sendmail host ip_address
ip_address - IP address of an SMTP server that will be sent alert
messages for event handling.
Default Setting
None
Console#show log ram
[5] 00:01:06 2001-01-01
"STA root change notification."
level: 6, module: 6, function: 1, and event no.: 1
[4] 00:01:00 2001-01-01
"STA root change notification."
level: 6, module: 6, function: 1, and event no.: 1
[3] 00:00:54 2001-01-01
"STA root change notification."
level: 6, module: 6, function: 1, and event no.: 1
[2] 00:00:50 2001-01-01
"STA topology change notification."
level: 6, module: 6, function: 1, and event no.: 1
[1] 00:00:48 2001-01-01
"VLAN 1 link-up notification."
level: 6, module: 6, function: 1, and event no.: 1
Console#
Table 4-22 SMTP Alert Commands
Command Function Mode Page
logging sendmail host SMTP servers to receive alert messages GC 4-61
logging sendmail level Severity threshold used to trigger alert messages GC 4-62
logging sendmail
source-email
Email address used for “From” field of alert messages GC 4-63
logging sendmail
destination-email
Email recipients of alert messages GC 4-63
logging sendmail Enables SMTP event handling GC 4-64
show logging sendmail Displays SMTP event handler settings NE, PE 4-64
Command Line Interface
4-62
4
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• You can specify up to three SMTP servers for event handing. However, you
must enter a separate command to specify each server.
• To send email alerts, the switch first opens a connection, sends all the email
alerts waiting in the queue one by one, and finally closes the connection.
• To open a connection, the switch first selects the server that successfully sent
mail during the last connection, or the first server configured by this command.
If it fails to send mail, the switch selects the next server in the list and tries to
send mail again. If it still fails, the system will repeat the process at a periodic
interval. (A trap will be triggered if the switch cannot successfully open a
connection.)
Example
logging sendmail level
This command sets the severity threshold used to trigger alert messages.
Syntax
logging sendmail level level
level - One of the system message levels (page 4-56). Messages sent
include the selected level down to level 0. (Range: 0-7; Default: 7)
Default Setting
Level 7
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The specified level indicates an event threshold. All events at this level or
higher will be sent to the configured email recipients. (For example, using
Level 7 will report all events from level 7 to level 0.)
Example
This example will send email alerts for system errors from level 4 through 0.
Console(config)#logging sendmail host 192.168.1.200
Console(config)#
Console(config)#logging sendmail level 4
Console(config)#
System Management Commands
4-63
4
logging sendmail source-email
This command sets the email address used for the “From” field in alert messages.
Use the no form to delete the source email address.
Syntax
[no] logging sendmail source-email email-address
email-address - The source email address used in alert messages.
(Range: 0-41 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
You may use an symbolic email address that identifies the switch, or the
address of an administrator responsible for the switch.
Example
This example will set the source email john@acme.com.
logging sendmail destination-email
This command specifies the email recipients of alert messages. Use the no form to
remove a recipient.
Syntax
[no] logging sendmail destination-email email-address
email-address - The source email address used in alert messages.
(Range: 1-41 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
You can specify up to five recipients for alert messages. However, you must
enter a separate command to specify each recipient.
Example
Console(config)#logging sendmail source-email john@acme.com
Console(config)#
Console(config)#logging sendmail destination-email ted@this-company.com
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-64
4
logging sendmail
This command enables SMTP event handling. Use the no form to disable this
function.
Syntax
[no] logging sendmail
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
show logging sendmail
This command displays the settings for the SMTP event handler.
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Example
Console(config)#logging sendmail
Console(config)#
Console#show logging sendmail
SMTP servers
-----------------------------------------------
1. 192.168.1.200
SMTP minimum severity level: 4
SMTP destination email addresses
-----------------------------------------------
1. geoff@acme.com
SMTP source email address: john@acme.com
SMTP status: Enabled
Console#
System Management Commands
4-65
4
Time Commands
The system clock can be dynamically set by polling a set of specified time servers
(NTP or SNTP). Maintaining an accurate time on the switch enables the system log
to record meaningful dates and times for event entries. If the clock is not set, the
switch will only record the time from the factory default set at the last bootup.
sntp client
This command enables SNTP client requests for time synchronization from NTP or
SNTP time servers specified with the sntp servers command. Use the no form to
disable SNTP client requests.
Syntax
[no] sntp client
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Table 4-23 Time Commands
Command Function Mode Page
sntp client Accepts time from specified time servers GC 4-65
sntp server Specifies one or more time servers GC 4-66
sntp poll Sets the interval at which the client polls for time GC 4-67
show sntp Shows current SNTP configuration settings NE, PE 4-67
ntp client Enables the NTP client for time updates from specified servers GC 4-68
ntp server Specifies NTP servers to poll for time updates GC 4-69
ntp poll Sets the interval at which the NTP client polls for time GC 4-70
ntp authenticate Enables authentication for NTP traffic GC 4-70
ntp authentication-key Configures authentication keys GC 4-71
show ntp Shows current NTP configuration settings NE, PE 4-72
clock
timezone-predefined
Sets the time zone for the switch’s internal clock using
predefined time zone configurations
GC 4-72
clock timezone Manually sets the time zone for the switch’s internal clock GC 4-73
clock summertime
(date)
Configures summer time (daylight savings time) for the switch’s
internal clock
GC 4-74
clock summertime
(predefined)
Configures summer time (daylight savings time) for the switch’s
internal clock
GC 4-75
clock summertime
(recurring)
Configures summer time (daylight savings time) for the switch’s
internal clock
GC 4-76
calendar set Sets the system date and time PE 4-77
show calendar Displays the current date and time setting NE, PE 4-77
Command Line Interface
4-66
4
Command Usage
• The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and
times for log events. Without SNTP, the switch only records the time starting
from the factory default set at the last bootup (i.e., 00:00:00, Jan. 1, 2001).
• This command enables client time requests to time servers specified via the
sntp servers command. It issues time synchronization requests based on the
interval set via the sntp poll command.
Example
Related Commands
sntp server (4-66)
sntp poll (4-67)
show sntp (4-67)
sntp server
This command sets the IP address of the servers to which SNTP time requests are
issued. Use the this command with no arguments to clear all time servers from the
current list.
Syntax
sntp server [ip1 [ip2 [ip3]]]
ip - IP address of a time server (NTP or SNTP).
(Range: 1-3 addresses)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command specifies time servers from which the switch will poll for time
updates when set to SNTP client mode. The client will poll the time servers in
the order specified until a response is received. It issues time synchronization
requests based on the interval set via the sntp poll command.
Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.19
Console(config)#sntp poll 60
Console(config)#sntp client
Console(config)#end
Console#show sntp
Current time: Dec 23 02:52:44 2002
Poll interval: 60
Current mode: unicast
SNTP status: Enabled
SNTP server: 10.1.0.19 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
Current server: 10.1.0.19
Console#
System Management Commands
4-67
4
Example
Related Commands
sntp client (4-65)
sntp poll (4-67)
show sntp (4-67)
sntp poll
This command sets the interval between sending time requests when the switch is
set to SNTP client mode. Use the no form to restore to the default.
Syntax
sntp poll seconds
no sntp poll
seconds - Interval between time requests. (Range: 16-16384 seconds)
Default Setting
16 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Related Commands
sntp client (4-65)
show sntp
This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the SNTP
client, and indicates whether or not the local time has been properly updated.
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command displays the current time, the poll interval used for sending
time synchronization requests, and the current SNTP mode (i.e., unicast).
Console(config)#sntp server 10.1.0.19
Console(config)#sntp poll 60
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-68
4
Example
ntp client
This command enables NTP client requests for time synchronization from NTP time
servers specified with the ntp servers command. Use the no form to disable NTP
client requests.
Syntax
[no] ntp client
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• The SNTP and NTP clients cannot be enabled at the same time. First disable
the SNTP client before using this command.
• The time acquired from time servers is used to record accurate dates and
times for log events. Without NTP, the switch only records the time starting
from the factory default set at the last bootup (i.e., 00:00:00, Jan. 1, 2001).
• This command enables client time requests to time servers specified via the
ntp servers command. It issues time synchronization requests based on the
interval set via the ntp poll command.
Example
Related Commands
sntp client (4-65)
ntp poll (4-70)
ntp server (4-69)
Console#show sntp
Current time: Dec 23 05:13:28 2002
Poll interval: 16
Current mode: unicast
SNTP status : Enabled
SNTP server 137.92.140.80 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
Current server: 137.92.140.80
Console#
Console(config)#ntp client
Console(config)#
System Management Commands
4-69
4
ntp server
This command sets the IP addresses of the servers to which NTP time requests are
issued. Use the no form of the command to clear a specific time server or all servers
from the current list.
Syntax
ntp server ip-address [version number] [key key-number]
no ntp server [ip-address]
•ip-address - IP address of an NTP time server.
•number - The NTP version number supported by the server. (Range: 1-3)
•key-number - The number of an authentication key to use in
communications with the server. (Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
Version number: 3
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• This command specifies time servers that the switch will poll for time updates
when set to NTP client mode. It issues time synchronization requests based
on the interval set with the ntp poll command. The client will poll all the time
servers configured, the responses received are filtered and compared to
determine the most reliable and accurate time update for the switch.
• You can configure up to 50 NTP servers on the switch. Re-enter this
command for each server you want to configure.
• NTP authentication is optional. If enabled with the ntp authenticate
command, you must also configure at least one key number using the ntp
authentication-key command.
•Use the no form of this command without an argument to clear all configured
servers in the list.
Example
Related Commands
ntp client (4-68)
ntp poll (4-70)
show ntp (4-72)
Console(config)#ntp server 192.168.3.20
Console(config)#ntp server 192.168.3.21
Console(config)#ntp server 192.168.4.22 version 2
Console(config)#ntp server 192.168.5.23 version 3 key 19
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-70
4
ntp poll
This command sets the interval between sending time requests when the switch is
set to NTP client mode. Use the no form to restore to the default.
Syntax
ntp poll seconds
no ntp poll
seconds - Interval between time requests. (Range: 16-16384 seconds)
Default Setting
16 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Related Commands
ntp client (4-68)
ntp authenticate
This command enables authentication for NTP client-server communications. Use
the no form to disable authentication.
Syntax
[no] ntp authenticate
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
You can enable NTP authentication to ensure that reliable updates are
received from only authorized NTP servers. The authentication keys and their
associated key number must be centrally managed and manually distributed to
NTP servers and clients. The key numbers and key values must match on
both the server and client.
Console(config)#ntp poll 60
Console(config)#
System Management Commands
4-71
4
Example
Related Commands
ntp authentication-key (4-71)
ntp authentication-key
This command configures authentication keys and key numbers to use when NTP
authentication is enabled. Use the no form of the command to clear a specific
authentication key or all keys from the current list.
Syntax
ntp authentication-key number md5 key
no ntp authentication-key [number]
•number - The NTP authentication key ID number. (Range: 1-65535)
•md5 - Specifies that authentication is provided by using the message digest
algorithm 5.
•key - An MD5 authentication key string. The key string can be up to 32
case-sensitive printable ASCII characters (no spaces).
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• The key number specifies a key value in the NTP authentication key list. Up
to 255 keys can be configured on the switch. Re-enter this command for each
server you want to configure.
• Note that NTP authentication key numbers and values must match on both the
server and client.
• NTP authentication is optional. When enabled with the ntp authenticate
command, you must also configure at least one key number using this
command.
•Use the no form of this command without an argument to clear all
authentication keys in the list.
Example
Related Commands
ntp authenticate (4-70)
Console(config)#ntp authenticate
Console(config)#
Console(config)#ntp authentication-key 45 md5 thisiskey45
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-72
4
show ntp
This command displays the current time and configuration settings for the NTP
client, and indicates whether or not the local time has been properly updated.
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command displays the current time, the poll interval used for sending
time synchronization requests, and the current NTP mode (i.e., unicast).
Example
clock timezone-predefined
This command uses predefined time zone configurations to set the time zone for the
switch’s internal clock. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
clock timezone-predefined offset-city
no clock timezone-predefined
•offset - Select the offset from GMT. (Range: GMT-0100 - GMT-1200;
GMT-Greenwich-Mean-Time; GMT+0100 - GMT+1300)
•city - Select the city associated with the chosen GMT offset. After the offset
has been entered, use the tab-complete function to display the available
city options.
Default Setting
GMT-Greenwich-Mean-Time-Dublin,Edinburgh,Lisbon,London
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Console#show ntp
Current time: Jan 1 02:58:58 2001
Poll interval: 16
Current mode: unicast
NTP status : Enabled NTP Authenticate status : Enabled
Last Update NTP Server: 0.0.0.0 Port: 0
Last Update time: Dec 31 00:00:00 2000 UTC
NTP Server 192.168.3.20 version 3
NTP Server 192.168.3.21 version 3
NTP Server 192.168.3.22 version 2
NTP Server 192.168.4.50 version 3 key 30
NTP Server 192.168.5.35 version 3 key 19
NTP Authentication-Key 12 md5 156S46Q24142414222711K66N80 7
NTP Authentication-Key 19 md5 Q33O16Q6338241J022S29Q731K7 7
NTP Authentication-Key 30 md5 D2V8777I51K1132K3552L26R6141O4 7
NTP Authentication-Key 45 md5 3U865531O13K38F0R8 7
NTP Authentication-Key 125 md5 A48S2810327947M76 7
Console#
System Management Commands
4-73
4
Command Usage
This command sets the local time zone relative to the Coordinated Universal
Time (UTC, formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT), based on the earth’s
prime meridian, zero degrees longitude. To display a time corresponding to
your local time, you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time
zone is east (before) or west (after) of UTC.
Example
Related Commands
show sntp (4-67)
clock timezone
This command sets the time zone for the switch’s internal clock.
Syntax
clock timezone name hour hours minute minutes {before-utc | after-utc}
•name - Name of timezone, usually an acronym. (Range: 1-29 characters)
•hours - Number of hours before/after UTC. (Range: 0-12 hours)
•minutes - Number of minutes before/after UTC. (Range: 0-59 minutes)
•before-utc - Sets the local time zone before (east) of UTC.
•after-utc - Sets the local time zone after (west) of UTC.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command sets the local time zone relative to the Coordinated Universal
Time (UTC, formerly Greenwich Mean Time or GMT), based on the earth’s
prime meridian, zero degrees longitude. To display a time corresponding to
your local time, you must indicate the number of hours and minutes your time
zone is east (before) or west (after) of UTC.
Example
Related Commands
show sntp (4-67)
Console(config)#clock timezone-predefined GMT-0930-Taiohae
Console(config)#
Console(config)#clock timezone Japan hours 8 minute 0 after-UTC
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-74
4
clock summer-time (date)
This command allows the user to manually configure the start, end, and offset times
of summer-time (daylight savings time) for the switch on a one-time basis. Use the
no form to disable summer-time.
Syntax
clock summer-time name date b-month b-day b-year b-hour b-minute
e-month e-day e-year e-hour e-minute offset
no clock summer-time
•name - Name of the time zone while summer-time is in effect, usually an
acronym. (Range: 1-30 characters)
• b-month - The month when summer-time will begin. (Options: january |
february | march | april | may | june | july | august | september | october
| november | december)
•b-day - The day summer-time will begin. (Options: sunday | monday |
tuesday | wednesday | thursday | friday | saturday)
•b-year- The year summer-time will begin.
•b-hour - The hour summer-time will begin. (Range: 0-23 hours)
•b-minute - The minute summer-time will begin. (Range: 0-59 minutes)
• e-month - The month when summer-time will end. (Options: january |
february | march | april | may | june | july | august | september | october
| november | december)
•e-day - The day summer-time will end. (Options: sunday | monday |
tuesday | wednesday | thursday | friday | saturday)
•e-year- The year summer-time will end.
•e-hour - The hour summer-time will end. (Range: 0-23 hours)
•e-minute - The minute summer-time will end. (Range: 0-59 minutes)
• offset - Summer-time offset from the regular time zone, in minutes.
(Range: 0-99 minutes)
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command sets the summer-time time zone relative to the currently
configured time zone. To display a time corresponding to your local time when
summer-time is in effect, you must indicate the number of minutes your
summer-time time zone deviates from your regular time zone.
System Management Commands
4-75
4
Example
Related Commands
show sntp (4-67)
clock summer-time (predefined)
This command configures the summer time (daylight savings time) status and
settings for the switch using predefined configurations for several major regions of
the world. Use the no form to disable summer time.
Syntax
clock summer-time name predefined [australia | europe | new-zealand |
usa]
no clock summer-time
•name - Name of the timezone while summer time is in effect, usually an
acronym. (Range: 1-30 characters)
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command sets the summer-time time relative to the configured time zone.
To display the time corresponding to your local time when summer-time is in
effect, select the predefined summer-time time zone appropriate for your
location, or manually configure summer-time if these predefined configurations
do not apply to your location (see “clock summer-time (date)” on page 4-74 or
“clock summer-time (recurring)” on page 4-76).
Example
Console(config)#clock summer-time DEST date april 1 2007 23 23 april 23
2007 23 23 60
Console(config)#
Table 4-24 Predefined Summer-Time Parameters
Region Start Time, Day, Week, & Month End Time, Day, Week, & Month Rel. Offset
Australia 00:00:00, Sunday, Week 5 of October 23:59:59, Sunday, Week 5 of March 60 min
Europe 00:00:00, Sunday, Week 5 of March 23:59:59, Sunday, Week 5 of October 60 min
New Zealand 00:00:00, Sunday, Week 1 of October 23:59:59, Sunday, Week 3 of March 60 min
USA 02:00:00, Sunday, Week 2 of March 02:00:00, Sunday, Week 1 of November 60 min
Console(config)#clock summer-time MESZ predefined europe
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-76
4
Related Commands
show sntp (4-67)
clock summer-time (recurring)
This command allows the user to manually configure the start, end, and offset times
of summer-time (daylight savings time) for the switch on a recurring basis. Use the
no form to disable summer-time.
Syntax
clock summer-time name recurring b-week b-day b-month b-hour b-minute
e-week e-day e-month e-hour e-minute offset
no clock summer-time
•name - Name of the timezone while summer time is in effect, usually an
acronym. (Range: 1-30 characters)
•b-week - The week of the month when summer-time will begin. (Range: 1-5)
•b-day - The day of the week when summer-time will begin. (Options:
sunday | monday | tuesday | wednesday | thursday | friday | saturday)
•b-month - The month when summer-time will begin. (Options: january |
february | march | april | may | june | july | august | september | october
| november | december)
•b-hour - The hour when summer-time will begin. (Range: 0-23 hours)
•b-minute - The minute when summer-time will begin. (Range: 0-59 minutes)
•e-week - The week of the month when summer-time will end. (Range: 1-5)
• e-day - The day of the week summer-time will end. (Options: sunday |
monday | tuesday | wednesday | thursday | friday | saturday)
•e-month - The month when summer-time will end. (Options: january |
february | march | april | may | june | july | august | september | october
| november | december)
•e-hour - The hour when summer-time will end. (Range: 0-23 hours)
•e-minute - The minute when summer-time will end. (Range: 0-59 minutes)
• offset - Summer-time offset from the regular time zone, in minutes.
(Range: 0-99 minutes)
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command sets the summer-time time zone relative to the currently
configured time zone. To display a time corresponding to your local time when
summer-time is in effect, you must indicate the number of minutes your
summer-time time zone deviates from your regular time zone.
System Management Commands
4-77
4
Example
Related Commands
show sntp (4-67)
calendar set
This command sets the system clock. It may be used if there is no time server on
your network, or if you have not configured the switch to receive signals from a time
server.
Syntax
calendar set hour min sec {day month year | month day year}
•hour - Hour in 24-hour format. (Range: 0-23)
•min - Minute. (Range: 0-59)
•sec - Second. (Range: 0-59)
•day - Day of month. (Range: 1-31)
•month - january | february | march | april | may | june | july | august |
september | october | november | december
•year - Year (4-digit). (Range: 2001-2100)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
show calendar
This command displays the system clock.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Example
Console(config)#clock summer-time MESZ recurring 1 friday june 23 59 3
saturday september 2 55 60
Console(config)#
Console#calendar set 15 12 34 1 April 2004
Console#
Console#show calendar
15:12:43 April 1 2004
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-78
4
System Status Commands
show startup-config
This command displays the configuration file stored in non-volatile memory that is
used to start up the system.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• Use this command in conjunction with the show running-config command to
compare the information in running memory to the information stored in
non-volatile memory.
• This command displays settings for key command modes. Each mode group
is separated by “!” symbols, and includes the configuration mode command,
and corresponding commands. This command displays the following
information:
- SNMP community strings
- Users (names and access levels)
- VLAN database (VLAN ID, name and state)
- VLAN configuration settings for each interface
- IP address configured for the switch
- Spanning tree settings
- Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet
Table 4-25 System Status Commands
Command Function Mode Page
show startup-config Displays the contents of the configuration file (stored in flash
memory) that is used to start up the system
PE 4-78
show running-config Displays the configuration data currently in use PE 4-79
show system Displays system information NE, PE 4-82
show users Shows all active console and Telnet sessions, including user
name, idle time, and IP address of Telnet clients
NE, PE 4-82
show version Displays version information for the system NE, PE 4-83
System Management Commands
4-79
4
Example
Related Commands
show running-config (4-79)
show running-config
This command displays the configuration information currently in use.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• Use this command in conjunction with the show startup-config command to
compare the information in running memory to the information stored in
non-volatile memory.
• This command displays settings for key command modes. Each mode group
Console#show startup-config
building startup-config, please wait.....
!
!
username admin access-level 15
username admin password 0 admin
!
username guest access-level 0
username guest password 0 guest
!
enable password level 15 0 super
!
snmp-server community public ro
snmp-server community private rw
!
logging history ram 6
logging history flash 3
!
vlan database
vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active
!
interface ethernet 1/1
switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged
switchport native vlan 1
.
.
.
interface vlan 1
ip address dhcp
!
line console
!
line vty
!
end
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-80
4
is separated by “!” symbols, and includes the configuration mode command,
and corresponding commands. This command displays the following
information:
- MAC address for each switch in the stack
- SNTP server settings
- Local time zone
- SNMP community strings
- Users (names, access levels, and encrypted passwords)
- Event log settings
- VLAN database (VLAN ID, name and state)
- VLAN configuration settings for each interface
- IP address configured for the switch
- Layer 4 precedence settings
- Any configured settings for the console port and Telnet
System Management Commands
4-81
4
Example
Related Commands
show startup-config (4-78)
Console#show running-config
building startup-config, please wait.....
!
phymap 00-12-cf-ce-2a-20 00-00-00-00-00-00 00-00-00-00-00-00
00-00-00-00-00-00 00-00-00-00-00-00 00-00-00-00-00-00 00-00-00-00-00-00
00-00-00-00-00-00
!
SNTP server 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0
!
clock timezone hours 0 minute 0 after-UTC
!
!
SNMP-server community private rw
SNMP-server community public ro
!
!
username admin access-level 15
username admin password 7 21232f297a57a5a743894a0e4a801fc3
username guest access-level 0
username guest password 7 084e0343a0486ff05530df6c705c8bb4
enable password level 15 7 1b3231655cebb7a1f783eddf27d254ca
!
!
logging history ram 6
logging history flash 3
!
!
vlan database
vlan 1 name DefaultVlan media ethernet state active
!
!
interface ethernet 1/1
switchport allowed vlan add 1 untagged
switchport native vlan 1
.
.
.
interface VLAN 1
IP address DHCP
!
no map IP DSCP
!
!
line console
!
line vty
!
end
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-82
4
show system
This command displays system information.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• For a description of the items shown by this command, refer to “Displaying
System Information” on page 3-12.
• The POST results should all display “PASS.” If any POST test indicates
“FAIL,” contact your distributor for assistance.
Example
show users
Shows all active console and Telnet sessions, including user name, idle time, and IP
address of Telnet client.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Console#show system
System Description: Model ABC123
System OID String: 1.3.6.1.4.1.259.8.1.4
System Information
System Up Time: 0 days, 0 hours, 1 minutes, and 32.18 seconds
System Name: [NONE]
System Location: [NONE]
System Contact: [NONE]
MAC Address (Unit1): 00-00-35-28-10-03
Web Server: Enabled
Web Server Port: 80
Web Secure Server: Enabled
Web Secure Server Port: 443
Telnet Server: Enable
Telnet Server Port: 23
Jumbo Frame: Disabled
POST Result:
DUMMY Test 1 ................. PASS
UART Loopback Test ........... PASS
DRAM Test .................... PASS
Timer Test ................... PASS
Switch Int Loopback Test ..... PASS
Done All Pass.
Console#
System Management Commands
4-83
4
Command Usage
The session used to execute this command is indicated by a “*” symbol next to
the Line (i.e., session) index number.
Example
show version
This command displays hardware and software version information for the system.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Command Usage
See “Displaying Switch Hardware/Software Versions” on page 3-13 for
detailed information on the items displayed by this command.
Console#show users
Username accounts:
Username Privilege Public-Key
-------- --------- ----------
admin 15 None
guest 0 None
steve 15 RSA
Online users:
Line Username Idle time (h:m:s) Remote IP addr.
----------- -------- ----------------- ---------------
0 console admin 0:14:14
* 1 VTY 0 admin 0:00:00 192.168.1.19
2 SSH 1 steve 0:00:06 192.168.1.19
Web online users:
Line Remote IP addr Username Idle time (h:m:s).
----------- -------------- -------- ------------------
1 HTTP 192.168.1.19 admin 0:00:00
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-84
4
Example
Frame Size Commands
jumbo frame
This command enables support for jumbo frames. Use the no form to disable it.
Syntax
[no] jumbo frame
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• This switch provides more efficient throughput for large sequential data
transfers by supporting jumbo frames up to 9216 bytes. Compared to
standard Ethernet frames that run only up to 1.5 KB, using jumbo frames
significantly reduces the per-packet overhead required to process protocol
encapsulation fields.
• To use jumbo frames, both the source and destination end nodes (such as a
computer or server) must support this feature. Also, when the connection is
operating at full duplex, all switches in the network between the two end nodes
must be able to accept the extended frame size. And for half-duplex
connections, all devices in the collision domain would need to support jumbo
frames.
Console#show version
Unit1
Serial number: S416000937
Service tag:
Hardware version: R01
Module A type: 1000BaseT
Module B type: 1000BaseT
Number of ports: 28
Main power status: up
Redundant power status :not present
Agent (master)
Unit ID: 1
Loader version: 2.2.1.4
Boot ROM version: 2.2.1.8
Operation code version: 2.2.7.1
Console#
Table 4-26 Frame Size Commands
Command Function Mode Page
jumbo frame Enables support for jumbo frames GC 4-84
Flash/File Commands
4-85
4
• Enabling jumbo frames will limit the maximum threshold for broadcast storm
control to 64 packets per second. (See the switchport broadcast command
on page 4-172.)
• The current setting for jumbo frames can be displayed with the show system
command (page 4-82).
Example
Flash/File Commands
These commands are used to manage the system code or configuration files.
copy
This command moves (upload/download) a code image or configuration file
between the switch’s flash memory and a TFTP server. When you save the system
code or configuration settings to a file on a TFTP server, that file can later be
downloaded to the switch to restore system operation. The success of the file
transfer depends on the accessibility of the TFTP server and the quality of the
network connection.
Syntax
copy file {file | running-config | startup-config | tftp | unit}
copy running-config {file | startup-config | tftp}
copy startup-config {file | running-config | tftp}
copy tftp {file | running-config | startup-config | https-certificate |
public-key}
copy unit file
•file - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a file.
•running-config - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from the current
running configuration.
•startup-config - The configuration used for system initialization.
•tftp - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a TFTP server.
Console(config)#jumbo frame
Console(config)#
Table 4-27 Flash/File Commands
Command Function Mode Page
copy Copies a code image or a switch configuration to or from flash
memory or a TFTP server
PE 4-85
delete Deletes a file or code image PE 4-88
dir Displays a list of files in flash memory PE 4-89
whichboot Displays the files booted PE 4-90
boot system Specifies the file or image used to start up the system GC 4-90
Command Line Interface
4-86
4
•https-certificate - Copies an HTTPS certificate from an TFTP server to the
switch.
•public-key - Keyword that allows you to copy a SSH key from a TFTP
server. (“Secure Shell Commands” on page 4-46)
•unit - Keyword that allows you to copy to/from a unit.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• The system prompts for data required to complete the copy command.
• The destination file name should not contain slashes (\ or /), the leading letter
of the file name should not be a period (.), and the maximum length for file
names on the TFTP server is 127 characters or 31 characters for files on the
switch. (Valid characters: A-Z, a-z, 0-9, “.”, “-”, “_”)
• Due to the size limit of the flash memory, the switch supports only two
operation code files.
• The maximum number of user-defined configuration files depends on
available memory.
• You can use “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” as the source to copy from the
factory default configuration file, but you cannot use it as the destination.
• To replace the startup configuration, you must use startup-config as the
destination.
•Use the copy file unit command to copy a local file to another switch in the
stack. Use the copy unit file command to copy a file from another switch in
the stack.
• The Boot ROM and Loader cannot be uploaded or downloaded from the TFTP
server. You must follow the instructions in the release notes for new firmware,
or contact your distributor for help.
• For information on specifying an https-certificate, see “Replacing the Default
Secure-site Certificate” on page 3-70. For information on configuring the
switch to use HTTPS for a secure connection, see “ip http secure-server” on
page 4-43.
Flash/File Commands
4-87
4
Example
The following example shows how to upload the configuration settings to a file on
the TFTP server:
The following example shows how to copy the running configuration to a startup file.
The following example shows how to download a configuration file:
This example shows how to copy a secure-site certificate from an TFTP server. It
then reboots the switch to activate the certificate:
Console#copy file tftp
Choose file type:
1. config: 2. opcode: <1-2>: 1
Source file name: startup
TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.99
Destination file name: startup.01
TFTP completed.
Success.
Console#
Console#copy running-config file
destination file name: startup
Write to FLASH Programming.
\Write to FLASH finish.
Success.
Console#
Console#copy tftp startup-config
TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.99
Source configuration file name: startup.01
Startup configuration file name [startup]:
Write to FLASH Programming.
\Write to FLASH finish.
Success.
Console#
Console#copy tftp https-certificate
TFTP server ip address: 10.1.0.19
Source certificate file name: SS-certificate
Source private file name: SS-private
Private password: ********
Success.
Console#reload
System will be restarted, continue <y/n>? y
Command Line Interface
4-88
4
This example shows how to copy a public-key used by SSH from a TFTP server.
Note that public key authentication via SSH is only supported for users configured
locally on the switch:
delete
This command deletes a file or image.
Syntax
delete [unit:] filename
filename - Name of the configuration file or image name.
unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• If the file type is used for system startup, then this file cannot be deleted.
• “Factory_Default_Config.cfg” cannot be deleted.
• A colon (:) is required after the specified unit number.
Example
This example shows how to delete the test2.cfg configuration file from flash memory
for unit 1.
Related Commands
dir (4-89)
delete public-key (4-50)
Console#copy tftp public-key
TFTP server IP address: 192.168.1.19
Choose public key type:
1. RSA: 2. DSA: <1-2>: 1
Source file name: steve.pub
Username: steve
TFTP Download
Success.
Write to FLASH Programming.
Success.
Console#
Console#delete 1:test2.cfg
Console#
Flash/File Commands
4-89
4
dir
This command displays a list of files in flash memory.
Syntax
dir [unit:] {{boot-rom: | config: | opcode:} [:filename]}
The type of file or image to display includes:
•boot-rom - Boot ROM (or diagnostic) image file.
•config - Switch configuration file.
•opcode - Run-time operation code image file.
•filename - Name of the configuration file or code image.
•unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• If you enter the command dir without any parameters, the system displays all
files.
• A colon (:) is required after the specified unit number.
• File information is shown below:
Example
The following example shows how to display all file information:
Table 4-28 File Directory Information
Column Heading Description
file name The name of the file.
file type File types: Boot-Rom, Operation Code, and Config file.
startup Shows if this file is used when the system is started.
size The length of the file in bytes.
Console#dir 1:
file name file type startup size (byte)
----------------------------------- -------------- ------- -------------
D2218 Boot-Rom image Y 214124
V2271 Operation Code Y 1761944
Factory_Default_Config.cfg Config File Y 5197
---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Total free space: 5242880
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-90
4
whichboot
This command displays which files were booted when the system powered up.
Syntax
whichboot [unit]
unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
This example shows the information displayed by the whichboot command. See
the table under the dir command for a description of the file information displayed by
this command.
boot system
This command specifies the image used to start up the system.
Syntax
boot system [unit:] {boot-rom| config | opcode}: filename
The type of file or image to set as a default includes:
•boot-rom* - Boot ROM.
•config* - Configuration file.
•opcode* - Run-time operation code.
•filename - Name of the configuration file or code image.
•unit* - Specifies the unit number. (Range: 1)
* The colon (:) is required.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• A colon (:) is required after the specified unit number and file type.
• If the file contains an error, it cannot be set as the default file.
Console#whichboot
file name file type startup size (byte)
------------------------------------- -------------- ------- -----------
Unit1:
D2218 Boot-Rom image Y 214124
V2271 Operation Code Y 1761944
Factory_Default_Config.cfg Config File Y 5197
Console#
Authentication Commands
4-91
4
Example
Related Commands
dir (4-89)
whichboot (4-90)
Authentication Commands
You can configure this switch to authenticate users logging into the system for
management access using local or RADIUS authentication methods. You can also
enable port-based authentication for network client access using IEEE 802.1X.
Authentication Sequence
Console(config)#boot system config: startup
Console(config)#
Table 4-29 Authentication Commands
Command Group Function Page
Authentication Sequence Defines logon authentication method and precedence 4-91
RADIUS Client Configures settings for authentication via a RADIUS server 4-94
TACACS+ Client Configures settings for authentication via a TACACS+ server 4-98
AAA Configures authentication, authorization, and accounting for
network access
4-102
Port Security Configures secure addresses for a port 4-111
Port Authentication Configures host authentication on specific ports using 802.1X 4-112
Network Access Configures MAC authentication and dynamic VLAN assignment 4-121
Web Authentication Configures Web authentication 4-130
Table 4-30 Authentication Sequence
Command Function Mode Page
authentication login Defines logon authentication method and precedence GC 4-92
authentication enable Defines the authentication method and precedence for
command mode change
GC 4-93
Command Line Interface
4-92
4
authentication login
This command defines the login authentication method and precedence. Use the no
form to restore the default.
Syntax
authentication login {[local] [radius] [tacacs]}
no authentication login
•local - Use local password.
•radius - Use RADIUS server password.
•tacacs - Use TACACS server password.
Default Setting
Local
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP. UDP only offers best effort
delivery, while TCP offers a connection-oriented transport. Also, note that
RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access-request packet from the
client to the server, while TACACS+ encrypts the entire body of the packet.
• RADIUS and TACACS+ logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level
for each user name and password pair. The user name, password, and
privilege level must be configured on the authentication server.
• You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate
the authentication sequence. For example, if you enter “authentication login
radius tacacs local,” the user name and password on the RADIUS server is
verified first. If the RADIUS server is not available, then authentication is
attempted on the TACACS+ server. If the TACACS+ server is not available,
the local user name and password is checked.
Example
Related Commands
username - for setting the local user names and passwords (4-38)
Console(config)#authentication login radius
Console(config)#
Authentication Commands
4-93
4
authentication enable
This command defines the authentication method and precedence to use when
changing from Exec command mode to Privileged Exec command mode with the
enable command (see page 4-21). Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
authentication enable {[local] [radius] [tacacs]}
no authentication enable
•local - Use local password only.
•radius - Use RADIUS server password only.
•tacacs - Use TACACS server password.
Default Setting
Local
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• RADIUS uses UDP while TACACS+ uses TCP. UDP only offers best effort
delivery, while TCP offers a connection-oriented transport. Also, note that
RADIUS encrypts only the password in the access-request packet from the
client to the server, while TACACS+ encrypts the entire body of the packet.
• RADIUS and TACACS+ logon authentication assigns a specific privilege level
for each user name and password pair. The user name, password, and
privilege level must be configured on the authentication server.
• You can specify three authentication methods in a single command to indicate
the authentication sequence. For example, if you enter “authentication
enable radius tacacs local,” the user name and password on the RADIUS
server is verified first. If the RADIUS server is not available, then
authentication is attempted on the TACACS+ server. If the TACACS+ server
is not available, the local user name and password is checked.
Example
Related Commands
enable password - sets the password for changing command modes (4-39)
Console(config)#authentication enable radius
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-94
4
RADIUS Client
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS) is a logon authentication
protocol that uses software running on a central server to control access to
RADIUS-aware devices on the network. An authentication server contains a
database of multiple user name/password pairs with associated privilege levels for
each user or group that require management access to a switch.
Table 4-31 RADIUS Client Commands
Command Function Mode Page
radius-server host Specifies the RADIUS server GC 4-95
radius-server acct-port Sets the RADIUS server network port GC 4-95
radius-server auth-port Sets the RADIUS server network port GC 4-96
radius-server key Sets the RADIUS encryption key GC 4-96
radius-server retransmit Sets the number of retries GC 4-97
radius-server timeout Sets the interval between sending authentication requests GC 4-97
show radius-server Shows the current RADIUS settings PE 4-97
Authentication Commands
4-95
4
radius-server host
This command specifies primary and backup RADIUS servers and authentication
parameters that apply to each server. Use the no form to restore the default values.
Syntax
[no] radius-server index host {host_ip_address | host_alias}
[auth-port auth_port] [timeout timeout] [retransmit retransmit] [key key]
•index - Allows you to specify up to five servers. These servers are queried
in sequence until a server responds or the retransmit period expires.
•host_ip_address - IP address of server.
•host_alias - Symbolic name of server. (Maximum length: 20 characters)
•port_number - RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication messages.
(Range: 1-65535)
•timeout - Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending
a request. (Range: 1-65535)
•retransmit - Number of times the switch will try to authenticate logon access
via the RADIUS server. (Range: 1-30)
•key - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client. Do not
use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20 characters)
Default Setting
•auth-port - 1812
•timeout - 5 seconds
•retransmit - 2
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
radius-server acct-port
This command sets the RADIUS server network port for accounting messages. Use
the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
radius-server acct-port port_number
no radius-server acct-port
port_number - RADIUS server UDP port used for accounting messages.
(Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
1813
Console(config)#radius-server 1 host 192.168.1.20 auth-port 181 timeout
10 retransmit 5 key green
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-96
4
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
radius-server auth-port
This command sets the RADIUS server network port for authentication messages.
Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
radius-server auth-port port_number
no radius-server auth-port
port_number - RADIUS server UDP port used for authentication
messages. (Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
181
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
radius-server key
This command sets the RADIUS encryption key. Use the no form to restore the
default.
Syntax
radius-server key key_string
no radius-server key
key_string - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client.
Do not use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Console(config)#radius-server acct-port 181
Console(config)#
Console(config)#radius-server port 181
Console(config)#
Console(config)#radius-server key green
Console(config)#
Authentication Commands
4-97
4
radius-server retransmit
This command sets the number of retries. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
radius-server retransmit number_of_retries
no radius-server retransmit
number_of_retries - Number of times the switch will try to authenticate
logon access via the RADIUS server. (Range: 1-30)
Default Setting
2
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
radius-server timeout
This command sets the interval between transmitting authentication requests to the
RADIUS server. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
radius-server timeout number_of_seconds
no radius-server timeout
number_of_seconds - Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply
before resending a request. (Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
5
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
show radius-server
This command displays the current settings for the RADIUS server.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Console(config)#radius-server retransmit 5
Console(config)#
Console(config)#radius-server timeout 10
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-98
4
Example
TACACS+ Client
Terminal Access Controller Access Control System (TACACS+) is a logon
authentication protocol that uses software running on a central server to control
access to TACACS-aware devices on the network. An authentication server
contains a database of multiple user name/password pairs with associated privilege
levels for each user or group that require management access to a switch.
tacacs-server host
This command specifies the TACACS+ server. Use the no form to restore the
default.
Syntax
[no] tacacs-server index host {host_ip_address} [port port_number]
[timeout timeout] [retransmit retransmit] [key key]
•index - Specifies the index number of the server. (Range: 1)
•host_ip_address - IP address of the server.
•port_number - The TACACS+ server TCP port used for authentication
messages. (Range: 1-65535)
Console#show radius-server
Remote RADIUS server configuration:
Global settings
Communication key with RADIUS server:
Server port number: 1812
Retransmit times: 2
Request timeout: 5
Sever 1:
Server IP address: 192.168.1.1
Communication key with RADIUS server: *****
Server port number: 1812
Retransmit times: 2
Request timeout: 5
Console#
Table 4-32 TACACS Commands
Command Function Mode Page
tacacs-server host Specifies the TACACS+ server GC 4-98
tacacs-server port Specifies the TACACS+ server network port GC 4-99
tacacs-server key Sets the TACACS+ encryption key GC 4-99
tacacs-server retransmit Sets the number of retries GC 4-100
tacacs-server timeout Sets the interval before resending an authentication request GC 4-100
show tacacs-server Shows the current TACACS+ settings GC 4-101
Authentication Commands
4-99
4
•timeout - Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply before resending
a request. (Range: 1-540 seconds)
•retransmit - Number of times the switch will resend an authentication
request to the TACACS+ server. (Range: 1-30)
•key - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for client. Do not
use blank spaces in the string. (Maximum length: 20 characters)
Default Setting
•port - 49
•timeout - 5 seconds
•retransmit - 2
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
tacacs-server port
This command specifies the TACACS+ server network port. Use the no form to
restore the default.
Syntax
tacacs-server port port_number
no tacacs-server port
port_number - TACACS+ server TCP port used for authentication
messages. (Range: 1-65535)
Default Setting
49
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
tacacs-server key
This command sets the TACACS+ encryption key. Use the no form to restore the
default.
Console(config)#tacacs-server host 192.168.1.25
Console(config)#
Console(config)#tacacs-server port 181
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-100
4
Syntax
tacacs-server key key_string
no tacacs-server key
key_string - Encryption key used to authenticate logon access for the
client. Do not use blank spaces in the string.
(Maximum length: 20 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
tacacs-server retransmit
This command sets the number of retries. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
tacacs-server retransmit number_of_retries
no tacacs-server retransmit
number_of_retries - Number of times the switch will try to authenticate
logon access via the TACACS+ server. (Range: 1-30)
Default Setting
2
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
tacacs-server timeout
This command sets the interval between transmitting authentication requests to the
TACACS+ server. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
tacacs-server timeout number_of_seconds
no tacacs-server timeout
number_of_seconds - Number of seconds the switch waits for a reply
before resending a request. (Range: 1-540)
Console(config)#tacacs-server key green
Console(config)#
Console(config)#tacacs-server retransmit 5
Console(config)#
Authentication Commands
4-101
4
Default Setting
5 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
show tacacs-server
This command displays the current settings for the TACACS+ server.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console(config)#tacacs-server timeout 10
Console(config)#
Console#show tacacs-server
Remote TACACS+ server configuration:
Global Settings:
Communication Key with TACACS+ Server:
Server Port Number: 49
Retransmit Times : 2
Request Times : 5
Server 1:
Server IP address: 1.2.3.4
Communication key with TACACS+ server: *****
Server port number: 49
Retransmit Times : 2
Request Times : 5
Tacacs server group:
Group Name Member Index
--------------------- -------------
tacacs+ 1
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-102
4
AAA Commands
The Authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) feature provides the main
framework for configuring access control on the switch. The AAA functions require
the use of configured RADIUS or TACACS+ servers in the network.
aaa group server
Use this command to name a group of security server hosts. To remove a server
group from the configuration list, enter the no form of this command.
Syntax
[no] aaa group server {radius | tacacs+} group-name
•radius - Defines a RADIUS server group.
•tacacs+ - Defines a TACACS+ server group.
•group-name - A text string that names a security server group.
(Range: 1-7 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Table 4-33 AAA Commands
Command Function Mode Page
aaa group server Groups security servers in to defined lists GC 4-102
server Configures the IP address of a server in a group list SG 4-103
aaa accounting dot1x Enables accounting of 802.1X services GC 4-103
aaa accounting exec Enables accounting of Exec services GC 4-104
aaa accounting commands Enables accounting of Exec mode commands GC 4-105
aaa accounting update Enables periodoc updates to be sent to the accounting
server
GC 4-106
accounting dot1x Applies an accounting method to an interface for 802.1X
service requests
IC 4-107
accounting exec Applies an accounting method to local console, Telnet or
SSH connections
Line 4-107
accounting commands Applies an accounting method to CLI commands entered
by a user
Line 4-108
aaa authorization exec Enables authorization of Exec sessions GC 4-108
authorization exec Applies an authorization method to local console, Telnet or
SSH connections
Line 4-109
show accounting Displays all accounting information PE 4-110
Authentication Commands
4-103
4
Example
server
This command adds a security server to an AAA server group. Use the no form to
remove the associated server from the group.
Syntax
[no] server {index | ip-address}
•index - Specifies the server index. (Range: RADIUS 1-5, TACACS+ 1)
•ip-address - Specifies the host IP address of a server.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Server Group Configuration
Command Usage
• When specifying the index for a RADIUS server, that server index must
already be defined by the radius-server host command (see page 4-95).
• When specifying the index for a TACACS+ server, that server index must
already be defined by the tacacs-server host command (see page 4-98).
Example
aaa accounting dot1x
This command enables the accounting of requested 802.1X services for network
access. Use the no form to disable the accounting service.
Syntax
aaa accounting dot1x {default | method-name} start-stop group {radius |
tacacs+ |server-group}
no aaa accounting dot1x {default | method-name}
•default - Specifies the default accounting method for service requests.
•method-name - Specifies an accounting method for service requests.
(Range: 1-255 characters)
•start-stop - Records accounting from starting point and stopping point.
•group - Specifies the server group to use.
Console(config)#aaa group server radius tps
Console(config-sg-radius)#
Console(config)#aaa group server radius tps
Console(config-sg-radius)#server 10.2.68.120
Console(config-sg-radius)#
Command Line Interface
4-104
4
-radius - Specifies all RADIUS hosts configure with the radius-server
host command described on page 4-95.
-tacacs+ - Specifies all TACACS+ hosts configure with the tacacs-server
host command described on page 4-98.
-server-group - Specifies the name of a server group configured with the
aaa group server command described on 4-102. (Range: 1-255
characters)
Default Setting
Accounting is not enabled
No servers are specified
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
Note that the default and method-name fields are only used to describe the
accounting method(s) configured on the specified RADIUS or TACACS+
servers, and do not actually send any information to the servers about the
methods to use.
Example
aaa accounting exec
This command enables the accounting of requested Exec services for network
access. Use the no form to disable the accounting service.
Syntax
aaa accounting exec {default | method-name} start-stop group {radius |
tacacs+ |server-group}
no aaa accounting exec {default | method-name}
•default - Specifies the default accounting method for service requests.
•method-name - Specifies an accounting method for service requests.
(Range: 1-255 characters)
•start-stop - Records accounting from starting point and stopping point.
•group - Specifies the server group to use.
Console(config)#aaa accounting dot1x default start-stop group radius
Console(config)#
Authentication Commands
4-105
4
-radius - Specifies all RADIUS hosts configure with the radius-server
host command described on page 4-95.
-tacacs+ - Specifies all TACACS+ hosts configure with the tacacs-server
host command described on page 4-98.
-server-group - Specifies the name of a server group configured with the
aaa group server command described on 4-102. (Range: 1-255
characters)
Default Setting
Accounting is not enabled
No servers are specified
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• This command runs accounting for Exec service requests for the local console
and Telnet connections.
• Note that the default and method-name fields are only used to describe the
accounting method(s) configured on the specified RADIUS or TACACS+
servers, and do not actually send any information to the servers about the
methods to use.
Example
aaa accounting commands
This command enables the accounting of Exec mode commands. Use the no form
to disable the accounting service.
Syntax
aaa accounting commands level {default | method-name} start-stop group
{tacacs+ |server-group}
no aaa accounting commands level {default | method-name}
•level - The privilege level for executing commands. (Range: 0-15)
•default - Specifies the default accounting method for service requests.
•method-name - Specifies an accounting method for service requests.
(Range: 1-255 characters)
•start-stop - Records accounting from starting point and stopping point.
•group - Specifies the server group to use.
Console(config)#aaa accounting exec default start-stop group tacacs+
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-106
4
-tacacs+ - Specifies all TACACS+ hosts configure with the tacacs-server
host command described on page 4-98.
-server-group - Specifies the name of a server group configured with the
aaa group server command described on 4-102. (Range: 1-255
characters)
Default Setting
Accounting is not enabled
No servers are specified
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• The accounting of Exec mode commands is only supported by TACACS+
servers.
• Note that the default and method-name fields are only used to describe the
accounting method(s) configured on the specified TACACS+ server, and do
not actually send any information to the server about the methods to use.
Example
aaa accounting update
This command enables the sending of periodic updates to the accounting server.
Use the no form to disable accounting updates.
Syntax
aaa accounting update [periodic interval]
no aaa accounting update
interval - Sends an interim accounting record to the server at this interval.
(Range: 1-2147483647 minutes)
Default Setting
1 minute
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• When accounting updates are enabled, the switch issues periodic interim
accounting records for all users on the system.
• Using the command without specifying an interim interval enables updates,
but does not change the current interval setting.
Console(config)#aaa accounting commands 15 default start-stop group
tacacs+
Console(config)#
Authentication Commands
4-107
4
Example
accounting dot1x
This command applies an accounting method for 802.1X service requests on an
interface. Use the no form to disable accounting on the interface.
Syntax
accounting dot1x {default | list-name}
no accounting dot1x
•default - Specifies the default method list created with the aaa accounting
dot1x command (page 4-103).
•list-name - Specifies a method list created with the aaa accounting dot1x
command.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Example
accounting exec
This command applies an accounting method to local console or Telnet connections.
Use the no form to disable accounting on the line.
Syntax
accounting exec {default | list-name}
no accounting exec
•default - Specifies the default method list created with the aaa accounting
exec command (page 4-104).
•list-name - Specifies a method list created with the aaa accounting exec
command.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Console(config)#aaa accounting update periodic 30
Console(config)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2
Console(config-if)#accounting dot1x tps
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-108
4
Example
accounting commands
This command applies an accounting method to entered CLI commands. Use the
no form to disable accounting for entered commands.
Syntax
accounting commands level {default | list-name}
no accounting commands level
•level - The privilege level for executing commands. (Range: 0-15)
•default - Specifies the default method list created with the aaa accounting
commands command (page 4-105).
•list-name - Specifies a method list created with the aaa accounting
commands command.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Example
aaa authorization exec
This command enables the authorization for Exec access. Use the no form to
disable the authorization service.
Syntax
aaa authorization exec {default | method-name} group {tacacs+
|server-group}
no aaa authorization exec {default | method-name}
•default - Specifies the default authorization method for Exec access.
•method-name - Specifies an authorization method for Exec access.
(Range: 1-255 characters)
•group - Specifies the server group to use.
Console(config)#line console
Console(config-line)#accounting exec tps
Console(config-line)#exit
Console(config)#line vty
Console(config-line)#accounting exec default
Console(config-line)#
Console(config)#line console
Console(config-line)#accounting commands 15 default
Console(config-line)#
Authentication Commands
4-109
4
-tacacs+ - Specifies all TACACS+ hosts configure with the tacacs-server
host command described on page 4-98.
-server-group - Specifies the name of a server group configured with the
aaa group server command described on 4-102. (Range: 1-255
characters)
Default Setting
Authorization is not enabled
No servers are specified
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• This command performs authorization to determine if a user is allowed to run
an Exec shell.
• AAA authentication must be enabled before authorization is enabled.
• If this command is issued without a specified named method, the default
method list is applied to all interfaces or lines (where this authorization type
applies), except those that have a named method explicitly defined.
Example
authorization exec
This command applies an authorization method to local console or Telnet
connections. Use the no form to disable authorization on the line.
Syntax
authorization exec {default | list-name}
no authorization exec
•default - Specifies the default method list created with the aaa
authorization exec command (page 4-108).
•list-name - Specifies a method list created with the aaa authorization exec
command.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Line Configuration
Console(config)#aaa authorization exec default group tacacs+
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-110
4
Example
show accounting
This command displays the current accounting settings per function and per port.
Syntax
show accounting [commands [level]] | [[dot1x [statistics [username
user-name | interface interface]] | exec [statistics] | statistics [username
user-name | interface]]
•commands - Displays command accounting information.
• level - Displays command accounting information for a specifiable
command level.
•dot1x - Displays dot1x accounting information.
•exec - Displays Exec accounting records.
•statistics - Displays accounting records.
•user-name - Displays accounting records for a specifiable username.
•interface
ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console(config)#line console
Console(config-line)#authorization exec tps
Console(config-line)#exit
Console(config)#line vty
Console(config-line)#authorization exec default
Console(config-line)#
Console#show accounting
Accounting type: dot1x
Method list: default
Group list: radius
Interface:
Method list: tps
Group list: radius
Interface: eth 1/2
Accounting type: Exec
Method list: default
Group list: radius
Interface: vty
Console#
Authentication Commands
4-111
4
Port Security Commands
These commands can be used to enable port security on a port. When using port
security, the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on the specified port when it
has reached a configured maximum number. Only incoming traffic with source
addresses already stored in the dynamic or static address table for this port will be
authorized to access the network. The port will drop any incoming frames with a
source MAC address that is unknown or has been previously learned from another
port. If a device with an unauthorized MAC address attempts to use the switch port,
the intrusion will be detected and the switch can automatically take action by
disabling the port and sending a trap message.
port security
This command enables or configures port security. Use the no form without any
keywords to disable port security. Use the no form with the appropriate keyword to
restore the default settings for a response to security violation or for the maximum
number of allowed addresses.
Syntax
port security [action {shutdown | trap | trap-and-shutdown}
|max-mac-count address-count]
no port security [action | max-mac-count]
•action - Response to take when port security is violated.
-shutdown - Disable port only.
-trap - Issue SNMP trap message only.
-trap-and-shutdown - Issue SNMP trap message and disable port.
• max-mac-count
-address-count - The maximum number of MAC addresses that can be
learned on a port. (Range: 0-1024)
Default Setting
• Status: Disabled
• Action: None
• Maximum Addresses: 0
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Table 4-34 Port Security Commands
Command Function Mode Page
port security Configures a secure port IC 4-111
mac-address-table static Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN GC 4-190
show mac-address-table Displays entries in the bridge-forwarding database PE 4-191
Command Line Interface
4-112
4
Command Usage
• If you enable port security, the switch stops learning new MAC addresses on
the specified port when it has reached a configured maximum number. Only
incoming traffic with source addresses already stored in the dynamic or static
address table will be accepted.
• First use the port security max-mac-count command to set the number of
addresses, and then use the port security command to enable security on the
port.
•Use the no port security max-mac-count command to disable port security
and reset the maximum number of addresses to the default.
• You can also manually add secure addresses with the mac-address-table
static command.
• A secure port has the following restrictions:
- Cannot use port monitoring.
- Cannot be a multi-VLAN port.
- Cannot be connected to a network interconnection device.
- Cannot be a trunk port.
• If a port is disabled due to a security violation, it must be manually re-enabled
using the no shutdown command.
Example
The following example enables port security for port 5, and sets the response to a
security violation to issue a trap message:
Related Commands
shutdown (4-171)
mac-address-table static (4-190)
show mac-address-table (4-191)
802.1X Port Authentication
The switch supports IEEE 802.1X (dot1x) port-based access control that prevents
unauthorized access to the network by requiring users to first submit credentials for
authentication. Client authentication is controlled centrally by a RADIUS server
using EAP (Extensible Authentication Protocol).
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#port security action trap
Table 4-35 802.1X Port Authentication
Command Function Mode Page
dot1x system-auth-control Enables dot1x globally on the switch. GC 4-113
dot1x default Resets all dot1x parameters to their default values GC 4-113
dot1x max-req Sets the maximum number of times that the switch
retransmits an EAP request/identity packet to the client
before it times out the authentication session
IC 4-114
dot1x port-control Sets dot1x mode for a port interface IC 4-114
Authentication Commands
4-113
4
dot1x system-auth-control
This command enables 802.1X port authentication globally on the switch. Use the
no form to restore the default.
Syntax
[no] dotx system-auth-control
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
dot1x default
This command sets all configurable dot1x global and port settings to their default
values.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
dot1x operation-mode Allows single or multiple hosts on an dot1x port IC 4-115
dot1x re-authenticate Forces re-authentication on specific ports PE 4-115
dot1x re-authentication Enables re-authentication for all ports IC 4-116
dot1x timeout quiet-period Sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max
Request Count has been exceeded before attempting to
acquire a new client
IC 4-116
dot1x timeout re-authperiod Sets the time period after which a connected client must
be re-authenticated
IC 4-117
dot1x timeout tx-period Sets the time period during an authentication session that
the switch waits before re-transmitting an EAP packet
IC 4-117
dot1x intrusion-action Sets the port response to intrusion when authentication
fails
IC 4-118
show dot1x Shows all dot1x related information PE 4-118
Console(config)#dot1x system-auth-control
Console(config)#
Console(config)#dot1x default
Console(config)#
Table 4-35 802.1X Port Authentication (Continued)
Command Function Mode Page
Command Line Interface
4-114
4
dot1x max-req
This command sets the maximum number of times the switch port will retransmit an
EAP request/identity packet to the client before it times out the authentication
session. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
dot1x max-req count
no dot1x max-req
count – The maximum number of requests (Range: 1-10)
Default
2
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Example
dot1x port-control
This command sets the dot1x mode on a port interface. Use the no form to restore
the default.
Syntax
dot1x port-control {auto | force-authorized | force-unauthorized}
no dot1x port-control
•auto – Requires a dot1x-aware connected client to be authorized by the
RADIUS server. Clients that are not dot1x-aware will be denied access.
•force-authorized – Configures the port to grant access to all clients, either
dot1x-aware or otherwise.
•force-unauthorized – Configures the port to deny access to all clients,
either dot1x-aware or otherwise.
Default
force-authorized
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Example
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2
Console(config-if)#dot1x max-req 2
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2
Console(config-if)#dot1x port-control auto
Console(config-if)#
Authentication Commands
4-115
4
dot1x operation-mode
This command allows single or multiple hosts (clients) to connect to an
802.1X-authorized port. Use the no form with no keywords to restore the default to
single host. Use the no form with the multi-host max-count keywords to restore the
default maximum count.
Syntax
dot1x operation-mode {single-host | multi-host [max-count count]}
no dot1x operation-mode [multi-host max-count]
•single-host – Allows only a single host to connect to this port.
•multi-host – Allows multiple host to connect to this port.
•max-count – Keyword for the maximum number of hosts.
-count – The maximum number of hosts that can connect to a port.
(Range: 1-1024; Default: 5)
Default
Single-host
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Command Usage
• The “max-count” parameter specified by this command is only effective if the
dot1x mode is set to “auto” by the dot1x port-control command (page 4-114).
• In “multi-host” mode, only one host connected to a port needs to pass
authentication for all other hosts to be granted network access. Similarly, a
port can become unauthorized for all hosts if one attached host fails
re-authentication or sends an EAPOL logoff message.
Example
dot1x re-authenticate
This command forces re-authentication on all ports or a specific interface.
Syntax
dot1x re-authenticate [interface]
interface
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2
Console(config-if)#dot1x operation-mode multi-host max-count 10
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-116
4
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
dot1x re-authentication
This command enables periodic re-authentication globally for all ports. Use the no
form to disable re-authentication.
Syntax
[no] dot1x re-authentication
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Example
dot1x timeout quiet-period
This command sets the time that a switch port waits after the Max Request Count
has been exceeded before attempting to acquire a new client. Use the no form to
reset the default.
Syntax
dot1x timeout quiet-period seconds
no dot1x timeout quiet-period
seconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 1-65535)
Default
60 seconds
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Example
Console#dot1x re-authenticate
Console#
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2
Console(config-if)#dot1x re-authentication
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout quiet-period 350
Console(config-if)#
Authentication Commands
4-117
4
dot1x timeout re-authperiod
This command sets the time period after which a connected client must be
re-authenticated.
Syntax
dot1x timeout re-authperiod seconds
no dot1x timeout re-authperiod
seconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 1-65535)
Default
3600 seconds
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Example
dot1x timeout tx-period
This command sets the time that an interface on the switch waits during an
authentication session before re-transmitting an EAP packet. Use the no form to
reset to the default value.
Syntax
dot1x timeout tx-period seconds
no dot1x timeout tx-period
seconds - The number of seconds. (Range: 1-65535)
Default
30 seconds
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Example
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout re-authperiod 300
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2
Console(config-if)#dot1x timeout tx-period 300
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-118
4
dot1x intrusion-action
This command sets the port’s response to a failed authentication, either to block all
traffic, or to assign all traffic for the port to a guest VLAN. Use the no form to reset
the default.
Syntax
dot1x intrusion-action {block-traffic | guest-vlan}
no dot1x intrusion-action
Default
block-traffic
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Command Usage
For guest VLAN assignment to be successful, the VLAN must be configured
and set as active (“vlan database” on page 4-242) and assigned as the guest
VLAN for the port (“network-access guest-vlan” on page 4-125).
Example
show dot1x
This command shows general port authentication related settings on the switch or a
specific interface.
Syntax
show dot1x [statistics] [interface interface]
•statistics - Displays dot1x status for each port.
• interface
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command displays the following information:
•Global 802.1X Parameters – Shows whether or not 802.1X port
authentication is globally enabled on the switch.
•802.1X Port Summary – Displays the port access control parameters for
each interface, including the following items:
Console(config)#interface eth 1/2
Console(config-if)#dot1x intrusion-action guest-vlan
Console(config-if)#
Authentication Commands
4-119
4
- Status – Administrative state for port access control.
- Operation Mode – Dot1x port control operation mode (page 4-115).
- Mode – Dot1x port control mode (page 4-114).
- Authorized – Authorization status (yes or n/a - not authorized).
•802.1X Port Details – Displays the port access control parameters for each
interface, including the following items:
- reauth-enabled – Periodic re-authentication (page 4-116).
- reauth-period – Time after which a connected client must be
re-authenticated (page 4-117).
- quiet-period – Time a port waits after Max Request Count is
exceeded before attempting to acquire a new
client (page 4-116).
- tx-period – Time a port waits during authentication session
before re-transmitting EAP packet (page 4-117).
- supplicant-timeout – Supplicant timeout.
- server-timeout – Server timeout.
- reauth-max – Maximum number of reauthentication attempts.
- max-req – Maximum number of times a port will retransmit
an EAP request/identity packet to the client
before it times out the authentication session
(page 4-114).
- Status – Authorization status (authorized or not).
- Operation Mode – Shows if single or multiple hosts (clients) can
connect to an 802.1X-authorized port.
- Max Count – The maximum number of hosts allowed to
access this port (page 4-115).
- Port-control – Shows the dot1x mode on a port as auto,
force-authorized, or force-unauthorized
(page 4-114).
- Supplicant – MAC address of authorized client.
- Current Identifier – The integer (0-255) used by the Authenticator to
identify the current authentication session.
- Intrusion action – Shows whether the switch will block all non-EAP
traffic or assign traffic on the port to a guest
VLAN if authentication fails.
•Authenticator State Machine
- State – Current state (including initialize, disconnected,
connecting, authenticating, authenticated, aborting,
held, force_authorized, force_unauthorized).
- Reauth Count – Number of times connecting state is re-entered.
•Backend State Machine
- State – Current state (including request, response,
success, fail, timeout, idle, initialize).
- Request Count – Number of EAP Request packets sent to the
Supplicant without receiving a response.
Command Line Interface
4-120
4
- Identifier(Server) – Identifier carried in the most recent EAP Success,
Failure or Request packet received from the
Authentication Server.
•Reauthentication State Machine
- State – Current state (including initialize, reauthenticate).
Example
Console#show dot1x
Global 802.1X Parameters
system-auth-control: enable
802.1X Port Summary
Port Name Status Operation Mode Mode Authorized
1/1 disabled Single-Host ForceAuthorized n/a
1/2 enabled Single-Host auto yes
.
.
.
1/28 disabled Single-Host ForceAuthorized n/a
802.1X Port Details
802.1X is disabled on port 1/1
802.1X is enabled on port 1/2
reauth-enabled: Enable
reauth-period: 1800
quiet-period: 30
tx-period: 40
supplicant-timeout: 30
server-timeout: 10
reauth-max: 2
max-req: 5
Status Authorized
Operation mode Single-Host
Max count 5
Port-control Auto
Supplicant 00-12-cf-49-5e-dc
Current Identifier 3
Intrusion action Guest VLAN
Authenticator State Machine
State Authenticated
Reauth Count 0
Backend State Machine
State Idle
Request Count 0
Identifier(Server) 2
Reauthentication State Machine
State Initialize
.
.
.
802.1X is disabled on port 1/28
Console#
Authentication Commands
4-121
4
Network Access – MAC Address Authentication
The Network Access feature controls host access to the network by authenticating
its MAC address on the connected switch port. Traffic received from a specific MAC
address is forwarded by the switch only if the source MAC address is successfully
authenticated by a central RADIUS server. While authentication for a MAC address
is in progress, all traffic is blocked until authentication is completed. On successful
authentication, the RADIUS server may optionally assign VLAN settings for the
switch port.
network-access mode
Use this command to enable network access authentication on a port interface. Use
the no form of this command to disable network access authentication.
Syntax
[no] network-access mode mac-authentication
Table 4-36 Network Access
Command Function Mode Page
network-access mode Enables MAC authentication on an interface IC 4-121
network-access
max-mac-count
Sets a maximum for authenticated MAC addresses on an
interface
IC 4-122
mac-authentication
intrusion-action
Determines the port response when a connected host fails
MAC authentication.
IC 4-123
mac-authentication
max-mac-count
Sets a maximum for mac-authentication autenticated
MAC addresses on an interface
IC 4-123
network-access dynamic-qos Enables dynamic quality of service feature IC 4-124
network-access
dynamic-vlan
Enables dynamic VLAN assignment from a RADIUS
server
IC 4-124
network-access guest-vlan Specifies the guest VLAN IC 4-125
network-access
link-detection
Enables the link detection feature IC 4-125
network-access
link-detection link-down
Configures the link detection feature to detect and act
upon link down events
IC 4-125
network-access
link-detection link-up
Configures the link detection feature to detect and act
upon link up events
IC 4-125
network-access
link-detection link-up-down
Configures the link detection feature to detect and act
upon both link-up and link-down events
IC 4-125
mac-authentication
reauth-time
Sets the time period after which a connected MAC
address must be re-authenticated
GC 4-127
clear network-access Clears authenticated MAC addresses from the address
table
PE 4-128
show network-access Displays the MAC authentication settings for port
interfaces
PE 4-128
show network-access
mac-address-table
Displays information for entries in the secure MAC
address table
PE 4-129
Command Line Interface
4-122
4
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Command Usage
• When enabled on a port interface, the authentication process sends a
Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) request to a configured RADIUS
server. The username and password are both equal to the MAC address
being authenticated.
• On the RADIUS server, PAP username and passwords must be configured in
the MAC address format XX-XX-XX-XX-XX-XX (all in upper case).
• The RADIUS server may optionally return a VLAN identifier list. VLAN
identifier list is carried in the “Tunnel-Private-Group-ID” attribute. The VLAN
list can contain multiple VLAN identifiers in the format “1u,2t,” where “u”
indicates untagged VLAN and “t” tagged VLAN. The “Tunnel-Type” attribute
should be set to “VLAN,” and the “Tunnel-Medium-Type” attribute set to “802.”
• Authenticated MAC addresses are stored as dynamic entries in the switch
secure MAC address table and are removed when the aging time expires. The
maximum number of secure MAC addresses supported for the switch system
is 1024.
• Configured static MAC addresses are added to the secure address table
when seen on a switch port. Static addresses are treated as authenticated
without sending a request to a RADIUS server.
• MAC authentication, 802.1X, and port security cannot be configured together
on the same port. Only one security mechanism can be applied.
• MAC authentication cannot be configured on trunk ports.
• When a port interface status changes to down, all MAC addresses are cleared
from the secure MAC address table. Static VLAN assignments are not
restored.
Example
network-access max-mac-count
Use this command to set the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be
authenticated on a port interface via all forms of authentication. Use the no form of
this command to restore the default.
Syntax
network-access max-mac-count count
no network-access max-mac-count
Console(config-if)#network-access mode mac-authentication
Console(config-if)#
Authentication Commands
4-123
4
count - The maximum number of authenticated MAC addresses allowed.
(Range: 1 to 2048; 0 for unlimited)
Default Setting
2048
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Command Usage
The maximum number of MAC addresses per port is 2048, and the maximum
number of secure MAC addresses supported for the switch system is 1024.
When the limit is reached, all new MAC addresses are treated as
authentication failed.
Example
mac-authentication intrusion-action
Use this command to configure the port response to a host MAC authentication
failure. Use the no form of this command to restore the default.
Syntax
mac-authentication intrusion-action [block traffic | pass traffic]
no mac-authentication intrusion-action
Default Setting
Block Traffic
Command Mode
Interface Config
Example
mac-authentication max-mac-count
Use this command to set the maximum number of MAC addresses that can be
authenticated on a port via 802.1X authentication or MAC authentication. Use the no
form of this command to restore the default.
Syntax
mac-authentication max-mac-count count
no mac-authentication max-mac-count
count - The maximum number of 802.1X and MAC-authenticated MAC
addresses allowed. (Range: 1-1024)
Console(config-if)#network-access max-mac-count 5
Console(config-if)#
Console(config-if)#mac-authentication intrusion-action block-traffic
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-124
4
Default Setting
1024
Command Mode
Interface Config
Example
network-access dynamic-qos
Use this command to enable the dynamic QoS feature for an authenticated port.
Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
[no] network-access dynamic-qos
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Example
The following example enables the dynamic QoS feature on port 1.
network-access dynamic-vlan
Use this command to enable dynamic VLAN assignment for an authenticated port.
Use the no form to disable dynamic VLAN assignment.
Syntax
[no] network-access dynamic-vlan
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Command Usage
• When enabled, the VLAN identifiers returned by the RADIUS server will be
applied to the port, providing the VLANs have already been created on the
switch. GVRP is not used to create the VLANs.
Console(config-if)#mac-authentication max-mac-count 32
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#network-access dynamic-qos
Console(config-if)#
Authentication Commands
4-125
4
• The VLAN settings specified by the first authenticated MAC address are
implemented for a port. Other authenticated MAC addresses on the port must
have same VLAN configuration, or they are treated as authentication failure.
• If dynamic VLAN assignment is enabled on a port and the RADIUS server
returns no VLAN configuration, the authentication is still treated as a success.
• When the dynamic VLAN assignment status is changed on a port, all
authenticated addresses are cleared from the secure MAC address table.
Example
The following example enables dynamic VLAN assignment on port 1.
network-access guest-vlan
Use this command to assign all traffic on a port to a guest VLAN when network
access (MAC authentication) or 802.1x authentication is rejected. Use the no form
of this command to disable guest VLAN assignment.
Syntax
network-access guest-vlan vlan-id
no network-access guest-vlan
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Command Usage
• The VLAN to be used as the guest VLAN must be defined and set as active
(“vlan database” on page 4-242).
• When used with 802.1x authentication, the intrusion-action configuration
must be set for ‘guest-vlan’ to be effective (“dot1x intrusion-action” on
page 4-118).
Example
network-access link-detection
Use this command to enable the link detection feature. Use the no form of this
command to restore the default.
Syntax
[no] network-access link-detection
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#network-access dynamic-vlan
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#network-access guest-vlan 25
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-126
4
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Example
network-access link-detection link-down
Use this command to configure the link detection feature to detect and link down
events. When a link down event is detected, the feature can shut down the port,
send an SNMP trap, or both. Use the no form of this command to disable this
feature.
Syntax
network-access link-detection link-down action [shutdown | trap |
trap-and-shutdown]
no network-access link-detection
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Example
network-access link-detection link-up
Use this command to configure the link detection feature to detect link up events.
When a link up event is detected, the feature can shut down the port, send an SNMP
trap, or both. Use the no form of this command to disable this feature.
Syntax
network-access link-detection link-up action [shutdown | trap |
trap-and-shutdown]
no network-access link-detection
Default Setting
Disabled
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#network-access link-detection
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#network-access link-detection link-down action trap
Console(config-if)#
Authentication Commands
4-127
4
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Example
network-access link-detection link-up-down
Use this command to configure the link detection feature to detect link-up and
link-down events. When either a link-up or link-down event is detected, the feature
can shut down the port, send an SNMP trap, or both. Use the no form of this
command to disable this feature.
Syntax
network-access link-detection link-up-down action [shutdown | trap |
trap-and-shutdown]
no network-access link-detection
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Example
mac-authentication reauth-time
Use this command to set the time period after which a connected MAC address
must be re-authenticated. Use the no form of this command to restore the default
value.
Syntax
mac-authentication reauth-time seconds
no mac-authentication reauth-time
seconds - The reauthentication time period.
(Range: 120-1000000 seconds)
Default Setting
1800
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#network-access link-detection link-up action trap
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#network-access link-detection link-up-down action trap
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-128
4
Command Usage
• The reauthentication time is a global setting and applies to all ports.
• When the reauthentication time expires for a secure MAC address it is
reauthenticated with the RADIUS server. During the reauthentication process
traffic through the port remains unaffected.
Example
clear network-access
Use this command to clear entries from the secure MAC addresses table.
Syntax
clear network-access mac-address-table [static | dynamic]
[address mac-address] [interface interface]
•static - Specifies static address entries.
•dynamic - Specifies dynamic address entries.
•mac-address - Specifies a MAC address entry. (Format: xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx)
•interface - Specifies a port interface.
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - This is unit 1.
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
show network-access
Use this command to display the MAC authentication settings for port interfaces.
Syntax
show network-access [interface interface]
•interface - Specifies a port interface.
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - This is unit 1.
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
Console(config)#mac-authentication reauth-time 300
Console(config)#
Console#clear network-access mac-address-table interface ethernet 1/1
Console#
Authentication Commands
4-129
4
Default Setting
Displays the settings for all interfaces.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
show network-access mac-address-table
Use this command to display secure MAC address table entries.
Syntax
show network-access mac-address-table [static | dynamic]
[address mac-address [mask]] [interface interface] [sort {address |
interface}]
•static - Specifies static address entries.
•dynamic - Specifies dynamic address entries.
•mac-address - Specifies a MAC address entry. (Format: xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx)
•mask - Specifies a MAC address bit mask for filtering displayed addresses.
•interface - Specifies a port interface.
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - This is unit 1.
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•sort - Sorts displayed entries by either MAC address or interface.
Default Setting
Displays all filters.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Console#show network-access interface ethernet 1/1
Global secure port information
Reauthentication Time : 1800
--------------------------------------------------
--------------------------------------------------
Port : 1/1
MAC Authentication : Disabled
MAC Authentication Intrusion action : Block traffic
MAC Authentication Maximum MAC Counts : 1024
Maximum MAC Counts : 2048
Dynamic VLAN Assignment : Enabled
Guest VLAN : Disabled
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-130
4
Command Usage
When using a bit mask to filter displayed MAC addresses, a 1 means "care"
and a 0 means "don't care". For example, a MAC of 00-00-01-02-03-04 and
mask FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 would result in all MACs in the range
00-00-01-00-00-00 to 00-00-01-FF-FF-FF to be displayed. All other MACs
would be filtered out.
Example
Web Authentication
Web authentication allows stations to authenticate and access the network in
situations where 802.1X or Network Access authentication are infeasible or
impractical. The web authentication feature allows unauthenticated hosts to request
and receive a DHCP assigned IP address and perform DNS queries. All other traffic,
except for http protocol traffic, is blocked. The switch intercepts http protocol traffic
and redirects it to a switch-generated webpage that facilitates username and
password authentication via RADIUS. Once authentication is successful, the web
browser is forwarded on to the originally requested web page. Successful
authentication is valid for all hosts connected to the port.
Notes: 1. MAC authentication, web authentication, 802.1X, and port security cannot be
configured together on the same port. Only one security mechanism can be
applied.
2. RADIUS authentication must be activated and configured properly for the
web authentication feature to work properly. (See “Configuring Local/Remote
Logon Authentication” on page 3-53)
3. Web authentication cannot be configured on trunk ports.
Console#show network-access mac-address-table
---- ----------------- --------------- --------- -------------------------
Port MAC-Address RADIUS-Server Attribute Time
---- ----------------- --------------- --------- -------------------------
1/1 00-00-01-02-03-04 172.155.120.17 Static 00d06h32m50s
1/1 00-00-01-02-03-05 172.155.120.17 Dynamic 00d06h33m20s
1/1 00-00-01-02-03-06 172.155.120.17 Static 00d06h35m10s
1/3 00-00-01-02-03-07 172.155.120.17 Dynamic 00d06h34m20s
Console#
Table 4-37 Web Authentication
Command Function Mode Page
web-auth
login-attempts
Defines the limit for failed web authentication login
attempts
GC 4-131
web-auth
login-fail-page-url
Defines the external URL to which a host is directed after
a failed web authentication attempt
GC 4-131
web-auth
login-page-url
Defines the external URL to which a host is directed to
complete web authentication
GC 4-132
web-auth
login-success-page-url
Defines the external URL to which a host is directed after
a successful web authentication
GC 4-132
Authentication Commands
4-131
4
web-auth login-attempts
This command defines the limit for failed web authentication login attempts. After the
limit is reached, the switch refuses further login attempts until the quiet time expires.
Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
web-auth login-attempts count
no web-auth login-attempts
count - The limit of allowed failed login attempts. (Range: 1-3)
Default Setting
3 login attempts
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
web-auth login-fail-page-url
This command defines the external URL to which a host is directed after a failed
web authentication attempt. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
web-auth login-fail-page-url fail-url
no web-auth login-fail-page-url
web-auth
quiet-period
Defines the amount of time to wait after the limit for failed
login attempts is exceeded.
GC 4-133
web-auth
session-timeout
Defines the amount of time a session remains valid GC 4-133
web-auth
system-auth-control
Enables web authentication globally for the switch GC 4-134
web-auth Enables web authentication for an interface IC 4-134
show web-auth Displays global web authentication parameters PE 4-135
show web-auth
interface
Displays interface-specific web authentication parameters
and statistics
PE 4-135
web-auth re-authenticate
(Port)
Ends all web authentication sessions on the port and
forces the users to re-authenticate
PE 4-136
web-auth re-authenticate (IP) Ends the web authentication session associated with the
designated IP and forces the user to re-authenticate
PE 4-136
show web-auth
summary
Displays a summary of web authentication port
parameters and statistics
PE 4-136
Console(config)#web-auth login-attempts 2
Console(config)#
Table 4-37 Web Authentication (Continued)
Command Function Mode Page
Command Line Interface
4-132
4
fail-url - The URL to which a host is directed after a failed web
authentication attempt.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command is not supported in the current release of the firmware.
Example
web-auth login-page-url
This command defines the external authentication page URL to which a host is
directed to complete web authentication. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
web-auth login-page-url login-url
no web-auth login-page-url
login-url - The URL to which a host is forwarded to complete web
authentication.
Default Setting
Switch-generated login page
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command is not supported in the current release of the firmware.
Example
web-auth login-success-page-url
This command defines the external URL to which a host is directed after a
successful web authentication attempt. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
web-auth login-success-page-url success-url
no web-auth login-success-page-url
Console(config)#web-auth login-fail-page-url http://www.example.com/fail/
Console(config)#
Console(config)#web-auth login-page-url http://www.example.com/login/
Console(config)#
Authentication Commands
4-133
4
success-url - The URL to which a host is directed after a successful web
authentication login.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command is not supported in the current release of the firmware.
Example
web-auth quiet-period
This command defines the amount of time a host must wait after exceeding the
failed login attempts limit, before it may attempt web authentication again. Use the
no form to restore the default.
Syntax
web-auth quiet-period time
no web-auth quiet period
time - The amount of time the host must wait before attempting
authentication again. (Range: 1-180 seconds)
Default Setting
60 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
web-auth session-timeout
This command defines the amount of time a web-authentication session remains
valid. When the session-timeout time has been reached, the host is logged off and
must re-authenticate itself the next time data transmission takes place. Use the no
form to restore the default.
Syntax
web-auth session-timeout timeout
no web-auth session timeout
Console(config)#web-auth login-success-page-url http://www.example.com/
success/
Console(config)#
Console(config)#web-auth quiet-period 120
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-134
4
timeout - The amount of time that an authenticated session remains valid.
(Range: 300-3600 seconds)
Default Setting
3600 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
web-auth system-auth-control
This command globally enables web authentication for the switch. Use the no form
to restore the default.
Syntax
[no] web-auth system-auth-control
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
Both web-auth system-auth-control for the switch and web-auth for an
interface must be enabled for the web authentication feature to be active.
Example
web-auth
This command enables web authentication for an interface. Use the no form to
restore the default.
Syntax
[no] web-auth
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Console(config)#web-auth session-timeout 1800
Console(config)#
Console(config)#web-auth system-auth-control
Console(config)#
Authentication Commands
4-135
4
Command Usage
Both web-auth system-auth-control for the switch and web-auth for an
interface must be enabled for the web authentication feature to be active.
Example
show web-auth
This command displays global web authentication parameters.
Syntax
show web-auth
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
show web-auth interface
This command displays interface-specific web authentication parameters and
statistics.
Syntax
show web-auth interface interface
•interface - Specifies a port interface.
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - This is unit 1.
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
Default Setting
None
Console(config-if)#web-auth
Console(config-if)#
Console#sh web-auth
Global Web-Auth Parameters
System Auth Control : Enabled
Login Page URL :
Login Fail Page URL :
Login Success Page URL :
Session Timeout : 3600
Quiet Period : 60
Max Login Attempts : 3
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-136
4
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
web-auth re-authenticate (Port)
This command ends all web authentication sessions connected to the port and
forces the users to re-authenticate.
Syntax
web-auth re-authenticate interface interface
•interface - Specifies a port interface.
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - This is unit 1.
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
web-auth re-authenticate (IP)
This command ends the web authentication session associated with the designated
IP address and forces the user to re-authenticate.
Syntax
web-auth re-authenticate interface interface ip
•interface - Specifies a port interface.
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - This is unit 1.
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•ip - IPv4 formatted IP address
Console#show web-auth interface eth 1/2
Web Auth Status : Enabled
Host Summary
IP address Web-Auth-State Remaining-Session-Time
--------------- -------------- ----------------------
Console#
Console#web-auth re-authenticate interface ethernet 1/2
Failed to reauth .
Console#
Authentication Commands
4-137
4
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
show web-auth summary
This command displays a summary of web authentication port parameters and
statistics.
Syntax
show web-auth summary
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Console#web-auth re-authenticate interface ethernet 1/2 192.168.1.5
Failed to reauth port.
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-138
4
Example
Console#show web-auth summary
Global Web-Auth Parameters
System Auth Control : Enabled
Port Status Authenticated Host Count
---- ------ ------------------------
1/ 1 Disabled 0
1/ 2 Enabled 0
1/ 3 Disabled 0
1/ 4 Disabled 0
1/ 5 Disabled 0
1/ 6 Disabled 0
1/ 7 Disabled 0
1/ 8 Disabled 0
1/ 9 Disabled 0
1/10 Disabled 0
1/11 Disabled 0
1/12 Disabled 0
1/13 Disabled 0
1/14 Disabled 0
1/15 Disabled 0
1/16 Disabled 0
1/17 Disabled 0
1/18 Disabled 0
1/19 Disabled 0
1/20 Disabled 0
1/21 Disabled 0
1/22 Disabled 0
1/23 Disabled 0
1/24 Disabled 0
1/25 Disabled 0
1/26 Disabled 0
1/27 Disabled 0
1/28 Disabled 0
Console#
Access Control List Commands
4-139
4
Access Control List Commands
Access Control Lists (ACL) provide packet filtering for IP frames (based on address,
protocol, or Layer 4 protocol port number) or any frames (based on MAC address or
Ethernet type). To filter packets, first create an access list, add the required rules
and then bind the list to a specific port.
Access Control Lists
An ACL is a sequential list of permit or deny conditions that apply to IP addresses,
MAC addresses, or other more specific criteria. This switch tests ingress or egress
packets against the conditions in an ACL one by one. A packet will be accepted as
soon as it matches a permit rule, or dropped as soon as it matches a deny rule. If no
rules match for a list of all permit rules, the packet is dropped; and if no rules match
for a list of all deny rules, the packet is accepted.
There are three filtering modes:
• Standard IP ACL mode (STD-ACL) filters packets based on the source IP address.
• Extended IP ACL mode (EXT-ACL) filters packets based on source or destination
IP address, as well as protocol type and protocol port number.
The following restrictions apply to ACLs:
• Each ACL can have up to 100 rules.
• However, due to resource restrictions, the average number of rules bound the
ports should not exceed 20.
• This switch supports ACLs for ingress filtering only. You can only bind one IP ACL
to any port for ingress filtering. In other words, only one ACL can be bound to an
interface - Ingress IP ACL.
The order in which active ACLs are checked is as follows:
1. User-defined rules in the Ingress IP ACL for ingress ports.
2. Explicit default rule (permit any any) in the ingress IP ACL for ingress ports.
3. If no explicit rule is matched, the implicit default is permit all.
Table 4-38 Access Control Lists
Command Groups Function Page
IP ACLs Configures ACLs based on IP addresses, TCP/UDP port number, and
protocol type
4-140
MAC ACLs Configures ACLs based on hardware addresses, packet format, and
Ethernet type
4-144
ACL Information Displays ACLs and associated rules; shows ACLs assigned to each port 4-149
Command Line Interface
4-140
4
IP ACLs
access-list ip
This command adds an IP access list and enters configuration mode for standard or
extended IP ACLs. Use the no form to remove the specified ACL.
Syntax
[no] access-list ip {standard | extended} acl_name
•standard – Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source IP
address.
•extended – Specifies an ACL that filters packets based on the source or
destination IP address, and other more specific criteria.
•acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters, no
spaces)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL,
use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list.
To create an ACL, you must add at least one rule to the list.
• To remove a rule, use the no permit or no deny command followed by the
exact text of a previously configured rule.
• An ACL can contain up to 100 rules.
Example
Table 4-39 IP ACLs
Command Function Mode Page
access-list ip Creates an IP ACL and enters configuration mode GC 4-140
permit, deny Filters packets matching a specified source IP address STD-ACL 4-141
permit, deny Filters packets meeting the specified criteria, including
source and destination IP address, TCP/UDP port number,
and protocol type
EXT-ACL 4-141
show ip access-list Displays the rules for configured IP ACLs PE 4-143
ip access-group Adds a port to an IP ACL IC 4-143
show ip access-group Shows port assignments for IP ACLs PE 4-143
Console(config)#access-list ip standard david
Console(config-std-acl)#
Access Control List Commands
4-141
4
Related Commands
permit, deny 4-141
ip access-group (4-143)
show ip access-list (4-143)
permit, deny (Standard ACL)
This command adds a rule to a Standard IP ACL. The rule sets a filter condition for
packets emanating from the specified source. Use the no form to remove a rule.
Syntax
[no] {permit | deny} {any | source bitmask | host source}
•any – Any source IP address.
•source – Source IP address.
•bitmask – Decimal number representing the address bits to match.
•host – Keyword followed by a specific IP address.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Standard ACL
Command Usage
• New rules are appended to the end of the list.
• Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask, containing four integers from
0 to 255, each separated by a period. The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate
“match” and 0 bits to indicate “ignore.” The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the
specified source IP address, and then compared with the address for each IP
packet entering the port(s) to which this ACL has been assigned.
Example
This example configures one permit rule for the specific address 10.1.1.21 and
another rule for the address range 168.92.16.x – 168.92.31.x using a bitmask.
Related Commands
access-list ip (4-140)
permit, deny (Extended ACL)
This command adds a rule to an Extended IP ACL. The rule sets a filter
condition for packets with specific source or destination IP addresses, protocol
types, or source or destination protocol ports. Use the no form to remove a
rule.
Console(config-std-acl)#permit host 10.1.1.21
Console(config-std-acl)#permit 168.92.16.0 255.255.240.0
Command Line Interface
4-142
4
Syntax
[no] {permit | deny} [protocol-number | udp]
{any | source address-bitmask | host source}
{any | destination address-bitmask | host destination}
[source-port sport [end]] [destination-port dport [end]]
[no] {permit | deny} tcp
{any | source address-bitmask | host source}
{any | destination address-bitmask | host destination}
[source-port sport [end]] [destination-port dport [end]]
•protocol-number – A specific protocol number. (Range: 0-255)
•source – Source IP address.
•destination – Destination IP address.
•address-bitmask – Decimal number representing the address bits to match.
•host – Keyword followed by a specific IP address.
•sport – Protocol17 source port number. (Range: 0-65535)
•dport – Protocol17 destination port number. (Range: 0-65535)
•end – Upper bound of the protocol port range. (Range: 0-65535)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Extended ACL
Command Usage
• All new rules are appended to the end of the list.
• Address bitmasks are similar to a subnet mask, containing four integers from
0 to 255, each separated by a period. The binary mask uses 1 bits to indicate
“match” and 0 bits to indicate “ignore.” The bitmask is bitwise ANDed with the
specified source IP address, and then compared with the address for each IP
packet entering the port(s) to which this ACL has been assigned.
Example
This example accepts any incoming packets if the source address is within subnet
10.7.1.x. For example, if the rule is matched; i.e., the rule (10.7.1.0 & 255.255.255.0)
equals the masked address (10.7.1.2 & 255.255.255.0), the packet passes through.
17. Includes TCP, UDP or other protocol types.
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit 10.7.1.1 255.255.255.0 any
Console(config-ext-acl)#
Access Control List Commands
4-143
4
This allows TCP packets from class C addresses 192.168.1.0 to any destination
address when set for destination TCP port 80 (i.e., HTTP).
Related Commands
access-list ip (4-140)
show ip access-list
This command displays the rules for configured IP ACLs.
Syntax
show ip access-list {standard | extended} [acl_name]
•standard – Specifies a standard IP ACL.
•extended – Specifies an extended IP ACL.
•acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters, no
spaces)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Related Commands
permit, deny 4-141
ip access-group (4-143)
ip access-group
This command binds a port to an IP ACL. Use the no form to remove the port.
Syntax
[no] ip access-group acl_name in
•acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters, no
spaces)
•in – Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets.
Default Setting
None
Console(config-ext-acl)#permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any
destination-port 80
Console(config-ext-acl)#
Console#show ip access-list standard
IP standard access-list david:
permit host 10.1.1.21
permit 168.92.0.0 255.255.255.0
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-144
4
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
• A port can only be bound to one ACL.
• If a port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL, the
switch will replace the old binding with the new one.
• You must configure a mask for an ACL rule before you can bind it to a port.
Example
Related Commands
show ip access-list (4-143)
show ip access-group
This command shows the ports assigned to IP ACLs.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Related Commands
ip access-group (4-143)
MAC ACLs
The commands in this section configure ACLs based on hardware addresses,
packet format, and Ethernet type. To configure MAC ACLs, first create an access list
containing the required permit or deny rules, and then bind the access list to one or
more ports
Console(config)#int eth 1/25
Console(config-if)#ip access-group david in
Console(config-if)#
Console#show ip access-group
Interface ethernet 1/25
IP access-list david in
Console#
Table 4-40 MAC ACL Commands
Command Function Mode Page
access-list mac Creates a MAC ACL and enters configuration mode GC 4-145
permit, deny Filters packets matching a specified source and
destination address, packet format, and Ethernet type
MAC-ACL 4-146
show mac access-list Displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs PE 4-147
Access Control List Commands
4-145
4
access-list mac
This command adds a MAC access list and enters MAC ACL configuration mode.
Use the no form to remove the specified ACL.
Syntax
[no] access-list mac acl_name
acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• When you create a new ACL or enter configuration mode for an existing ACL,
use the permit or deny command to add new rules to the bottom of the list.
To create an ACL, you must add at least one rule to the list.
• To remove a rule, use the no permit or no deny command followed by the
exact text of a previously configured rule.
• An ACL can contain up to 32 rules.
Example
Related Commands
permit, deny (4-146)
mac access-group (4-148)
show mac access-list (4-147)
mac access-group Adds a port to a MAC ACL IC 4-148
show mac access-group Shows port assignments for MAC ACLs PE 4-148
Console(config)#access-list mac jerry
Console(config-mac-acl)#
Table 4-40 MAC ACL Commands
Command Function Mode Page
Command Line Interface
4-146
4
permit, deny (MAC ACL)
This command adds a rule to a MAC ACL. The rule filters packets matching a
specified MAC source or destination address (i.e., physical layer address), or
Ethernet protocol type. Use the no form to remove a rule.
Syntax
[no]
{
permit
|
deny
}
{
any
|
host
source | source address-bitmask}
{
any
|
host
destination | destination address-bitmask}
[
vid
vid vid-bitmask] [
ethertype
protocol [protocol-bitmask]]
Note:- The default is for Ethernet II packets.
[no]
{
permit
|
deny
}
tagged-eth2
{
any
|
host
source | source address-bitmask}
{
any
|
host
destination | destination address-bitmask}
[
vid
vid vid-bitmask] [
ethertype
protocol [protocol-bitmask]]
[no]
{
permit
|
deny
}
untagged-eth2
{
any
|
host
source | source address-bitmask}
{
any
|
host
destination | destination address-bitmask}
[
ethertype
protocol [protocol-bitmask]]
[no]
{
permit
|
deny
}
tagged-802.3
{
any
|
host
source | source address-bitmask}
{
any
|
host
destination | destination address-bitmask}
[
vid
vid vid-bitmask]
[no]
{
permit
|
deny
}
untagged-802.3
{
any
|
host
source | source address-bitmask}
{
any
|
host
destination | destination address-bitmask}
•tagged-eth2 – Tagged Ethernet II packets.
•untagged-eth2 – Untagged Ethernet II packets.
•tagged-802.3 – Tagged Ethernet 802.3 packets.
•untagged-802.3 – Untagged Ethernet 802.3 packets.
•any – Any MAC source or destination address.
•host – A specific MAC address.
•source – Source MAC address.
•destination – Destination MAC address range with bitmask.
•address-
bitmask
18 – Bitmask for MAC address (in hexidecimal format).
• vid – VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4094)
•
vid-bitmask –
VLAN bitmask. (Range: 1-4095)
•protocol – A specific Ethernet protocol number. (Range: 600-fff hex.)
•protocol-bitmask – Protocol bitmask. (
Range: 600-fff hex.
)
18. For all bitmasks, “1” means care and “0” means ignore.
Access Control List Commands
4-147
4
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
MAC ACL
Command Usage
• New rules are added to the end of the list.
•The ethertype option can only be used to filter Ethernet II formatted packets.
• A detailed listing of Ethernet protocol types can be found in RFC 1060. A few
of the more common types include the following:
- 0800 - IP
- 0806 - ARP
- 8137 - IPX
Example
This rule permits packets from any source MAC address to the destination address
00-e0-29-94-34-de where the Ethernet type is 0800.
Related Commands
access-list mac (4-145)
show mac access-list
This command displays the rules for configured MAC ACLs.
Syntax
show mac access-list [acl_name]
acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Related Commands
permit, deny 4-146
mac access-group (4-148)
Console(config-mac-acl)#permit any host 00-e0-29-94-34-de ethertype 0800
Console(config-mac-acl)#
Console#show mac access-list
MAC access-list jerry:
permit any 00-e0-29-94-34-de ethertype 0800
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-148
4
mac access-group
This command binds a port to a MAC ACL. Use the no form to remove the port.
Syntax
mac access-group acl_name in
•acl_name – Name of the ACL. (Maximum length: 16 characters)
•in – Indicates that this list applies to ingress packets.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
• A port can only be bound to one ACL.
• If a port is already bound to an ACL and you bind it to a different ACL, the
switch will replace the old binding with the new one.
Example
Related Commands
show mac access-list (4-147)
show mac access-group
This command shows the ports assigned to MAC ACLs.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Related Commands
mac access-group (4-148)
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2
Console(config-if)#mac access-group jerry in
Console(config-if)#
Console#show mac access-group
Interface ethernet 1/5
MAC access-list M5 in
Console#
Access Control List Commands
4-149
4
ACL Information
show access-list
This command shows all ACLs and associated rules, as well as all the user-defined
masks.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Once the ACL is bound to an interface (i.e., the ACL is active), the order in
which the rules are displayed is determined by the associated mask.
Example
show access-group
This command shows the port assignments of ACLs.
Command Mode
Privileged Executive
Example
Table 4-41 ACL Information
Command Function Mode Page
show access-list Show all ACLs and associated rules PE 4-149
show access-group Shows the ACLs assigned to each port PE 4-149
Console#show access-list
IP standard access-list david:
permit host 10.1.1.21
permit 168.92.16.0 255.255.240.0
IP extended access-list bob:
permit 10.7.1.1 255.255.255.0 any
permit 192.168.1.0 255.255.255.0 any destination-port 80 80
IP access-list jerry:
permit any host 00-30-29-94-34-de ethertype 800 800
IP extended access-list A6:
permit any any
Console#
Console#show access-group
Interface ethernet 1/1
IP access-list jerry in
.
.
.
Interface ethernet 1/28
IP access-list jerry in
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-150
4
SNMP Commands
Controls access to this switch from management stations using the Simple Network
Management Protocol (SNMP), as well as the error types sent to trap managers.
SNMP Version 3 also provides security features that cover message integrity,
authentication, and encryption; as well as controlling user access to specific areas of
the MIB tree. To use SNMPv3, first set an SNMP engine ID (or accept the default),
specify read and write access views for the MIB tree, configure SNMP user groups
with the required security model (i.e., SNMP v1, v2c or v3) and security level (i.e.,
authentication and privacy), and then assign SNMP users to these groups, along
with their specific authentication and privacy passwords.
Table 4-42 SNMP Commands
Command Function Mode Page
snmp-server Enables the SNMP agent GC 4-151
show snmp Displays the status of SNMP communications NE, PE 4-151
snmp-server community Sets up the community access string to permit access to
SNMP commands
GC 4-152
snmp-server contact Sets the system contact string GC 4-153
snmp-server location Sets the system location string GC 4-153
snmp-server host Specifies the recipient of an SNMP notification operation GC 4-154
snmp-server enable traps Enables the device to send SNMP traps (i.e., SNMP
notifications)
GC 4-156
snmp-server engine-id Sets the SNMP engine ID GC 4-157
show snmp engine-id Shows the SNMP engine ID PE 4-158
snmp-server view Adds an SNMP view GC 4-159
show snmp view Shows the SNMP views PE 4-160
snmp-server group Adds an SNMP group, mapping users to views GC 4-160
show snmp group Shows the SNMP groups PE 4-161
snmp-server user Adds a user to an SNMP group GC 4-163
show snmp user Shows the SNMP users PE 4-165
SNMP Commands
4-151
4
snmp-server
This command enables the SNMPv3 engine and services for all management clients
(i.e., versions 1, 2c, 3). Use the no form to disable the server.
Syntax
[no] snmp-server
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
show snmp
This command can be used to check the status of SNMP communications.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command provides information on the community access strings, counter
information for SNMP input and output protocol data units, and whether or not
SNMP logging has been enabled with the snmp-server enable traps
command.
Console(config)#snmp-server
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-152
4
Example
snmp-server community
This command defines the SNMP v1 and v2c community access string. Use the no
form to remove the specified community string.
Syntax
snmp-server community string [ro|rw]
no snmp-server community string
•string - Community string that acts like a password and permits access to
the SNMP protocol. (Maximum length: 32 characters, case sensitive;
Maximum number of strings: 5)
•ro - Specifies read-only access. Authorized management stations are only
able to retrieve MIB objects.
•rw - Specifies read/write access. Authorized management stations are able
to both retrieve and modify MIB objects.
Default Setting
• public - Read-only access. Authorized management stations are only able to
retrieve MIB objects.
Console#show snmp
SNMP Agent: enabled
SNMP traps:
Authentication: enable
Link-up-down: enable
SNMP communities:
1. private, and the privilege is read-write
2. public, and the privilege is read-only
0 SNMP packets input
0 Bad SNMP version errors
0 Unknown community name
0 Illegal operation for community name supplied
0 Encoding errors
0 Number of requested variables
0 Number of altered variables
0 Get-request PDUs
0 Get-next PDUs
0 Set-request PDUs
0 SNMP packets output
0 Too big errors
0 No such name errors
0 Bad values errors
0 General errors
0 Response PDUs
0 Trap PDUs
SNMP logging: disabled
Console#
SNMP Commands
4-153
4
• private - Read/write access. Authorized management stations are able to both
retrieve and modify MIB objects.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
snmp-server contact
This command sets the system contact string. Use the no form to remove the
system contact information.
Syntax
snmp-server contact string
no snmp-server contact
string - String that describes the system contact information.
(Maximum length: 255 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Related Commands
snmp-server location (4-153)
snmp-server location
This command sets the system location string. Use the no form to remove the
location string.
Syntax
snmp-server location text
no snmp-server location
text - String that describes the system location.
(Maximum length: 255 characters)
Default Setting
None
Console(config)#snmp-server community alpha rw
Console(config)#
Console(config)#snmp-server contact Paul
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-154
4
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Related Commands
snmp-server contact (4-153)
snmp-server host
This command specifies the recipient of a Simple Network Management Protocol
notification operation. Use the no form to remove the specified host.
Syntax
snmp-server host host-addr [inform [retry retries | timeout seconds]]
community-string [version {1 | 2c | 3 {auth | noauth | priv} [udp-port port]}
no snmp-server host host-addr
•host-addr - Internet address of the host (the targeted recipient).
(Maximum host addresses: 5 trap destination IP address entries)
•inform - Notifications are sent as inform messages. Note that this option is
only available for version 2c and 3 hosts. (Default: traps are used)
-retries - The maximum number of times to resend an inform message if
the recipient does not acknowledge receipt. (Range: 0-255; Default: 3)
-seconds - The number of seconds to wait for an acknowledgment before
resending an inform message. (Range: 0-2147483647 centiseconds;
Default: 1500 centiseconds)
•community-string - Password-like community string sent with the
notification operation to SNMP V1 and V2c hosts. Although you can set this
string using the snmp-server host command by itself, we recommend that
you define this string using the snmp-server community command prior
to using the snmp-server host command. (Maximum length:
32 characters)
•version - Specifies whether to send notifications as SNMP Version 1, 2c or
3 traps. (Range: 1, 2c, 3; Default: 1)
-auth | noauth | priv - This group uses SNMPv3 with authentication, no
authentication, or with authentication and privacy. See “Simple Network
Management Protocol” on page 3-38 for further information about these
authentication and encryption options.
•port - Host UDP port to use. (Range: 1-65535; Default: 162)
Default Setting
• Host Address: None
• Notification Type: Traps
Console(config)#snmp-server location WC-19
Console(config)#
SNMP Commands
4-155
4
• SNMP Version: 1
• UDP Port: 162
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• If you do not enter an snmp-server host command, no notifications are sent.
In order to configure the switch to send SNMP notifications, you must enter at
least one snmp-server host command. In order to enable multiple hosts, you
must issue a separate snmp-server host command for each host.
•The snmp-server host command is used in conjunction with the
snmp-server enable traps command. Use the snmp-server enable traps
command to enable the sending of traps or informs and to specify which
SNMP notifications are sent globally. For a host to receive notifications, at
least one snmp-server enable traps command and the snmp-server host
command for that host must be enabled.
• Some notification types cannot be controlled with the snmp-server enable
traps command. For example, some notification types are always enabled.
• Notifications are issued by the switch as trap messages by default. The
recipient of a trap message does not send a response to the switch. Traps are
therefore not as reliable as inform messages, which include a request for
acknowledgement of receipt. Informs can be used to ensure that critical
information is received by the host. However, note that informs consume more
system resources because they must be kept in memory until a response is
received. Informs also add to network traffic. You should consider these
effects when deciding whether to issue notifications as traps or informs.
To send an inform to a SNMPv2c host, complete these steps:
1. Enable the SNMP agent (page 4-151).
2. Allow the switch to send SNMP traps; i.e., notifications (page 4-156).
3. Specify the target host that will receive inform messages with the
snmp-server host command as described in this section.
4. Create a view with the required notification messages (page 4-159).
5. Create a group that includes the required notify view (page 4-160).
To send an inform to a SNMPv3 host, complete these steps:
1. Enable the SNMP agent (page 4-151).
2. Allow the switch to send SNMP traps; i.e., notifications (page 4-156).
3. Specify the target host that will receive inform messages with the
snmp-server host command as described in this section.
4. Create a view with the required notification messages (page 4-159).
5. Create a group that includes the required notify view (page 4-160).
6. Specify a remote engine ID where the user resides (page 4-157).
7. Then configure a remote user (page 4-163).
• The switch can send SNMP Version 1, 2c or 3 notifications to a host IP
address, depending on the SNMP version that the management station
Command Line Interface
4-156
4
supports. If the snmp-server host command does not specify the SNMP
version, the default is to send SNMP version 1 notifications.
• If you specify an SNMP Version 3 host, then the community string is
interpreted as an SNMP user name. If you use the V3 “auth” or “priv” options,
the user name must first be defined with the snmp-server user command.
Otherwise, the authentication password and/or privacy password will not
exist, and the switch will not authorize SNMP access for the host. However, if
you specify a V3 host with the “noauth” option, an SNMP user account will be
generated, and the switch will authorize SNMP access for the host.
Example
Related Commands
snmp-server enable traps (4-156)
snmp-server enable traps
This command enables this device to send Simple Network Management Protocol
traps or informs (i.e., SNMP notifications). Use the no form to disable SNMP
notifications.
Syntax
[no] snmp-server enable traps [authentication | link-up-down]
•authentication - Keyword to issue authentication failure notifications.
•link-up-down - Keyword to issue link-up or link-down notifications.
Default Setting
Issue authentication and link-up-down traps.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• If you do not enter an snmp-server enable traps command, no notifications
controlled by this command are sent. In order to configure this device to send
SNMP notifications, you must enter at least one snmp-server enable traps
command. If you enter the command with no keywords, both authentication
and link-up-down notifications are enabled. If you enter the command with a
keyword, only the notification type related to that keyword is enabled.
•The snmp-server enable traps command is used in conjunction with the
snmp-server host command. Use the snmp-server host command to
specify which host or hosts receive SNMP notifications. In order to send
notifications, you must configure at least one snmp-server host command.
• The authentication, link-up, and link-down traps are legacy notifications, and
therefore when used for SNMP Version 3 hosts, they must be enabled in
Console(config)#snmp-server host 10.1.19.23 batman
Console(config)#
SNMP Commands
4-157
4
conjunction with the corresponding entries in the Notify View assigned by the
snmp-server group command (page 4-160).
Example
Related Commands
snmp-server host (4-154)
snmp-server engine-id
This command configures an identification string for the SNMPv3 engine. Use the
no form to restore the default.
Syntax
snmp-server engine-id {local | remote {ip-address}} engineid-string
no snmp-server engine-id {local | remote {ip-address}}
•local - Specifies the SNMP engine on this switch.
•remote - Specifies an SNMP engine on a remote device.
•ip-address - The Internet address of the remote device.
•engineid-string - String identifying the engine ID.
(Range: 9-64 hexadecimal characters representing 5-32 octets)
Default Setting
A unique engine ID is automatically generated by the switch based on its MAC
address.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• An SNMP engine is an independent SNMP agent that resides either on this
switch or on a remote device. This engine protects against message replay,
delay, and redirection. The engine ID is also used in combination with user
passwords to generate the security keys for authenticating and encrypting
SNMPv3 packets.
• A remote engine ID is required when using SNMPv3 informs. (See
snmp-server host on page 4-154.) The remote engine ID is used to compute
the security digest for authenticating and encrypting packets sent to a user on
the remote host. SNMP passwords are localized using the engine ID of the
authoritative agent. For informs, the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote
agent. You therefore need to configure the remote agent’s SNMP engine ID
before you can send proxy requests or informs to it.
• Trailing zeroes need not be entered to uniquely specify a engine ID. In other
words, the value “123456789” is equivalent to “1234567890” because a
trailing zero will be added to fill in the last octet if an odd number of
hexadecimal characters is specified.
Console(config)#snmp-server enable traps link-up-down
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-158
4
• A local engine ID is automatically generated that is unique to the switch. This
is referred to as the default engine ID. If the local engine ID is deleted or
changed, all SNMP users will be cleared. You will need to reconfigure all
existing users (page 4-163).
Example
Related Commands
snmp-server host (4-154)
show snmp engine-id
This command shows the SNMP engine ID.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
This example shows the default engine ID.
Console(config)#snmp-server engine-id local 123456789
Console(config)#snmp-server engineID remote 987654321 192.168.1.19
Console(config)#
Console#show snmp engine-id
Local SNMP engineID: 8000002a8000000000e8666672
Local SNMP engineBoots: 1
Remote SNMP engineID IP address
80000000030004e2b316c54321 192.168.1.19
Console#
Table 4-43 show snmp engine-id - display description
Field Description
Local SNMP engineID String identifying the engine ID.
Local SNMP engineBoots The number of times that the engine has (re-)initialized since the snmp EngineID
was last configured.
Remote SNMP engineID String identifying an engine ID on a remote device.
IP address IP address of the device containing the corresponding remote SNMP engine.
SNMP Commands
4-159
4
snmp-server view
This command adds an SNMP view which controls user access to the MIB. Use the
no
form to remove an SNMP view.
Syntax
snmp-server view view-name oid-tree {included | excluded}
no snmp-server view view-name
• view-name - Name of an SNMP view. (Range: 1-64 characters)
•oid-tree - Object identifier of a branch within the MIB tree. Wild cards can
be used to mask a specific portion of the OID string. (Refer to the
examples.)
•included - Defines an included view.
•excluded - Defines an excluded view.
Default Setting
defaultview (includes access to the entire MIB tree)
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• Views are used in the snmp-server group command to restrict user access
to specified portions of the MIB tree.
• The predefined view “defaultview” includes access to the entire MIB tree.
Examples
This view includes MIB-2.
This view includes the MIB-2 interfaces table, ifDescr. The wild card is used to select
all the index values in this table.
This view includes the MIB-2 interfaces table, and the mask selects all index entries.
Console(config)#snmp-server view mib-2 1.3.6.1.2.1 included
Console(config)#
Console(config)#snmp-server view ifEntry.2 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.*.2 included
Console(config)#
Console(config)#snmp-server view ifEntry.a 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.1.* included
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-160
4
show snmp view
This command shows information on the SNMP views.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
snmp-server group
This command adds an SNMP group, mapping SNMP users to SNMP views. Use
the no form to remove an SNMP group.
Syntax
snmp-server group groupname {v1 | v2c | v3 {auth | noauth | priv}}
[read readview] [write writeview] [notify notifyview]
no snmp-server group groupname
• groupname - Name of an SNMP group. (Range: 1-32 characters)
•v1 | v2c | v3 - Use SNMP version 1, 2c or 3.
•auth | noauth | priv - This group uses SNMPv3 with authentication, no
authentication, or with authentication and privacy. See “Simple Network
Management Protocol” on page 3-38 for further information about these
authentication and encryption options.
•readview - Defines the view for read access. (1-64 characters)
•writeview - Defines the view for write access. (1-64 characters)
•notifyview - Defines the view for notifications. (1-64 characters)
Console#show snmp view
View Name: mib-2
Subtree OID: 1.2.2.3.6.2.1
View Type: included
Storage Type: permanent
Row Status: active
View Name: defaultview
Subtree OID: 1
View Type: included
Storage Type: volatile
Row Status: active
Console#
Table 4-44 show snmp view - display description
Field Description
View Name Name of an SNMP view.
Subtree OID A branch in the MIB tree.
View Type Indicates if the view is included or excluded.
Storage Type The storage type for this entry.
Row Status The row status of this entry.
SNMP Commands
4-161
4
Default Setting
• Default groups: public19 (read only), private20 (read/write)
•readview - Every object belonging to the Internet OID space (1.3.6.1).
• writeview - Nothing is defined.
•notifyview - Nothing is defined.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• A group sets the access policy for the assigned users.
• When authentication is selected, the MD5 or SHA algorithm is used as
specified in the snmp-server user command.
• When privacy is selected, the DES 56-bit algorithm is used for data encryption.
• Note that the authentication, link-up and link-down messages are legacy traps
and must therefore be enabled in conjunction with the
snmp-server enable
traps
command (page 4-156).
Example
show snmp group
Four default groups are provided – SNMPv1 read-only access and read/write
access, and SNMPv2c read-only access and read/write access.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
19. No view is defined.
20. Maps to the defaultview.
Console(config)#snmp-server group r&d v3 auth write daily
Console(config)#
Console#show snmp group
Group Name: r&d
Security Model: v3
Read View: defaultview
Write View: daily
Notify View: none
Storage Type: permanent
Row Status: active
Group Name: public
Security Model: v1
Read View: defaultview
Write View: none
Notify View: none
Storage Type: volatile
Row Status: active
Command Line Interface
4-162
4
Group Name: public
Security Model: v2c
Read View: defaultview
Write View: none
Notify View: none
Storage Type: volatile
Row Status: active
Group Name: private
Security Model: v1
Read View: defaultview
Write View: defaultview
Notify View: none
Storage Type: volatile
Row Status: active
Group Name: private
Security Model: v2c
Read View: defaultview
Write View: defaultview
Notify View: none
Storage Type: volatile
Row Status: active
Console#
SNMP Commands
4-163
4
snmp-server user
This command adds a user to an SNMP group, restricting the user to a specific
SNMP Read, Write, or Notify View. Use the no form to remove a user from an SNMP
group.
Syntax
snmp-server user username groupname [remote ip-address] {v1 | v2c | v3
[encrypted] [auth {md5 | sha} auth-password [priv des56 priv-password]]
no snmp-server user username {v1 | v2c | v3 | remote}
•username - Name of user connecting to the SNMP agent.
(Range: 1-32 characters)
• groupname - Name of an SNMP group to which the user is assigned.
(Range: 1-32 characters)
•remote - Specifies an SNMP engine on a remote device.
•ip-address - The Internet address of the remote device.
•v1 | v2c | v3 - Use SNMP version 1, 2c or 3.
•encrypted - Accepts the password as encrypted input.
•auth - Uses SNMPv3 with authentication.
•md5 | sha - Uses MD5 or SHA authentication.
•auth-password - Authentication password. Enter as plain text if the
encrypted option is not used. Otherwise, enter an encrypted password.
(A minimum of eight characters is required.)
•priv des56 - Uses SNMPv3 with privacy with DES56 encryption.
•priv-password - Privacy password. Enter as plain text if the encrypted
option is not used. Otherwise, enter an encrypted password.
Table 4-45 show snmp group - display description
Field Description
groupname Name of an SNMP group.
security model The SNMP version.
readview The associated read view.
writeview The associated write view.
notifyview The associated notify view.
storage-type The storage type for this entry.
Row Status The row status of this entry.
Command Line Interface
4-164
4
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• The SNMP engine ID is used to compute the authentication/privacy digests
from the password. You should therefore configure the engine ID with the
snmp-server engine-id command before using this configuration command.
• Before you configure a remote user, use the snmp-server engine-id
command (page 4-157) to specify the engine ID for the remote device where
the user resides. Then use the snmp-server user command to specify the
user and the IP address for the remote device where the user resides. The
remote agent’s SNMP engine ID is used to compute authentication/privacy
digests from the user’s password. If the remote engine ID is not first configured,
the snmp-server user command specifying a remote user will fail.
• SNMP passwords are localized using the engine ID of the authoritative agent.
For informs, the authoritative SNMP agent is the remote agent. You therefore
need to configure the remote agent’s SNMP engine ID before you can send
proxy requests or informs to it.
Example
Console(config)#snmp-server user steve group r&d v3 auth md5 greenpeace
priv des56 einstien
Console(config)#snmp-server user mark group r&d remote 192.168.1.19 v3
auth md5 greenpeace priv des56 einstien
Console(config)#
SNMP Commands
4-165
4
show snmp user
This command shows information on SNMP users.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show snmp user
EngineId: 800000ca030030f1df9ca00000
User Name: steve
Authentication Protocol: md5
Privacy Protocol: des56
Storage Type: nonvolatile
Row Status: active
SNMP remote user
EngineId: 80000000030004e2b316c54321
User Name: mark
Authentication Protocol: mdt
Privacy Protocol: des56
Storage Type: nonvolatile
Row Status: active
Console#
Table 4-46 show snmp user - display description
Field Description
EngineId String identifying the engine ID.
User Name Name of user connecting to the SNMP agent.
Authentication Protocol The authentication protocol used with SNMPv3.
Privacy Protocol The privacy protocol used with SNMPv3.
Storage Type The storage type for this entry.
Row Status The row status of this entry.
SNMP remote user A user associated with an SNMP engine on a remote device.
Command Line Interface
4-166
4
Interface Commands
These commands are used to display or set communication parameters for an
Ethernet port, aggregated link, or VLAN.
interface
This command configures an interface type and enters interface configuration mode.
Use the no form to remove a trunk.
Syntax
interface interface
no interface port-channel channel-id
interface
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-8)
•vlan vlan-id (Range: 1-4092)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Table 4-47 Interface Commands
Command Function Mode Page
interface Configures an interface type and enters interface configuration
mode
GC 4-166
description Adds a description to an interface configuration IC 4-167
speed-duplex Configures the speed and duplex operation of a given interface
when autonegotiation is disabled
IC 4-167
negotiation Enables autonegotiation of a given interface IC 4-168
capabilities Advertises the capabilities of a given interface for use in
autonegotiation
IC 4-169
flowcontrol Enables flow control on a given interface IC 4-170
shutdown Disables an interface IC 4-171
switchport packet-rate Configures the broadcast storm control threshold IC 4-172
clear counters Clears statistics on an interface PE 4-172
show interfaces status Displays status for the specified interface NE, PE 4-173
show interfaces
counters
Displays statistics for the specified interfaces NE, PE 4-174
show interfaces
switchport
Displays the administrative and operational status of an
interface
NE, PE 4-175
Interface Commands
4-167
4
Example
To specify port 24, enter the following command:
description
This command adds a description to an interface. Use the no form to remove the
description.
Syntax
description string
no description
string - Comment or a description to help you remember what is attached
to this interface. (Range: 1-64 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Example
The following example adds a description to port 24.
speed-duplex
This command configures the speed and duplex mode of a given interface when
autonegotiation is disabled. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
speed-duplex {1000full | 100full | 100half | 10full | 10half}
no speed-duplex
•1000full - Forces 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation
•100full - Forces 100 Mbps full-duplex operation
•100half - Forces 100 Mbps half-duplex operation
•10full - Forces 10 Mbps full-duplex operation
•10half - Forces 10 Mbps half-duplex operation
Note: 1000full operation cannot be forced. The Gigabit Combo ports can only operate at
1000full when auto-negotiation is enabled.
Default Setting
• Auto-negotiation is enabled by default.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/24
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/24
Console(config-if)#description RD-SW#3
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-168
4
• When auto-negotiation is disabled, the default speed-duplex setting for both
100BASE-FX and Gigabit Ethernet ports is 100full.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• To force operation to the speed and duplex mode specified in a speed-duplex
command, use the no negotiation command to disable auto-negotiation on
the selected interface.
• When using the negotiation command to enable auto-negotiation, the
optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command. To set the
speed/duplex mode under auto-negotiation, the required mode must be
specified in the capabilities list for an interface.
Example
The following example configures port 5 to 100 Mbps, half-duplex operation.
Related Commands
negotiation (4-168)
capabilities (4-169)
negotiation
This command enables autonegotiation for a given interface. Use the no form to
disable autonegotiation.
Syntax
[no] negotiation
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• When auto-negotiation is enabled the switch will negotiate the best settings
for a link based on the capabilities command. When auto-negotiation is
disabled, you must manually specify the link attributes with the speed-duplex
and flowcontrol commands.
• If autonegotiation is disabled, auto-MDI/MDI-X pin signal configuration will
also be disabled for the RJ-45 ports.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#speed-duplex 100half
Console(config-if)#no negotiation
Console(config-if)#
Interface Commands
4-169
4
Example
The following example configures port 11 to use autonegotiation.
Related Commands
capabilities (4-169)
speed-duplex (4-167)
capabilities
This command advertises the port capabilities of a given interface during
autonegotiation. Use the no form with parameters to remove an advertised
capability, or the no form without parameters to restore the default values.
Syntax
[no] capabilities {1000full | 100full | 100half | 10full | 10half | flowcontrol |
symmetric}
•1000full - Supports 1000 Mbps full-duplex operation
•100full - Supports 100 Mbps full-duplex operation
•100half - Supports 100 Mbps half-duplex operation
•10full - Supports 10 Mbps full-duplex operation
•10half - Supports 10 Mbps half-duplex operation
•flowcontrol - Supports flow control
•symmetric (Gigabit only) - When specified, the port transmits and receives
pause frames; when not specified, the port will auto-negotiate to determine
the sender and receiver for asymmetric pause frames. (The current switch
ASIC only supports symmetric pause frames.)
Default Setting
• 100BASE-FX: 100full
• 1000BASE-T: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full, 1000full
• SFP: 1000full
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
When auto-negotiation is enabled with the negotiation command, the switch
will negotiate the best settings for a link based on the capabilites command.
When auto-negotiation is disabled, you must manually specify the link
attributes with the speed-duplex and flowcontrol commands.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11
Console(config-if)#negotiation
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-170
4
Example
The following example configures Ethernet port 25 capabilities to 100half, 100full
and flow control.
Related Commands
negotiation (4-168)
speed-duplex (4-167)
flowcontrol (4-170)
flowcontrol
This command enables flow control. Use the no form to disable flow control.
Syntax
[no] flowcontrol
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• Flow control can eliminate frame loss by “blocking” traffic from end stations or
segments connected directly to the switch when its buffers fill. When enabled,
back pressure is used for half-duplex operation and IEEE 802.3x for
full-duplex operation.
• To force flow control on or off (with the flowcontrol or no flowcontrol
command), use the no negotiation command to disable auto-negotiation on
the selected interface.
• When using the negotiation command to enable auto-negotiation, the
optimal settings will be determined by the capabilities command. To enable
flow control under auto-negotiation, “flowcontrol” must be included in the
capabilities list for any port
• Avoid using flow control on a port connected to a hub unless it is actually
required to solve a problem. Otherwise back pressure jamming signals may
degrade overall performance for the segment attached to the hub.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/25
Console(config-if)#capabilities 100half
Console(config-if)#capabilities 100full
Console(config-if)#capabilities flowcontrol
Console(config-if)#
Interface Commands
4-171
4
Example
The following example enables flow control on port 5.
Related Commands
negotiation (4-168)
capabilities (flowcontrol, symmetric) (4-169)
shutdown
This command disables an interface. To restart a disabled interface, use the no
form.
Syntax
[no] shutdown
Default Setting
All interfaces are enabled.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
This command allows you to disable a port due to abnormal behavior
(e.g., excessive collisions), and then reenable it after the problem has been
resolved. You may also want to disable a port for security reasons.
Example
The following example disables port 5.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#flowcontrol
Console(config-if)#no negotiation
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#shutdown
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-172
4
switchport packet-rate
This command configures broadcast and multicast and unknown unicast storm
control. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
switchport broadcast packet-rate rate
no switchport broadcast
•broadcast - Specifies storm control for broadcast traffic.
•rate - Threshold level as a rate; i.e., kilobits per second.
(Range: 64-100000 for 100 Mbps ports, 64-1000000 for 1 Gbps ports)
Default Setting
Broadcast Storm Control: Enabled, packet-rate limit: 64 kbps
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
When traffic exceeds the threshold specified for broadcast and multicast or
unknown unicast traffic, packets exceeding the threshold are dropped until the
rate falls back down beneath the threshold.
Example
The following shows how to configure broadcast storm control at 500 kilobits per
second:
clear counters
This command clears statistics on an interface.
Syntax
clear counters interface
interface
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-8)
Default Setting
None
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#switchport broadcast packet-rate 500
Console(config-if)#
Interface Commands
4-173
4
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Statistics are only initialized for a power reset. This command sets the base
value for displayed statistics to zero for the current management session.
However, if you log out and back into the management interface, the statistics
displayed will show the absolute value accumulated since the last power reset.
Example
The following example clears statistics on port 5.
show interfaces status
This command displays the status for an interface.
Syntax
show interfaces status [interface]
interface
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-8)
•vlan vlan-id (Range: 1-4092)
Default Setting
Shows the status for all interfaces.
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Command Usage
If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed. For a
description of the items displayed by this command, see “Displaying
Connection Status” on page 3-110.
Console#clear counters ethernet 1/5
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-174
4
Example
show interfaces counters
This command displays interface statistics.
Syntax
show interfaces counters [interface]
interface
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-8)
Default Setting
Shows the counters for all interfaces.
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Command Usage
If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed. For a
description of the items displayed by this command, see “Showing Port
Statistics” on page 3-129.
Console#show interfaces status ethernet 1/5
Information of Eth 1/5
Basic information:
Port type: 100FX
Mac address: 00-12-CF-12-34-61
Configuration:
Name:
Port admin: Up
Speed-duplex: Auto
Capabilities: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full,
Broadcast storm: Enabled
Broadcast storm limit: 64 Kbits/second
Flow control: Disabled
Lacp: Disabled
Port security: Disabled
Max MAC count: 0
Port security action: None
Current status:
Link status: Up
Port operation status: Up
Operation speed-duplex: 100full
Flow control type: None
Console#show interfaces status vlan 1
Information of VLAN 1
MAC address: 00-12-CF-12-34-56
Console#
Interface Commands
4-175
4
Example
show interfaces switchport
This command displays the administrative and operational status of the specified
interfaces.
Syntax
show interfaces switchport [interface]
interface
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-8)
Default Setting
Shows all interfaces.
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Command Usage
If no interface is specified, information on all interfaces is displayed.
Console#show interfaces counters ethernet 1/7
Ethernet 1/7
Iftable stats:
Octets input: 30658, Octets output: 196550
Unicast input: 6, Unicast output: 5
Discard input: 0, Discard output: 0
Error input: 0, Error output: 0
Unknown protos input: 0, QLen output: 0
Extended iftable stats:
Multi-cast input: 0, Multi-cast output: 3064
Broadcast input: 262, Broadcast output: 1
Ether-like stats:
Alignment errors: 0, FCS errors: 0
Single Collision frames: 0, Multiple collision frames: 0
SQE Test errors: 0, Deferred transmissions: 0
Late collisions: 0, Excessive collisions: 0
Internal mac transmit errors: 0, Internal mac receive errors: 0
Frame too longs: 0, Carrier sense errors: 0
Symbol errors: 0
RMON stats:
Drop events: 0, Octets: 227208, Packets: 3338
Broadcast pkts: 263, Multi-cast pkts: 3064
Undersize pkts: 0, Oversize pkts: 0
Fragments: 0, Jabbers: 0
CRC align errors: 0, Collisions: 0
Packet size <= 64 octets: 3150, Packet size 65 to 127 octets: 139
Packet size 128 to 255 octets: 49, Packet size 256 to 511 octets: 0
Packet size 512 to 1023 octets: 0, Packet size 1024 to 1518 octets: 0
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-176
4
Example
This example shows the configuration setting for port 24.
Console#show interfaces switchport ethernet 1/24
Broadcast threshold: Enabled, 64 Kbits/second
LACP status: Enabled
Ingress Rate Limit: Disabled, 100000 Kbits per second
Egress Rate Limit: Disabled, 100000 Kbits per second
VLAN membership mode: Hybrid
Ingress rule: Enabled
Acceptable frame type: All frames
Native VLAN: 1
Priority for untagged traffic: 0
Gvrp status: Disabled
Allowed Vlan: 1(u),
Forbidden Vlan:
Private-VLAN mode: NONE
Private-VLAN host-association: NONE
Private-VLAN mapping: NONE
Console#
Table 4-48 Interfaces Switchport Statistics
Field Description
Broadcast threshold Shows if broadcast storm suppression is enabled or disabled; if enabled it also
shows the threshold level (page 4-172).
Lacp status Shows if Link Aggregation Control Protocol has been enabled or disabled
(page 4-182).
Ingress rate limit Shows if ingress rate limiting is enabled, and the current rate limit. (page 4-179).
Egress rate limit Shows if egress rate limiting is enabled, and the current rate limit. (page 4-179).
VLAN membership mode Indicates membership mode as Trunk or Hybrid (page 4-245).
Ingress rule Shows if ingress filtering is enabled or disabled (page 4-246).
Note: Ingress filtering is always enabled.
Acceptable frame type Shows if acceptable VLAN frames include all types or tagged frames only
(page 4-246).
Native VLAN Indicates the default Port VLAN ID (page 4-247).
Priority for untagged traffic Indicates the default priority for untagged frames (page 4-264).
Gvrp status Shows if GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is enabled or disabled (page 4-240).
Allowed Vlan Shows the VLANs this interface has joined, where “(u)” indicates untagged and
“(t)” indicates tagged (page 4-248).
Forbidden Vlan Shows the VLANs this interface can not dynamically join via GVRP (page 4-249).
Private VLAN mode Shows the private VLAN mode as host, promiscuous, or none (4-257).
Private VLAN
host-association
Shows the secondary (or community) VLAN with which this port is associated
(4-258).
Private VLAN mapping Shows the primary VLAN mapping for a promiscuous port (4-259).
Mirror Port Commands
4-177
4
Mirror Port Commands
This section describes how to mirror traffic from a source port to a target port.
port monitor
This command configures a mirror session. Use the no form to clear a mirror
session.
Syntax
port monitor interface [rx | tx]
no port monitor interface
•interface - ethernet unit/port (source port)
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•rx - Mirror received packets.
•tx - Mirror transmitted packets.
Default Setting
No mirror session is defined.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, destination port)
Command Usage
• You can mirror traffic from any source port to a destination port for real-time
analysis. You can then attach a logic analyzer or RMON probe to the
destination port and study the traffic crossing the source port in a completely
unobtrusive manner.
• The destination port is set by specifying an Ethernet interface.
• The mirror port and monitor port speeds should match, otherwise traffic may
be dropped from the monitor port.
• All mirror sessions must share the same destination port.
• When mirroring port traffic, the target port must be included in the same VLAN
as the source port
Table 4-49 Mirror Port Commands
Command Function Mode Page
port monitor Configures a mirror session IC 4-177
show port monitor Shows the configuration for a mirror port PE 4-178
Command Line Interface
4-178
4
Example
The following example configures the switch to mirror received packets from port 6
to 11:
show port monitor
This command displays mirror information.
Syntax
show port monitor [interface]
interface - ethernet unit/port (source port)
•unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
•port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
Default Setting
Shows all sessions.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
This command displays the currently configured source port, destination port,
and mirror mode (i.e., RX, TX).
Example
The following shows mirroring configured from port 6 to port 11:
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11
Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/6 rx
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11
Console(config-if)#port monitor ethernet 1/6 rx
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show port monitor
Port Mirroring
-------------------------------------
Destination port(listen port):Eth1/11
Source port(monitored port) :Eth1/6
Mode :RX
Console#
Rate Limit Commands
4-179
4
Rate Limit Commands
This function allows the network manager to control the maximum rate for traffic
received on an interface. Rate limiting is configured on interfaces at the edge of a
network to limit traffic into the network. Packets that exceed the acceptable amount
of traffic are dropped.
Rate limiting can be applied to individual ports or trunks. When an interface is
configured with this feature, the traffic rate will be monitored by the hardware to
verify conformity. Non-conforming traffic is dropped.
rate-limit
Use this command to define the rate limit level for a specific interface. Use this
command without specifying a rate to restore the default rate limit level. Use the no
form to restore the default status of disabled.
Syntax
rate-limit <input | output> [rate]
no rate-limit <input | output>
•input – Input rate limit
•output – Input rate limit
•rate – The traffic rate limit level. Range: 64-100000 kilobits per second for
100 Mbps ports; 64-1000000 kilobits per second for 1 Gbps ports
Default Setting
Input/Output Rate Limit Status: Disabled
Rate level: 100000 kilobits per second for 100 Mbps ports; 1000000 kilobits
per second for 1 Gbps ports
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Example
Table 4-50 Rate Limit Commands
Command Function Mode Page
rate-limit Configures the maximum input rate for a port IC 4-179
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#rate-limit input 2000
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-180
4
Link Aggregation Commands
Ports can be statically grouped into an aggregate link (i.e., trunk) to increase the
bandwidth of a network connection or to ensure fault recovery. Or you can use the
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) to automatically negotiate a trunk link
between this switch and another network device. For static trunks, the switches have
to comply with the Cisco EtherChannel standard. For dynamic trunks, the switches
have to comply with LACP. This switch supports up to four trunks. For example, a
trunk consisting of two 1000 Mbps ports can support an aggregate bandwidth of
4 Gbps when operating at full duplex.
Table 4-51 Link Aggregation Commands
Command Function Mode Page
Manual Configuration Commands
interface port-channel Configures a trunk and enters interface
configuration mode for the trunk
GC 4-166
channel-group Adds a port to a trunk IC (Ethernet) 4-181
Dynamic Configuration Command
lacp Configures LACP for the current interface IC (Ethernet) 4-182
lacp system-priority Configures a port's LACP system priority IC (Ethernet) 4-183
lacp admin-key Configures a port's administration key IC (Ethernet) 4-184
lacp admin-key Configures an port channel’s administration key IC (Port Channel) 4-185
lacp port-priority Configures a port's LACP port priority IC (Ethernet) 4-186
Trunk Status Display Command
show interfaces status
port-channel
Shows trunk information NE, PE 4-173
show lacp Shows LACP information PE 4-186
Link Aggregation Commands
4-181
4
Guidelines for Creating Trunks
General Guidelines –
• Finish configuring port trunks before you connect the corresponding network
cables between switches to avoid creating a loop.
• A trunk can have up to eight ports.
• The ports at both ends of a connection must be configured as trunk ports.
• All ports in a trunk must be configured in an identical manner, including
communication mode (i.e., speed, duplex mode and flow control), VLAN
assignments, and CoS settings.
• All the ports in a trunk have to be treated as a whole when moved from/to,
added or deleted from a VLAN via the specified port-channel.
• STP, VLAN, and IGMP settings can only be made for the entire trunk via the
specified port-channel.
Dynamically Creating a Port Channel –
Ports assigned to a common port channel must meet the following criteria:
• Ports must have the same LACP system priority.
• Ports must have the same port admin key (Ethernet Interface).
• If the port channel admin key (lacp admin key - Port Channel) is not set when
a channel group is formed (i.e., it has the null value of 0), this key is set to the
same value as the port admin key (lacp admin key - Ethernet Interface) used
by the interfaces that joined the group.
• However, if the port channel admin key is set, then the port admin key must
be set to the same value for a port to be allowed to join a channel group.
• If a link goes down, LACP port priority is used to select the backup link.
channel-group
This command adds a port to a trunk. Use the no form to remove a port from a trunk.
Syntax
channel-group channel-id
no channel-group
channel-id - Trunk index (Range: 1-8)
Default Setting
The current port will be added to this trunk.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
• When configuring static trunks, the switches must comply with the Cisco
EtherChannel standard.
•Use no channel-group to remove a port group from a trunk.
• Use no interfaces port-channel to remove a trunk from the switch.
Command Line Interface
4-182
4
Example
The following example creates trunk 1 and then adds port 11:
lacp
This command enables 802.3ad Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) for the
current interface. Use the no form to disable it.
Syntax
[no] lacp
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
• The ports on both ends of an LACP trunk must be configured for full duplex,
and auto-negotiation.
• A trunk formed with another switch using LACP will automatically be assigned
the next available port-channel ID.
• If the target switch has also enabled LACP on the connected ports, the trunk
will be activated automatically.
• If more than eight ports attached to the same target switch have LACP
enabled, the additional ports will be placed in standby mode, and will only be
enabled if one of the active links fails.
Console(config)#interface port-channel 1
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11
Console(config-if)#channel-group 1
Console(config-if)#
Link Aggregation Commands
4-183
4
Example
The following shows LACP enabled on ports 11-13. Because LACP has also been
enabled on the ports at the other end of the links, the show interfaces status
port-channel 1 command shows that Trunk 1 has been established.
lacp system-priority
This command configures a port's LACP system priority. Use the no form to restore
the default setting.
Syntax
lacp {actor | partner} system-priority priority
no lacp {actor | partner} system-priority
•actor - The local side an aggregate link.
•partner - The remote side of an aggregate link.
•priority - This priority is used to determine link aggregation group (LAG)
membership, and to identify this device to other switches during LAG
negotiations. (Range: 0-65535)
Default Setting
32768
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/11
Console(config-if)#lacp
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/12
Console(config-if)#lacp
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/13
Console(config-if)#lacp
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#exit
Console#show interfaces status port-channel 1
Information of Trunk 1
Basic information:
Port type: 100FX
Mac address: 00-12-CF-12-34-72
Configuration:
Name:
Port admin: Up
Speed-duplex: Auto
Capabilities: 10half, 10full, 100half, 100full
Flow control status: Disabled
Port security: Disabled
Max MAC count: 0
Current status:
Created by: LACP
Link status: Up
Operation speed-duplex: 100full
Flow control type: None
Member Ports: Eth1/11, Eth1/12, Eth1/13,
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-184
4
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
• Port must be configured with the same system priority to join the same LAG.
• System priority is combined with the switch’s MAC address to form the LAG
identifier. This identifier is used to indicate a specific LAG during LACP
negotiations with other systems.
• Once the remote side of a link has been established, LACP operational
settings are already in use on that side. Configuring LACP settings for the
partner only applies to its administrative state, not its operational state, and
will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the
partner.
Example
lacp admin-key (Ethernet Interface)
This command configures a port's LACP administration key. Use the no form to
restore the default setting.
Syntax
lacp {actor | partner} admin-key key
[no] lacp {actor | partner} admin-key
•actor - The local side an aggregate link.
•partner - The remote side of an aggregate link.
•key - The port admin key must be set to the same value for ports that belong
to the same link aggregation group (LAG). (Range: 0-65535)
Default Setting
0
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
• Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if (1) the LACP system priority
matches, (2) the LACP port admin key matches, and (3) the LACP port
channel key matches (if configured).
• If the port channel admin key (lacp admin key - Port Channel) is not set when
a channel group is formed (i.e., it has the null value of 0), this key is set to the
same value as the port admin key (lacp admin key - Ethernet Interface) used
by the interfaces that joined the group.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#lacp actor system-priority 3
Console(config-if)#
Link Aggregation Commands
4-185
4
• Once the remote side of a link has been established, LACP operational
settings are already in use on that side. Configuring LACP settings for the
partner only applies to its administrative state, not its operational state, and
will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the
partner.
Example
lacp admin-key (Port Channel)
This command configures a port channel's LACP administration key string. Use the
no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
lacp {actor | partner} admin-key key
[no] lacp {actor | partner} admin-key
key - The port channel admin key is used to identify a specific link
aggregation group (LAG) during local LACP setup on this switch.
(Range: 0-65535)
Default Setting
0
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Port Channel)
Command Usage
• Ports are only allowed to join the same LAG if (1) the LACP system priority
matches, (2) the LACP port admin key matches, and (3) the LACP port
channel key matches (if configured).
• If the port channel admin key (lacp admin key - Port Channel) is not set when
a channel group is formed (i.e., it has the null value of 0), this key is set to the
same value as the port admin key (lacp admin key - Ethernet Interface) used
by the interfaces that joined the group. Note that when the LAG is no longer
used, the port channel admin key is reset to 0.
Example
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#lacp actor admin-key 120
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface port-channel 1
Console(config-if)#lacp actor admin-key 3
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-186
4
lacp port-priority
This command configures LACP port priority. Use the no form to restore the default
setting.
Syntax
lacp {actor | partner} port-priority priority
no lacp {actor | partner} port-priority
•actor - The local side an aggregate link.
•partner - The remote side of an aggregate link.
•priority - LACP port priority is used to select a backup link. (Range: 0-65535)
Default Setting
32768
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
• Setting a lower value indicates a higher effective priority.
• If an active port link goes down, the backup port with the highest priority is
selected to replace the downed link. However, if two or more ports have the
same LACP port priority, the port with the lowest physical port number will be
selected as the backup port.
• Once the remote side of a link has been established, LACP operational
settings are already in use on that side. Configuring LACP settings for the
partner only applies to its administrative state, not its operational state, and
will only take effect the next time an aggregate link is established with the
partner.
Example
show lacp
This command displays LACP information.
Syntax
show lacp [port-channel] {counters | internal | neighbors | sysid}
•port-channel - Local identifier for a link aggregation group. (Range: 1-8)
•counters - Statistics for LACP protocol messages.
•internal - Configuration settings and operational state for local side.
•neighbors - Configuration settings and operational state for remote side.
•sysid - Summary of system priority and MAC address for all channel groups.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#lacp actor port-priority 128
Link Aggregation Commands
4-187
4
Default Setting
Port Channel: all
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show lacp 1 counters
Port channel : 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eth 1/ 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
LACPDUs Sent : 21
LACPDUs Received : 21
Marker Sent : 0
Marker Received : 0
LACPDUs Unknown Pkts : 0
LACPDUs Illegal Pkts : 0
.
.
.
Table 4-52 show lacp counters - display description
Field Description
LACPDUs Sent Number of valid LACPDUs transmitted from this channel group.
LACPDUs Received Number of valid LACPDUs received on this channel group.
Marker Sent Number of valid Marker PDUs transmitted from this channel group.
Marker Received Number of valid Marker PDUs received by this channel group.
LACPDUs Unknown Pkts Number of frames received that either (1) Carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet
Type value, but contain an unknown PDU, or (2) are addressed to the Slow
Protocols group MAC Address, but do not carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet
Type.
LACPDUs Illegal Pkts Number of frames that carry the Slow Protocols Ethernet Type value, but contain
a badly formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype.
Console#show lacp 1 internal
Port channel : 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Oper Key : 4
Admin Key : 0
Eth 1/1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
LACPDUs Internal : 30 sec
LACP System Priority : 32768
LACP Port Priority : 32768
Admin Key : 4
Oper Key : 4
Admin State : defaulted, aggregation, long timeout, LACP-activity
Oper State : distributing, collecting, synchronization, aggregation,
long timeout, LACP-activity
.
.
.
Command Line Interface
4-188
4
Table 4-53 show lacp internal - display description
Field Description
Oper Key Current operational value of the key for the aggregation port.
Admin Key Current administrative value of the key for the aggregation port.
LACPDUs Internal Number of seconds before invalidating received LACPDU information.
LACP System Priority LACP system priority assigned to this port channel.
LACP Port Priority LACP port priority assigned to this interface within the channel group.
Admin State,
Oper State
Administrative or operational values of the actor’s state parameters:
• Expired – The actor’s receive machine is in the expired state;
• Defaulted – The actor’s receive machine is using defaulted operational partner
information, administratively configured for the partner.
• Distributing – If false, distribution of outgoing frames on this link is disabled; i.e.,
distribution is currently disabled and is not expected to be enabled in the absence
of administrative changes or changes in received protocol information.
• Collecting – Collection of incoming frames on this link is enabled; i.e., collection is
currently enabled and is not expected to be disabled in the absence of
administrative changes or changes in received protocol information.
• Synchronization – The System considers this link to be IN_SYNC; i.e., it has been
allocated to the correct Link Aggregation Group, the group has been associated
with a compatible Aggregator, and the identity of the Link Aggregation Group is
consistent with the System ID and operational Key information transmitted.
• Aggregation – The system considers this link to be aggregatable; i.e., a potential
candidate for aggregation.
• Long timeout – Periodic transmission of LACPDUs uses a slow transmission rate.
• LACP-Activity – Activity control value with regard to this link. (0: Passive; 1: Active)
Console#show lacp 1 neighbors
Port channel 1 neighbors
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Eth 1/1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
Partner Admin System ID : 32768, 00-00-00-00-00-00
Partner Oper System ID : 32768, 00-00-00-00-00-01
Partner Admin Port Number : 1
Partner Oper Port Number : 1
Port Admin Priority : 32768
Port Oper Priority : 32768
Admin Key : 0
Oper Key : 4
Admin State : defaulted, distributing, collecting, synchronization,
long timeout,
Oper State : distributing, collecting, synchronization, aggregation,
long timeout, LACP-activity
.
.
.
Link Aggregation Commands
4-189
4
Table 4-54 show lacp neighbors - display description
Field Description
Partner Admin System ID LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the user.
Partner Oper System ID LAG partner’s system ID assigned by the LACP protocol.
Partner Admin
Port Number
Current administrative value of the port number for the protocol Partner.
Partner Oper
Port Number
Operational port number assigned to this aggregation port by the port’s protocol
partner.
Port Admin Priority Current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol partner.
Port Oper Priority Priority value assigned to this aggregation port by the partner.
Admin Key Current administrative value of the Key for the protocol partner.
Oper Key Current operational value of the Key for the protocol partner.
Admin State Administrative values of the partner’s state parameters. (See preceding table.)
Oper State Operational values of the partner’s state parameters. (See preceding table.)
Console#show lacp sysid
Port Channel System Priority System MAC Address
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
1 32768 00-12-CF-8F-2C-A7
2 32768 00-12-CF-8F-2C-A7
3 32768 00-12-CF-8F-2C-A7
4 32768 00-12-CF-8F-2C-A7
Console#
Table 4-55 show lacp sysid - display description
Field Description
Channel group A link aggregation group configured on this switch.
System Priority*LACP system priority for this channel group.
System MAC Address*System MAC address.
* The LACP system priority and system MAC address are concatenated to form the LAG system ID.
Command Line Interface
4-190
4
Address Table Commands
These commands are used to configure the address table for filtering specified
addresses, displaying current entries, clearing the table, or setting the aging time.
mac-address-table static
This command maps a static address to a destination port in a VLAN. Use the no
form to remove an address.
Syntax
mac-address-table static mac-address interface interface
vlan vlan-id [action]
no mac-address-table static mac-address vlan vlan-id
•mac-address - MAC address.
•interface
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-8)
•vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4092)
•action -
-delete-on-reset - Assignment lasts until the switch is reset.
-permanent - Assignment is permanent.
Default Setting
No static addresses are defined. The default mode is permanent.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Table 4-56 Address Table Commands
Command Function Mode Page
mac-address-table static Maps a static address to a port in a VLAN GC 4-190
clear mac-address-table
dynamic
Removes any learned entries from the forwarding database PE 4-191
show mac-address-table Displays entries in the bridge-forwarding database PE 4-191
mac-address-table
aging-time
Sets the aging time of the address table GC 4-192
show mac-address-table
aging-time
Shows the aging time for the address table PE 4-193
Address Table Commands
4-191
4
Command Usage
The static address for a host device can be assigned to a specific port within
a specific VLAN. Use this command to add static addresses to the MAC
Address Table. Static addresses have the following characteristics:
• Static addresses will not be removed from the address table when a given
interface link is down.
• Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and will not be moved.
When a static address is seen on another interface, the address will be
ignored and will not be written to the address table.
• A static address cannot be learned on another port until the address is
removed with the no form of this command.
Example
clear mac-address-table dynamic
This command removes any learned entries from the forwarding database and
clears the transmit and receive counts for any static or system configured entries.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
show mac-address-table
This command shows classes of entries in the bridge-forwarding database.
Syntax
show mac-address-table [address mac-address [mask]] [interface interface]
[vlan vlan-id] [sort {address |vlan | interface}]
•mac-address - MAC address.
•mask - Bits to match in the address.
•interface
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-8)
•vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4092)
Console(config)#mac-address-table static 00-12-cf-94-34-de interface
ethernet 1/1 vlan 1 delete-on-reset
Console(config)#
Console#clear mac-address-table dynamic
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-192
4
•sort - Sort by address, vlan or interface.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• The MAC Address Table contains the MAC addresses associated with each
interface. Note that the Type field may include the following types:
- Learned - Dynamic address entries
- Permanent - Static entry
- Delete-on-reset - Static entry to be deleted when system is reset
• The mask should be hexadecimal numbers (representing an equivalent bit
mask) in the form xx-xx-xx-xx-xx-xx that is applied to the specified MAC
address. Enter hexadecimal numbers, where an equivalent binary bit “0”
means to match a bit and “1” means to ignore a bit. For example, a mask of
00-00-00-00-00-00 means an exact match, and a mask of
FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF means “any.”
• The maximum number of address entries is 8191.
Example
mac-address-table aging-time
This command sets the aging time for entries in the address table. Use the no form
to restore the default aging time.
Syntax
mac-address-table aging-time seconds
no mac-address-table aging-time
seconds - Aging time. (Range: 10-30000 seconds; 0 to disable aging)
Default Setting
300 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The aging time is used to age out dynamically learned forwarding information.
Console#show mac-address-table
Interface Mac Address Vlan Type
--------- ----------------- ---- -----------------
Eth 1/1 00-12-cf-94-34-de 1 Delete-on-reset
Trunk 2 00-12-cf-8f-aa-1b 1 Learned
Console#
LLDP Commands
4-193
4
Example
show mac-address-table aging-time
This command shows the aging time for entries in the address table.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
LLDP Commands
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP) is used to discover basic information about
neighboring devices on the local broadcast domain. LLDP is a Layer 2 protocol that
uses periodic broadcasts to advertise information about the sending device.
Advertised information is represented in Type Length Value (TLV) format according
to the IEEE 802.1ab standard, and can include details such as device identification,
capabilities and configuration settings. LLDP also defines how to store and maintain
information gathered about the neighboring network nodes it discovers.
Link Layer Discovery Protocol - Media Endpoint Discovery (LLDP-MED) is an
extension of LLDP intended for managing endpoint devices such as Voice over IP
phones and network switches. The LLDP-MED TLVs advertise information such as
network policy, power, inventory, and device location details. The LLDP and
LLDP-MED information can be used by SNMP applications to simplify
troubleshooting, enhance network management, and maintain an accurate network
topology.
Console(config)#mac-address-table aging-time 100
Console(config)#
Console#show mac-address-table aging-time
Aging time: 100 sec.
Console#
Table 4-57 LLDP Commands
Command Function Mode Page
lldp Enables LLDP globally on the switch GC 4-195
lldp holdtime-multiplier Configures the time-to-live (TTL) value sent in LLDP
advertisements
GC 4-195
medFastStartCount Configures how many medFastStart packets are transmitted GC 4-196
lldp notification-interval Configures the allowed interval for sending SNMP
notifications about LLDP changes
GC 4-196
lldp refresh-interval Configures the periodic transmit interval for LLDP
advertisements
GC 4-197
Command Line Interface
4-194
4
lldp reinit-delay Configures the delay before attempting to re-initialize after
LLDP ports are disabled or the link goes down
GC 4-198
lldp tx-delay Configures a delay between the successive transmission of
advertisements initiated by a change in local LLDP MIB
variables
GC 4-198
lldp admin-status Enables LLDP transmit, receive, or transmit and receive
mode on the specified port
IC 4-199
lldp notification Enables the transmission of SNMP trap notifications about
LLDP changes
IC 4-199
lldp mednotification Enables the transmission of SNMP trap notifications about
LLDP-MED changes
IC 4-200
lldp basic-tlv
management-ip-address
Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise the
management address for this device
IC 4-201
lldp basic-tlv
port-description
Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its port
description
IC 4-201
lldp basic-tlv
system-capabilities
Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its system
capabilities
IC 4-202
lldp basic-tlv
system-description
Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise the system
description
IC 4-202
lldp basic-tlv
system-name
Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its system
name
IC 4-203
lldp dot1-tlv
proto-ident
Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise the supported
protocols
IC 4-203
lldp dot1-tlv
proto-vid
Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise port related
VLAN information
IC 4-204
lldp dot1-tlv
pvid
Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its default
VLAN ID
IC 4-204
lldp dot1-tlv
vlan-name
Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its VLAN
name
IC 4-205
lldp dot3-tlv
link-agg
Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its link
aggregation capabilities
IC 4-205
lldp dot3-tlv
mac-phy
Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its MAC and
physical layer specifications
IC 4-206
lldp dot3-tlv
max-frame
Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its maximum
frame size
IC 4-206
lldp dot3-tlv
poe
Configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its
Power-over-Ethernet capabilities
IC 4-207
lldp medtlv
extpoe
Configures an LLDP-MED-enabled port to advertise its
extended Pover over Ethernet configuration and usage
information
IC 4-207
lldp medtlv
inventory
Configures an LLDP-MED-enabled port to advertise its
inventory identification details
IC 4-208
lldp medtlv
location
Configures an LLDP-MED-enabled port to advertise its
location identification details
IC 4-208
Table 4-57 LLDP Commands (Continued)
Command Function Mode Page
LLDP Commands
4-195
4
lldp
This command enables LLDP globally on the switch. Use the no form to disable
LLDP.
Syntax
[no] lldp
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
lldp holdtime-multiplier
This command configures the time-to-live (TTL) value sent in LLDP advertisements.
Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
lldp holdtime-multiplier value
no lldp holdtime-multiplier
value - Calculates the TTL in seconds based on
(holdtime-multiplier * refresh-interval) ≤ 65536
(Range: 2 - 10)
Default Setting
Holdtime multiplier: 4
TTL: 4*30 = 120 seconds
lldp medtlv
med-cap
Configures an LLDP-MED-enabled port to advertise its
Media Endpoint Device capabilities
IC 4-209
lldp medtlv
network-policy
Configures an LLDP-MED-enabled port to advertise its
network policy configuration
IC 4-209
show lldp config Shows LLDP configuration settings for all ports PE 4-210
show lldp info
local-device
Shows LLDP global and interface-specific configuration
settings for this device
PE 4-212
show lldp info
remote-device
Shows LLDP global and interface-specific configuration
settings for remote devices
PE 4-213
show lldp info
statistics
Shows statistical counters for all LLDP-enabled interfaces PE 4-213
Console(config)#lldp
Console(config)#
Table 4-57 LLDP Commands (Continued)
Command Function Mode Page
Command Line Interface
4-196
4
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The time-to-live tells the receiving LLDP agent how long to retain all
information pertaining to the sending LLDP agent if it does not transmit
updates in a timely manner.
Example
lldp medFastStartCount
This command specifies the amount of MED Fast Start LLDPDUs to transmit during
the activation process of the LLDP-MED Fast Start mechanism.
Syntax
lldp medfaststartcount packets
seconds - Amount of packets. (Range: 1-10 packets; Default: 4 packets)
Default Setting
4 packets
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The MEDFastStartCount parameter is part of the timer which ensures that the
LLDP-MED Fast Start mechanism is active for the port. LLDP-MED Fast Start
is critical to the timely startup of LLDP, and therefore integral to the rapid
availability of Emergency Call Service.
Example
lldp notification-interval
This command configures the allowed interval for sending SNMP notifications about
LLDP MIB changes. Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
lldp notification-interval seconds
no lldp notification-interval
seconds - Specifies the periodic interval at which SNMP notifications are
sent. (Range: 5 - 3600 seconds)
Console(config)#lldp holdtime-multiplier 10
Console(config)#
Console(config)#lldp medfaststartcount 6
Console(config)#
LLDP Commands
4-197
4
Default Setting
5 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• This parameter only applies to SNMP applications which use data stored in
the LLDP MIB for network monitoring or management.
• Information about changes in LLDP neighbors that occur between SNMP
notifications is not transmitted. Only state changes that exist at the time of a
notification are included in the transmission. An SNMP agent should therefore
periodically check the value of lldpStatsRemTableLastChangeTime to detect
any lldpRemTablesChange notification-events missed due to throttling or
transmission loss.
Example
lldp refresh-interval
This command configures the periodic transmit interval for LLDP advertisements.
Use the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
lldp refresh-interval seconds
no lldp refresh-delay
seconds - Specifies the periodic interval at which LLDP advertisements
are sent. (Range: 5 - 32768 seconds)
Default Setting
30 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This attribute must comply with the following rule:
(refresh-interval * holdtime-multiplier) ≤ 65536
Example
Console(config)#lldp notification-interval 30
Console(config)#
Console(config)#lldp refresh-interval 60
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-198
4
lldp reinit-delay
This command configures the delay before attempting to re-initialize after LLDP
ports are disabled or the link goes down. Use the no form to restore the default
setting.
Syntax
lldp reinit-delay seconds
no lldp reinit-delay
seconds - Specifies the delay before attempting to re-initialize LLDP.
(Range: 1 - 10 seconds)
Default Setting
2 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
When LLDP is re-initialized on a port, all information in the remote systems
LLDP MIB associated with this port is deleted.
Example
lldp tx-delay
This command configures a delay between the successive transmission of
advertisements initiated by a change in local LLDP MIB variables. Use the no form
to restore the default setting.
Syntax
lldp tx-delay seconds
no lldp tx-delay
seconds - Specifies the transmit delay. (Range: 1 - 8192 seconds)
Default Setting
2 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• The transmit delay is used to prevent a series of successive LLDP
transmissions during a short period of rapid changes in local LLDP MIB
objects, and to increase the probability that multiple, rather than single
changes, are reported in each transmission.
Console(config)#lldp reinit-delay 10
Console(config)#
LLDP Commands
4-199
4
• This attribute must comply with the following rule:
(4 * tx-delay) ≤ refresh-interval
Example
lldp admin-status
This command enables LLDP transmit, receive, or transmit and receive mode on the
specified port. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
lldp admin-status {rx-only | tx-only | tx-rx}
no lldp admin-status
•rx-only - Only receive LLDP PDUs.
•tx-only - Only transmit LLDP PDUs.
•tx-rx - Both transmit and receive LLDP Protocol Data Units (PDUs).
Default Setting
tx-rx
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Example
lldp notification
This command enables the transmission of SNMP trap notifications about LLDP
changes. Use the no form to disable LLDP notifications.
Syntax
[no] lldp notification
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• This option sends out SNMP trap notifications to designated target stations at
the interval specified by the lldp notification-interval command
(page 4-196). Trap notifications include information about state changes in
Console(config)#lldp tx-delay 10
Console(config)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#lldp admin-status rx-only
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-200
4
the LLDP MIB (IEEE 802.1AB), or organization-specific LLDP-EXT-DOT1 and
LLDP-EXT-DOT3 MIBs.
• SNMP trap destinations are defined using the snmp-server host command
(page 4-154).
• Information about additional changes in LLDP neighbors that occur between
SNMP notifications is not transmitted. Only state changes that exist at the time
of a trap notification are included in the transmission. An SNMP agent should
therefore periodically check the value of lldpStatsRemTableLastChangeTime
to detect any lldpRemTablesChange notification-events missed due to
throttling or transmission loss.
Example
lldp mednotification
This command enables the transmission of SNMP trap notifications about
LLDP-MED changes. Use the no form to disable LLDP-MED notifications.
Syntax
[no] lldp mednotification
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• This option sends out SNMP trap notifications to designated target stations at
the interval specified by the lldp notification-interval command
(page 4-196). Trap notifications include information about state changes in
the LLDP MIB (IEEE 802.1AB), the LLDP-MED MIB (ANSI/TIA 1057), or
oganization-specific LLDP-EXT-DOT1 and LLDP-EXT-DOT3 MIBs.
• SNMP trap destinations are defined using the snmp-server host command
(page 4-154).
• Information about additional changes in LLDP neighbors that occur between
SNMP notifications is not transmitted. Only state changes that exist at the time
of a trap notification are included in the transmission. An SNMP agent should
therefore periodically check the value of lldpStatsRemTableLastChangeTime
to detect any lldpRemTablesChange notification-events missed due to
throttling or transmission loss.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#lldp notification
Console(config-if)#
LLDP Commands
4-201
4
Example
lldp basic-tlv management-ip-address
This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise the management
address for this device. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp basic-tlv management-ip-address
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• The management address protocol packet includes the IPv4 address of the
switch. If no management address is available, the address should be the
MAC address for the CPU or for the port sending this advertisement.
• The management address TLV may also include information about the
specific interface associated with this address, and an object identifier
indicating the type of hardware component or protocol entity associated with
this address. The interface number and OID are included to assist SNMP
applications to perform network discovery by indicating enterprise specific or
other starting points for the search, such as the Interface or Entity MIB.
• Since there are typically a number of different addresses associated with a
Layer 3 device, an individual LLDP PDU may contain more than one
management address TLV.
• Every management address TLV that reports an address that is accessible on
a port and protocol VLAN through the particular port should be accompanied
by a port and protocol VLAN TLV that indicates the VLAN identifier (VID)
associated with the management address reported by this TLV.
Example
lldp basic-tlv port-description
This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its port description.
Use the no form to disable this feature.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#lldp mednotification
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#lldp basic-tlv management-ip-address
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-202
4
Syntax
[no] lldp basic-tlv port-description
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
The port description is taken from the ifDescr object in RFC 2863, which
includes information about the manufacturer, the product name, and the
version of the interface hardware/software.
Example
lldp basic-tlv system-capabilities
This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its system capabilities.
Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp basic-tlv system-capabilities
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
The system capabilities identifies the primary function(s) of the system and
whether or not these primary functions are enabled. The information
advertised by this TLV is described in IEEE 802.1AB.
Example
lldp basic-tlv system-description
This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise the system
description. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#lldp basic-tlv port-description
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#lldp basic-tlv system-capabilities
Console(config-if)#
LLDP Commands
4-203
4
Syntax
[no] lldp basic-tlv system-description
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
The system description is taken from the sysDescr object in RFC 3418, which
includes the full name and version identification of the system's hardware type,
software operating system, and networking software.
Example
lldp basic-tlv system-name
This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise the system name. Use
the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp basic-tlv system-name
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
The system name is taken from the sysName object in RFC 3418, which
contains the system’s administratively assigned name, and is in turn based on
the hostname command (page 4-28).
Example
lldp dot1-tlv proto-ident
This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise the supported
protocols. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#lldp basic-tlv system-description
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#lldp basic-tlv system-name
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-204
4
Syntax
[no] lldp dot1-tlv proto-ident
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
This option advertises the protocols that are accessible through this interface.
Example
lldp dot1-tlv proto-vid
This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise port related VLAN
information. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp dot1-tlv proto-vid
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
This option advertises the port-based and protocol-based VLANs configured
on this interface (see “Configuring VLAN Interfaces” on page 4-244 and
“Configuring Protocol-based VLANs” on page 4-261).
Example
lldp dot1-tlv pvid
This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its default VLAN ID.
Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp dot1-tlv pvid
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#no lldp dot1-tlv proto-ident
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#no lldp dot1-tlv proto-vid
Console(config-if)#
LLDP Commands
4-205
4
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
The port’s default VLAN identifier (PVID) indicates the VLAN with which
untagged or priority-tagged frames are associated (see “switchport native vlan”
on page 4-247).
Example
lldp dot1-tlv vlan-name
This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its VLAN name. Use
the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp dot1-tlv vlan-name
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
This option advertises the name of all VLANs to which this interface has been
assigned. See “switchport allowed vlan” on page 4-248 and “protocol-vlan
protocol-group (Configuring VLANs)” on page 4-262.
Example
lldp dot3-tlv link-agg
This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise link aggregation
capabilities. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp dot3-tlv link-agg
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#no lldp dot1-tlv pvid
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#no lldp dot1-tlv vlan-name
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-206
4
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
This option advertises link aggregation capabilities, aggregation status of the
link, and the 802.3 aggregated port identifier if this interface is currently a link
aggregation member.
Example
lldp dot3-tlv mac-phy
This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its MAC and physical
layer capabilities. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp dot3-tlv mac-phy
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
This option advertises MAC/PHY configuration/status which includes
information about auto-negotiation support/capabilities, and operational
Multistation Access Unit (MAU) type.
Example
lldp dot3-tlv max-frame
This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its maximum frame
size. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp dot3-tlv max-frame
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#no lldp dot3-tlv link-agg
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#no lldp dot3-tlv mac-phy
Console(config-if)#
LLDP Commands
4-207
4
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
Refer to “Frame Size Commands” on page 4-84 for information on configuring
the maximum frame size for this switch.
Example
lldp dot3-tlv poe
This command configures an LLDP-enabled port to advertise its
Power-over-Ethernet (PoE) capabilities. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp dot3-tlv poe
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
This option advertises Power-over-Ethernet capabilities, including whether or
not PoE is supported, currently enabled, if the port pins through which power
is delivered can be controlled, the port pins selected to deliver power, and the
power class. Note that this device does not support PoE capabilities.
Example
lldp medtlv extpoe
This command configures an LLDP-MED-enabled port to advertise and accept
Extended Power-over-Ethernet configuration and usage information. Use the no
form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp medtlv extpoe
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#lldp dot3-tlv max-frame
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#lldp dot3-tlv poe
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-208
4
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
This option advertises extended Power-over-Ethernet capability details, such
as power availability from the switch, and power state of the switch, including
whether the switch is operating from primary or backup power (the Endpoint
Device could use this information to decide to enter power conservation
mode). Note that this device does not support PoE capabilities.
Example
lldp medtlv inventory
This command configures an LLDP-MED-enabled port to advertise its inventory
identification details. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp medtlv inventory
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
This option advertises device details useful for inventory management, such
as manufacturer, model, software version and other pertinent information.
Example
lldp medtlv location
This command configures an LLDP-MED-enabled port to advertise its location
identification details. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp medtlv location
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#no lldp medtlv extpoe
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#no lldp medtlv inventory
Console(config-if)#
LLDP Commands
4-209
4
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
This option advertises location identification details.
Example
lldp medtlv med-cap
This command configures an LLDP-MED-enabled port to advertise its Media
Endpoint Device capabilities. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp medtlv med-cap
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
This option advertises LLDP-MED TLV capabilities, allowing Media Endpoint
and Connectivity Devices to efficiently discover which LLDP-MED related TLVs
are supported on the switch.
Example
lldp medtlv network-policy
This command configures an LLDP-MED-enabled port to advertise its network
policy configuration. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
[no] lldp medtlv network-policy
Default Setting
Enabled
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#lldp medtlv location
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#lldp medtlv med-cap
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-210
4
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
This option advertises network policy configuration information, aiding in the
discovery and diagnosis of VLAN configuration mismatches on a port.
Improper network policy configurations frequently result in voice quality
degradation or complete service disruption.
Example
show lldp config
This command shows LLDP configuration settings for all ports.
Syntax
show lldp config [detail interface]
•detail - Shows configuration summary.
•interface
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-8)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#lldp medtlv network-policy
Console(config-if)#
LLDP Commands
4-211
4
Example
Console#show lldp config
LLDP Global Configuation
LLDP Enable : Yes
LLDP Transmit interval : 30
LLDP Hold Time Multiplier : 4
LLDP Delay Interval : 2
LLDP Reinit Delay : 2
LLDP Notification Interval : 5
LLDP MED fast start counts : 4
LLDP Port Configuration
Interface |AdminStatus NotificationEnabled
--------- + ----------- -------------------
Eth 1/1 | Tx-Rx True
Eth 1/2 | Tx-Rx True
Eth 1/3 | Tx-Rx True
Eth 1/4 | Tx-Rx True
Eth 1/5 | Tx-Rx True
.
.
.
Console#show lldp config detail ethernet 1/1
LLDP Port Configuration Detail
Port : Eth 1/1
Admin Status : Tx-Rx
Notification Enabled : True
Basic TLVs Advertised:
port-description
system-name
system-description
system-capabilities
management-ip-address
802.1 specific TLVs Advertised:
*port-vid
*vlan-name
*proto-vlan
*proto-ident
802.3 specific TLVs Advertised:
*mac-phy
*poe
*link-agg
*max-frame
MED Configuration:
MED Notification Enabled : True MED Enabled TLVs Advertised:
*med-cap
*network-policy
*location
*extPoe
*inventory
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-212
4
show lldp info local-device
This command shows LLDP global and interface-specific configuration settings for
this device.
Syntax
show lldp info local-device [detail interface]
•detail - Shows detailed information.
•interface
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-8)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show lldp info local-device
LLDP Local System Information
Chassis Type : MAC Address
Chassis ID : 00-01-02-03-04-05
System Name :
System Description : Edgecore ES3528M-SFP
System Capabilities Support : Bridge
System Capabilities Enable : Bridge
Management Address : 192.168.0.101 (IPv4)
LLDP Port Information
Interface |PortID Type PortID PortDesc
--------- + ---------------- ----------------- ---------------------------
Eth 1/1 |MAC Address 00-01-02-03-04-06 Ethernet Port on unit 1, port 1
Eth 1/2 |MAC Address 00-01-02-03-04-07 Ethernet Port on unit 1, port 2
Eth 1/3 |MAC Address 00-01-02-03-04-08 Ethernet Port on unit 1, port 3
Eth 1/4 |MAC Address 00-01-02-03-04-09 Ethernet Port on unit 1, port 4
.
.
.
Console#show lldp info local-device detail ethernet 1/1
LLDP Port Information Detail
Port : Eth 1/1
Port Type : MAC Address
Port ID : 00-01-02-03-04-06
Port Desc : Ethernet Port on unit 1, port 1
Console#
LLDP Commands
4-213
4
show lldp info remote-device
This command shows LLDP global and interface-specific configuration settings for
remote devices attached to an LLDP-enabled port.
Syntax
show lldp info remote-device [detail interface]
•detail - Shows detailed information.
•interface
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-8)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
show lldp info statistics
This command shows statistics based on traffic received through all attached
LLDP-enabled interfaces.
Syntax
show lldp info statistics [detail interface]
Console#show lldp info remote-device
LLDP Remote Devices Information
Interface | ChassisId PortId SysName
--------- + ----------------- ----------------- ---------------------
Eth 1/1 | 00-01-02-03-04-05 00-01-02-03-04-06
Console#show lldp info remote-device detail ethernet 1/1
LLDP Remote Devices Information Detail
---------------------------------------------------------------
Local PortName : Eth 1/1
Chassis Type : MAC Address
Chassis Id : 00-01-02-03-04-05
PortID Type : MAC Address
PortID : 00-01-02-03-04-06
SysName :
SysDescr : ES3528M-SFP
PortDescr : Ethernet Port on unit 1, port 1
SystemCapSupported : Bridge
SystemCapEnabled : Bridge
Remote Management Address :
00-01-02-03-04-05 (MAC Address)
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-214
4
•detail - Shows detailed information.
•interface
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-8)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
switch#show lldp info statistics
LLDP Device Statistics
Neighbor Entries List Last Updated : 2450279 seconds
New Neighbor Entries Count : 1
Neighbor Entries Deleted Count : 0
Neighbor Entries Dropped Count : 0
Neighbor Entries Ageout Count : 0
Interface | NumFramesRecvd NumFramesSent NumFramesDiscarded
--------- + -------------- ------------- ------------------
Eth 1/1 | 10 11 0
Eth 1/2 | 0 0 0
Eth 1/3 | 0 0 0
Eth 1/4 | 0 0 0
Eth 1/5 | 0 0 0
.
.
.
switch#show lldp info statistics detail ethernet 1/1
LLDP Port Statistics Detail
PortName : Eth 1/1
Frames Discarded : 0
Frames Invalid : 0
Frames Received : 12
Frames Sent : 13
TLVs Unrecognized : 0
TLVs Discarded : 0
Neighbor Ageouts : 0
switch#
UPnP Commands
4-215
4
UPnP Commands
Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a set of protocols that allows devices to connect
seamlessly and simplifies the deployment of home and office networks. UPnP
achieves this by issuing UPnP device control protocols designed upon open,
Internet-based communication standards.
upnp device
This command enables UPnP on the device. Use the no form to disable UPnP.
Syntax
[no] upnp device}
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
You must enable UPnP before you can configure time out settings for sending of
UPnP messages.
Example
In the following example, UPnP is enabled on the device.
Related Commands
upnp device ttl (4-216)
upnp device advertise duration (4-216)
Table 4-1. UPnP Commands
Command Function Mode Page
upnp device Enables/disables UPnP on the network GC 4-215
upnp device ttl Sets the time-to-live (TTL) value. GC 4-216
upnp device advertise
duration
Sets the advertisement duration of the device GC 4-216
show upnp Displays UPnP status and parameters PE 4-217
Console(config)#upnp device
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-216
4
upnp device ttl
This command sets the time-to-live (TTL) value for sending of UPnP messages from
the device.
Syntax
upnp device ttl {value}
•value - The number of router hops a UPnP packet can travel before it is
discarded. (Range:1-255)
Default Setting
4
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
UPnP devices and control points must be within the local network, that is within the
TTL value for multicast messages.
Example
In the following example, the TTL is set to 6.
upnp device advertise duration
This command sets the duration for which a device will advertise its presence on the
local network.
Syntax
upnp device advertise duration {value}
•value - A time out value expressed in seconds. (Range: 6-86400 seconds)
Default Setting
100 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
In the following example, the device advertise duration is set to 200 seconds.
Console(config)#upnp device ttl 6
Console(config)#
Console(config)#upnp device advertise duration 200
Console(config)#
Spanning Tree Commands
4-217
4
Related Commands
upnp device ttl (4-216)
show upnp
This command displays the UPnP management status and time out settings.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Spanning Tree Commands
This section includes commands that configure the Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA)
globally for the switch, and commands that configure STA for the selected interface.
Console#show upnp
UPnP global settings:
Status: Enabled
Advertise duration: 200
TTL: 20
Console#
Table 4-58 Spanning Tree Commands
Command Function Mode Page
spanning-tree Enables the spanning tree protocol GC 4-218
spanning-tree mode Configures STP, RSTP or MSTP mode GC 4-219
spanning-tree forward-time Configures the spanning tree bridge forward time GC 4-220
spanning-tree hello-time Configures the spanning tree bridge hello time GC 4-221
spanning-tree max-age Configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age GC 4-221
spanning-tree priority Configures the spanning tree bridge priority GC 4-222
spanning-tree
path-cost method
Configures the path cost method for RSTP/MSTP GC 4-222
spanning-tree
transmission-limit
Configures the transmission limit for RSTP/MSTP GC 4-223
spanning-tree
mst-configuration
Changes to MSTP configuration mode GC 4-223
mst vlan Adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance MST 4-224
mst priority Configures the priority of a spanning tree instance MST 4-225
name Configures the name for the multiple spanning tree MST 4-225
revision Configures the revision number for the multiple spanning
tree
MST 4-226
max-hops Configures the maximum number of hops allowed in the
region before a BPDU is discarded
MST 4-226
Command Line Interface
4-218
4
spanning-tree
This command enables the Spanning Tree Algorithm globally for the switch. Use the
no form to disable it.
Syntax
[no] spanning-tree
Default Setting
Spanning tree is enabled.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA) can be used to detect and disable
network loops, and to provide backup links between switches, bridges or
routers. This allows the switch to interact with other bridging devices (that is,
spanning-tree
spanning-disabled
Disables spanning tree for an interface IC 4-227
spanning-tree cost Configures the spanning tree path cost of an interface IC 4-227
spanning-tree port-priority Configures the spanning tree priority of an interface IC 4-228
spanning-tree edge-port Enables fast forwarding for edge ports IC 4-229
spanning-tree portfast Sets an interface to fast forwarding IC 4-230
spanning-tree link-type Configures the link type for RSTP/MSTP IC 4-231
spanning-tree
loopback-detection
Enables BPDU loopback detection for the port IC 4-231
spanning-tree
loopback-detection
release-mode
Configures loopback release mode for the port IC 4-232
spanning-tree
loopback-detection trap
Enables BPDU loopback SNMP trap notification for the
port
IC 4-233
spanning-tree mst cost Configures the path cost of an instance in the MST IC 4-233
spanning-tree mst
port-priority
Configures the priority of an instance in the MST IC 4-234
spanning-tree
protocol-migration
Re-checks the appropriate BPDU format PE 4-235
show spanning-tree Shows spanning tree configuration for the common
spanning tree (i.e., overall bridge), a selected interface, or
an instance within the multiple spanning tree
PE 4-235
show spanning-tree mst
configuration
Shows the multiple spanning tree configuration PE 4-237
Table 4-58 Spanning Tree Commands (Continued)
Command Function Mode Page
Spanning Tree Commands
4-219
4
an STA-compliant switch, bridge or router) in your network to ensure that only
one route exists between any two stations on the network, and provide backup
links which automatically take over when a primary link goes down.
Example
This example shows how to enable the Spanning Tree Algorithm for the switch:
spanning-tree mode
This command selects the spanning tree mode for this switch. Use the no form to
restore the default.
Note: MSTP is not supported in the current software.
Syntax
spanning-tree mode {stp | rstp | mstp}
no spanning-tree mode
•stp - Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1D)
•rstp - Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 802.1w)
•mstp - Multiple Spanning Tree (IEEE 802.1s)
Default Setting
rstp
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• Spanning Tree Protocol
Uses RSTP for the internal state machine, but sends only 802.1D BPDUs.
- This creates one spanning tree instance for the entire network. If multiple
VLANs are implemented on a network, the path between specific VLAN
members may be inadvertently disabled to prevent network loops, thus
isolating group members. When operating multiple VLANs, we recommend
selecting the MSTP option.
• Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
RSTP supports connections to either STP or RSTP nodes by monitoring
the incoming protocol messages and dynamically adjusting the type of
protocol messages the RSTP node transmits, as described below:
- STP Mode – If the switch receives an 802.1D BPDU after a port’s migration
delay timer expires, the switch assumes it is connected to an 802.1D bridge
and starts using only 802.1D BPDUs.
- RSTP Mode – If RSTP is using 802.1D BPDUs on a port and receives an
RSTP BPDU after the migration delay expires, RSTP restarts the migration
delay timer and begins using RSTP BPDUs on that port.
Console(config)#spanning-tree
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-220
4
• Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol
- To allow multiple spanning trees to operate over the network, you must
configure a related set of bridges with the same MSTP configuration,
allowing them to participate in a specific set of spanning tree instances.
- A spanning tree instance can exist only on bridges that have compatible
VLAN instance assignments.
- Be careful when switching between spanning tree modes. Changing modes
stops all spanning-tree instances for the previous mode and restarts the
system in the new mode, temporarily disrupting user traffic.
Example
The following example configures the switch to use Rapid Spanning Tree:
spanning-tree forward-time
This command configures the spanning tree bridge forward time globally for this
switch. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree forward-time seconds
no spanning-tree forward-time
seconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 4 - 30 seconds)
The minimum value is the higher of 4 or [(max-age / 2) + 1].
Default Setting
15 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) the root device will wait
before changing states (i.e., discarding to learning to forwarding). This delay is
required because every device must receive information about topology
changes before it starts to forward frames. In addition, each port needs time to
listen for conflicting information that would make it return to the discarding
state; otherwise, temporary data loops might result.
Example
Console(config)#spanning-tree mode rstp
Console(config)#
Console(config)#spanning-tree forward-time 20
Console(config)#
Spanning Tree Commands
4-221
4
spanning-tree hello-time
This command configures the spanning tree bridge hello time globally for this switch.
Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree hello-time time
no spanning-tree hello-time
time - Time in seconds. (Range: 1-10 seconds).
The maximum value is the lower of 10 or [(max-age / 2) -1].
Default Setting
2 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command sets the time interval (in seconds) at which the root device
transmits a configuration message.
Example
Related Commands
spanning-tree forward-time (4-220)
spanning-tree max-age (4-221)
spanning-tree max-age
This command configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age globally for this
switch. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree max-age seconds
no spanning-tree max-age
seconds - Time in seconds. (Range: 6-40 seconds)
The minimum value is the higher of 6 or [2 x (hello-time + 1)].
The maximum value is the lower of 40 or [2 x (forward-time - 1)].
Default Setting
20 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command sets the maximum time (in seconds) a device can wait without
receiving a configuration message before attempting to reconfigure. All device
Console(config)#spanning-tree hello-time 5
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-222
4
ports (except for designated ports) should receive configuration messages at
regular intervals. Any port that ages out STA information (provided in the last
configuration message) becomes the designated port for the attached LAN. If
it is a root port, a new root port is selected from among the device ports
attached to the network.
Example
Related Commands
spanning-tree forward-time (4-220)
spanning-tree hello-time (4-221)
spanning-tree priority
This command configures the spanning tree priority globally for this switch. Use the
no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree priority priority
no spanning-tree priority
priority - Priority of the bridge. (Range: 0 - 65535)
(Range – 0-61440, in steps of 4096; Options: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288,
16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960, 45056, 49152,
53248, 57344, 61440)
Default Setting
32768
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
Bridge priority is used in selecting the root device, root port, and designated
port. The device with the highest priority (i.e., lower numeric value) becomes
the STA root device. However, if all devices have the same priority, the device
with the lowest MAC address will then become the root device.
Example
spanning-tree pathcost method
This command configures the path cost method used for Rapid Spanning Tree and
Multiple Spanning Tree. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree pathcost method {long | short}
Console(config)#spanning-tree max-age 40
Console(config)#
Console(config)#spanning-tree priority 40000
Console(config)#
Spanning Tree Commands
4-223
4
no spanning-tree pathcost method
•long - Specifies 32-bit based values that range from 1-200,000,000.
This method is based on the IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
•short - Specifies 16-bit based values that range from 1-65535.
This method is based on the IEEE 802.1 Spanning Tree Protocol.
Default Setting
Long method
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The path cost method is used to determine the best path between devices.
Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports attached to faster media,
and higher values assigned to ports with slower media. Note that path cost
(page 4-227) takes precedence over port priority (page 4-228).
Example
spanning-tree transmission-limit
This command configures the minimum interval between the transmission of
consecutive RSTP/MSTP BPDUs. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree transmission-limit count
no spanning-tree transmission-limit
count - The transmission limit in seconds. (Range: 1-10)
Default Setting
3
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command limits the maximum transmission rate for BPDUs.
Example
spanning-tree mst-configuration
This command changes to Multiple Spanning Tree (MST) configuration mode.
Default Setting
Console(config)#spanning-tree pathcost method long
Console(config)#
Console(config)#spanning-tree transmission-limit 4
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-224
4
• No VLANs are mapped to any MST instance.
• The region name is set the switch’s MAC address.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
Related Commands
mst vlan (4-224)
mst priority (4-225)
name (4-225)
revision (4-226)
max-hops (4-226)
mst vlan
This command adds VLANs to a spanning tree instance. Use the no form to remove
the specified VLANs. Using the no form without any VLAN parameters to remove all
VLANs.
Syntax
[no] mst instance_id vlan vlan-range
•instance_id - Instance identifier of the spanning tree. (Range: 0-4094)
•vlan-range - Range of VLANs. (Range: 1-4092)
Default Setting
none
Command Mode
MST Configuration
Command Usage
• Use this command to group VLANs into spanning tree instances. MSTP
generates a unique spanning tree for each instance. This provides multiple
pathways across the network, thereby balancing the traffic load, preventing
wide-scale disruption when a bridge node in a single instance fails, and
allowing for faster convergence of a new topology for the failed instance.
• By default all VLANs are assigned to the Internal Spanning Tree (MSTI 0) that
connects all bridges and LANs within the MST region. This switch supports up
to 58 instances. You should try to group VLANs which cover the same general
area of your network. However, remember that you must configure all bridges
within the same MSTI Region (page 4-225) with the same set of instances,
and the same instance (on each bridge) with the same set of VLANs. Also,
note that RSTP treats each MSTI region as a single node, connecting all
regions to the Common Spanning Tree.
Console(config)#spanning-tree mst configuration
Console(config-mstp)#
Spanning Tree Commands
4-225
4
Example
mst priority
This command configures the priority of a spanning tree instance. Use the no form
to restore the default.
Syntax
mst instance_id priority priority
no mst instance_id priority
•instance_id - Instance identifier of the spanning tree. (Range: 0-4094)
•priority - Priority of the a spanning tree instance.
(Range: 0-61440 in steps of 4096; Options: 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384,
20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344,
61440)
Default Setting
32768
Command Mode
MST Configuration
Command Usage
• MST priority is used in selecting the root bridge and alternate bridge of the
specified instance. The device with the highest priority (i.e., lowest numerical
value) becomes the MSTI root device. However, if all devices have the same
priority, the device with the lowest MAC address will then become the root
device.
• You can set this switch to act as the MSTI root device by specifying a priority
of 0, or as the MSTI alternate device by specifying a priority of 16384.
Example
name
This command configures the name for the multiple spanning tree region in which
this switch is located. Use the no form to clear the name.
Syntax
name name
name - Name of the spanning tree.
Default Setting
Switch’s MAC address
Command Mode
Console(config-mstp)#mst 1 vlan 2-5
Console(config-mstp)#
Console(config-mstp)#mst 1 priority 4096
Console(config-mstp)#
Command Line Interface
4-226
4
MST Configuration
Command Usage
The MST region name and revision number (page 4-226) are used to
designate a unique MST region. A bridge (i.e., spanning-tree compliant device
such as this switch) can only belong to one MST region. And all bridges in the
same region must be configured with the same MST instances.
Example
Related Commands
revision (4-226)
revision
This command configures the revision number for this multiple spanning tree
configuration of this switch. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
revision number
number - Revision number of the spanning tree. (Range: 0-65535)
Default Setting
0
Command Mode
MST Configuration
Command Usage
The MST region name (page 4-225) and revision number are used to
designate a unique MST region. A bridge (i.e., spanning-tree compliant device
such as this switch) can only belong to one MST region. And all bridges in the
same region must be configured with the same MST instances.
Example
Related Commands
name (4-225)
max-hops
This command configures the maximum number of hops in the region before a
BPDU is discarded. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
max-hops hop-number
Console(config-mstp)#name R&D
Console(config-mstp)#
Console(config-mstp)#revision 1
Console(config-mstp)#
Spanning Tree Commands
4-227
4
hop-number - Maximum hop number for multiple spanning tree.
(Range: 1-40)
Default Setting
20
Command Mode
MST Configuration
Command Usage
An MSTI region is treated as a single node by the STP and RSTP protocols.
Therefore, the message age for BPDUs inside an MSTI region is never
changed. However, each spanning tree instance within a region, and the
internal spanning tree (IST) that connects these instances use a hop count to
specify the maximum number of bridges that will propagate a BPDU. Each
bridge decrements the hop count by one before passing on the BPDU. When
the hop count reaches zero, the message is dropped.
Example
spanning-tree spanning-disabled
This command disables the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface. Use
the no form to reenable the spanning tree algorithm for the specified interface.
Syntax
[no] spanning-tree spanning-disabled
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Example
This example disables the spanning tree algorithm for port 5.
spanning-tree cost
This command configures the spanning tree path cost for the specified interface.
Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree cost cost
no spanning-tree cost
Console(config-mstp)#max-hops 30
Console(config-mstp)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree spanning-disabled
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-228
4
cost - The path cost for the port.
(Range: 0 for auto-configuration, or 1-200,000,000)
The recommended range is:
• Ethernet: 200,000-20,000,000
• Fast Ethernet: 20,000-2,000,000
• Gigabit Ethernet: 2,000-200,000
• 10 Gigabit Ethernet: 200-20,000
Default Setting
By default, the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used
on each port, and configures the path cost according to the values shown
below. Path cost “0” is used to indicate auto-configuration mode.
• Ethernet – half duplex: 2,000,000; full duplex: 1,000,000; trunk: 500,000
• Fast Ethernet – half duplex: 200,000; full duplex: 100,000; trunk: 50,000
• Gigabit Ethernet – full duplex: 10,000; trunk: 5,000
• 10 Gigabit Ethernet – full duplex: 1000; trunk: 500
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• This command is used by the Spanning Tree Algorithm to determine the best
path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned to ports
attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to ports with slower
media.
• Path cost takes precedence over port priority.
• When the spanning-tree pathcost method (page 4-222) is set to short, the
maximum value for path cost is 65,535.
Example
spanning-tree port-priority
This command configures the priority for the specified interface. Use the no form to
restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree port-priority priority
no spanning-tree port-priority
priority - The priority for a port. (Range: 0-240, in steps of 16)
Default Setting
128
Command Mode
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree cost 50
Console(config-if)#
Spanning Tree Commands
4-229
4
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• This command defines the priority for the use of a port in the Spanning Tree
Algorithm. If the path cost for all ports on a switch are the same, the port with
the highest priority (that is, lowest value) will be configured as an active link in
the spanning tree.
• Where more than one port is assigned the highest priority, the port with lowest
numeric identifier will be enabled.
Example
Related Commands
spanning-tree cost (4-227)
spanning-tree edge-port
This command specifies an interface as an edge port. Use the no form to restore the
default.
Syntax
[no] spanning-tree edge-port
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• You can enable this option if an interface is attached to a LAN segment that
is at the end of a bridged LAN or to an end node. Since end nodes cannot
cause forwarding loops, they can pass directly through to the spanning tree
forwarding state. Specifying Edge Ports provides quicker convergence for
devices such as workstations or servers, retains the current forwarding
database to reduce the amount of frame flooding required to rebuild address
tables during reconfiguration events, does not cause the spanning tree to
initiate reconfiguration when the interface changes state, and also overcomes
other STA-related timeout problems. However, remember that Edge Port
should only be enabled for ports connected to an end-node device.
• This command has the same effect as the spanning-tree portfast.
Example
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree port-priority 0
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree edge-port
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-230
4
Related Commands
spanning-tree portfast (4-230)
spanning-tree portfast
This command sets an interface to fast forwarding. Use the no form to disable fast
forwarding.
Syntax
[no] spanning-tree portfast
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• This command is used to enable/disable the fast spanning-tree mode for the
selected port. In this mode, ports skip the Discarding and Learning states, and
proceed straight to Forwarding.
• Since end-nodes cannot cause forwarding loops, they can be passed through
the spanning tree state changes more quickly than allowed by standard
convergence time. Fast forwarding can achieve quicker convergence for
end-node workstations and servers, and also overcome other STA related
timeout problems. (Remember that fast forwarding should only be enabled for
ports connected to a LAN segment that is at the end of a bridged LAN or for
an end-node device.)
• This command is the same as spanning-tree edge-port, and is only included
for backward compatibility with earlier products. Note that this command may
be removed for future software versions.
Example
Related Commands
spanning-tree edge-port (4-229)
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#bridge-group 1 portfast
Console(config-if)#
Spanning Tree Commands
4-231
4
spanning-tree link-type
This command configures the link type for Rapid Spanning Tree and Multiple
Spanning Tree. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree link-type {auto | point-to-point | shared}
no spanning-tree link-type
•auto - Automatically derived from the duplex mode setting.
•point-to-point - Point-to-point link.
•shared - Shared medium.
Default Setting
auto
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• Specify a point-to-point link if the interface can only be connected to exactly
one other bridge, or a shared link if it can be connected to two or more bridges.
• When automatic detection is selected, the switch derives the link type from the
duplex mode. A full-duplex interface is considered a point-to-point link, while
a half-duplex interface is assumed to be on a shared link.
• RSTP only works on point-to-point links between two bridges. If you designate
a port as a shared link, RSTP is forbidden. Since MSTP is an extension of
RSTP, this same restriction applies.
Example
spanning-tree loopback-detection
This command enables the detection and response to Spanning Tree loopback
BPDU packets on the port. Use the no form to disable this feature.
Syntax
spanning-tree loopback-detection
no spanning-tree loopback-detection
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• If Port Loopback Detection is not enabled and a port receives it’s own BPDU, then
the port will drop the loopback BPDU according to IEEE Standard 802.1W-2001
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree link-type point-to-point
Command Line Interface
4-232
4
9.3.4 (Note 1).
•Port Loopback Detection will not be active if Spanning Tree is disabled on the
switch.
Example
spanning-tree loopback-detection release-mode
This command configures the release mode for a port that was placed in the
discarding state because a loopback BPDU was received. Use the no form to
restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree loopback-detection release-mode {auto | manual}
no spanning-tree loopback-detection release-mode
•auto - Allows a port to automatically be released from the discarding state
when the loopback state ends.
•manual - The port can only be released from the discarding state manually.
Default Setting
Auto
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• If the port is configured for automatic loopback release, then the port will only
be returned to the forwarding state if one of the following conditions is
satisfied:
- The port receives any other BPDU except for it’s own, or;
- The port’s link status changes to link down and then link up again, or;
- The port ceases to receive it’s own BPDUs in a forward delay interval.
• If Port Loopback Detection is not enabled and a port receives it’s own BPDU, then
the port will drop the loopback BPDU according to IEEE Standard 802.1W-2001
9.3.4 (Note 1).
• Port Loopback Detection will not be active if Spanning Tree is disabled on the
switch.
• When configured for manual release mode, then a link down / up event will not
release the port from the discarding state.
Example
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree loopback-detection
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree loopback-detection release-mode manual
Spanning Tree Commands
4-233
4
spanning-tree loopback-detection trap
This command enables SNMP trap notification for Spanning Tree loopback BPDU
detections. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree loopback-detection trap
no spanning-tree loopback-detection trap
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Example
spanning-tree mst cost
This command configures the path cost on a spanning instance in the Multiple
Spanning Tree. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree mst instance_id cost cost
no spanning-tree mst instance_id cost
•instance_id - Instance identifier of the spanning tree.
(Range: 0-4094, no leading zeroes)
•cost - Path cost for an interface. (Range: 1-200,000,000)
The recommended range is -
- Ethernet: 200,000-20,000,000
- Fast Ethernet: 20,000-2,000,000
- Gigabit Ethernet: 2,000-200,000
- 10 Gigabit Ethernet: 200-20,000
Default Setting
By default, the system automatically detects the speed and duplex mode used
on each port, and configures the path cost according to the values shown
below. Path cost “0” is used to indicate auto-configuration mode.
• Ethernet – half duplex: 2,000,000; full duplex: 1,000,000; trunk: 500,000
• Fast Ethernet – half duplex: 200,000; full duplex: 100,000; trunk: 50,000
• Gigabit Ethernet – full duplex: 10,000; trunk: 5,000
• 10 Gigabit Ethernet – full duplex: 1000; trunk: 500
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
Console(config)#interface ethernet ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree loopback-detection trap
Command Line Interface
4-234
4
• Each spanning-tree instance is associated with a unique set of VLAN IDs.
• This command is used by the multiple spanning-tree algorithm to determine
the best path between devices. Therefore, lower values should be assigned
to interfaces attached to faster media, and higher values assigned to
interfaces with slower media.
• Use the no spanning-tree mst cost command to specify auto-configuration
mode.
• Path cost takes precedence over interface priority.
Example
Related Commands
spanning-tree mst port-priority (4-234)
spanning-tree mst port-priority
This command configures the interface priority on a spanning instance in the
Multiple Spanning Tree. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
spanning-tree mst instance_id port-priority priority
no spanning-tree mst instance_id port-priority
•instance_id - Instance identifier of the spanning tree.
(Range: 0-4094, no leading zeroes)
•priority - Priority for an interface. (Range: 0-240 in steps of 16)
Default Setting
128
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• This command defines the priority for the use of an interface in the multiple
spanning-tree. If the path cost for all interfaces on a switch are the same, the
interface with the highest priority (that is, lowest value) will be configured as
an active link in the spanning tree.
• Where more than one interface is assigned the highest priority, the interface
with lowest numeric identifier will be enabled.
Example
Related Commands
Console(config)#interface ethernet ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree mst 1 cost 50
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#spanning-tree mst 1 port-priority 0
Console(config-if)#
Spanning Tree Commands
4-235
4
spanning-tree mst cost (4-233)
spanning-tree protocol-migration
This command re-checks the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected
interface.
Syntax
spanning-tree protocol-migration interface
interface
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-8)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
If at any time the switch detects STP BPDUs, including Configuration or
Topology Change Notification BPDUs, it will automatically set the selected
interface to forced STP-compatible mode. However, you can also use the
spanning-tree protocol-migration command at any time to manually
re-check the appropriate BPDU format to send on the selected interfaces (i.e.,
RSTP or STP-compatible).
Example
show spanning-tree
This command shows the configuration for the common spanning tree (CST) or for
an instance within the multiple spanning tree (MST).
Syntax
show spanning-tree [interface | mst instance_id]
•interface
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-8)
•instance_id - Instance identifier of the multiple spanning tree.
(Range: 0-4094, no leading zeroes)
Default Setting
None
Console#spanning-tree protocol-migration eth 1/5
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-236
4
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
•Use the show spanning-tree command with no parameters to display the
spanning tree configuration for the switch for the Common Spanning Tree
(CST) and for every interface in the tree.
• Use the show spanning-tree interface command to display the spanning tree
configuration for an interface within the Common Spanning Tree (CST).
•Use the show spanning-tree mst instance_id command to display the
spanning tree configuration for an instance within the Multiple Spanning Tree
(MST).
• For a description of the items displayed under “Spanning-tree information,”
see “Configuring Global Settings” on page 3-141. For a description of the
items displayed for specific interfaces, see “Displaying Interface Settings” on
page 3-144.
Example
Console#show spanning-tree
Spanning-tree information
---------------------------------------------------------------
Spanning tree mode: MSTP
Spanning tree enable/disable: enable
Instance: 0
Vlans configuration: 1-4092
Priority: 32768
Bridge Hello Time (sec.): 2
Bridge Max Age (sec.): 20
Bridge Forward Delay (sec.): 15
Root Hello Time (sec.): 2
Root Max Age (sec.): 20
Root Forward Delay (sec.): 15
Max hops: 20
Remaining hops: 20
Designated Root: 32768.0.0000ABCD0000
Current root port: 1
Current root cost: 10000
Number of topology changes: 1
Last topology changes time (sec.): 22
Transmission limit: 3
Path Cost Method: long
Spanning Tree Commands
4-237
4
show spanning-tree mst configuration
This command shows the configuration of the multiple spanning tree.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
---------------------------------------------------------------
Eth 1/ 1 information
---------------------------------------------------------------
Admin status: enable
Role: root
State: forwarding
External admin path cost: 10000
Internal admin cost: 10000
External oper path cost: 10000
Internal oper path cost: 10000
Priority: 128
Designated cost: 200000
Designated port: 128.24
Designated root: 32768.0.0000ABCD0000
Designated bridge: 32768.0.0030F1552000
Fast forwarding: disable
Forward transitions: 1
Admin edge port: enable
Oper edge port: disable
Admin Link type: auto
Oper Link type: point-to-point
Spanning Tree Status: enable
.
.
.
Console#show spanning-tree mst configuration
Mstp Configuration Information
--------------------------------------------------------------
Configuration name: R&D
Revision level:0
Instance Vlans
--------------------------------------------------------------
1 2
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-238
4
VLAN Commands
A VLAN is a group of ports that can be located anywhere in the network, but
communicate as though they belong to the same physical segment. This section
describes commands used to create VLAN groups, add port members, specify how
VLAN tagging is used, and enable automatic VLAN registration for the selected
interface.
GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN
information in order to automatically register VLAN members on interfaces across
the network. This section describes how to enable GVRP for individual interfaces
and globally for the switch, as well as how to display default configuration settings
for the Bridge Extension MIB.
Table 4-59 VLANs
Command Groups Function Page
GVRP and Bridge Extension Configures GVRP settings that permit automatic VLAN learning;
shows the configuration for bridge extension MIB
4-238
Editing VLAN Groups Sets up VLAN groups, including name, VID and state 4-242
Configuring VLAN
Interfaces
Configures VLAN interface parameters, including ingress and egress
tagging mode, ingress filtering, PVID, and GVRP
4-244
Displaying VLAN
Information
Displays VLAN groups, status, port members, and MAC addresses 4-250
Configuring 802.1Q
Tunneling
Configures 802.1Q Tunneling (QinQ Tunneling) 4-251
Configuring Private VLANs Configures private VLANs, including uplink and downlink ports 4-254
Configuring Protocol VLANs Configures protocol-based VLANs based on frame type and protocol 4-261
Table 4-60 GVRP and Bridge Extension Commands
Command Function Mode Page
bridge-ext gvrp Enables GVRP globally for the switch GC 4-239
show bridge-ext Shows the global bridge extension configuration PE 4-239
switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface IC 4-240
switchport forbidden vlan Configures forbidden VLANs for an interface IC 4-249
show gvrp configuration Displays GVRP configuration for the selected interface NE, PE 4-240
garp timer Sets the GARP timer for the selected function IC 4-241
show garp timer Shows the GARP timer for the selected function NE, PE 4-241
VLAN Commands
4-239
4
bridge-ext gvrp
This command enables GVRP globally for the switch. Use the no form to disable it.
Syntax
[no] bridge-ext gvrp
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
GVRP defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to
register VLAN members on ports across the network. This function should be
enabled to permit automatic VLAN registration, and to support VLANs which
extend beyond the local switch.
Example
show bridge-ext
This command shows the configuration for bridge extension commands.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
See “Displaying Basic VLAN Information” on page 3-159 and “Displaying
Bridge Extension Capabilities” on page 3-15 for a description of the displayed
items.
Example
Console(config)#bridge-ext gvrp
Console(config)#
Console#show bridge-ext
Max support vlan numbers: 256
Max support vlan ID: 4092
Extended multicast filtering services: No
Static entry individual port: Yes
VLAN learning: IVL
Configurable PVID tagging: Yes
Local VLAN capable: No
Traffic classes: Enabled
Global GVRP status: Enabled
GMRP: Disabled
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-240
4
switchport gvrp
This command enables GVRP for a port. Use the no form to disable it.
Syntax
[no] switchport gvrp
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Example
show gvrp configuration
This command shows if GVRP is enabled.
Syntax
show gvrp configuration [interface]
interface
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-8)
Default Setting
Shows both global and interface-specific configuration.
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Example
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/6
Console(config-if)#switchport gvrp
Console(config-if)#
Console#show gvrp configuration ethernet 1/6
Eth 1/ 6:
GVRP configuration: Enabled
Console#
VLAN Commands
4-241
4
garp timer
This command sets the values for the join, leave and leaveall timers. Use the no
form to restore the timers’ default values.
Syntax
garp timer {join | leave | leaveall} timer_value
no garp timer {join | leave | leaveall}
•{join | leave | leaveall} - Which timer to set.
•timer_value - Value of timer.
Ranges:
join: 20-1000 centiseconds
leave: 60-3000 centiseconds
leaveall: 500-18000 centiseconds
Default Setting
• join: 20 centiseconds
• leave: 60 centiseconds
• leaveall: 1000 centiseconds
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• Group Address Registration Protocol is used by GVRP and GMRP to register
or deregister client attributes for client services within a bridged LAN. The
default values for the GARP timers are independent of the media access
method or data rate. These values should not be changed unless you are
experiencing difficulties with GMRP or GVRP registration/deregistration.
• Timer values are applied to GVRP for all the ports on all VLANs.
• Timer values must meet the following restrictions:
- leave >= (2 x join)
- leaveall > leave
Note: Set GVRP timers on all Layer 2 devices connected in the same network to
the same values. Otherwise, GVRP may not operate successfully.
Example
Related Commands
show garp timer (4-241)
show garp timer
This command shows the GARP timers for the selected interface.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#garp timer join 100
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-242
4
Syntax
show garp timer [interface]
interface
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-8)
Default Setting
Shows all GARP timers.
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Example
Related Commands
garp timer (4-241)
Editing VLAN Groups
vlan database
This command enters VLAN database mode. All commands in this mode will take
effect immediately.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Console#show garp timer ethernet 1/1
Eth 1/ 1 GARP timer status:
Join timer: 100 centiseconds
Leave timer: 60 centiseconds
Leaveall timer: 1000 centiseconds
Console#
Table 4-61 Editing VLAN Groups
Command Function Mode Page
vlan database Enters VLAN database mode to add, change, and delete
VLANs
GC 4-242
vlan Configures a VLAN, including VID, name and state VC 4-243
VLAN Commands
4-243
4
Command Usage
• Use the VLAN database command mode to add, change, and delete VLANs.
After finishing configuration changes, you can display the VLAN settings by
entering the show vlan command.
•Use the interface vlan command mode to define the port membership mode
and add or remove ports from a VLAN. The results of these commands are
written to the running-configuration file, and you can display this file by
entering the show running-config command.
Example
Related Commands
show vlan (4-250)
vlan
This command configures a VLAN. Use the no form to restore the default settings or
delete a VLAN.
Syntax
vlan vlan-id [name vlan-name] media ethernet [state {active | suspend}]
no vlan vlan-id [name | state]
•vlan-id - ID of configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4092, no leading zeroes)
•name - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name.
-vlan-name - ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters.
•media ethernet - Ethernet media type.
•state - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN state.
-active - VLAN is operational.
-suspend - VLAN is suspended. Suspended VLANs do not pass packets.
Default Setting
By default only VLAN 1 exists and is active.
Command Mode
VLAN Database Configuration
Command Usage
•no vlan vlan-id deletes the VLAN.
•no vlan vlan-id name removes the VLAN name.
•no vlan vlan-id state returns the VLAN to the default state (i.e., active).
• You can configure up to 255 VLANs on the switch.
Note: The switch allows 255 user-manageable VLANs. One extra, unmanageable VLAN
(VLAN ID 4093) is maintained for IP clustering.
Console(config)#vlan database
Console(config-vlan)#
Command Line Interface
4-244
4
Example
The following example adds a VLAN, using VLAN ID 105 and name RD5. The VLAN
is activated by default.
Related Commands
show vlan (4-250)
Configuring VLAN Interfaces
interface vlan
This command enters interface configuration mode for VLANs, which is used to
configure VLAN parameters for a physical interface.
Syntax
interface vlan vlan-id
vlan-id - ID of the configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4092, no leading zeroes)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Console(config)#vlan database
Console(config-vlan)#vlan 105 name RD5 media ethernet
Console(config-vlan)#
Table 4-62 Configuring VLAN Interfaces
Command Function Mode Page
interface vlan Enters interface configuration mode for a specified VLAN GC 4-244
switchport mode Configures VLAN membership mode for an interface IC 4-245
switchport
acceptable-frame-types
Configures frame types to be accepted by an interface IC 4-246
switchport ingress-filtering Enables ingress filtering on an interface IC 4-246
switchport native vlan Configures the PVID (native VLAN) of an interface IC 4-247
switchport allowed vlan Configures the VLANs associated with an interface IC 4-248
switchport gvrp Enables GVRP for an interface IC 4-240
switchport forbidden vlan Configures forbidden VLANs for an interface IC 4-249
switchport priority default Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames IC 4-265
VLAN Commands
4-245
4
Example
The following example shows how to set the interface configuration mode to
VLAN 1, and then assign an IP address to the VLAN:
Related Commands
shutdown (4-171)
switchport mode
This command configures the VLAN membership mode for a port. Use the no form
to restore the default.
Syntax
switchport mode {trunk | hybrid | private-vlan}
no switchport mode
•trunk - Specifies a port as an end-point for a VLAN trunk. A trunk is a direct
link between two switches, so the port transmits tagged frames that identify
the source VLAN. Note that frames belonging to the port’s default VLAN
(i.e., associated with the PVID) are also transmitted as tagged frames.
•hybrid - Specifies a hybrid VLAN interface. The port may transmit tagged
or untagged frames.
•private-vlan - For an explanation of this command see “switchport mode
private-vlan” on page 4-257.
Default Setting
All ports are in hybrid mode with the PVID set to VLAN 1.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Example
The following shows how to set the configuration mode to port 1, and then set the
switchport mode to hybrid:
Related Commands
switchport acceptable-frame-types (4-246)
Console(config)#interface vlan 1
Console(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.254 255.255.255.0
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#switchport mode hybrid
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-246
4
switchport acceptable-frame-types
This command configures the acceptable frame types for a port. Use the no form to
restore the default.
Syntax
switchport acceptable-frame-types {all | tagged}
no switchport acceptable-frame-types
•all - The port accepts all frames, tagged or untagged.
•tagged - The port only receives tagged frames.
Default Setting
All frame types
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
When set to receive all frame types, any received frames that are untagged
are assigned to the default VLAN.
Example
The following example shows how to restrict the traffic received on port 1 to tagged
frames:
Related Commands
switchport mode (4-245)
switchport ingress-filtering
This command enables ingress filtering for an interface.
Note: Although the ingress filtering command is available, the switch has ingress filtering
permanently set to enable. Therefore, trying to disable the filtering with the
no switchport ingress-filtering command will produce this error message:
“Note: Failed to ingress-filtering on ethernet interface !”
Syntax
switchport ingress-filtering
no switchport ingress-filtering
Default Setting
Enabled
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#switchport acceptable-frame-types tagged
Console(config-if)#
VLAN Commands
4-247
4
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• Ingress filtering only affects tagged frames.
• With ingress filtering enabled, a port will discard received frames tagged for
VLANs for it which it is not a member.
• Ingress filtering does not affect VLAN independent BPDU frames, such as
GVRP or STA. However, they do affect VLAN dependent BPDU frames, such
as GMRP.
Example
The following example shows how to select port 1 and then enable ingress filtering:
switchport native vlan
This command configures the PVID (i.e., default VLAN ID) for a port. Use the no
form to restore the default.
Syntax
switchport native vlan vlan-id
no switchport native vlan
vlan-id - Default VLAN ID for a port. (Range: 1-4092, no leading zeroes)
Default Setting
VLAN 1
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• Setting the native VLAN for a port can only be performed when the port is a
member of the VLAN and the VLAN is untagged. The no switchport native
vlan command will set the native VLAN of the port to untagged VLAN 1.
• If acceptable frame types is set to all or switchport mode is set to hybrid, the
PVID will be inserted into all untagged frames entering the ingress port.
Example
The following example shows how to set the PVID for port 1 to VLAN 3:
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#switchport ingress-filtering
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#switchport native vlan 3
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-248
4
switchport allowed vlan
This command configures VLAN groups on the selected interface. Use the no form
to restore the default.
Note: Each port can only have one untagged VLAN. If a second VLAN is defined for
a port as untagged, the other VLAN that had untagged status will
automatically be changed to tagged. Setting a VLAN untagged will also
change the native VLAN of the port to this VLAN.
Syntax
switchport allowed vlan {add vlan-list [tagged | untagged] |
remove vlan-list}
no switchport allowed vlan
•add vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to add.
•remove vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to remove.
•vlan-list - Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no
spaces; use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs. Do not enter leading
zeros. (Range: 1-4092).
Default Setting
All ports are assigned to VLAN 1 by default.
The default frame type is untagged.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• A port, or a trunk with switchport mode set to hybrid, must be assigned to a
VLAN as untagged.
• If a trunk has switchport mode set to trunk (i.e., 1Q Trunk), then you can only
assign an interface to VLAN groups as a tagged member.
• Frames are always tagged within the switch. The tagged/untagged parameter
used when adding a VLAN to an interface tells the switch whether to keep or
remove the tag from a frame on egress.
• The interface can be added to a VLAN as an untagged member regardless of
connected devices to this interface. The default setting is untagged VLAN 1.
Note that each port can only have one untagged VLAN. If a second VLAN is
defined for a port as untagged, the other VLAN that had untagged status will
automatically be changed to tagged. Setting a VLAN untagged will also
change the native VLAN of the port to this VLAN.
• If a VLAN on the forbidden list for an interface is manually added to that
interface, the VLAN is automatically removed from the forbidden list for that
interface.
VLAN Commands
4-249
4
Example
The following example shows how to add VLANs 1, 2, 5 and 6 to the allowed list as
tagged VLANs for port 1:
switchport forbidden vlan
This command configures forbidden VLANs. Use the no form to remove the list of
forbidden VLANs.
Syntax
switchport forbidden vlan {add vlan-list | remove vlan-list}
no switchport forbidden vlan
•add vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to add.
•remove vlan-list - List of VLAN identifiers to remove.
•vlan-list - Separate nonconsecutive VLAN identifiers with a comma and no
spaces; use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs. Do not enter leading
zeros. (Range: 1-4092).
Default Setting
No VLANs are included in the forbidden list.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• This command prevents a VLAN from being automatically added to the
specified interface via GVRP.
• If a VLAN has been added to the set of allowed VLANs for an interface, then
you cannot add it to the set of forbidden VLANs for that same interface.
Example
The following example shows how to prevent port 1 from being added to VLAN 3:
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#switchport allowed vlan add 1,2,5,6 tagged
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#switchport forbidden vlan add 3
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-250
4
Displaying VLAN Information
show vlan
This command shows VLAN information.
Syntax
show vlan [id vlan-id | name vlan-name | private-vlan private-vlan-type]
•id - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN ID.
-vlan-id - ID of the configured VLAN. (Range: 1-4092, no leading zeroes)
•name - Keyword to be followed by the VLAN name.
-vlan-name - ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters.
•private-vlan - For an explanation of this command see “show vlan
private-vlan” on page 4-259
-private-vlan-type - Indicates the private vlan type.
(Options: Community, Isolated, Primary)
Default Setting
Shows all VLANs.
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Example
The following example shows how to display information for VLAN 1:
Table 4-63 Show VLAN Commands
Command Function Mode Page
show vlan Shows VLAN information NE, PE 4-250
show interfaces status vlan Displays status for the specified VLAN interface NE, PE 4-173
show interfaces switchport Displays the administrative and operational status of an
interface
NE, PE 4-175
Console#show vlan id 1
Default VLAN ID : 1
VLAN ID: 1
Type: Static
Name: DefaultVlan
Status: Active
Ports/Port Channels: Eth1/ 1(S) Eth1/ 2(S) Eth1/ 3(S) Eth1/ 4(S) Eth1/ 5(S)
Eth1/ 6(S) Eth1/ 7(S) Eth1/ 8(S) Eth1/ 9(S) Eth1/10(S)
Eth1/11(S) Eth1/12(S) Eth1/13(S) Eth1/14(S) Eth1/15(S)
Eth1/16(S) Eth1/17(S) Eth1/18(S) Eth1/19(S) Eth1/20(S)
Eth1/21(S) Eth1/22(S) Eth1/23(S) Eth1/24(S) Eth1/25(S)
Eth1/26(S) Eth1/27(S) Eth1/28(S)
Console#
VLAN Commands
4-251
4
Configuring IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling
IEEE 802.1Q tunneling (QinQ tunneling) uses a single Service Provider VLAN
(SPVLAN) for customers who have multiple VLANs. Customer VLAN IDs are
preserved and traffic from different customers is segregated within the service
provider’s network even when they use the same customer-specific VLAN IDs. QinQ
tunneling expands VLAN space by using a VLAN-in-VLAN hierarchy, preserving the
customer’s original tagged packets, and adding SPVLAN tags to each frame (also
called double tagging).
This section describes commands used to configure QinQ tunneling.
General Configuration Guidelines for QinQ
1. Configure the switch to QinQ mode (dot1q-tunnel system-tunnel-control,
page 4-251).
2. Create a SPVLAN (vlan, page 4-243).
3. Configure the QinQ tunnel access port to dot1Q-tunnel access mode
(switchport dot1q-tunnel mode, page 4-252).
4. Set the Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) value of the tunnel access port. This step
is required if the attached client is using a nonstandard 2-byte ethertype to
identify 802.1Q tagged frames. The standard ethertype value is 0x8100. (See
switchport dot1q-tunnel tpid, page 4-253.)
5. Configure the QinQ tunnel access port to join the SPVLAN as an untagged
member (switchport allowed vlan, page 4-248).
6. Configure the SPVLAN ID as the native VID on the QinQ tunnel access port
(switchport native vlan, page 4-247).
7. Configure the QinQ tunnel uplink port to dot1Q-tunnel uplink mode (switchport
dot1q-tunnel mode, page 4-252).
8. Configure the QinQ tunnel uplink port to join the SPVLAN as a tagged member
(switchport allowed vlan, page 4-248).
dot1q-tunnel system-tunnel-control
This command sets the switch to operate in QinQ mode. Use the no form to disable
QinQ operating mode.
Syntax
[no] dot1q-tunnel system-tunnel-control
Table 4-64 IEEE 802.1Q Tunneling Commands
Command Function Mode Page
dot1q-tunnel
system-tunnel-control
Configures the switch to operate in normal mode or QinQ
mode
GC 4-251
switchport dot1q-tunnel
mode
Configures an interface as a QinQ tunnel port IC 4-252
switchport dot1q-tunnel tpid Sets the Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) value of a tunnel port IC 4-253
show dot1q-tunnel Displays the configuration of QinQ tunnel ports PE 4-253
show interfaces switchport Displays port QinQ operational status PE 4-175
Command Line Interface
4-252
4
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
QinQ tunnel mode must be enabled on the switch for QinQ interface settings
to be functional.
Example
Related Commands
show dot1q-tunnel (4-253)
show interfaces switchport (4-175)
switchport dot1q-tunnel mode
This command configures an interface as a QinQ tunnel port. Use the no form to
disable QinQ on the interface.
Syntax
switchport dot1q-tunnel mode <access | uplink>
no switchport dot1q-tunnel mode
•access – Sets the port as an 802.1Q tunnel access port.
•uplink – Sets the port as an 802.1Q tunnel uplink port.
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
Use the dot1q-tunnel system-tunnel-control command to set the switch to
QinQ mode before entering this command.
Example
Related Commands
show dot1q-tunnel (4-253)
show interfaces switchport (4-175)
Console(config)#dot1q-tunnel system-tunnel-control
Console(config)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#switchport dot1q-tunnel mode access
Console(config-if)#
VLAN Commands
4-253
4
switchport dot1q-tunnel tpid
This command sets the Tag Protocol Identifier (TPID) value of a tunnel port. Use the
no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
switchport dot1q-tunnel tpid tpid
no switchport dot1q-tunnel tpid
tpid – Sets the ethertype value for 802.1Q encapsulation. This identifier is
used to select a nonstandard 2-byte ethertype to identify 802.1Q tagged
frames. The standard ethertype value is 0x8100. (Range: 0800-FFFF
hexadecimal)
Default Setting
0x8100
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
•Use the switchport dot1q-tunnel tpid command to set a custom 802.1Q
ethertype value on the selected interface. This feature allows the switch to
interoperate with third-party switches that do not use the standard 0x8100
ethertype to identify 802.1Q-tagged frames. For example, 0x1234 is set as the
custom 802.1Q ethertype on a trunk port, incoming frames containing that
ethertype are assigned to the VLAN contained in the tag following the
ethertype field, as they would be with a standard 802.1Q trunk. Frames
arriving on the port containing any other ethertype are looked upon as
untagged frames, and assigned to the native VLAN of that port.
• All ports on the switch will be set to the same ethertype.
Example
Related Commands
show interfaces switchport (4-175)
show dot1q-tunnel
This command displays information about QinQ tunnel ports.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#switchport dot1q-tunnel tpid 9100
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-254
4
Example
Related Commands
switchport dot1q-tunnel mode (4-252)
Configuring Private VLANs
Private VLANs provide port-based security and isolation between ports within
the assigned VLAN. This switch supports two types of private VLANs: primary/
secondary associated groups, and stand-alone isolated VLANs. A primary VLAN
contains promiscuous ports that can communicate with all other ports in the private
VLAN group, while a secondary (or community) VLAN contains community ports
that can only communicate with other hosts within the secondary VLAN and with any
of the promiscuous ports in the associated primary VLAN. Isolated VLANs, on the
other hand, consist a single stand-alone VLAN that contains one promiscuous port
and one or more isolated (or host) ports. In all cases, the promiscuous ports are
designed to provide open access to an external network such as the Internet, while
the community or isolated ports provide restricted access to local users.
Multiple primary VLANs can be configured on this switch, and multiple community
VLANs can be associated with each primary VLAN. One or more isolated VLANs
can also be configured. (Note that private VLANs and normal VLANs can exist
simultaneously within the same switch.)
This section describes commands used to configure private VLANs.
Console(config)#dot1q-tunnel system-tunnel-control
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#switchport dot1q-tunnel mode access
Console(config-if)#interface ethernet 1/2
Console(config-if)#switchport dot1q-tunnel mode uplink
Console(config-if)#end
Console#show dot1q-tunnel
Current double-tagged status of the system is Enabled
The dot1q-tunnel mode of the set interface 1/1 is Access mode, TPID is 0x8100.
The dot1q-tunnel mode of the set interface 1/2 is Uplink mode, TPID is 0x8100.
The dot1q-tunnel mode of the set interface 1/3 is Normal mode, TPID is 0x8100.
The dot1q-tunnel mode of the set interface 1/4 is Normal mode, TPID is 0x8100.
The dot1q-tunnel mode of the set interface 1/5 is Normal mode, TPID is 0x8100.
The dot1q-tunnel mode of the set interface 1/6 is Normal mode, TPID is 0x8100.
The dot1q-tunnel mode of the set interface 1/7 is Normal mode, TPID is 0x8100.
.
.
.
.
The dot1q-tunnel mode of the set interface 1/24 is Normal mode, TPID is 0x8100.
Console#
Table 4-65 Private VLAN Commands
Command Function Mode Page
Edit Private VLAN Groups
private-vlan Adds or deletes primary, community, or isolated VLANs VC 4-256
VLAN Commands
4-255
4
To configure primary/secondary associated groups, follow these steps:
1. Use the private-vlan command to designate one or more community VLANs
and the primary VLAN that will channel traffic outside of the community groups.
2. Use the private-vlan association command to map the community VLAN(s) to
the primary VLAN.
3. Use the switchport mode private-vlan command to configure ports as
promiscuous (i.e., having access to all ports in the primary VLAN) or host (i.e.,
community port).
4. Use the switchport private-vlan host-association command to assign a port
to a secondary VLAN.
5. Use the switchport private-vlan mapping command to assign a port to a
primary VLAN.
6. Use the show vlan private-vlan command to verify your configuration settings.
To configure isolated VLANs, follow these steps:
1. Use the private-vlan command to designate an isolated VLAN that will contain
a single promiscuous port and one or more isolated ports.
2. Use the switchport mode private-vlan command to configure one port as
promiscuous (i.e., having access to all ports in the isolated VLAN) one or more
ports as host (i.e., isolated port).
3. Use the switchport private-vlan isolated command to assign a port to an
isolated VLAN.
4. Use the show vlan private-vlan command to verify your configuration settings.
private-vlan association Associates a community VLAN with a primary VLAN VC 4-256
Configure Private VLAN Interfaces
switchport mode
private-vlan
Sets an interface to host mode or promiscuous mode IC 4-257
switchport private-vlan
host-association
Associates an interface with a secondary VLAN IC 4-258
switchport private-vlan
isolated
Associates an interface with an isolated VLAN IC 4-258
switchport private-vlan
mapping
Maps an interface to a primary VLAN IC 4-259
Display Private VLAN Information
show vlan private-vlan Shows private VLAN information NE,
PE
4-259
Table 4-65 Private VLAN Commands
Command Function Mode Page
Command Line Interface
4-256
4
private-vlan
Use this command to create a primary, community, or isolated private VLAN. Use
the no form to remove the specified private VLAN.
Syntax
private-vlan vlan-id {community | primary | isolated}
no private-vlan vlan-id
•vlan-id - ID of private VLAN. (Range: 1-4092, no leading zeroes).
•community - A VLAN in which traffic is restricted to host members in the
same VLAN and to promiscuous ports in the associate primary VLAN.
•primary - A VLAN which can contain one or more community VLANs, and
serves to channel traffic between community VLANs and other locations.
•isolated – Specifies an isolated VLAN. Ports assigned to an isolated VLAN
can only communicate with the promiscuous port within their own VLAN.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
VLAN Configuration
Command Usage
• Private VLANs are used to restrict traffic to ports within the same community
or isolated VLAN, and channel traffic passing outside the community through
promiscuous ports. When using community VLANs, they must be mapped to
an associated “primary” VLAN that contains promiscuous ports. When using
an isolated VLAN, it must be configured to contain a single promiscuous port.
• Port membership for private VLANs is static. Once a port has been assigned
to a private VLAN, it cannot be dynamically moved to another VLAN via GVRP.
• Private VLAN ports cannot be set to trunked mode. (See “switchport mode” on
page 4-245.)
Example
private vlan association
Use this command to associate a primary VLAN with a secondary (i.e., community)
VLAN. Use the no form to remove all associations for the specified primary VLAN.
Syntax
private-vlan primary-vlan-id association {secondary-vlan-id |
add secondary-vlan-id | remove secondary-vlan-id}
Console(config)#vlan database
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 2 primary
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 3 community
Console(config)#
VLAN Commands
4-257
4
no private-vlan primary-vlan-id association
•primary-vlan-id - ID of primary VLAN.
(Range: 1-4092, no leading zeroes).
•secondary-vlan-id - ID of secondary (i.e, community) VLAN.
(Range: 1-4092, no leading zeroes).
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
VLAN Configuration
Command Usage
Secondary VLANs provide security for group members. The associated
primary VLAN provides a common interface for access to other network
resources within the primary VLAN (e.g., servers configured with promiscuous
ports) and to resources outside of the primary VLAN (via promiscuous ports).
Example
switchport mode private-vlan
Use this command to set the private VLAN mode for an interface. Use the no form to
restore the default setting.
Syntax
switchport mode private-vlan {host | promiscuous}
no switchport mode private-vlan
•host – This port type can subsequently be assigned to a community or
isolated VLAN.
•promiscuous – This port type can communicate with all other promiscuous
ports in the same primary VLAN, as well as with all the ports in the
associated secondary VLANs.
Default Setting
Normal VLAN
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• To assign a promiscuous port to a primary VLAN, use the switchport
private-vlan mapping command. To assign a host port to a community
VLAN, use the private-vlan host association command.
Console(config-vlan)#private-vlan 2 association 3
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-258
4
• To assign a promiscuous port or host port to an isolated VLAN, use the
switchport private-vlan isolated command.
Example
switchport private-vlan host-association
Use this command to associate an interface with a secondary VLAN. Use the no
form to remove this association.
Syntax
switchport private-vlan host-association secondary-vlan-id
no switchport private-vlan host-association
secondary-vlan-id - ID of secondary (i.e., community) VLAN.
(Range: 1-4092, no leading zeroes).
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
All ports assigned to a secondary (i.e., community) VLAN can pass traffic
between group members, but must communicate with resources outside of the
group via promiscuous ports in the associated primary VLAN.
Example
switchport private-vlan isolated
Use this command to assign an interface to an isolated VLAN. Use the no form to
remove this assignment.
Syntax
switchport private-vlan isolated isolated-vlan-id
no switchport private-vlan isolated
isolated-vlan-id - ID of isolated VLAN. (Range: 1-4092).
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2
Console(config-if)#switchport mode private-vlan promiscuous
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3
Console(config-if)#switchport mode private-vlan host
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3
Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan host-association 3
Console(config-if)#
VLAN Commands
4-259
4
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
Host ports assigned to a isolated VLAN cannot pass traffic between group
members, and must communicate with resources outside of the group via a
promiscuous port.
Example
switchport private-vlan mapping
Use this command to map an interface to a primary VLAN. Use the no form to
remove this mapping.
Syntax
switchport private-vlan mapping primary-vlan-id
no switchport private-vlan mapping
primary-vlan-id – ID of primary VLAN. (Range: 1-4092, no leading zeroes).
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
Promiscuous ports assigned to a primary VLAN can communicate with any
other promiscuous ports in the same VLAN, and with the group members
within any associated secondary VLANs.
Example
show vlan private-vlan
Use this command to show the private VLAN configuration settings on this switch.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3
Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan isolated 3
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/2
Console(config-if)#switchport private-vlan mapping 2
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-260
4
Syntax
show vlan private-vlan [community | isolated | primary]
•community – Displays all community VLANs, along with their associated
primary VLAN and assigned host interfaces.
•isolated – Displays an isolated VLAN, along with the assigned
promiscuous interface and host interfaces. The Primary and Secondary
fields both display the isolated VLAN ID.
•primary – Displays all primary VLANs, along with any assigned
promiscuous interfaces.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Executive
Example
Console#show vlan private-vlan
Primary Secondary Type Interfaces
-------- ----------- ---------- ------------------------------
5 primary Eth1/ 3
5 6 community Eth1/ 4 Eth1/ 5
0 8 isolated
Console#
VLAN Commands
4-261
4
Configuring Protocol-based VLANs
The network devices required to support multiple protocols cannot be easily grouped
into a common VLAN. This may require non-standard devices to pass traffic
between different VLANs in order to encompass all the devices participating in a
specific protocol. This kind of configuration deprives users of the basic benefits of
VLANs, including security and easy accessibility.
To avoid these problems, you can configure this switch with protocol-based VLANs
that divide the physical network into logical VLAN groups for each required protocol.
When a frame is received at a port, its VLAN membership can then be determined
based on the protocol type in use by the inbound packets.
To configure protocol-based VLANs, follow these steps:
1. First configure VLAN groups for the protocols you want to use (page 4-243).
Although not mandatory, we suggest configuring a separate VLAN for each
major protocol running on your network. Do not add port members at this time.
2. Create a protocol group for each of the protocols you want to assign to a VLAN
using the protocol-vlan protocol-group add command.
3. Then map the protocol group to the appropriate VLAN using the protocol-vlan
protocol-group vlan command.
Note: Traffic which matches IP Protocol Ethernet Frames is mapped to the VLAN
(VLAN 1) that has been configured with the switch’s administrative IP. IP Protocol
Ethernet traffic must not be mapped to another VLAN or you will lose
administrative network connectivity to the switch. If lost in this manner, network
access can be regained by removing the offending Protocol VLAN rule via the
console. Alternately, the switch can be power-cycled, however all unsaved
configuration changes will be lost.
protocol-vlan protocol-group (Configuring Groups)
This command creates a protocol group. Only one frame and protocol type can be
added to a protocol group. Use the no form to remove a protocol group.
Syntax
protocol-vlan protocol-group group-id [{add | remove} frame-type frame
protocol-type protocol]
no protocol-vlan protocol-group group-id
Table 4-66 Protocol-based VLAN Commands
Command Function Mode Page
protocol-vlan protocol-group Create a protocol group, specifying the supported protocols GC 4-261
protocol-vlan protocol-group Maps a protocol group to a VLAN GC 4-262
show protocol-vlan
protocol-group
Shows the configuration of protocol groups PE 4-263
show protocol-vlan
protocol-group-vid
Shows the mapping of protocol groups to VLAN PE 4-263
Command Line Interface
4-262
4
•group-id - Group identifier of this protocol group. (Range: 1-2147483647)
•frame1 - Frame type used by this protocol. (Options: ethernet, rfc_1042,
llc_other)
•protocol - Protocol type. The only option for the llc_other frame type is
ipx_raw. The options for all other frames types include: ip, arp, and rarp.
Default Setting
No protocol groups are configured.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
The following creates protocol group 2, and specifies Ethernet frames transmitting
ARP protocol type traffic:
protocol-vlan protocol-group (Configuring VLANs)
This command globally maps a protocol group to a VLAN. Use the no form to
remove the protocol mapping.
Syntax
protocol-vlan protocol-group group-id vlan vlan-id
no protocol-vlan protocol-group group-id vlan
•group-id - Group identifier of this protocol group. (Range: 1-2147483647)
•vlan-id - VLAN to which matching protocol traffic is forwarded.
(Range: 1-4092)
Default Setting
No protocol groups are mapped to any VLANs.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• When creating a protocol-based VLAN, do not assign interfaces to the
protocol VLAN via any of the standard VLAN commands. If you assign
interfaces using any of the other VLAN commands (such as vlan on
page 4-243), the switch will admit traffic of any protocol type into the
associated VLAN.
• When a frame enters the switch that has protocol VLANs configured, it is
processed in the following manner:
- If the frame is tagged, it will be processed according to the standard rules
1. SNAP frame types are not supported by this switch due to hardware limitations.
Console(config)#protocol-vlan protocol-group 2 add frame-type ethernet
protocol-type arp
Console(config)#
VLAN Commands
4-263
4
applied to tagged frames.
- If the frame is untagged and the protocol type matches, the frame is
forwarded to the appropriate VLAN.
- If the frame is untagged but the protocol type does not match, the frame is
forwarded to the default VLAN for the interface.
Example
The following example maps traffic matching the protocol type specified in protocol
group 2 to VLAN 2.
show protocol-vlan protocol-group
This command shows the frame and protocol type associated with protocol groups.
Syntax
show protocol-vlan protocol-group [group-id]
group-id - Group identifier for a protocol group. (Range: 1-2147483647)
Default Setting
All protocol groups are displayed.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
This shows protocol group 2 configured for IP over RFC 1042:
show protocol-vlan protocol-group-vid
This command shows the mapping from protocol groups to VLANs.
Syntax
show protocol-vlan protocol-group-vid
Default Setting
The mapping for all protocol groups is displayed.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console(config)#protocol-vlan protocol-group 2 vlan 2
Console(config)#
Console#show protocol-vlan protocol-group
ProtocolGroup ID Frame Type Protocol Type
------------------ ------------- ---------------
2 RFC 1042 08 00
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-264
4
This shows that traffic matching the specifications for protocol group 2 will be
mapped to VLAN 2:
Priority Commands
The commands described in this section allow you to specify which data packets
have greater precedence when traffic is buffered in the switch due to congestion.
This switch supports CoS with four priority queues for each port. Data packets in a
port’s high-priority queue will be transmitted before those in the lower-priority
queues. You can set the default priority for each interface, the relative weight of each
queue, and the mapping of frame priority tags to the switch’s priority queues.
Priority Commands (Layer 2)
Console#show protocol-vlan protocol-group-vid
ProtocolGroup ID VLAN ID
------------------ -----------
2 VLAN2
Console#
Table 4-67 Priority Commands
Command Groups Function Page
Priority (Layer 2) Configures default priority for untagged frames, sets queue weights,
and maps class of service tags to hardware queues
4-264
Priority (Layer 3 and 4) Maps IP DSCP tags to class of service values 4-269
Table 4-68 Priority Commands (Layer 2)
Command Function Mode Page
queue mode Sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted
Round-Robin (WRR)
GC 4-265
switchport priority default Sets a port priority for incoming untagged frames IC 4-265
queue bandwidth Assigns round-robin weights to the priority queues GC 4-266
queue cos map Assigns class-of-service values to the priority queues IC 4-267
show queue mode Shows the current queue mode PE 4-268
show queue bandwidth Shows round-robin weights assigned to the priority queues PE 4-268
show queue cos-map Shows the class-of-service map PE 4-269
show interfaces switchport Displays the administrative and operational status of an
interface
PE 4-175
Priority Commands
4-265
4
queue mode
This command sets the queue mode to strict priority or Weighted Round-Robin
(WRR) for the class of service (CoS) priority queues. Use the no form to restore the
default value.
Syntax
queue mode {strict | wrr}
no queue mode
•strict - Services the egress queues in sequential order, transmitting all
traffic in the higher priority queues before servicing lower priority queues.
•wrr - Weighted Round-Robin shares bandwidth at the egress ports by using
scheduling weights 1, 2, 4, 8 for queues 0 - 3 respectively.
Default Setting
Weighted Round Robin
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
You can set the switch to service the queues based on a strict rule that
requires all traffic in a higher priority queue to be processed before lower
priority queues are serviced, or use Weighted Round-Robin (WRR) queuing
that specifies a relative weight of each queue. WRR uses a predefined relative
weight for each queue that determines the percentage of service time the
switch services each queue before moving on to the next queue. This
prevents the head-of-line blocking that can occur with strict priority queuing.
Example
The following example sets the queue mode to strict priority service mode:
switchport priority default
This command sets a priority for incoming untagged frames. Use the no form to
restore the default value.
Syntax
switchport priority default default-priority-id
no switchport priority default
default-priority-id - The priority number for untagged ingress traffic.
The priority is a number from 0 to 7. Seven is the highest priority.
Console(config)#queue mode strict
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-266
4
Default Setting
The priority is not set, and the default value for untagged frames received on
the interface is zero.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP DSCP, and default switchport
priority.
• The default priority applies for an untagged frame received on a port set to
accept all frame types (i.e, receives both untagged and tagged frames). This
priority does not apply to IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged frames. If the incoming
frame is an IEEE 802.1Q VLAN tagged frame, the IEEE 802.1p User Priority
bits will be used.
• This switch provides eight priority queues for each port. It is configured to use
Weighted Round Robin, which can be viewed with the show queue
bandwidth command. Inbound frames that do not have VLAN tags are
tagged with the input port’s default ingress user priority, and then placed in the
appropriate priority queue at the output port. The default priority for all ingress
ports is zero. Therefore, any inbound frames that do not have priority tags will
be placed in queue 0 of the output port. (Note that if the output port is an
untagged member of the associated VLAN, these frames are stripped of all
VLAN tags prior to transmission.)
Example
The following example shows how to set a default priority on port 3 to 5:
queue bandwidth
This command assigns weighted round-robin (WRR) weights to the four class of
service (CoS) priority queues. Use the no form to restore the default weights.
Note: This switch does not allow the queue service weights to be set. The weights are
fixed as 1, 2, 4, 8, for queues 0 through 3 respectively.
Syntax
queue bandwidth weight1...weight4
no queue bandwidth
weight1...weight4 - The ratio of weights for queues 0-3 determines the
weights used by the WRR scheduler. (Range: 1-31)
Default Setting
Weights 1, 2, 4, 8 are assigned to queues 0-3 respectively.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/3
Console(config-if)#switchport priority default 5
Priority Commands
4-267
4
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
WRR controls bandwidth sharing at the egress port by defining scheduling
weights.
Example
This example shows how to assign WRR weights to priority queues 0 - 2:
Related Commands
show queue bandwidth (4-268)
queue cos-map
This command assigns class of service (CoS) values to the priority queues (i.e.,
hardware output queues 0 - 3). Use the no form set the CoS map to the default
values.
Syntax
queue cos-map queue_id [cos1 ... cosn]
no queue cos-map
•queue_id - The ID of the priority queue.
Ranges are 0 to 3, where 3 is the highest priority queue.
•cos1 .. cosn - The CoS values that are mapped to the queue ID. It is a
space-separated list of numbers. The CoS value is a number from 0 to 7,
where 7 is the highest priority.
Default Setting
This switch supports Class of Service by using four priority queues, with
Weighted Round Robin queuing for each port. Eight separate traffic classes
are defined in IEEE 802.1p. The default priority levels are assigned according
to recommendations in the IEEE 802.1p standard as shown below.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Console(config)#queue bandwidth 6 9 12
Console(config)#
Table 4-69 Default CoS Values to Egress Queues
Queue 0123
Priority 1,20,34,56,7
Command Line Interface
4-268
4
Command Usage
• CoS values assigned at the ingress port are also used at the egress port.
• This command sets the CoS priority for all interfaces.
Example
The following example shows how to change the CoS assignments:
Related Commands
show queue cos-map (4-269)
show queue mode
This command shows the current queue mode.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
show queue bandwidth
This command displays the weighted round-robin (WRR) bandwidth allocation for
the four priority queues.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 0 0
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 1 1
Console(config-if)#queue cos-map 2 2
Console(config-if)#exit
Console#show queue cos-map ethernet 1/1
Information of Eth 1/1
Traffic Class : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Priority Queue: 0 1 2 1 2 2 3 3
Console#
Console#show queue mode
Queue mode: wrr
Console#
Priority Commands
4-269
4
Example
show queue cos-map
This command shows the class of service priority map.
Syntax
show queue cos-map [interface]
interface
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-8)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4)
map ip dscp (Global Configuration)
This command enables IP DSCP mapping (i.e., Differentiated Services Code Point
mapping). Use the no form to disable IP DSCP mapping.
Console#show queue bandwidth
Queue ID Weight
-------- ------
0 1
1 2
2 4
3 8
Console#
Console#show queue cos-map ethernet 1/1
Information of Eth 1/1
Traffic Class : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Priority Queue: 1 0 0 1 2 2 3 3
Console#
Table 4-70 Priority Commands (Layer 3 and 4)
Command Function Mode Page
map ip dscp Enables IP DSCP class of service mapping GC 4-269
map ip dscp Maps IP DSCP value to a class of service IC 4-270
show map ip dscp Shows the IP DSCP map PE 4-271
Command Line Interface
4-270
4
Syntax
[no] map ip dscp
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP DSCP, and default switchport
priority.
Example
The following example shows how to enable IP DSCP mapping globally:
map ip dscp (Interface Configuration)
This command sets IP DSCP priority (i.e., Differentiated Services Code Point
priority). Use the no form to restore the default table.
Syntax
map ip dscp dscp-value cos cos-value
no map ip dscp
•dscp-value - 8-bit DSCP value. (Range: 0-63)
•cos-value - Class-of-Service value (Range: 0-7)
Default Setting
The DSCP default values are defined in the following table. Note that all the
DSCP values that are not specified are mapped to CoS value 0.
Console(config)#map ip dscp
Console(config)#
Table 4-71 IP DSCP to CoS Vales
IP DSCP Value CoS Value
00
81
10, 12, 14, 16 2
18, 20, 22, 24 3
26, 28, 30, 32, 34, 36 4
38, 40, 42 5
48 6
46, 56 7
Priority Commands
4-271
4
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• The precedence for priority mapping is IP DSCP, and default switchport
priority.
• DSCP priority values are mapped to default Class of Service values according
to recommendations in the IEEE 802.1p standard, and then subsequently
mapped to the four hardware priority queues.
• This command sets the IP DSCP priority for all interfaces.
Example
The following example shows how to map IP DSCP value 1 to CoS value 0:
show map ip dscp
This command shows the IP DSCP priority map.
Syntax
show map ip dscp [interface]
interface
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-8)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#map ip dscp 1 cos 0
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-272
4
Example
Related Commands
map ip dscp (Global Configuration) (4-269)
map ip dscp (Interface Configuration) (4-270)
Quality of Service Commands
The commands described in this section are used to configure Differentiated
Services (DiffServ) classification criteria and service policies. You can classify traffic
based on access lists, IP Precedence or DSCP values, or VLANs. Using access lists
allows you select traffic based on Layer 2, Layer 3, or Layer 4 information contained
in each packet.
Console#show map ip dscp ethernet 1/1
DSCP mapping status: disabled
Port DSCP COS
--------- ---- ---
Eth 1/ 1 0 0
Eth 1/ 1 1 0
Eth 1/ 1 2 0
Eth 1/ 1 3 0
.
.
.
Eth 1/ 1 61 0
Eth 1/ 1 62 0
Eth 1/ 1 63 0
Console#
Table 4-72 Quality of Service Commands
Command Function Mode Page
class-map Creates a class map for a type of traffic GC 4-273
match Defines the criteria used to classify traffic CM 4-274
policy-map Creates a policy map for multiple interfaces GC 4-275
class Defines a traffic classification for the policy to act on PM 4-276
set Classifies IP traffic by setting a CoS, DSCP, or IP-precedence
value in a packet
PM-C 4-277
police Defines an enforcer for classified traffic PM-C 4-277
service-policy Applies a policy map defined by the policy-map command to
the input of a particular interface
IC 4-278
show class-map Displays the QoS class maps which define matching criteria
used for classifying traffic
PE 4-279
show policy-map Displays the QoS policy maps which define classification
criteria for incoming traffic, and may include policers for
bandwidth limitations
PE 4-279
show policy-map interface Displays the configuration of all classes configured for all
service policies on the specified interface
PE 4-280
Quality of Service Commands
4-273
4
To create a service policy for a specific category of ingress traffic, follow these steps:
1. Use the class-map command to designate a class name for a specific category
of traffic, and enter the Class Map configuration mode.
2. Use the match command to select a specify type of traffic based on an access
list, a DSCP or IP Precedence value, or a VLAN.
3. Set an ACL mask to enable filtering for the criteria specified in the match
command.
4. Use the policy-map command to designate a policy name for a specific
manner in which ingress traffic will be handled, and enter the Policy Map
configuration mode.
5. Use the class command to identify the class map, and enter Policy Map Class
configuration mode. A policy map can contain multiple class statements.
6. Use the set command to modify the QoS value for matching traffic class, and
use the policer command to monitor the average flow and burst rate, and drop
any traffic that exceeds the specified rate, or just reduce the DSCP service level
for traffic exceeding the specified rate.
7. Use the service-policy command to assign a policy map to a specific interface.
Notes: 1. You can configure up to 16 rules per Class Map. You can also include
multiple classes in a Policy Map.
2. You should create a Class Map (page 4-273) before creating a Policy Map
(page 4-275). Otherwise, you will not be able to specify a Class Map with the
class command (page 4-276) after entering Policy-Map Configuration mode.
class-map
This command creates a class map used for matching packets to the specified
class, and enters Class Map configuration mode. Use the no form to delete a class
map and return to Global configuration mode.
Syntax
[no] class-map class-map-name [match-any]
•match-any - Match any condition within a class map.
•class-map-name - Name of the class map. (Range: 1-16 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• First enter this command to designate a class map and enter the Class Map
configuration mode. Then use the match command (page 4-274) to specify
the criteria for ingress traffic that will be classified under this class map.
• Up to 16 match commands are permitted per class map.
Command Line Interface
4-274
4
• The class map is used with a policy map (page 4-275) to create a service
policy (page 4-278) for a specific interface that defines packet classification,
service tagging, and bandwidth policing.
Example
This example creates a class map call “rd_class,” and sets it to match packets
marked for DSCP service value 3:
Related Commands
show class map (4-279)
match
This command defines the criteria used to classify traffic. Use the no form to delete
the matching criteria.
Syntax
[no] match {access-list acl-name | ip dscp dscp | ip precedence
ip-precedence | vlan vlan}
•acl-name - Name of the access control list. Any type of ACL can be
specified, including standard or extended IP ACLs and MAC ACLs.
(Range: 1-16 characters)
•dscp - A DSCP value. (Range: 0-63)
•ip-precedence - An IP Precedence value. (Range: 0-7)
•vlan - A VLAN. (Range:1-4092)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Class Map Configuration
Command Usage
• First enter the class-map command to designate a class map and enter the
Class Map configuration mode. Then use the match command to specify the
fields within ingress packets that must match to qualify for this class map.
• Only one match command can be entered per class map.
Example
This example creates a class map called “rd_class#1,” and sets it to match packets
marked for DSCP service value 3:
Console(config)#class-map rd_class match-any
Console(config-cmap)#match ip dscp 3
Console(config-cmap)#
Console(config)#class-map rd_class#1_ match-any
Console(config-cmap)#match ip dscp 3
Console(config-cmap)#
Quality of Service Commands
4-275
4
This example creates a class map call “rd_class#2,” and sets it to match packets
marked for IP Precedence service value 5:
This example creates a class map call “rd_class#3,” and sets it to match packets
marked for VLAN 1:
policy-map
This command creates a policy map that can be attached to multiple interfaces, and
enters Policy Map configuration mode. Use the no form to delete a policy map and
return to Global configuration mode.
Syntax
[no] policy-map policy-map-name
policy-map-name - Name of the policy map. (Range: 1-16 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
•Use the policy-map command to specify the name of the policy map, and
then use the class command to configure policies for traffic that matches
criteria defined in a class map.
• A policy map can contain multiple class statements that can be applied to the
same interface with the service-policy command (page 4-278).
• You must create a Class Map (page 4-275) before assigning it to a Policy Map.
Example
This example creates a policy called “rd_policy,” uses the class command to specify
the previously defined “rd_class,” uses the set command to classify the service that
incoming packets will receive, and then uses the police command to limit the
average bandwidth to 100,000 Kbps, the burst rate to 1522 bytes, and configure the
response to drop any violating packets.
Console(config)#class-map rd_class#2 match-any
Console(config-cmap)#match ip precedence 5
Console(config-cmap)#
Console(config)#class-map rd_class#3 match-any
Console(config-cmap)#match vlan 1
Console(config-cmap)#
Console(config)#policy-map rd_policy
Console(config-pmap)#class rd_class
Console(config-pmap-c)#set ip dscp 3
Console(config-pmap-c)#police 100000 1522 exceed-action drop
Console(config-pmap-c)#
Command Line Interface
4-276
4
class
This command defines a traffic classification upon which a policy can act, and enters
Policy Map Class configuration mode. Use the no form to delete a class map and
return to Policy Map configuration mode.
Syntax
[no] class class-map-name
class-map-name - Name of the class map. (Range: 1-16 characters)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Policy Map Configuration
Command Usage
• Use the policy-map command to specify a policy map and enter Policy Map
configuration mode. Then use the class command to enter Policy Map Class
configuration mode. And finally, use the set and police commands to specify
the match criteria, where the:
-set command classifies the service that an IP packet will receive.
-police command defines the maximum throughput, burst rate, and the
action that results from a policy violation.
•You can configure up to 16 rules per Class Map. You can also include multiple
classes in a Policy Map.
Example
This example creates a policy called “rd_policy,” uses the class command to specify
the previously defined “rd_class,” uses the set command to classify the service that
incoming packets will receive, and then uses the police command to limit the
average bandwidth to 100,000 Kbps, the burst rate to 1522 bytes, and configure the
response to drop any violating packets.
Console(config)#policy-map rd_policy
Console(config-pmap)#class rd_class
Console(config-pmap-c)#set ip dscp 3
Console(config-pmap-c)#police 100000 1522 exceed-action drop
Console(config-pmap-c)#
Quality of Service Commands
4-277
4
set
This command services IP traffic by setting a CoS, DSCP, or IP Precedence value in
a matching packet (as specified by the match command on page 4-274). Use the
no form to remove the traffic classification.
Syntax
[
no
]
set
{
cos
new-cos |
ip dscp
new-dscp |
ip precedence
new-precedence |
ipv6 dscp
new-dscp}
•new-cos - New Class of Service (CoS) value. (Range: 0-7)
•new-dscp - New Differentiated Service Code Point (DSCP) value.
(Range: 0-63)
•new-precedence - New IP Precedence value.
(Range: 0-7)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Policy Map Class Configuration
Example
This example creates a policy called “rd_policy,” uses the class command to specify
the previously defined “rd_class,” uses the set command to classify the service that
incoming packets will receive, and then uses the police command to limit the
average bandwidth to 100,000 Kbps, the burst rate to 1522 bytes, and configure the
response to drop any violating packets.
police
This command defines an policer for classified traffic. Use the no form to remove a
policer.
Syntax
[
no
]
police
rate-kbps burst-byte [
exceed-action
{
drop
|
set
}]
•
rate-kbps
- Rate in kilobits per second. (Range: 1-100000 kbps or maximum
port speed, whichever is lower)
•burst-byte - Burst in bytes. (Range: 64-1522 bytes)
•drop - Drop packet when specified rate or burst are exceeded.
•set - Set DSCP service to the specified value. (Range: 0-63)
Default Setting
Drop out-of-profile packets.
Command Mode
Console(config)#policy-map rd_policy
Console(config-pmap)#class rd_class
Console(config-pmap-c)#set ip dscp 3
Console(config-pmap-c)#police 100000 1522 exceed-action drop
Console(config-pmap-c)#
Command Line Interface
4-278
4
Policy Map Class Configuration
Command Usage
• You can configure up to 64 policers (i.e., meters or class maps) for each of the
following access list types: MAC ACL, IP ACL (including Standard ACL and
Extended ACL), IPv6 Standard ACL, and IPv6 Extended ACL. This limitation
applies to each switch chip (ES3528M-SFP: ports 1-28).
• Policing is based on a token bucket, where bucket depth (i.e., the maximum
burst before the bucket overflows) is specified by the burst-byte field, and the
average rate at which tokens are removed from the bucket is specified by the
rate-bps option.
Example
This example creates a policy called “rd_policy,” uses the class command to specify
the previously defined “rd_class,” uses the set command to classify the service that
incoming packets will receive, and then uses the police command to limit the
average bandwidth to 100,000 Kbps, the burst rate to 1522 bytes, and configure the
response to drop any violating packets.
service-policy
This command applies a policy map defined by the policy-map command to the
ingress queue of a particular interface. Use the no form to remove the policy map
from this interface.
Syntax
[
no
]
service-policy
input
policy-map-name
•
input
- Apply to the input traffic.
•
policy-map-name
- Name of the policy map for this interface.
(Range: 1-16 characters)
Default Setting
No policy map is attached to an interface.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• You can only assign one policy map to an interface.
• You must first define a class map, then define a policy map, and finally use
the service-policy command to bind the policy map to the required interface.
Console(config)#policy-map rd_policy
Console(config-pmap)#class rd_class
Console(config-pmap-c)#set ip dscp 3
Console(config-pmap-c)#police 100000 1522 exceed-action drop
Console(config-pmap-c)#
Quality of Service Commands
4-279
4
Example
This example applies a service policy to an ingress interface.
show class-map
This command displays the QoS class maps which define matching criteria used for
classifying traffic.
Syntax
show class-map
[class-map-name]
class-map-name - Name of the class map. (Range: 1-16 characters)
Default Setting
Displays all class maps.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
show policy-map
This command displays the QoS policy maps which define classification criteria for
incoming traffic, and may include policers for bandwidth limitations.
Syntax
show policy-map
[policy-map-name [
class
class-map-name]]
•
policy-map-name
- Name of the policy map. (Range: 1-16 characters)
•class-map-name - Name of the class map. (Range: 1-16 characters)
Default Setting
Displays all policy maps and all classes.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#service-policy input rd_policy
Console(config-if)#
Console#show class-map
Class Map match-any rd_class#1
Match ip dscp 3
Class Map match-any rd_class#2
Match ip precedence 5
Class Map match-any rd_class#3
Match vlan 1
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-280
4
Example
show policy-map interface
This command displays the service policy assigned to the specified interface.
Syntax
show policy-map interface
interface
input
interface
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-8)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Voice VLAN Commands
The switch allows you to specify a Voice VLAN for the network and set a CoS priority
for the VoIP traffic. VoIP traffic can be detected on switch ports by using the source
MAC address of packets, or by using LLDP (IEEE 802.1AB) to discover connected
VoIP devices. When VoIP traffic is detected on a configured port, the switch
automatically assigns the port to the Voice VLAN. Alternatively, switch ports can be
manually configured.
Console#show policy-map
Policy Map rd_policy
class rd_class
set ip dscp 3
Console#show policy-map rd_policy class rd_class
Policy Map rd_policy
class rd_class
set ip dscp 3
Console#
Console#show policy-map interface ethernet 1/5
Service-policy rd_policy input
Console#
Table 4-73 Voice VLAN Commands
Command Function Mode Page
voice vlan Defines the Voice VLAN ID GC 4-281
voice vlan aging Configures the aging time for Voice VLAN ports GC 4-282
voice vlan mac-address Configures VoIP device MAC adresses GC 4-282
switchport voice vlan Sets the Voice VLAN port mode IC 4-283
switchport voice vlan rule Sets the automatic VoIP traffic detection method for ports IC 4-284
Voice VLAN Commands
4-281
4
voice vlan
This command enables VoIP traffic detection and defines the Voice VLAN ID. Use
the no form to disable the Voice VLAN.
Syntax
voice vlan voice-vlan-id
no voice vlan
voice-vlan-id - Specifies the voice VLAN ID. (Range: 1-4094)
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• When IP telephony is deployed in an enterprise network, it is recommended
to isolate the Voice over IP (VoIP) network traffic from other data traffic. Traffic
isolation helps prevent excessive packet delays, packet loss, and jitter, which
results in higher voice quality. This is best achieved by assigning all VoIP
traffic to a single VLAN.
• VoIP traffic can be detected on switch ports by using the source MAC address
of packets, or by using LLDP (IEEE 802.1AB) to discover connected VoIP
devices. When VoIP traffic is detected on a configured port, the switch
automatically assigns the port as a tagged member of the Voice VLAN.
• Only one Voice VLAN is supported and it must already be created on the
switch before it can be specified as the Voice VLAN.
•The Voice VLAN ID cannot be modified when the global auto-detection status is
enabled.
Example
The following example enables VoIP traffic detection and specifies the Voice VLAN
ID as 1234.
switchport voice vlan security Enables Voice VLAN security on ports IC 4-284
switchport voice vlan priority Sets the VoIP traffic priority for ports IC 4-285
show voice vlan Displays Voice VLAN settings PE 4-286
Console(config)#voice vlan 1234
Console(config)#
Table 4-73 Voice VLAN Commands
Command Function Mode Page
Command Line Interface
4-282
4
voice vlan aging
This command sets the Voice VLAN ID time out. Use the no form to restore the
default.
Syntax
voice vlan aging minutes
no voice vlan
minutes - Specifies the port Voice VLAN membership time out.
(Range: 5-43200 minutes)
Default Setting
1440 minutes
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The Voice VLAN aging time is the time after which a port is removed from the
Voice VLAN when VoIP traffic is no longer received on the port.
Example
The following example configures the Voice VLAN aging time as 3000 minutes.
voice vlan mac-address
This command specifies MAC address ranges to add to the OUI Telephony list. Use
the no form to remove an entry from the list.
Syntax
voice vlan mac-address mac-address mask mask-address [description
description]
no voice vlan mac-address mac-address mask mask-address
•mac-address - Defines a MAC address OUI that identifies VoIP devices in
the network. (For example, 01-23-45-00-00-00)
•mask-address - Identifies a range of MAC addresses. (Range:
80-00-00-00-00-00 to FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF)
•description - User-defined text that identifies the VoIP devices.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Console(config)#voice vlan aging 3000
Console(config)#
Voice VLAN Commands
4-283
4
Command Usage
• VoIP devices attached to the switch can be identified by the manufacturer’s
Organizational Unique Identifier (OUI) in the source MAC address of received
packets. OUI numbers are assigned to manufacturers and form the first three
octets of device MAC addresses. The MAC OUI numbers for VoIP equipment
can be configured on the switch so that traffic from these devices is
recognized as VoIP.
• Selecting a mask of FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 identifies all devices with the same
OUI (the first three octets). Other masks restrict the MAC address range.
Selecting FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF specifies a single MAC address.
Example
The following example adds a MAC OUI to the OUI Telephony list.
switchport voice vlan
This command specifies the Voice VLAN mode for ports. Use the no form to disable
the Voice VLAN feature on the port.
Syntax
switchport voice vlan {manual | auto}
no switchport voice vlan
•manual - The Voice VLAN feature is enabled on the port, but the port must
be manually added to the Voice VLAN.
•auto - The port will be added as a tagged member to the Voice VLAN when
VoIP traffic is detected on the port.
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Command Usage
When auto is selected, you must select the method to use for detecting VoIP
traffic, either OUI or 802.1ab (LLDP). When OUI is selected, be sure to
configure the MAC address ranges in the Telephony OUI list.
Example
The following example sets port 1 to Voice VLAN auto mode.
Console(config)#voice vlan mac-address 00-12-34-56-78-90 mask
ff-ff-ff-00-00-00 description A new phone
Console(config)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#switchport voice vlan auto
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-284
4
switchport voice vlan rule
This command selects a method for detecting VoIP traffic on a port. Use the no form
to disable the detection method on the port.
Syntax
[no] switchport voice vlan rule {oui | lldp}
•oui - Traffic from VoIP devices is detected by the Organizationally Unique
Identifier (OUI) of the source MAC address.
•lldp - Uses LLDP to discover VoIP devices attached to the port.
Default Setting
OUI: Enabled
LLDP: Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Command Usage
• When OUI is selected, be sure to configure the MAC address ranges in the
Telephony OUI list. MAC address OUI numbers must be configured in the
Telephony OUI list so that the switch recognizes the traffic as being from a
VoIP device.
• LLDP checks that the “telephone bit” in the system capability TLV is turned on.
See “LLDP Commands” on page 4-193 for more information on LLDP.
Example
The following example enables the OUI method on port 1 for detecting VoIP traffic.
switchport voice vlan security
This command enables security filtering for VoIP traffic on a port. Use the no form to
disable filtering on a port.
Syntax
[no] switchport voice vlan security
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#switchport voice vlan rule oui
Console(config-if)#
Voice VLAN Commands
4-285
4
Command Usage
• Security filtering discards any non-VoIP packets received on the port that are
tagged with voice VLAN ID. VoIP traffic is identified by source MAC addresses
configured in the Telephony OUI list, or through LLDP that discovers VoIP
devices attached to the switch. Packets received from non-VoIP sources are
dropped.
• When enabled, be sure the MAC address ranges for VoIP devices are
configured in the Telephony OUI list.
Example
The following example enables security filtering on port 1.
switchport voice vlan priority
This command specifies a CoS priority for VoIP traffic on a port. Use the no form to
restore the default priority on a port.
Syntax
switchport voice vlan priority priority-value
no switchport voice vlan priority
•priority-value - The CoS priority value. (Range: 0-6)
Default Setting
6
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Command Usage
Specifies a CoS priority to apply to the port VoIP traffic on the Voice VLAN.
The priority of any received VoIP packet is overwritten with the new priority
when the Voice VLAN feature is active for the port.
Example
The following example sets the CoS priority to 5 on port 1.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#switchport voice vlan security
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#switchport voice vlan priority 5
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-286
4
show voice vlan
This command displays the Voice VLAN settings on the switch and the OUI
Telephony list.
Syntax
show voice vlan {oui | status}
•oui - Displays the OUI Telephony list.
•status - Displays the global and port Voice VLAN settings.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show voice vlan status
Global Voice VLAN Status
Voice VLAN Status : Enabled
Voice VLAN ID : 1234
Voice VLAN aging time : 1440 minutes
Voice VLAN Port Summary
Port Mode Security Rule Priority
-------- -------- -------- --------- --------
Eth 1/ 1 Auto Enabled OUI 6
Eth 1/ 2 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/ 3 Manual Enabled OUI 5
Eth 1/ 4 Auto Enabled OUI 6
Eth 1/ 5 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/ 6 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/ 7 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/ 8 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/ 9 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Eth 1/10 Disabled Disabled OUI 6
Console#show voice vlan oui
OUIAddress Mask Description
00-12-34-56-78-9A FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 old phones
00-11-22-33-44-55 FF-FF-FF-00-00-00 new phones
00-98-76-54-32-10 FF-FF-FF-FF-FF-FF Chris' phone
Console#
Multicast Filtering Commands
4-287
4
Multicast Filtering Commands
This switch uses IGMP (Internet Group Management Protocol) to query for any
attached hosts that want to receive a specific multicast service. It identifies the ports
containing hosts requesting a service and sends data out to those ports only. It then
propagates the service request up to any neighboring multicast switch/router to
ensure that it will continue to receive the multicast service.
IGMP Snooping Commands
This section describes commands used to configure IGMP snooping on the switch.
Table 4-74 Multicast Filtering Commands
Command Groups Function Page
IGMP Snooping Configures multicast groups via IGMP snooping or static
assignment, sets the IGMP version, displays current snooping and
query settings, and displays the multicast service and group
members
4-287
IGMP Query Configures IGMP query parameters for multicast filtering at Layer 2 4-292
Static Multicast Routing Configures static multicast router ports 4-295
IGMP Filtering and Throttling Configures IGMP filtering and throttling 4-297
Multicast VLAN Registration Configures a single network-wide multicast VLAN shared by hosts
residing in other standard or private VLAN groups, preserving
security and data isolation for normal traffic
4-304
Table 4-75 IGMP Snooping Commands
Command Function Mode Page
ip igmp snooping Enables IGMP snooping GC 4-288
ip igmp snooping vlan static Adds an interface as a member of a multicast group GC 4-288
ip igmp snooping version Configures the IGMP version for snooping GC 4-289
ip igmp snooping
leave-proxy
Enables IGMP leave proxy on the switch GC 4-289
ip igmp snooping
immediate-leave
Enables IGMP immediate leave for a VLAN interface IC 4-290
show ip igmp snooping Shows the IGMP snooping and query configuration PE 4-289
show mac-address-table
multicast
Shows the IGMP snooping MAC multicast list PE 4-291
Command Line Interface
4-288
4
ip igmp snooping
This command enables IGMP snooping on this switch. Use the no form to disable it.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
The following example enables IGMP snooping.
ip igmp snooping vlan static
This command adds a port to a multicast group. Use the no form to remove the port.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id static ip-address interface
•vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4092)
•ip-address - IP address for multicast group
•interface
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-8)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
The following shows how to statically configure a multicast group on a port:
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping
Console(config)#
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 static 224.0.0.12 ethernet 1/5
Console(config)#
Multicast Filtering Commands
4-289
4
ip igmp snooping version
This command configures the IGMP snooping version. Use the no form to restore
the default.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping version {1 | 2 | 3}
no ip igmp snooping version
•1 - IGMP Version 1
•2 - IGMP Version 2
•3 - IGMP Version 3
Default Setting
IGMP Version 2
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• All systems on the subnet must support the same version. If there are legacy
devices in your network that only support Version 1, you will also have to
configure this switch to use Version 1.
• Some commands are only enabled for IGMPv2 and/or v3, including ip igmp
snooping querier, ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time, ip igmp
snooping query-interval, and ip igmp snooping immediate leave.
Example
The following configures the switch to use IGMP Version 1:
ip igmp snooping leave-proxy
This command enables IGMP leave proxy on the switch. Use the no form to disable
the feature.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping leave-proxy
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping version 1
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-290
4
Command Usage
• The IGMP snooping leave-proxy feature suppresses all unnecessary IGMP
leave messages so that the non-querier switch forwards an IGMP leave
packet only when the last dynamic member port leaves a multicast group.
• The leave-proxy feature does not function when a switch is set as the querier.
Example
ip igmp snooping immediate-leave
This command immediately deletes a member port of a multicast service if a leave
packet is received at that port and immediate-leave is enabled for the parent VLAN.
Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping immediate-leave vlan-id
vlan-id - VLAN ID (1 to 4092)
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN)
Command Usage
• If immediate-leave is not used, a multicast router (or querier) will send a
group-specific query message when an IGMPv2 or IGMPv3 group leave
message is received. The router/querier stops forwarding traffic for that group
only if no host replies to the query within the specified timeout period. Note
that the timeout period is determined by ip igmp snooping
query-max-response-time (see 4-294).
• If immediate-leave is enabled, the switch assumes that only one host is
connected to the interface. Therefore, immediate leave should only be
enabled on an interface if it is connected to only one IGMP-enabled device,
eiter a service host or a neighbor running IGMP snooping.
• This command is only effective if IGMP snooping is enabled, and IGMPv2 or
IGMPv3 snooping is used.
Example
The following shows how to enable immediate leave.
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping leave-proxy
Console(config)#
Console(config)#interface vlan 1
Console(config-if)#ip igmp snooping immediate-leave
Console(config-if)#
Multicast Filtering Commands
4-291
4
show ip igmp snooping
This command shows the IGMP snooping configuration.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
See “Configuring IGMP Snooping and Query Parameters” on page 3-213 for a
description of the displayed items.
Example
The following shows the current IGMP snooping configuration:
show mac-address-table multicast
This command shows known multicast addresses.
Syntax
show mac-address-table multicast [vlan vlan-id] [user |igmp-snooping]
•vlan-id - VLAN ID (1 to 4092)
•user - Display only the user-configured multicast entries.
•igmp-snooping - Display only entries learned through IGMP snooping.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Member types displayed include IGMP or USER, depending on selected
options.
Console#show ip igmp snooping
Service status: Enabled
Querier status: Enabled
Leave proxy status: Disabled
Query count: 10
Query interval: 100 sec
Query max response time: 20 sec
Router port expire time: 300 sec
Immediate Leave Processing: Disabled on all VLAN
IGMP snooping version: Version 2
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-292
4
Example
The following shows the multicast entries learned through IGMP snooping for
VLAN 1:
IGMP Query Commands (Layer 2)
This section describes commands used to configure Layer 2 IGMP query on the
switch.
ip igmp snooping querier
This command enables the switch as an IGMP querier. Use the no form to disable it.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping querier
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• IGMP snooping querier is not supported for IGMPv3 snooping (see ip igmp
snooping version, page 4-289).
• If enabled, the switch will serve as querier if elected. The querier is
responsible for asking hosts if they want to receive multicast traffic.
Console#show mac-address-table multicast vlan 1 igmp-snooping
VLAN M'cast IP addr. Member ports Type
---- --------------- ------------ -------
1 224.1.2.3 Eth1/11 IGMP
Console#
Table 4-76 IGMP Query Commands (Layer 2)
Command Function Mode Page
ip igmp snooping querier Allows this device to act as the querier for IGMP snooping GC 4-292
ip igmp snooping
query-count
Configures the query count GC 4-293
ip igmp snooping
query-interval
Configures the query interval GC 4-293
ip igmp snooping
query-max-response-time
Configures the report delay GC 4-294
ip igmp snooping
router-port-expire-time
Configures the query timeout GC 4-295
Multicast Filtering Commands
4-293
4
Example
ip igmp snooping query-count
This command configures the query count. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping query-count count
no ip igmp snooping query-count
count - The maximum number of queries issued for which there has been
no response before the switch takes action to drop a client from the
multicast group. (Range: 2-10)
Default Setting
2 times
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The query count defines how long the querier waits for a response from a
multicast client before taking action. If a querier has sent a number of queries
defined by this command, but a client has not responded, a countdown timer
is started using the time defined by ip igmp snooping query-max-
response-time. If the countdown finishes, and the client still has not
responded, then that client is considered to have left the multicast group.
Example
The following shows how to configure the query count to 10:
Related Commands
ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time (4-294)
ip igmp snooping query-interval
This command configures the query interval. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping query-interval seconds
no ip igmp snooping query-interval
seconds - The frequency at which the switch sends IGMP host-query
messages. (Range: 60-125)
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping querier
Console(config)#
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-count 10
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-294
4
Default Setting
125 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Example
The following shows how to configure the query interval to 100 seconds:
ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time
This command configures the query report delay. Use the no form to restore the
default.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time seconds
no ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time
seconds - The report delay advertised in IGMP queries. (Range: 5-25)
Default Setting
10 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• The switch must be using IGMPv2 or v3 snooping for this command to take
effect.
• This command defines the time after a query, during which a response is
expected from a multicast client. If a querier has sent a number of queries
defined by the ip igmp snooping query-count, but a client has not
responded, a countdown timer is started using an initial value set by this
command. If the countdown finishes, and the client still has not responded,
then that client is considered to have left the multicast group.
Example
The following shows how to configure the maximum response time to 20 seconds:
Related Commands
ip igmp snooping version (4-289)
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-interval 100
Console(config)#
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping query-max-response-time 20
Console(config)#
Multicast Filtering Commands
4-295
4
ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time
This command configures the query timeout. Use the no form to restore the default.
Syntax
ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time seconds
no ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time
seconds - The time the switch waits after the previous querier stops before
it considers the router port (i.e., the interface which had been receiving
query packets) to have expired.
(Range: 300-500)
Default Setting
300 seconds
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
The switch must use IGMPv2 or v3 snooping for this command to take effect.
Example
The following shows how to configure the default timeout to 300 seconds:
Related Commands
ip igmp snooping version (4-289)
Static Multicast Routing Commands
This section describes commands used to configure static multicast routing on the
switch.
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping router-port-expire-time 300
Console(config)#
Table 4-77 Static Multicast Routing Commands
Command Function Mode Page
ip igmp snooping vlan
mrouter
Adds a multicast router port GC 4-296
show ip igmp snooping
mrouter
Shows multicast router ports PE 4-296
Command Line Interface
4-296
4
ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter
This command statically configures a multicast router port. Use the no form to
remove the configuration.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id mrouter interface
•vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4092)
•interface
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-8)
Default Setting
No static multicast router ports are configured.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
Depending on your network connections, IGMP snooping may not always be
able to locate the IGMP querier. Therefore, if the IGMP querier is a known
multicast router/switch connected over the network to an interface (port or
trunk) on your router, you can manually configure that interface to join all the
current multicast groups.
Example
The following shows how to configure port 11 as a multicast router port within VLAN 1:
show ip igmp snooping mrouter
This command displays information on statically configured and dynamically learned
multicast router ports.
Syntax
show ip igmp snooping mrouter [vlan vlan-id]
vlan-id - VLAN ID (Range: 1-4092)
Default Setting
Displays multicast router ports for all configured VLANs.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Console(config)#ip igmp snooping vlan 1 mrouter ethernet 1/11
Console(config)#
Multicast Filtering Commands
4-297
4
Command Usage
Multicast router port types displayed include Static.
Example
The following shows that port 11 in VLAN 1 is attached to a multicast router:
IGMP Filtering and Throttling Commands
In certain switch applications, the administrator may want to control the multicast
services that are available to end users. For example, an IP/TV service based on a
specific subscription plan. The IGMP filtering feature fulfills this requirement by
restricting access to specified multicast services on a switch port, and IGMP
throttling limits the number of simultaneous multicast groups a port can join.
Console#show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1
VLAN M'cast Router Ports Type
---- ------------------- -------
1 Eth 1/11 Static
2 Eth 1/12 Static
Console#
Table 4-78 IGMP Filtering and Throttling Commands
Command Function Mode Page
ip igmp filter Enables IGMP filtering and throttling on the switch GC 4-298
ip igmp profile Sets a profile number and enters IGMP filter profile
configuration mode
GC 4-298
permit, deny Sets a profile access mode to permit or deny IPC 4-299
range Specifies one or a range of multicast addresses for a
profile
IPC 4-299
ip igmp filter Assigns an IGMP filter profile to an interface IC 4-300
ip igmp max-groups Specifies an IGMP throttling number for an interface IC 4-300
ip igmp max-groups action Sets the IGMP throttling action for an interface IC 4-301
show ip igmp filter Displays the IGMP filtering status PE 4-302
show ip igmp profile Displays IGMP profiles and settings PE 4-302
show ip igmp throttle interface Displays the IGMP throttling setting for interfaces PE 4-303
Command Line Interface
4-298
4
ip igmp filter (Global Configuration)
This command globally enables IGMP filtering and throttling on the switch. Use the
no form to disable the feature.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp filter
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• IGMP filtering enables you to assign a profile to a switch port that specifies
multicast groups that are permitted or denied on the port. An IGMP filter profile
can contain one or more, or a range of multicast addresses; but only one
profile can be assigned to a port. When enabled, IGMP join reports received
on the port are checked against the filter profile. If a requested multicast group
is permitted, the IGMP join report is forwarded as normal. If a requested
multicast group is denied, the IGMP join report is dropped.
• IGMP filtering and throttling only applies to dynamically learned multicast
groups, it does not apply to statically configured groups.
• The IGMP filtering feature operates in the same manner when MVR is used
to forward multicast traffic.
Example
ip igmp profile
This command creates an IGMP filter profile number and enters IGMP profile
configuration mode. Use the no form to delete a profile number.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp profile profile-number
profile-number - An IGMP filter profile number. (Range: 1-4294967295)
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Console(config)#ip igmp filter
Console(config)#
Multicast Filtering Commands
4-299
4
Command Usage
A profile defines the multicast groups that a subscriber is permitted or denied
to join. The same profile can be applied to many interfaces, but only one
profile can be assigned to one interface. Each profile has only one access
mode; either permit or deny.
Example
permit, deny
This command sets the access mode for an IGMP filter profile. Use the no form to
delete a profile number.
Syntax
{permit | deny}
Default Setting
Deny
Command Mode
IGMP Profile Configuration
Command Usage
• Each profile has only one access mode; either permit or deny.
• When the access mode is set to permit, IGMP join reports are processed
when a multicast group falls within the controlled range. When the access
mode is set to deny, IGMP join reports are only processed when a multicast
group is not in the controlled range.
Example
range
This command specifies multicast group addresses for a profile. Use the no form to
delete addresses from a profile.
Syntax
[no] range low-ip-address [high-ip-address]
•low-ip-address - A valid IP address of a multicast group or start of a group
range.
•high-ip-address - A valid IP address for the end of a multicast group range.
Default Setting
None
Console(config)#ip igmp profile 19
Console(config-igmp-profile)#
Console(config)#ip igmp profile 19
Console(config-igmp-profile)#permit
Console(config-igmp-profile)#
Command Line Interface
4-300
4
Command Mode
IGMP Profile Configuration
Command Usage
Enter this command multiple times to specify more than one multicast address
or address range for a profile.
Example
ip igmp filter (Interface Configuration)
This command assigns an IGMP filtering profile to an interface on the switch. Use
the no form to remove a profile from an interface.
Syntax
[no] ip igmp filter profile-number
profile-number - An IGMP filter profile number. (Range: 1-4294967295)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Command Usage
• The IGMP filtering profile must first be created with the ip igmp profile
command before being able to assign it to an interface.
• Only one profile can be assigned to an interface.
• A profile can also be assigned to a trunk interface. When ports are configured
as trunk members, the trunk uses the filtering profile assigned to the first port
member in the trunk.
Example
ip igmp max-groups
This command sets the IGMP throttling number for an interface on the switch. Use
the no form to restore the default setting.
Syntax
ip igmp max-groups number
no ip igmp max-groups
Console(config)#ip igmp profile 19
Console(config-igmp-profile)#range 239.1.1.1
Console(config-igmp-profile)#range 239.2.3.1 239.2.3.100
Console(config-igmp-profile)#
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#ip igmp filter 19
Console(config-if)#
Multicast Filtering Commands
4-301
4
number - The maximum number of multicast groups an interface can join
at the same time. (Range: 0-64)
Default Setting
64
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Command Usage
• IGMP throttling sets a maximum number of multicast groups that a port can
join at the same time. When the maximum number of groups is reached on a
port, the switch can take one of two actions; either “deny” or “replace.” If the
action is set to deny, any new IGMP join reports will be dropped. If the action
is set to replace, the switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces
it with the new multicast group.
• IGMP throttling can also be set on a trunk interface. When ports are
configured as trunk members, the trunk uses the throttling settings of the first
port member in the trunk.
Example
ip igmp max-groups action
This command sets the IGMP throttling action for an interface on the switch.
Syntax
ip igmp max-groups action {replace | deny}
•replace - The new multicast group replaces an existing group.
•deny - The new multicast group join report is dropped.
Default Setting
Deny
Command Mode
Interface Configuration
Command Usage
When the maximum number of groups is reached on a port, the switch can
take one of two actions; either “deny” or “replace.” If the action is set to deny,
any new IGMP join reports will be dropped. If the action is set to replace, the
switch randomly removes an existing group and replaces it with the new
multicast group.
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#ip igmp max-groups 10
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-302
4
Example
show ip igmp filter
This command displays the global and interface settings for IGMP filtering.
Syntax
show ip igmp filter [interface interface]
interface
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-8)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
show ip igmp profile
This command displays IGMP filtering profiles created on the switch.
Syntax
show ip igmp profile [profile-number]
profile-number - An existing IGMP filter profile number.
(Range: 1-4294967295)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/1
Console(config-if)#ip igmp max-groups action replace
Console(config-if)#
Console#show ip igmp filter
IGMP filter enabled
Console#show ip igmp filter interface ethernet 1/1
Ethernet 1/1 information
---------------------------------
IGMP Profile 19
Deny
range 239.1.1.1 239.1.1.1
range 239.2.3.1 239.2.3.100
Console#
Multicast Filtering Commands
4-303
4
Example
show ip igmp throttle interface
This command displays the interface settings for IGMP throttling.
Syntax
show ip igmp throttle interface [interface]
interface
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-8)
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Using this command without specifying an interface displays all interfaces.
Example
Console#show ip igmp profile
IGMP Profile 19
IGMP Profile 50
Console#show ip igmp profile 19
IGMP Profile 19
Deny
range 239.1.1.1 239.1.1.1
range 239.2.3.1 239.2.3.100
Console#
Console#show ip igmp throttle interface ethernet 1/1
Eth 1/1 Information
Status : TRUE
Action : Deny
Max Multicast Groups : 32
Current Multicast Groups : 0
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-304
4
Multicast VLAN Registration Commands
This section describes commands used to configure Multicast VLAN Registration
(MVR). A single network-wide VLAN can be used to transmit multicast traffic (such
as television channels) across a service provider’s network. Any multicast traffic
entering an MVR VLAN is sent to all subscribers. This can significantly reduce to
processing overhead required to dynamically monitor and establish the distribution
tree for a normal multicast VLAN. Also note that MVR maintains the user isolation
and data security provided by VLAN segregation by passing only multicast traffic
into other VLANs to which the subscribers belong.
mvr (Global Configuration)
This command enables Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) globally on the switch,
statically configures MVR multicast group IP address(es) using the group keyword,
or specifies the MVR VLAN identifier using the vlan keyword. Use the no form of
this command without any keywords to globally disable MVR. Use the no form with
the group keyword to remove a specific address or range of addresses. Or use the
no form with the vlan keyword restore the default MVR VLAN.
Syntax
[no] mvr [group ip-address [count] | vlan vlan-id]
•ip-address - IP address for an MVR multicast group.
(Range: 224.0.1.0 - 239.255.255.255)
•count - The number of contiguous MVR group addresses. (Range: 1-255)
•vlan-id - MVR VLAN ID (Range: 1-4094)
Default Setting
• MVR is disabled.
• No MVR group address is defined.
• The default number of contiguous addresses is 0.
• MVR VLAN ID is 1.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Table 4-79 Multicast VLAN Registration Commands
Command Function Mode Page
mvr Globally enables MVR, statically configures MVR group
address(es), or specifies the MVR VLAN identifier
GC 4-304
mvr Configures an interface as an MVR receiver or source port,
enables immediate leave capability, or configures an
interface as a static member of the MVR VLAN
IC 4-305
show mvr Shows information about the global MVR configuration
settings, the interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN, or the
multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN
PE 4-307
Multicast VLAN Registration Commands
4-305
4
Command Usage
•Use the mvr group command to statically configure all multicast group
addresses that will join the MVR VLAN. Any multicast data associated an
MVR group is sent from all source ports, and to all receiver ports that have
registered to receive data from that multicast group.
• The IP address range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 is used for multicast
streams. MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast
address range of 224.0.0.x.
• IGMP snooping must be enabled to a allow a subscriber to dynamically join or
leave an MVR group (see ip igmp snooping on page 4-288). Note that only
IGMP version 2 or 3 hosts can issue multicast join or leave messages.
Example
The following example enables MVR globally, and configures a range of MVR group
addresses:
mvr (Interface Configuration)
This command configures an interface as an MVR receiver or source port using the
type keyword, enables immediate leave capability using the immediate keyword, or
configures an interface as a static member of the MVR VLAN using the group
keyword. Use the no form to restore the default settings.
Syntax
[no] mvr {type {receiver | source} | immediate | group ip-address}
•receiver - Configures the interface as a subscriber port that can receive
multicast data.
•source - Configure the interface as an uplink port that can send and receive
multicast data for the configured multicast groups.
•immediate - Configures the switch to immediately remove an interface from
a multicast stream as soon as it receives a leave message for that group.
•ip-address - Statically configures an interface to receive multicast traffic
from the IP address specified for an MVR multicast group.
(Range: 224.0.1.0 - 239.255.255.255)
Default Setting
• The port type is not defined.
• Immediate leave is disabled.
• No receiver port is a member of any configured multicast group.
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Console(config)#mvr
Console(config)#mvr group 228.1.23.1 10
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-306
4
Command Usage
• A port which is not configured as an MVR receiver or source port can use
IGMP snooping to join or leave multicast groups using the standard rules for
multicast filtering.
• MVR receiver ports cannot be members of a trunk. Receiver ports can belong
to different VLANs, but should not be configured as a member of the MVR
VLAN. IGMP snooping can be used to allow a receiver port to dynamically join
or leave multicast groups within the MVR VLAN. Multicast groups can also be
statically assigned to a receiver port using the group keyword.
• One or more interfaces may be configured as MVR source ports. A source
port is able to both receive and send data for multicast groups which it has
joined through IGMP snooping or which have been statically assigned using
the group keyword.
• The IP address range from 224.0.0.0 to 239.255.255.255 is used for multicast
streams. MVR group addresses cannot fall within the reserved IP multicast
address range of 224.0.0.x.
• Immediate leave applies only to receiver ports. When enabled, the receiver
port is immediately removed from the multicast group identified in the leave
message. When immediate leave is disabled, the switch follows the standard
rules by sending a group-specific query to the receiver port and waiting for a
response to determine if there are any remaining subscribers for that multicast
group before removing the port from the group list.
• Using immediate leave can speed up leave latency, but should only be
enabled on a port attached to one multicast subscriber to avoid disrupting
services to other group members attached to the same interface.
• Immediate leave does not apply to multicast groups which have been
statically assigned to a port.
• IGMP snooping must be enabled to allow a subscriber to dynamically join or
leave an MVR group (see ip igmp snooping on page 4-288). Note that only
IGMP version 2 or 3 hosts can issue multicast join or leave messages.
Example
The following configures one source port and several receiver ports on the switch,
enables immediate leave on one of the receiver ports, and statically assigns a
multicast group to another receiver port:
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#mvr type source
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/6
Console(config-if)#mvr type receiver
Console(config-if)#mvr immediate
Console(config-if)#exit
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/7
Console(config-if)#mvr type receiver
Console(config-if)#mvr group 225.0.0.5
Console(config-if)#
Multicast VLAN Registration Commands
4-307
4
show mvr
This command shows information about the global MVR configuration settings when
entered without any keywords, the interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN using the
interface keyword, or the multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN using the
members keyword.
Syntax
show mvr [interface [interface] | members [ip-address]]
•interface
•ethernet unit/port
-unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
-port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
•port-channel channel-id (Range: 1-8)
•ip-address - IP address for an MVR multicast group.
(Range: 224.0.1.0 - 239.255.255.255)
Default Setting
Displays global configuration settings for MVR when no keywords are used.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
Enter this command without any keywords to display the global settings for
MVR. Use the interface keyword to display information about interfaces
attached to the MVR VLAN. Or use the members keyword to display
information about multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN.
Example
The following shows the global MVR settings:
Console#show mvr
MVR Status:enable
MVR running status:TRUE
MVR multicast vlan:1
MVR Max Multicast Groups:255
MVR Current multicast groups:10
Console#
Table 4-80 show mvr - display description
Field Description
MVR Status Shows if MVR is globally enabled on the switch.
MVR running status Indicates whether or not all necessary conditions in the MVR environment
are satisfied.
MVR multicast vlan Shows the VLAN used to transport all MVR multicast traffic.
MVR Max Multicast Groups Shows the maximum number of multicast groups which can assigned to the
MVR VLAN.
MVR Current multicast groups Shows the number of multicast groups currently assigned to the MVR VLAN.
Command Line Interface
4-308
4
The following displays information about the interfaces attached to the MVR VLAN:
The following shows information about the interfaces associated with multicast
groups assigned to the MVR VLAN:
Console#show mvr interface
Port Type Status Immediate Leave
------- -------- ------------- ---------------
eth1/1 SOURCE ACTIVE/UP Disable
eth1/2 RECEIVER ACTIVE/UP Disable
eth1/5 RECEIVER INACTIVE/DOWN Disable
eth1/6 RECEIVER INACTIVE/DOWN Disable
eth1/7 RECEIVER INACTIVE/DOWN Disable
Console#
Table 4-81 show mvr interface - display description
Field Description
Port Shows interfaces attached to the MVR.
Type Shows the MVR port type.
Status Shows the MVR status and interface status. MVR status for source ports is
“ACTIVE” if MVR is globally enabled on the switch. MVR status for receiver
ports is “ACTIVE” only if there are subscribers receiving multicast traffic from
one of the MVR groups, or a multicast group has been statically assigned to
an interface.
Immediate Leave Shows if immediate leave is enabled or disabled.
Console#show mvr members
MVR Group IP Status Members
---------------- -------- -------
225.0.0.1 ACTIVE eth1/1(d), eth1/2(s)
225.0.0.2 INACTIVE None
225.0.0.3 INACTIVE None
225.0.0.4 INACTIVE None
225.0.0.5 INACTIVE None
225.0.0.6 INACTIVE None
225.0.0.7 INACTIVE None
225.0.0.8 INACTIVE None
225.0.0.9 INACTIVE None
225.0.0.10 INACTIVE None
Console#
Table 4-82 show mvr members - display description
Field Description
MVR Group IP Multicast groups assigned to the MVR VLAN.
Status Shows whether or not the there are active subscribers for this multicast group. Note that
this field will also display “INACTIVE” if MVR is globally disabled.
Members Shows the interfaces with subscribers for multicast services provided through the MVR
VLAN. Also shows if an interface has dynamically joined a multicast group (d), or if a
multicast group has been statically bound to the interface (s).
IP Interface Commands
4-309
4
IP Interface Commands
An IP addresses may be used for management access to the switch over your
network. The IP address for this switch is obtained via DHCP by default. You can
manually configure a specific IP address, or direct the device to obtain an address
from a BOOTP or DHCP server when it is powered on. You may also need to a
establish a default gateway between this device and management stations or other
devices that exist on another network segment.
ip address
This command sets the IP address for the currently selected VLAN interface. Use
the no form to restore the default IP address.
Syntax
ip address {ip-address netmask | bootp | dhcp}
no ip address
•ip-address - IP address
•netmask - Network mask for the associated IP subnet. This mask identifies
the host address bits used for routing to specific subnets.
•bootp - Obtains IP address from BOOTP.
•dhcp - Obtains IP address from DHCP.
Default Setting
DHCP
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (VLAN)
Command Usage
• You must assign an IP address to this device to gain management access
over the network. You can manually configure a specific IP address, or direct
the device to obtain an address from a BOOTP or DHCP server. Valid IP
addresses consist of four numbers, 0 to 255, separated by periods. Anything
outside this format will not be accepted by the configuration program.
Table 4-83 IP Interface Commands
Command Function Mode Page
ip address Sets the IP address for the current interface IC 4-309
ip default-gateway Defines the default gateway through which this switch can reach
other subnetworks
GC 4-310
ip dhcp restart Submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request PE 4-311
show ip interface Displays the IP settings for this device PE 4-311
show ip redirects Displays the default gateway configured for this device PE 4-312
ping Sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the
network
NE,
PE
4-312
Command Line Interface
4-310
4
• If you select the bootp or dhcp option, IP is enabled but will not function until
a BOOTP or DHCP reply has been received. Requests will be broadcast
periodically by this device in an effort to learn its IP address. (BOOTP and
DHCP values can include the IP address, default gateway, and subnet mask).
• You can start broadcasting BOOTP or DHCP requests by entering an ip dhcp
restart command, or by rebooting the switch.
Note: Only one VLAN interface can be assigned an IP address (the default is
VLAN 1). This defines the management VLAN, the only VLAN through
which you can gain management access to the switch. If you assign an IP
address to any other VLAN, the new IP address overrides the original IP
address and this becomes the new management VLAN.
Example
In the following example, the device is assigned an address in VLAN 1.
Related Commands
ip dhcp restart (4-311)
ip default-gateway
This command establishes a static route between this switch and devices that exist
on another network segment. Use the no form to remove the static route.
Syntax
ip default-gateway gateway
no ip default-gateway
gateway - IP address of the default gateway
Default Setting
No static route is established.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
A gateway must be defined if the management station is located in a different
IP segment.
Example
The following example defines a default gateway for this device:
Related Commands
show ip redirects (4-312)
Console(config)#interface vlan 1
Console(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.5 255.255.255.0
Console(config-if)#
Console(config)#ip default-gateway 10.1.1.254
Console(config)#
IP Interface Commands
4-311
4
ip dhcp restart
This command submits a BOOTP or DHCP client request.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• This command issues a BOOTP or DHCP client request for any IP interface
that has been set to BOOTP or DHCP mode via the ip address command.
• DHCP requires the server to reassign the client’s last address if available.
• If the BOOTP or DHCP server has been moved to a different domain, the
network portion of the address provided to the client will be based on this new
domain.
Example
In the following example, the device is reassigned the same address.
Related Commands
ip address (4-309)
show ip interface
This command displays the settings of an IP interface.
Default Setting
All interfaces
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Related Commands
show ip redirects (4-312)
Console(config)#interface vlan 1
Console(config-if)#ip address dhcp
Console(config-if)#end
Console#ip dhcp restart
Console#show ip interface
IP address and netmask: 192.168.1.54 255.255.255.0 on VLAN 1,
and address mode: DHCP.
Console#
Console#show ip interface
IP address and netmask: 192.168.1.54 255.255.255.0 on VLAN 1,
and address mode: User specified.
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-312
4
show ip redirects
This command shows the default gateway configured for this device.
Default Setting
None
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Related Commands
ip default-gateway (4-310)
ping
This command sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network.
Syntax
ping host [size size] [count count]
•host - IP address or IP alias of the host.
•size - Number of bytes in a packet. (Range: 32-512, default: 32)
The actual packet size will be eight bytes larger than the size specified
because the switch adds header information.
•count - Number of packets to send. (Range: 1-16, default: 5)
Default Setting
This command has no default for the host.
Command Mode
Normal Exec, Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• Use the ping command to see if another site on the network can be reached.
• Following are some results of the ping command:
-Normal response - The normal response occurs in one to ten seconds,
depending on network traffic.
-Destination does not respond - If the host does not respond, a “timeout”
appears in ten seconds.
-Destination unreachable - The gateway for this destination indicates that
the destination is unreachable.
-Network or host unreachable - The gateway found no corresponding entry
in the route table.
• Press <Esc> to stop pinging.
Console#show ip redirects
IP default gateway 10.1.0.254
Console#
IP Source Guard Commands
4-313
4
Example
Related Commands
interface (4-166)
IP Source Guard Commands
IP Source Guard is a security feature that filters IP traffic on network interfaces
based on manually configured entries in the IP Source Guard table, or static and
dynamic entries in the DHCP Snooping table when enabled (see “DHCP Snooping
Commands” on page 4-317). IP source guard can be used to prevent traffic attacks
caused when a host tries to use the IP address of a neighbor to access the network.
This section describes commands used to configure IP Source Guard.
ip source-guard
This command configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based source IP
address, or source IP address and corresponding MAC address. Use the no form to
disable this function.
Syntax
ip source-guard {sip | sip-mac}
no ip source-guard
•sip - Filters traffic based on IP addresses stored in the binding table.
Console#ping 10.1.0.9
Type ESC to abort.
PING to 10.1.0.9, by 5 32-byte payload ICMP packets, timeout is 5 seconds
response time: 10 ms
response time: 10 ms
response time: 10 ms
response time: 10 ms
response time: 10 ms
Ping statistics for 10.1.0.9:
5 packets transmitted, 5 packets received (100%), 0 packets lost (0%)
Approximate round trip times:
Minimum = 10 ms, Maximum = 20 ms, Average = 10 ms
Console#
Table 4-84 IP Source Guard Commands
Command Function Mode Page
ip source-guard Configures the switch to filter inbound traffic based on source IP
address, or source IP address and corresponding MAC address
IC 4-313
ip source-guard
binding
Adds a static address to the source-guard binding table GC 4-315
show ip
source-guard
Shows whether source guard is enabled or disabled on each
interface
PE 4-316
show ip
source-guard
binding
Shows the source guard binding table PE 4-316
Command Line Interface
4-314
4
•sip-mac - Filters traffic based on IP addresses and corresponding MAC
addresses stored in the binding table.
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet)
Command Usage
• Source guard is used to filter traffic on an unsecure port which receives
messages from outside the network or firewall, and therefore may be subject
to traffic attacks caused by a host trying to use the IP address of a neighbor.
• Setting source guard mode to “sip” or “sip-mac” enables this function on the
selected port. Use the “sip” option to check the VLAN ID, source IP address,
and port number against all entries in the binding table. Use the “sip-mac”
option to check these same parameters, plus the source MAC address. Use
the no source guard command to disable this function on the selected port.
• When enabled, traffic is filtered based upon dynamic entries learned via
DHCP snooping, static entries configured in the DHCP snooping table, or
static addresses configured in the source guard binding table.
• Table entries include a MAC address, IP address, lease time, entry type
(Static-IP-SG-Binding, Dynamic-DHCP-Binding, Static-DHCP-Binding),
VLAN identifier, and port identifier.
• Static addresses entered in the source guard binding table with the ip
source-guard binding command (page 4-315) are automatically configured
with an infinite lease time. Dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping are
configured by the DHCP server itself; static entries include a manually
configured lease time.
• If the IP source guard is enabled, an inbound packet’s IP address (sip option)
or both its IP address and corresponding MAC address (sip-mac option) will
be checked against the binding table. If no matching entry is found, the packet
will be dropped.
• Filtering rules are implemented as follows:
- If the DHCP snooping is disabled (see page 4-317), IP source guard will
check the VLAN ID, source IP address, port number, and source MAC
address (for the sip-mac option). If a matching entry is found in the binding
table and the entry type is static IP source guard binding, the packet will be
forwarded.
- If the DHCP snooping is enabled, IP source guard will check the VLAN ID,
source IP address, port number, and source MAC address (for the sip-mac
option). If a matching entry is found in the binding table and the entry type
is static IP source guard binding, static DHCP snooping binding or dynamic
DHCP snooping binding, the packet will be forwarded.
- If IP source guard if enabled on an interface for which IP source bindings
(dynamically learned via DHCP snooping or manually configured) are not
IP Source Guard Commands
4-315
4
yet configured, the switch will drop all IP traffic on that port, except for
DHCP packets.
Example
This example enables IP source guard on port 5.
Related Commands
ip source-guard binding (4-315)
ip dhcp snooping (4-317)
ip dhcp snooping vlan (4-319)
ip source-guard binding
This command adds a static address to the source-guard binding table. Use the no
form to remove a static entry.
Syntax
ip source-guard binding mac-address vlan vlan-id ip-address
interface ethernet unit/port
no ip source-guard binding mac-address vlan vlan-id
•mac-address - A valid unicast MAC address.
•vlan-id - ID of a configured VLAN (Range: 1-4094)
•ip-address - A valid unicast IP address, including classful types A, B or C.
•unit - Stack unit. (Range: 1)
•port - Port number. (Range: 1-28)
Default Setting
No configured entries
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• Table entries include a MAC address, IP address, lease time, entry type
(Static-IP-SG-Binding, Dynamic-DHCP-Binding, Static-DHCP-Binding),
VLAN identifier, and port identifier.
• All static entries are configured with an infinite lease time, which is indicated
with a value of zero by the show ip source-guard command (page 4-316).
• When source guard is enabled, traffic is filtered based upon dynamic entries
learned via DHCP snooping, static entries configured in the DHCP snooping
table, or static addresses configured in the source guard binding table with
this command.
• Static bindings are processed as follows:
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#ip source-guard sip
Console(config-if)#
Command Line Interface
4-316
4
- If there is no entry with same VLAN ID and MAC address, a new entry is
added to binding table using the type of static IP source guard binding.
- If there is an entry with same VLAN ID and MAC address, and the type of
entry is static IP source guard binding, then the new entry will replace the
old one.
- If there is an entry with same VLAN ID and MAC address, and the type of
the entry is dynamic DHCP snooping binding, then the new entry will
replace the old one and the entry type will be changed to static IP source
guard binding.
Example
This example configures a static source-guard binding on port 5.
Related Commands
ip source-guard (4-313)
ip dhcp snooping (4-317)
ip dhcp snooping vlan (4-319)
show ip source-guard
This command shows whether source guard is enabled or disabled on each
interface.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
show ip source-guard binding
This command shows the source guard binding table.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Console(config)#ip source-guard binding 11-22-33-44-55-66 vlan 1
192.168.0.99 interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#
Console#show ip source-guard
Interface Filter-type
--------- -----------
Eth 1/1 DISABLED
Eth 1/2 DISABLED
Eth 1/3 DISABLED
Eth 1/4 DISABLED
Eth 1/5 SIP
Eth 1/6 DISABLED
.
.
.
DHCP Snooping Commands
4-317
4
Example
DHCP Snooping Commands
DHCP snooping allows a switch to protect a network from rogue DHCP servers or
other devices which send port-related information to a DHCP server. This
information can be useful in tracking an IP address back to a physical port. This
section describes commands used to configure DHCP snooping.
ip dhcp snooping
This command enables DHCP snooping globally. Use the no form to restore the
default setting.
Syntax
[no] ip dhcp snooping
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• Network traffic may be disrupted when malicious DHCP messages are
received from an outside source. DHCP snooping is used to filter DHCP
Console#show ip source-guard binding
MacAddress IpAddress Lease(sec) Type VLAN Interface
----------------- --------------- ---------- -------------------- ---- ---------
11-22-33-44-55-66 192.168.0.99 0 Static 1 Eth 1/5
Console#
Table 4-85 DHCP Snooping Commands
Command Function Mode Page
ip dhcp snooping Enables DHCP snooping globally GC 4-317
ip dhcp snooping vlan Enables DHCP snooping on the specified VLAN GC 4-319
ip dhcp snooping trust Configures the specified interface as trusted IC 4-320
ip dhcp snooping verify
mac-address
Verifies the client’s hardware address stored in the DHCP
packet against the source MAC address in the Ethernet header
GC 4-321
ip dhcp snooping
information option
Enables or disables DHCP Option 82 information relay GC 4-321
ip dhcp snooping
information policy
Sets the information option policy for DHCP client packets that
include Option 82 information
GC 4-322
ip dhcp snooping
database flash
Writes all dynamically learned snooping entries to flash
memory
GC 4-323
show ip dhcp snooping Shows the DHCP snooping configuration settings PE 4-323
show ip dhcp snooping
binding
Shows the DHCP snooping binding table entries PE 4-324
Command Line Interface
4-318
4
messages received on an unsecure interface from outside the network or
firewall. When DHCP snooping is enabled globally by this command, and
enabled on a VLAN interface by the ip dhcp snooping vlan command
(page 4-319), DHCP messages received on an untrusted interface (as
specified by the no ip dhcp snooping trust command, page 4-320) from a
device not listed in the DHCP snooping table will be dropped.
• When enabled, DHCP messages entering an untrusted interface are filtered
based upon dynamic entries learned via DHCP snooping.
• Table entries are only learned for untrusted interfaces. Each entry includes a
MAC address, IP address, lease time, entry type (Dynamic-DHCP-Binding,
Static-DHCP-Binding), VLAN identifier, and port identifier.
• When DHCP snooping is enabled, the rate limit for the number of DHCP
messages that can be processed by the switch is 100 packets per second.
Any DHCP packets in excess of this limit are dropped.
• Filtering rules are implemented as follows:
- If the global DHCP snooping is disabled, all DHCP packets are forwarded.
- If DHCP snooping is enabled globally, and also enabled on the VLAN where
the DHCP packet is received, all DHCP packets are forwarded for a trusted
port. If the received packet is a DHCP ACK message, a dynamic DHCP
snooping entry is also added to the binding table.
- If DHCP snooping is enabled globally, and also enabled on the VLAN where
the DHCP packet is received, but the port is not trusted, it is processed as
follows:
* If the DHCP packet is a reply packet from a DHCP server (including
OFFER, ACK or NAK messages), the packet is dropped.
* If the DHCP packet is from a client, such as a DECLINE or RELEASE
message, the switch forwards the packet only if the corresponding entry
is found in the binding table.
* If the DHCP packet is from client, such as a DISCOVER, REQUEST,
INFORM, DECLINE or RELEASE message, the packet is forwarded if
MAC address verification is disabled (as specified by the ip dhcp
snooping verify mac-address command, page 4-321). However, if
MAC address verification is enabled, then the packet will only be
forwarded if the client’s hardware address stored in the DHCP packet is
the same as the source MAC address in the Ethernet header.
* If the DHCP packet is not a recognizable type, it is dropped.
- If a DHCP packet from a client passes the filtering criteria above, it will only
be forwarded to trusted ports in the same VLAN.
- If a DHCP packet is from server is received on a trusted port, it will be
forwarded to both trusted and untrusted ports in the same VLAN.
• If the DHCP snooping is globally disabled, all dynamic bindings are removed
from the binding table.
•Additional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCP client – The port(s)
through which the switch submits a client request to the DHCP server must be
configured as trusted (ip dhcp snooping trust, page 4-320). Note that the
DHCP Snooping Commands
4-319
4
switch will not add a dynamic entry for itself to the binding table when it
receives an ACK message from a DHCP server. Also, when the switch sends
out DHCP client packets for itself, no filtering takes place. However, when the
switch receives any messages from a DHCP server, any packets received
from untrusted ports are dropped.
Example
This example enables DHCP snooping globally for the switch.
Related Commands
ip dhcp snooping vlan (4-319)
ip dhcp snooping trust (4-320)
ip dhcp snooping vlan
This command enables DHCP snooping on the specified VLAN. Use the no form to
restore the default setting.
Syntax
[no] ip dhcp snooping vlan vlan-id
vlan-id - ID of a configured VLAN (Range: 1-4094)
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• When DHCP snooping enabled globally using the ip dhcp snooping
command (page 4-317), and enabled on a VLAN with this command, DHCP
packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN as
specified by the ip dhcp snooping trust command (page 4-320).
• When the DHCP snooping is globally disabled, DHCP snooping can still be
configured for specific VLANs, but the changes will not take effect until DHCP
snooping is globally re-enabled.
• When DHCP snooping is globally enabled, configuration changes for specific
VLANs have the following effects:
- If DHCP snooping is disabled on a VLAN, all dynamic bindings learned for
this VLAN are removed from the binding table.
Example
This example enables DHCP snooping for VLAN 1.
Console(config)#ip dhcp snooping
Console(config)#
Console(config)#ip dhcp snooping vlan 1
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-320
4
Related Commands
ip dhcp snooping (4-317)
ip dhcp snooping trust (4-320)
ip dhcp snooping trust
This command configures the specified interface as trusted. Use the no form to
restore the default setting.
Syntax
[no] ip dhcp snooping trust
Default Setting
All interfaces are untrusted
Command Mode
Interface Configuration (Ethernet, Port Channel)
Command Usage
• An untrusted interface is an interface that is configured to receive messages
from outside the network or firewall. A trusted interface is an interface that is
configured to receive only messages from within the network.
• When DHCP snooping enabled globally using the ip dhcp snooping
command (page 4-317), and enabled on a VLAN with this command, DHCP
packet filtering will be performed on any untrusted ports within the VLAN
according to the default status, or as specifically configured for an interface
with the no ip dhcp snooping trust command.
• When an untrusted port is changed to a trusted port, all the dynamic DHCP
snooping bindings associated with this port are removed.
•Additional considerations when the switch itself is a DHCP client – The port(s)
through which it submits a client request to the DHCP server must be
configured as trusted.
Example
This example sets port 5 to untrusted.
Related Commands
ip dhcp snooping (4-317)
ip dhcp snooping vlan (4-319)
Console(config)#interface ethernet 1/5
Console(config-if)#no ip dhcp snooping trust
Console(config-if)#
DHCP Snooping Commands
4-321
4
ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address
This command verifies the client’s hardware address stored in the DHCP packet
against the source MAC address in the Ethernet header. Use the no form to disable
this function.
Syntax
[no] ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
If MAC address verification is enabled, and the source MAC address in the
Ethernet header of the packet is not same as the client’s hardware address in
the DHCP packet, the packet is dropped.
Example
This example enables MAC address verification.
Related Commands
ip dhcp snooping (4-317)
ip dhcp snooping vlan (4-319)
ip dhcp snooping trust (4-320)
ip dhcp snooping information option
This command enables the DHCP Option 82 information relay for the switch. Use
the no form to disable this function.
Syntax
[no] ip dhcp snooping information option
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• DHCP provides a relay mechanism for sending information about the switch
and its DHCP clients to the DHCP server. Known as DHCP Option 82, it
allows compatible DHCP servers to use the information when assigning IP
addresses, or to set other services or policies for clients.
Console(config)#ip dhcp snooping verify mac-address
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-322
4
• When the DHCP Snooping Information Option is enabled, clients can be
identified by the switch port to which they are connected rather than just their
MAC address. DHCP client-server exchange messages are then forwarded
directly between the server and client without having to flood them to the
entire VLAN.
•DHCP snooping must be enabled on the switch for the DHCP Option 82
information to be inserted into packets.
Example
This example enables the DHCP Snooping Information Option.
ip dhcp snooping information policy
This command sets the DHCP snooping information option policy for DHCP client
packets that include Option 82 information.
Syntax
ip dhcp snooping information policy <drop | keep | replace>
•drop - Discards the Option 82 information in a packet and then floods it to
the entire VLAN.
•keep - Retains the client’s DHCP information
•replace - Overwrites the DHCP client packet information with the switch’s
relay information.
Default Setting
replace
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
When the switch receives DHCP packets from clients that already include
DHCP Option 82 information, the switch can be configured to set the action
policy for these packets. Either the switch can drop the DHCP packets, keep
the existing information, or replace it with the switch’s relay information.
Example
Console(config)#ip dhcp snooping information option
Console(config)#
Console(config)#ip dhcp snooping information policy drop
Console(config)#
DHCP Snooping Commands
4-323
4
ip dhcp snooping database flash
This command writes all dynamically learned snooping entries to flash memory.
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
This command can be used to store the currently learned dynamic DHCP
snooping entries to flash memory. These entries will be restored to the
snooping table when the switch is reset. However, note that the lease time
shown for a dynamic entry that has been restored from flash memory will no
longer be valid.
Example
show ip dhcp snooping
This command shows the DHCP snooping configuration settings.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console(config)#ip dhcp snooping database flash
Console(config)#
Console#show ip dhcp snooping
Global DHCP Snooping status: disable
DHCP Snooping is configured on the following VLANs:
1
Verify Source Mac-Address: enable
Interface Trusted
---------- ----------
Eth 1/1 No
Eth 1/2 No
Eth 1/3 No
Eth 1/4 No
Eth 1/5 Yes
.
.
.
Command Line Interface
4-324
4
show ip dhcp snooping binding
This command shows the DHCP snooping binding table entries.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
IP Cluster Commands
IP Clustering is a method of grouping switches together to enable centralized
management through a single unit. A switch cluster has a “Commander” unit that is
used to manage all other “Member” switches in the cluster. The management station
uses Telnet to communicate directly with the Commander throught its IP address,
and the Commander manages Member switches using cluster “internal” IP
addresses. There can be up to 36 Member switches in one cluster. Cluster switches
are limited to within a single IP subnet.
cluster
This command enables clustering on the switch. Use the no form to disable
clustering.
Syntax
[no] cluster
Default Setting
Enabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Console#show ip dhcp snooping binding
MacAddress IpAddress Lease(sec) Type VLAN Interface
----------------- --------------- ---------- -------------------- ---- ---------
11-22-33-44-55-66 192.168.0.99 0 Static 1 Eth 1/5
Console#
Table 4-86 Switch Cluster Commands
Command Function Mode Page
cluster Configures clustering on the switch GC 4-324
cluster commander Configures the switch as a cluster Commander GC 4-325
cluster ip-pool Sets the cluster IP address pool for Members GC 4-326
cluster member Sets Candidate switches as cluster members GC 4-326
rcommand Provides configuration access to Member switches GC 4-327
show cluster Displays the switch clustering status PE 4-327
show cluster members Displays current cluster Members PE 4-328
show cluster candidates Displays current cluster Candidates in the network PE 4-328
IP Cluster Commands
4-325
4
Command Usage
• To create a switch cluster, first be sure that clustering is enabled on the switch
(the default is enabled), then set the switch as a Cluster Commander. Set a
Cluster IP Pool that does not conflict with any other IP subnets in the network.
Cluster IP addresses are assigned to switches when they become Members
and are used for communication between Member switches and the
Commander.
• Switch clusters are limited to a single IP subnet (Layer 2 domain).
• A switch can only be a Member of one cluster.
• Configured switch clusters are maintained across power resets and network
changes.
Example
cluster commander
This command enables the switch as a cluster Commander. Use the no form to
disable the switch as cluster Commander.
Syntax
[no] cluster commander
Default Setting
Disabled
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• Once a switch has been configured to be a cluster Commander, it
automatically discovers other cluster-enabled switches in the network. These
“Candidate” switches only become cluster Members when manually selected
by the administrator through the management station.
• Cluster Member switches can be managed through using a Telnet connection to
the Commander. From the Commander CLI prompt, use the rcommand id
command to connect to the Member switch.
Example
Console(config)#cluster
Console(config)#
Console(config)#cluster commander
Console(config)#
Command Line Interface
4-326
4
cluster ip-pool
This command sets the cluster IP address pool. Use the no form to reset to the
default address.
Syntax
cluster ip-pool <ip-address>
no cluster ip-pool
ip-address - The base IP address for IP addresses assigned to cluster
Members. The IP address must start 10.x.x.x.
Default Setting
10.254.254.1
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Command Usage
• An “internal” IP address pool is used to assign IP addresses to Member
switches in the cluster. Internal cluster IP addresses are in the form
10.x.x.member-ID. Only the base IP address of the pool needs to be set since
Member IDs can only be between 1 and 36.
•Set a Cluster IP Pool that does not conflict with addresses in the network IP
subnet. Cluster IP addresses are assigned to switches when they become
Members and are used for communication between Member switches and the
Commander.
• You cannot change the cluster IP pool when the switch is currently in Commander
mode. Commander mode must first be disabled.
Example
cluster member
This command configures a Candidate switch as a cluster Member. Use the no form
to remove a Member switch from the cluster.
Syntax
cluster member mac-address <mac-address> id <member-id>
no cluster member id <member-id>
mac-address - The MAC address of the Candidate switch.
member-id - The ID number to assign to the Member switch.
(Range: 1-36)
Default Setting
No Members
Command Mode
Global Configuration
Console(config)#cluster ip-pool 10.2.3.4
Console(config)#
IP Cluster Commands
4-327
4
Command Usage
• The maximum number of cluster Members is 36.
•The maximum number of switch Candidates is 100.
Example
rcommand
This command provides access to a cluster Member CLI for configuration.
Syntax
rcommand id <member-id>
member-id - The ID number of the Member switch. (Range: 1-36)
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Command Usage
• This command only operates through a Telnet connection to the Commander
switch. Managing cluster Members using the local console CLI on the
Commander is not supported.
•There is no need to enter the username and password for access to the
Member switch CLI.
Example
show cluster
This command shows the switch clustering configuration.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console(config)#cluster member mac-address 00-12-34-56-78-9a id 5
Console(config)#
Vty-0#rcommand id 1
CLI session with the 24/48 L2/L4 GE Switch is opened.
To end the CLI session, enter [Exit].
Vty-0#
Console#show cluster
Role: commander
Interval heartbeat: 30
Heartbeat loss count: 3
Number of Members: 1
Number of Candidates: 2
Console#
Command Line Interface
4-328
4
show cluster members
This command shows the current switch cluster members.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
show cluster candidates
This command shows the discovered Candidate switches in the network.
Command Mode
Privileged Exec
Example
Console#show cluster members
Cluster Members:
ID: 1
Role: Active member
IP Address: 10.254.254.2
MAC Address: 00-12-cf-23-49-c0
Description: 24/48 L2/L4 IPV4/IPV6 GE Switch
Console#
Console#show cluster candidates
Cluster Candidates:
Role Mac Description
--------------- ----------------- -----------------------------------------
ACTIVE MEMBER 00-12-cf-23-49-c0 24/48 L2/L4 IPV4/IPV6 GE Switch
CANDIDATE 00-12-cf-0b-47-a0 24/48 L2/L4 IPV4/IPV6 GE Switch
Console#
A-1
Appendix A: Software Specifications
Software Features
Authentication
Local, RADIUS, TACACS, Port (802.1X, MAC Authentication, Web
Authentication), HTTPS, SSH, Port Security
Access Control Lists
IP, MAC; 1000 rules per system
DHCP Client
Port Configuration
100BASE-FX: 100 Mbps full duplex
1000BASE-T: 10/100 Mbps at half/full duplex, 1000 Mbps at full duplex
1000BASE-SX/LX/LH - 1000 Mbps at full duplex (SFP)
Flow Control
Full Duplex: IEEE 802.3-2005
Half Duplex: Back pressure
Broadcast Storm Control
Traffic throttled above a critical threshold
Port Mirroring
Multiple source ports, one destination port
Rate Limits
Input limit
Output limit
Port Trunking
Static trunks (Cisco EtherChannel compliant)
Dynamic trunks (Link Aggregation Control Protocol)
Spanning Tree Algorithm
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP, IEEE 802.1D)
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP, IEEE 802.1w)
Muliple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP, IEEE 802.1s)
VLAN Support
Up to 255 groups; port-based or tagged (802.1Q),
Private VLANs
Protocol-based VLANs
Class of Service
Supports 4 levels of priority and Weighted Round Robin Queueing
(which can be configured by VLAN tag or port),
Layer 3/4 priority mapping: IP DSCP
Multicast Filtering
IGMP Snooping (Layer 2)
Software Specifications
A-2
A
Multicast VLAN Registration
Quality of Service
DiffServ supports class maps, policy maps, and service policies
Additional Features
BOOTP client
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol)
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
RMON (Remote Monitoring, groups 1,2,3,9)
SMTP Email Alerts
DHCP Snooping
IP Source Guard
IP Clustering
Management Features
In-Band Management
Telnet, Web-based HTTP or HTTPS, SNMP manager, or Secure Shell
Out-of-Band Management
RS-232 DB-9 console port
Software Loading
TFTP in-band or XModem out-of-band
SNMP
Management access via MIB database
Trap management to specified hosts
RMON
Groups 1, 2, 3, 9 (Statistics, History, Alarm, Event)
Standards
IEEE 802.1D Spanning Tree Protocol and traffic priorities
IEEE 802.1p Priority tags
IEEE 802.1Q VLAN
IEEE 802.1v Protocol-based VLANs
IEEE 802.1w Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
IEEE 802.1X Port Authentication
IEEE 802.3-2005
Ethernet, Fast Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet
Full-duplex flow control
Link Aggregation Control Protocol
IEEE 802.3ac VLAN tagging
DHCP Client (RFC 1541)
HTTPS
IGMP (RFC 1112)
IGMPv2 (RFC 2236)
Management Information Bases
A-3
A
RADIUS+ (RFC 2618)
RMON (RFC 1757 groups 1,2,3,9)
SNMP (RFC 1157)
SNMPv2 (RFC 2571)
SNMPv3 (RFC DRAFT 3414, 3410, 2273, 3411, 3415)
SNTP (RFC 2030)
SSH (Version 2.0)
TFTP (RFC 1350)
Management Information Bases
Bridge MIB (RFC 1493)
Differentiated Services MIB (RFC 3289)
Entity MIB (RFC 2737)
Ether-like MIB (RFC 2665)
Extended Bridge MIB (RFC 2674)
Extensible SNMP Agents MIB (RFC 2742)
Forwarding Table MIB (RFC 2096)
IGMP MIB (RFC 2933)
Interface Group MIB (RFC 2233)
Interfaces Evolution MIB (RFC 2863)
IP Multicasting related MIBs
MAU MIB (RFC 2668)
MIB II (RFC 1213)
Port Access Entity MIB (IEEE 802.1X)
Port Access Entity Equipment MIB
Private MIB
Quality of Service MIB
RADIUS Authentication Client MIB (RFC 2621)
RMON MIB (RFC 2819)
RMON II Probe Configuration Group (RFC 2021, partial implementation)
SNMPv2 IP MIB (RFC 2011)
SNMP Community MIB (RFC 3584)
SNMP Framework MIB (RFC 3411)
SNMP-MPD MIB (RFC 3412)
SNMP Target MIB, SNMP Notification MIB (RFC 3413)
SNMP User-Based SM MIB (RFC 3414)
SNMP View Based ACM MIB (RFC 3415)
TACACS+ Authentication Client MIB
TCP MIB (RFC 2013)
Trap (RFC 1215)
UDP MIB (RFC 2012)
Software Specifications
A-4
A
B-1
Appendix B: Troubleshooting
Problems Accessing the Management Interface
Table B-1 Troubleshooting Chart
Symptom Action
Cannot connect using Telnet,
web browser, or SNMP
software
• Be sure the switch is powered up.
• Check network cabling between the management station and the switch.
• Check that you have a valid network connection to the switch and that the
port you are using has not been disabled.
• Be sure you have configured the VLAN interface through which the
management station is connected with a valid IP address, subnet mask
and default gateway.
• Be sure the management station has an IP address in the same subnet as
the switch’s IP interface to which it is connected.
• If you are trying to connect to the switch via the IP address for a tagged
VLAN group, your management station, and the ports connecting
intermediate switches in the network, must be configured with the
appropriate tag.
• If you cannot connect using Telnet, you may have exceeded the maximum
number of concurrent Telnet/SSH sessions permitted. Try connecting
again at a later time.
Cannot connect using
Secure Shell
• If you cannot connect using SSH, you may have exceeded the maximum
number of concurrent Telnet/SSH sessions permitted. Try connecting
again at a later time.
• Be sure the control parameters for the SSH server are properly configured
on the switch, and that the SSH client software is properly configured on
the management station.
• Be sure you have generated a public key on the switch, and exported this
key to the SSH client.
• Be sure you have set up an account on the switch for each SSH user,
including user name, authentication level, and password.
• Be sure you have imported the client’s public key to the switch (if public
key authentication is used).
Cannot access the on-board
configuration program via a
serial port connection
• Be sure you have set the terminal emulator program to VT100 compatible,
8 data bits, 1 stop bit, no parity, and 9600 bps.
• Check that the null-modem serial cable conforms to the pin-out
connections provided in the Installation Guide.
Forgot or lost the password • Contact your local distributor.
Troubleshooting
B-2
B
Using System Logs
If a fault does occur, refer to the Installation Guide to ensure that the problem you
encountered is actually caused by the switch. If the problem appears to be caused
by the switch, follow these steps:
1. Enable logging.
2. Set the error messages reported to include all categories.
3. Designate the SNMP host that is to receive the error messages.
4. Repeat the sequence of commands or other actions that lead up to the error.
5. Make a list of the commands or circumstances that led to the fault. Also make a
list of any error messages displayed.
6. Contact your distributor’s service engineer.
For example:
Console(config)#logging on
Console(config)#logging history flash 7
Console(config)#snmp-server host 192.168.1.23
.
.
.
Glossary-1
Glossary
Access Control List (ACL)
ACLs can limit network traffic and restrict access to certain users or devices by
checking each packet for certain IP or MAC (i.e., Layer 2) information.
Boot Protocol (BOOTP)
BOOTP is used to provide bootup information for network devices, including IP
address information, the address of the TFTP server that contains the devices
system files, and the name of the boot file.
Class of Service (CoS)
CoS is supported by prioritizing packets based on the required level of service, and
then placing them in the appropriate output queue. Data is transmitted from the
queues using weighted round-robin service to enforce priority service and prevent
blockage of lower-level queues. Priority may be set according to the port default, the
packet’s priority bit (in the VLAN tag), TCP/UDP port number, or DSCP priority bit.
Differentiated Services Code Point Service (DSCP)
DSCP uses a six-bit tag to provide for up to 64 different forwarding behaviors. Based
on network policies, different kinds of traffic can be marked for different kinds of
forwarding. The DSCP bits are mapped to the Class of Service categories, and then
into the output queues.
Domain Name Service (DNS)
A system used for translating host names for network nodes into IP addresses.
Dynamic Host Control Protocol (DHCP)
Provides a framework for passing configuration information to hosts on a TCP/IP
network. DHCP is based on the Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP), adding the capability
of automatic allocation of reusable network addresses and additional configuration
options.
Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL)
EAPOL is a client authentication protocol used by this switch to verify the network
access rights for any device that is plugged into the switch. A user name and
password is requested by the switch, and then passed to an authentication server
(e.g., RADIUS) for verification. EAPOL is implemented as part of the IEEE 802.1X
Port Authentication standard.
Glossary
Glossary-2
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol (GVRP)
Defines a way for switches to exchange VLAN information in order to register
necessary VLAN members on ports along the Spanning Tree so that VLANs defined
in each switch can work automatically over a Spanning Tree network.
Generic Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP)
GARP is a protocol that can be used by endstations and switches to register and
propagate multicast group membership information in a switched environment so
that multicast data frames are propagated only to those parts of a switched LAN
containing registered endstations. Formerly called Group Address Registration
Protocol.
Generic Multicast Registration Protocol (GMRP)
GMRP allows network devices to register end stations with multicast groups. GMRP
requires that any participating network devices or end stations comply with the IEEE
802.1p standard.
Group Attribute Registration Protocol (GARP)
See Generic Attribute Registration Protocol.
IEEE 802.1D
Specifies a general method for the operation of MAC bridges, including the
Spanning Tree Protocol.
IEEE 802.1Q
VLAN Tagging—Defines Ethernet frame tags which carry VLAN information. It
allows switches to assign endstations to different virtual LANs, and defines a
standard way for VLANs to communicate across switched networks.
IEEE 802.1p
An IEEE standard for providing quality of service (QoS) in Ethernet networks. The
standard uses packet tags that define up to eight traffic classes and allows switches
to transmit packets based on the tagged priority value.
IEEE 802.1X
Port Authentication controls access to the switch ports by requiring users to first
enter a user ID and password for authentication.
IEEE 802.3ac
Defines frame extensions for VLAN tagging.
IEEE 802.3x
Defines Ethernet frame start/stop requests and timers used for flow control on
full-duplex links. (Now incorporated in IEEE 802.3-2002)
Glossary-3
Glossary
IGMP Snooping
Listening to IGMP Query and IGMP Report packets transferred between IP Multicast
Routers and IP Multicast host groups to identify IP Multicast group members.
IGMP Query
On each subnetwork, one IGMP-capable device will act as the querier — that is, the
device that asks all hosts to report on the IP multicast groups they wish to join or to
which they already belong. The elected querier will be the device with the lowest IP
address in the subnetwork.
Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP)
A protocol through which hosts can register with their local router for multicast
services. If there is more than one multicast switch/router on a given subnetwork,
one of the devices is made the “querier” and assumes responsibility for keeping
track of group membership.
In-Band Management
Management of the network from a station attached directly to the network.
IP Multicast Filtering
A process whereby this switch can pass multicast traffic along to participating hosts.
Layer 2
Data Link layer in the ISO 7-Layer Data Communications Protocol. This is related
directly to the hardware interface for network devices and passes on traffic based on
MAC addresses.
Link Aggregation
See Port Trunk.
Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP)
Allows ports to automatically negotiate a trunked link with LACP-configured ports on
another device.
Management Information Base (MIB)
An acronym for Management Information Base. It is a set of database objects that
contains information about a specific device.
MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm
An algorithm that is used to create digital signatures. It is intended for use with 32 bit
machines and is safer than the MD4 algorithm, which has been broken. MD5 is a
one-way hash function, meaning that it takes a message and converts it into a fixed
string of digits, also called a message digest.
Glossary
Glossary-4
Multicast Switching
A process whereby the switch filters incoming multicast frames for services for
which no attached host has registered, or forwards them to all ports contained within
the designated multicast VLAN group.
Network Time Protocol (NTP)
NTP provides the mechanisms to synchronize time across the network. The time
servers operate in a hierarchical-master-slave configuration in order to synchronize
local clocks within the subnet and to national time standards via wire or radio.
Out-of-Band Management
Management of the network from a station not attached to the network.
Port Authentication
See IEEE 802.1X.
Port Mirroring
A method whereby data on a target port is mirrored to a monitor port for
troubleshooting with a logic analyzer or RMON probe. This allows data on the target
port to be studied unobstructively.
Port Trunk
Defines a network link aggregation and trunking method which specifies how to
create a single high-speed logical link that combines several lower-speed physical
links.
Private VLANs
Private VLANs provide port-based security and isolation between ports within the
assigned VLAN. Data traffic on downlink ports can only be forwarded to, and from,
uplink ports.
Remote Authentication Dial-in User Service (RADIUS)
RADIUS is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central
server to control access to RADIUS-compliant devices on the network.
Remote Monitoring (RMON)
RMON provides comprehensive network monitoring capabilities. It eliminates the
polling required in standard SNMP, and can set alarms on a variety of traffic
conditions, including specific error types.
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)
RSTP reduces the convergence time for network topology changes to about 10% of
that required by the older IEEE 802.1D STP standard.
Glossary-5
Glossary
Secure Shell (SSH)
A secure replacement for remote access functions, including Telnet. SSH can
authenticate users with a cryptographic key, and encrypt data connections between
management clients and the switch.
Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
The application protocol in the Internet suite of protocols which offers network
management services.
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP)
SNTP allows a device to set its internal clock based on periodic updates from a
Network Time Protocol (NTP) server. Updates can be requested from a specific NTP
server, or can be received via broadcasts sent by NTP servers.
Spanning Tree Algorithm (STA)
A technology that checks your network for any loops. A loop can often occur in
complicated or backup linked network systems. Spanning Tree detects and directs
data along the shortest available path, maximizing the performance and efficiency of
the network.
Telnet
Defines a remote communication facility for interfacing to a terminal device over
TCP/IP.
Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus (TACACS+)
TACACS+ is a logon authentication protocol that uses software running on a central
server to control access to TACACS-compliant devices on the network.
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)
Protocol suite that includes TCP as the primary transport protocol, and IP as the
network layer protocol.
Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP)
A TCP/IP protocol commonly used for software downloads.
User Datagram Protocol (UDP)
UDP provides a datagram mode for packet-switched communications. It uses IP as
the underlying transport mechanism to provide access to IP-like services. UDP
packets are delivered just like IP packets – connection-less datagrams that may be
discarded before reaching their targets. UDP is useful when TCP would be too
complex, too slow, or just unnecessary.
Glossary
Glossary-6
Virtual LAN (VLAN)
A Virtual LAN is a collection of network nodes that share the same collision domain
regardless of their physical location or connection point in the network. A VLAN
serves as a logical workgroup with no physical barriers, and allows users to share
information and resources as though located on the same LAN.
XModem
A protocol used to transfer files between devices. Data is grouped in 128-byte
blocks and error-corrected.
Index-1
Numerics
802.1Q tunnel 3-167, 4-251
configuration, guidelines 3-170
configuration, limitations 3-170
description 3-167
ethernet type 3-171
interface configuration 3-172,
4-252–4-253
mode selection 3-172
status, configuring 3-170
TPID 4-253
uplink 3-172
802.1X, port authentication 3-81, 3-99
802.1X, port authentication
accounting 3-62
A
AAA
accounting 802.1X port
settings 3-62
accounting exec command
privileges 3-63
accounting exec settings 3-65
accounting summary 3-65
accounting update 3-62
accounting, configuring 3-60
Authorization & Accounting 3-58
authorization exec settings 3-68
authorization settings 3-67
authorization summary 3-68
RADIUS group settings 3-59
TACACS+ group settings 3-59
acceptable frame type 3-165, 4-246
Access Control List See ACL
ACL
Extended IP 4-139, 4-140, 4-141
MAC 4-144, 4-145–4-147
Standard IP 4-139, 4-140, 4-141
address table 3-133, 4-190, 4-193
aging time 3-136, 4-193
authentication
MAC 3-98
MAC address auth 3-93
MAC, configuring ports 3-98
network access 3-93
public key 3-73
web 3-88
web auth for ports, configuring 3-90
web auth port info, displaying 3-91
web auth, re-authenticating
ports 3-92
web, configuring 3-89
B
BOOTP 3-18, 4-215, 4-216, 4-309
BPDU 3-137
broadcast storm, threshold 3-125,
4-172
C
Class of Service See CoS
CLI, showing commands 4-4
command line interface See CLI
community ports 3-174, 4-254
community string 2-6, 3-39, 3-43, 3-45,
3-46, 3-49, 4-152
community VLANs 3-175, 4-256
configuration settings, saving or
restoring 2-8, 3-21, 4-85
console port, required connections 2-2
CoS
configuring 3-191, 4-264, 4-272
DSCP 3-198, 4-269
layer 3/4 priorities 3-196, 4-269
queue mapping 3-192, 4-267
queue mode 3-195, 4-265
traffic class weights 3-195, 4-266
D
default gateway, configuration 3-16,
4-310
default priority, ingress port 3-191,
4-265
Index
Index-2
Index
default settings, system 1-6
DHCP 3-18, 4-215, 4-216, 4-309
client 3-16
dynamic configuration 2-5
DHCP snooping
global configuration 4-317, 4-324,
4-325
specifying trusted interfaces 4-320
verifying MAC addresses 4-321,
4-322
VLAN configuration 4-319
Differentiated Code Point Service See
DSCP
Differentiated Services See DiffServ
DiffServ 3-200, 4-272
binding policy to interface 3-206,
4-278
class map 3-200, 4-273, 4-276
policy map 3-203, 4-275
service policy 3-206, 4-278
downloading software 3-20, 4-85
DSA encryption 3-75, 3-76
DSCP
enabling 3-197, 4-269
mapping priorities 3-198, 4-270
dynamic addresses, displaying 3-134,
4-191
dynamic VLAN assignment 3-93, 3-95,
4-124
E
edge port, STA 3-146, 3-148, 4-229
encryption
DSA 3-75, 3-76
RSA 3-75
encryption RSA 3-76
event logging 4-55
exec command privileges,
accounting 3-63
exec settings, accounting 3-65
exec settings, authorization 3-68
F
firmware
displaying version 3-13, 4-83
upgrading 3-20, 4-85
G
GARP VLAN Registration Protocol See
GVRP
gateway, default 3-16, 4-310
GVRP
enabling 3-158
global setting 3-158, 4-239
interface configuration 3-165, 4-240
H
hardware version, displaying 3-13,
4-83
HTTPS 3-69, 3-70, 4-43
configuring 3-69
replacing SSL cert 3-70
HTTPS, secure server 3-69, 4-43
I
IEEE 802.1D 3-136, 4-219
IEEE 802.1s 4-219
IEEE 802.1w 3-136, 4-219
IEEE 802.1X 3-81, 3-99, 4-112
IGMP
filter profiles, configuration 3-222
filter, parameters 3-213
filtering & throttling 3-220
filtering & throttling, interface
configuration 3-223
filtering & throttling, status 3-221
filtering/throttling 4-297
filtering/throttling, configuring
profile 4-299
filtering/throttling, creating
profile 4-298
filtering/throttling, enabling 4-298
filtering/throttling, interface
settings 4-300–4-301
groups, displaying 3-218, 4-291
immediate leave, status 3-215
Layer 2 3-212, 4-287
query 3-212, 4-292
query, Layer 2 3-214, 4-292
snooping 3-212, 4-288
snooping & query,
Index-3
Index
parameters 3-213
snooping, configuring 3-213, 4-287
importing user public keys 3-76
ingress filtering 3-165, 4-246
IP address
BOOTP/DHCP 3-18, 4-215, 4-216,
4-309, 4-311
setting 2-4, 3-16, 4-215, 4-216,
4-309
IP precedence
enabling 3-197
IP source guard
configuring static entries 4-315
setting filter criteria 4-313
isolated ports 3-174, 4-254
isolated VLAN, configuring 3-174
J
jumbo frame 4-84
K
key
private 3-71
public 3-71
user public, importing 3-76
key pair
host 3-71
host, generating 3-75
L
LACP
local parameters 4-186
partner parameters 4-186
protocol message statistics 4-186
Link Layer Discovery Protocol - Media
Endpoint Discovery See
LLDP-MED
Link Layer Discovery Protocol See
LLDP
link type, STA 3-146, 3-148, 3-150,
3-152, 3-155, 4-231, 4-232, 4-233
LLDP 3-181
device statistics detail,
displaying 3-190
device statistics, displaying 3-189
interface attributes,
configuring 3-183
local device information,
displaying 3-186
remote information,
displaying 3-188
remote port information,
displaying 3-187
timing attributes, configuring 3-181
TLV 3-181, 3-184
TLV, management address 3-184
TLV, port description 3-184
TLV, system capabilities 3-185
TLV, system description 3-184
TLV, system name 3-184
LLDP-MED 3-181
notification, status 3-185
TLV 3-185
TLV, inventory 3-185
TLV, location 3-185
TLV, network policy 3-185
TLV, port capabilities 3-185
logging
syslog traps 4-58
to syslog servers 4-57
log-in, Web interface 3-2
logon authentication 3-51, 4-91
RADIUS client 4-94
RADIUS server 4-94
TACACS+ client 3-53, 4-98
TACACS+ server 3-53, 4-98
logon authentication, sequence 3-54,
4-92, 4-93
logon authentication, settings 3-54
M
MAC address authentication 3-93,
4-121
ports, configuring 3-94
reauthentication 3-94
MAC authentication 3-98
ports, configuring 3-98
main menu 3-4
Management Information Bases
(MIBs) A-3
mirror port, configuring 3-127, 4-177
Index-4
Index
MSTP 4-219
configuring 3-149
global settings 4-217
global settings, configuring 3-141
global settings, displaying 3-138
interface settings 4-218
interface settings, configuring 3-147,
3-153
interface settings, displaying 3-151
multicast filtering 3-212, 3-225, 3-240,
4-287
multicast groups 3-218, 4-291
displaying 4-291
static 3-218, 4-288, 4-289, 4-291
multicast services
configuring 3-219, 3-226, 3-227,
3-229, 4-288, 4-289
displaying 3-218, 4-291
multicast, filtering and throttling 4-298
multicast, static router port 3-217,
4-296
MVR
setting interface type 4-305
setting multicast groups 4-304
specifying a VLAN 4-304
using immediate leave 4-305
N
network access
authentication 3-93, 4-121
dynamic VLAN assignment 4-124
port configuration 3-94
reauthentication 3-94, 4-127
secure MAC information 3-97, 4-129
P
password, line 4-14, 4-15
passwords 2-4
administrator setting 3-51, 3-59,
3-60, 3-62, 3-65, 4-38
path cost 3-139, 3-145
method 3-142, 4-222
STA 3-139, 3-145, 4-222
port authentication 3-81, 3-99
port priority
configuring 3-191, 4-264, 4-272
default ingress 3-191, 4-265
STA 3-145, 4-228
port security, configuring 3-80, 4-111
port, statistics 3-129, 4-174
ports
autonegotiation 3-112, 4-168
broadcast storm threshold 3-125,
4-172
capabilities 3-112, 4-169
duplex mode 3-112, 4-167
flow control 3-112, 4-170
speed 3-112, 4-167
ports, configuring 3-110, 4-166
ports, mirroring 3-127, 4-177
primary VLAN 3-174
priority, default port ingress 3-191,
4-265
private key 3-71
private VLANs, configuring 3-174,
3-175, 4-255
private VLANs, displaying 3-174
problems, troubleshooting B-1
promiscuous ports 3-174, 4-254
protocol migration 3-148, 4-235
protocol VLANs 3-179
protocol VLANs, configuring 3-179
protocol VLANs, system
configuration 3-180
public key 3-71
PVLAN
association 3-176
community ports 3-174, 4-254
configuring 3-174, 3-175
displaying 3-174
interface configuration 3-178
isolated ports 3-174, 4-254
isolated VLAN, configuring 3-174
primary VLAN 3-174
promiscuous ports 3-174, 4-254
Q
QinQ Tunneling See 802.1Q
QoS 3-199, 4-272
Quality of Service See QoS
queue weights 3-195, 4-266
Index-5
Index
R
RADIUS, logon authentication 4-94
RADIUS, settings 3-54
rate limits, setting 3-128, 4-179
remote logging 4-58
restarting the system 3-33, 4-24, 4-25
RSA encryption 3-75, 3-76
RSTP 3-136, 4-219
global configuration 4-219
global settings, configuring 3-141
global settings, displaying 3-138
interface settings, configuring 3-147
interface settings, displaying 3-144
S
secure shell 3-71, 4-46
configuration 3-71, 4-49
serial port
configuring 4-12
show dot1q-tunnel 4-253
Simple Network Management Protocol
See SNMP
SNMP 3-38
community string 3-39, 3-43, 3-45,
3-46, 3-49, 4-152
enabling traps 3-40, 4-156
filtering IP addresses 3-107
trap manager 3-40, 4-154
software
displaying version 3-13, 4-83
downloading 3-20, 4-85
Spanning Tree Protocol See STA
specifications, software A-1
SSH 3-71
server, configuring 3-74
SSH, configuring 3-71, 4-49
SSL
replacing cert 3-70
STA 3-136, 4-217
edge port 3-146, 3-148, 4-229
global settings, configuring 3-141,
4-218–4-223
global settings, displaying 3-138,
4-235
interface settings 4-227–4-235,
4-236
interface settings, configuring 3-147
interface settings, displaying 3-144
link type 3-146, 3-148, 3-150, 3-152,
3-155, 4-231, 4-232, 4-233
path cost 3-139, 3-145, 4-227
path cost method 3-142, 4-222
port priority 3-145, 4-228
protocol migration 3-148, 4-235
transmission limit 3-143, 4-223
standards, IEEE A-2
startup files
creating 3-22
displaying 3-20, 4-78
setting 3-20, 4-90
static addresses, setting 3-133, 4-190
statistics
port 3-129, 4-174
STP 3-141, 4-219
STP Also see STA
summary, accounting 3-65
switchport dot1q-ethertype 4-253
switchport mode dot1q-tunnel 4-252
system clock, setting 3-34, 4-65
system logs 3-28
system mode, normal or QinQ 3-170,
4-251
system software, downloading from
server 3-20
T
TACACS+, logon authentication 3-53,
4-98
TACACS+, settings 3-54
time, setting 3-34, 4-65
TPID 4-253
traffic class weights 3-195, 4-266
trap manager 2-7, 3-40, 4-154
troubleshooting B-1
trunk
configuration 3-114, 4-180
LACP 3-116, 4-182
static 3-115, 4-181
Type Length Value See LLDP
TLV
Index-6
Index
Type Length Value See also
LLDP-MED
TLV
U
upgrading software 3-20
UPnP 3-245
configuration 3-245
user password 3-51, 3-59, 3-60, 3-62,
3-65, 4-38, 4-39
V
VLANs 3-155–3-191, 4-238
802.1Q tunnel mode 3-172
adding static members 3-162,
3-164, 4-248
creating 3-161, 4-243
description 3-155, 3-191
displaying basic information 3-159,
4-239
displaying port members 3-159,
4-250
dynamic assignment 3-95, 4-124
egress mode 3-166, 4-245
interface configuration 3-165,
4-246–4-249
private 3-173, 4-254
protocol 3-179, 4-261
protocol, configuring 3-179
protocol, system configuration 3-180
voice VLAN 3-207, 4-280
VoIP Traffic 3-207, 4-280
ports, configuring 3-208
telephony OUI, configuring 3-210
voice VLAN, configuring 3-207
W
web authentication 3-88
configuring 3-89
port information, displaying 3-91
ports, configuring 3-90
ports, re-authenticating 3-92
Web interface
access requirements 3-1
configuration buttons 3-3
home page 3-2
menu list 3-4
panel display 3-3
ES3528M-SFP
E122007-DG-R01
149100035500A

Navigation menu